ATP 3-09.

60

Techniques for Multiple Launch Rocket System

(MLRS) and High Mobility Artillery Rocket System
(HIMARS) Operations

January 2014

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense (DOD) and DOD
contractors only based on included procedures and technical data. This determination was made on 29
September 2005. Other requests must be referred to the Directorate of Training and Doctrine, 700 McNair
Ave, Suite 117, ATTN: ATSF-DD, Fort Sill, OK 73503-9035.

DESTRUCTION NOTICE. Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.

Headquarters Department of the Army

This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online
(https://armypubs.us.army.mil/doctrine/index.html).
To receive publishing updates, please subscribe at
http://www.apd.army.mil/AdminPubs/new_subscribe.asp.
 *ATP 3-09.60

Army Techniques Publication Headquarters

No. 3-09.60 Department of the Army
Washington, DC, 10 January 2014

Techniques for Multiple Launch Rocket System

(MLRS) and High Mobility Artillery Rocket
System (HIMARS) Operations

Contents
Page
PREFACE ........................................................................................................... viii
Chapter 1 THE MLRS/HIMARS BATTALION..................................................................... 1-1
MLRS/HIMARS Battalion .................................................................................... 1-1
Headquarters and Headquarters Battery ............................................................ 1-1
MLRS Firing Battery ............................................................................................ 1-5
Forward Support Company ................................................................................. 1-6
Battalion Duties ................................................................................................... 1-7
Firing Battery ..................................................................................................... 1-11
Forward Support Company ............................................................................... 1-14
Chapter 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 2-1
Section I – Introduction .................................................................................... 2-1
MLRS/HIMARS Employment Concept................................................................ 2-1
System Components ........................................................................................... 2-1
Section II – Launcher and Subsystems .......................................................... 2-2
M270A1 Launcher ............................................................................................... 2-2
M142 High Mobility Artillery Rocket System ....................................................... 2-5
Section III – MLRS/HIMARS Family of Munitions (MFOM) .......................... 2-12
Launch Pod ....................................................................................................... 2-12
Missile/Launch Pod Assembly Trainer .............................................................. 2-13
Rockets ............................................................................................................. 2-13
Missiles ............................................................................................................. 2-18
Section IV – Associated Equipment .............................................................. 2-23
Ammunition Resupply Vehicle and Trailer (HEMTT/HEMAT) .......................... 2-23
HIMARS Resupply Vehicle and Resupply Trailer ............................................. 2-24

Distribution Restriction: Distribution authorized to the DOD and DOD contractors only based on included
procedures and technical data. This determination was made on 29 September 2005. Other requests must be
referred to the Commandant, U.S. Army Field Artillery School, ATTN: ATSF-DD, Fort Sill, OK 73503.

*This publication supersedes FM 3-09.60, 12 August 2008.

i
Contents

Mission Command System ............................................................................... 2-27

AFATDS ............................................................................................................ 2-27
Survey Equipment ............................................................................................. 2-27
Chapter 3 EMPLOYMENT ................................................................................................... 3-1
Section I – Operations in War .......................................................................... 3-1
General Employment Considerations ................................................................. 3-1
TASK Organization ............................................................................................. 3-4
Battalion Commander ......................................................................................... 3-5
Liaison Function Options .................................................................................... 3-6
Offensive Tasks .................................................................................................. 3-6
Defensive Tasks.................................................................................................. 3-8
Operations in Depth ............................................................................................ 3-8
Nonstandard Employment Techniques ............................................................. 3-10
Target Acquisition and Sensor System Interface.............................................. 3-14
Stability Tasks ................................................................................................... 3-16
Section II – Integration and Coordination of Fires ...................................... 3-21
Role of Higher Headquarters ............................................................................ 3-21
Chapter 4 MLRS UNIT OPERATIONS ................................................................................ 4-1
Section I – Battalion Operations...................................................................... 4-1
Battalion Command Post and Operations Center............................................... 4-1
Automated Systems ............................................................................................ 4-3
Battalion ALOC ................................................................................................... 4-5
Section II – MLRS/HIMARS Firing Battery Operations .................................. 4-5
Battery Headquarters .......................................................................................... 4-5
Battery Headquarters Operations ....................................................................... 4-6
Battery Defense .................................................................................................. 4-7
Section III – Firing Platoon Operations ......................................................... 4-12
Platoon Headquarters ....................................................................................... 4-12
Operational Area ............................................................................................... 4-13
Launcher Survey Control .................................................................................. 4-16
Launcher Response Posture ............................................................................ 4-18
Detachment of the MLRS/HIMARS Firing Platoon ........................................... 4-22
Section IV – Reconnaissance, Selection, and Occupation of Position ..... 4-22
Planning ............................................................................................................ 4-22
Reconnaissance, Selection, and Occupation of Position Process ................... 4-22
Section V – Contingency Operations ............................................................ 4-25
Force Projection ................................................................................................ 4-25
Means of Deployment ....................................................................................... 4-27
Deployment Packages ...................................................................................... 4-28
Special Operations ............................................................................................ 4-28
Chapter 5 DELIVERY OF FIRES......................................................................................... 5-1
Section I – Introduction .................................................................................... 5-1
Organization and Structure ................................................................................. 5-1
Fire Direction Centers ......................................................................................... 5-2
Section II – Accurate Predicted Fire................................................................ 5-3

ii ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Contents

Target Size and Location .................................................................................... 5-3

Firing Unit Location and Meteorological Informaton ........................................... 5-3
Meteorology Message ......................................................................................... 5-5
Section III – Tactical and Technical Fire Direction ........................................ 5-5
Tactical Fire Direction ......................................................................................... 5-5
Technical Fire Direction ...................................................................................... 5-9
Section IV – Automated Mission Processing ................................................. 5-9
Automated Tactical Fire Direction ..................................................................... 5-10
Fire Mission Cycle ............................................................................................. 5-17
Automated AFOM Processing .......................................................................... 5-25
Fire Mission Execution ...................................................................................... 5-27
Fire Support Planning Function ........................................................................ 5-30
Sustainment ...................................................................................................... 5-32
Appendix A AERIAL TRANSPORT OF MLRS AMMUNITION AND EQUIPMENT ............. A-1
Aerial Ammunition Resupply .............................................................................. A-1
Internal Load ...................................................................................................... A-1
External Load ..................................................................................................... A-1
Transportation of MLRS/HIMARS Equipment on United States Air Force
Aircraft ................................................................................................................ A-8
Appendix B MLRS BATTALION AND BATTERY TACTICAL STANDING OPERATING
PROCEDURES .................................................................................................. B-1
Section I – Tactical Standard Operating Procedures (TSOP) Format ........ B-1
Section II – Battalion TSOP ............................................................................. B-3
ANNEX A (OPERATIONS) to Battalion FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP ................ B-4
ANNEX B (INTELLIGENCE) to Battalion FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP.............. B-7
ANNEX C (AIR DEFENSE) to Battalion FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP ............... B-7
ANNEX D (CBRN ) to Battalion FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP ............................ B-8
ANNEX E (SIGNAL) to Battalion FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP........................... B-8
ANNEX F (SUSTAINMENT) to Battalion FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP .............. B-9
ANNEX G (SAFETY) to Battalion FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP ....................... B-12
ANNEX H (REPORTS) to Battalion FA (MLRS/HIMARS TSOP) .................... B-12
Appendix C LNO CHECKLIST .............................................................................................. C-1
Preparation for Operations ................................................................................. C-1
Liaison Checklist ................................................................................................ C-1
Example Outline of a Liaison Officer's Handbook/TSOP ................................... C-3
Appendix D MLRS COMMAND POSTS ............................................................................... D-1
Section I—MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Command Post ................................... D-1
Section II—MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Trains .................................................. D-4
Section III—MLRS/HIMARS Battery Command Post .................................. D-10
Section IV—MLRS/HIMARS Battery Trains ................................................. D-11
Section V—Platoon Headquarters................................................................ D-13
Appendix E ROCKET BALLISTIC ALGORITHM SOLUTIONS ........................................... E-1
Appendix F RAID PLANNING CHECKLIST .......................................................................... F-1
Appendix G MLRS/HIMARS BATTALION SAFETY............................................................. G-1

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 iii

Contents

Section I – MLRS/HIMARS Safety Procedures .............................................. G-1

Section II – Computation of MLRS/HIMARS Safety Data ............................. G-1
Section III – Check Data for M270A1/MLRS M142 HIMARS ....................... G-23
GLOSSARY .......................................................................................... Glossary-1
REFERENCES.................................................................................. References-1
Required Publications ........................................................................ References-1
Related Publications .......................................................................... References-2
Referenced Forms ............................................................................. References-3
INDEX ......................................................................................................... Index-1

Figures
Figure 1-1. MLRS/HIMARS battalion organization ................................................................ 1-1
Figure 1-2. Headquarters and headquarters battery ............................................................. 1-2
Figure 1-3. MLRS/HIMARS firing battery ............................................................................... 1-5
Figure 2-1. M270A1 launcher, M269A1 launcher module, M993A1 carrier vehicle .............. 2-2
Figure 2-2. M142 HIMARS launcher ...................................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-3. M142 chassis frame ............................................................................................ 2-7
Figure 2-4. Increased crew protection cab............................................................................. 2-7
Figure 2-5. Firing platform ...................................................................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-6. Sponsons ............................................................................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-7. Turret assembly ................................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-8. Base assembly .................................................................................................. 2-10
Figure 2-9. M142 reload system .......................................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-10. Launch pod ...................................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-11. M26 rocket ....................................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-12. M77 submunition ............................................................................................. 2-14
Figure 2-13. M30 GMLRS DPICM rocket ............................................................................ 2-16
Figure 2-14. M31 GMLRS unitary rocket ............................................................................. 2-16
Figure 2-15. M39/M39A1 missile ......................................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-16. M74 submunition ............................................................................................. 2-19
Figure 2-17. ATACMS M48/M57 .......................................................................................... 2-21
Figure 2-18. M985 HEMTT .................................................................................................. 2-23
Figure 2-19. M989A1 HEMAT .............................................................................................. 2-23
Figure 2-20. M1084A1 resupply vehicle .............................................................................. 2-24
Figure 2-21. M1095 resupply trailer ..................................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2-22. MTS control station.......................................................................................... 2-25
Figure 2-23. MTS mobile unit ............................................................................................... 2-25
Figure 2-24. MTS mobile unit in the resupply vehicle .......................................................... 2-26
Figure 2-25. MTS transceiver mount ................................................................................... 2-26

iv ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Contents

Figure 3-1. Example of a MLRS/HIMARS platoon operating base with internal firing
points ................................................................................................................ 3-20
Figure 4-1. CP radio and AFATDS quantities ........................................................................ 4-2
Figure 4-2. Special formations ............................................................................................. 4-12
Figure 4-3. Platoon operational area ................................................................................... 4-14
Figure 4-4. Masking ............................................................................................................. 4-25
Figure 4-5. Urban targeting solution .................................................................................... 4-30
Figure 5-1. Fire mission execution ....................................................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-2. Default Block I and 1A target air hazard area ................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-3. Fire mission support function............................................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-4. MFOM platoon air hazard area.......................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-5. DA Form 7232 (sample) .................................................................................... 5-19
Figure 5-6a. DA Form 7232 (front)....................................................................................... 5-20
Figure 5-6b. DA Form 7232 (back) ...................................................................................... 5-21
Figure 5-7. DA Form 7232(sample) ..................................................................................... 5-23
Figure 5-8. DA Form 7233 ................................................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-9. Instructions for completing DA Form 7233 ........................................................ 5-26
Figure 5-10. Fire planning and scheduling........................................................................... 5-30
Figure A-1. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with
ATACMS missiles, one container ....................................................................... A-3
Figure A-2 LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with
ATACMS missiles, two containers ..................................................................... A-5
Figure A-3. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with
ATACMS missiles, four containers ..................................................................... A-7
Figure D-1. Vehicles at the MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP, option one, dual CPs .................. D-1
Figure D-2. MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP, side by side configuration ................................... D-3
Figure D-3. Vehicles at the MLRS/HIMARS battalion trains, option one, dual CPs .............. D-4
Figure D-4. MLRS/HIMARS battalion ALOC in built up trucks .............................................. D-7
Figure D-5. MLRS/HIMARS battalion ALOC in a general purpose medium tent................... D-7
Figure D-6. MLRS/HIMARS battery CP, split HQ ................................................................ D-10
Figure D-7. MLRS/HIMARS battery operations center in carrier CP ................................... D-11
Figure D-8. MLRS/HIMARS battery trains, split HQ ............................................................ D-12
Figure D-9. Battery LOC ...................................................................................................... D-13
Figure D-10. Vehicles at the MLRS/HIMARS platoon HQ ................................................... D-14
Figure D-11. MLRS/HIMARS POC in mission command vehicle ........................................ D-15
Figure E-1. M26 low quadrant elevation trajectories. conditions: BA-ER-D, sea level
standard (no wind). For illustration purposes only. ............................................ E-9
Figure E-2. M26 high quadrant elevation trajectories. conditions: BA-ER-D, sea level
standard (no wind). For illustration purposes only. .......................................... E-18
Figure E-3. M26A1/2 trajectories ......................................................................................... E-29
Figure E-4. M26A2 (high quadrant elevation) trajectories ................................................... E-43
Figure G-1. Example impact area ..........................................................................................G-5
Figure G-2. Example operational area azimuth limits ............................................................G-6

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 v

Contents

Figure G-3 Example development of target selection box azimuth limits ..............................G-6
Figure G-4. Example development of target selection box range limits ................................G-7
Figure G-5. Example development of minimum and maximum quadrant .............................G-8
Figure G-6. Safety T computations (fire missions) ................................................................G-9
Figure G-7. Example Safety T ...............................................................................................G-9
Figure G-8. Firing operational area surface danger zone requirements..............................G-11
Figure G-9. Example exclusion areas M28A1/A2 ................................................................G-12
Figure G-10. Example of an impact area .............................................................................G-13
Figure G-11. Example of the development of target selection box range limits ..................G-14
Figure G-12. Example of computing safety data .................................................................G-15
Figure G-13. Example of a Safety T ....................................................................................G-16
Figure G-14. Example of the launcher danger area and noise hazard area .......................G-17
Figure G-15. Example exclusion areas M28A1/A2 ..............................................................G-18
Figure G-16. Example of an impact area .............................................................................G-19
Figure G-17. Example of azimuth limits ...............................................................................G-20
Figure G-18. Example of fire missions for Safety T .............................................................G-20
Figure G-19. Example of a Safety T ....................................................................................G-21
Figure G-20. Example launcher danger area, noise hazard area, and Exclusion Areas I
and II .................................................................................................................G-22

Tables
Table 2-1. M270A1 launcher characteristics ......................................................................... 2-2
Table 2-2. MFOM characteristics ......................................................................................... 2-17
Table 2-3. ATACMS family of munitions characteristics ...................................................... 2-22
Table 2-4. Estimated position error ...................................................................................... 2-28
Table 3-1. Block I, Block IA, and M48/M57comparison ......................................................... 3-3
Table 3-2. Positioning the battalion commander ................................................................... 3-5
Table 3-3. Comparison of MLRS/HIMARS operating base techniques ............................... 3-19
Table 4-1. Stand alone FBCB2 .............................................................................................. 4-5
Table 4-2. Navigation ........................................................................................................... 4-18
Table 4-3. Alignment time .................................................................................................... 4-18
Table 4-4. Response postures ............................................................................................. 4-19
Table 4-5. GPS initialization states ...................................................................................... 4-21
Table 4-6. Transportability by aircraft .................................................................................. 4-27
Table 4-7. MLRS/HIMARS contingency packages .............................................................. 4-28
Table 5-1. Required accuracies ............................................................................................. 5-4
Table 5-2. System accuracy .................................................................................................. 5-4
Table 5-3. Ammunition selection matrix ............................................................................... 5-16
Table 5-4. Fire plan change reaction times.......................................................................... 5-32

vi ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Contents

Table A-1. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with
ATACMS missiles, one container or two containers .......................................... A-2
Table A-2. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with
ATACMS missiles, two containers ..................................................................... A-3
Table A-3. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with
ATACMS missiles, four containers ..................................................................... A-6
Table D-1. Personnel at the MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP, option one, dual CPs ................ D-1
Table D-2. MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP shifts by duty position ............................................ D-3
Table D-3. Personnel at MLRS/HIMARS battalion trains, option one, dual CPs ................... D-4
Table D-4. MLRS/HIMARS battalion ALOC shifts by duty position ....................................... D-6
Table D-5. Forward support company with the MLRS/HIMARS battalion ............................. D-8
Table D-6. Personnel at the MLRS/HIMARS battery CP, split HQ ...................................... D-11
Table D-7. MLRS/HIMARS BOC shifts by duty position ...................................................... D-11
Table D-8. Personnel at the MLRS/HIMARS battery trains ................................................. D-12
Table D-9. MLRS/HIMARS battery LOC shifts by duty position .......................................... D-13
Table D-10 Personnel at the MLRS/HIMARS platoon HQ................................................... D-14
Table D-11. MLRS/HIMARS POC shifts by duty position .................................................... D-14
Table E-1. M26 (low quadrant elevation) rocket trajectory data ............................................ E-1
Table E-2. M26 (high quadrant elevation) rocket trajectory data ......................................... E-10
Table E-3. M26A2 (low quadrant elevation) rocket trajectory data ...................................... E-19
Table E-4. M26A2 (high quadrant elevation) rocket trajectory data .................................... E-30
Table F-1. Raid planning checklist (battalion) ........................................................................ F-1
Table F-2. Raid checklist (battery commander) ..................................................................... F-2
Table F-3. Coordination meeting with force commander checklist (passing force) ............... F-3
Table F-4. Briefing to raid element checklist (raid leader) ..................................................... F-4
Table F-5. Raid checklist (launcher section chief) ................................................................. F-5
Table G-1. M28A1/A2 (combined) safety...............................................................................G-3
Table G-2. MLRS surface danger zone values ......................................................................G-3
Table G-3. Exclusion areas ..................................................................................................G-12
Table G-4. Example of a launcher live-fire safety checklist .................................................G-24
Table G-5. Example of an officer in charge/fire direction center live-fire safety checklist ...G-25
Table G-6. Example of a launcher check data checklist ......................................................G-27
Table G-7. Example of a check data checklist using launchers (officer in charge/fire
direction center check data checklist) ..............................................................G-28
Table G-8. Example of a safety data calculator check data checklist (officer in charge/fire
direction center) check data checklist ..............................................................G-29

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 vii

 Preface
Army Techniques Publication (ATP) 3-09.60 sets forth the doctrine pertaining to the organization, equipment,
mission command, operations, and techniques for the Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS)/High Mobility
Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS) battalion, battery, and platoon. It establishes the responsibilities and general
duties of key personnel by focusing on techniques of how the MLRS/HIMARS unit fights. It keys the
MLRS/HIMARS battalion, battery, and platoon leaders to those areas that must be trained to win the fight.
The principle audience for ATP 3-09.60 is the MLRS/HIMARS battalion, battery, and platoon. It is also a guide for
corps and division fire cells/fires elements, fires brigades, and fire support coordinators and their supported
commanders and staffs.
Commanders, staffs, and subordinates ensure their decisions and actions comply with applicable United States,
(U.S.) international, and, in some cases, host nation laws and regulations. Commanders at all levels ensure their
Soldiers operate in accordance with the law of war and the rules of engagement (see Field Manual[FM] 27-10).
ATP 3-09.60 implements Standard North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) Agreements 2934, 2484, and 5620.
Publication ATP 3-09.60 uses joint terms where applicable. Selected joint and Army terms and definitions appear in
both the glossary and the text. Terms for which ATP 3-09.60 is the proponent publication (the authority) are marked
with an asterisk (*) in the glossary. Definitions for which Publication ATP 3-09.60 is the proponent publication are
boldfaced in the text. For other definitions shown in the text, the term is italicized and the number of the proponent
publication follows the definition.
ATP 3-09.60 applies to the Active Army, Army National Guard/Army National Guard of the United States, and
United States Army Reserve unless otherwise stated.

The proponent of Publication ATP 3-09.60 is the United States Army Training and Doctrine Command. The U.S.
Army Field Artillery School is the preparing agency. Send comments and recommendations on Department of the
Army (DA) Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) to Directorate of Training and
Doctrine 700 McNair Avenue, Suite 117 ATTN: ATSF-DD (Name) Fort Sill OK 73503-9035 or email to
[email protected]

viii ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Chapter 1
The MLRS/HIMARS Battalion
MLRS/HIMARS units are organized and equipped to provide field artillery rocket and
missile fires for the supported commander and to reinforce the fires of other field artillery
battalions. One MLRS/HIMARS battalion is organic to a fires brigade. Additional
MLRS/HIMARS units may be attached or assigned to a fires brigade.

MLRS/HIMARS BATTALION
1-1. The mission of the MLRS/HIMARS battalion is to provide field artillery rocket and missile fires in
support of the brigade combat team, division, corps, theater army, and joint or multinational forces. The
battalion may be further attached to a Marine artillery regiment, other Army or joint controlling headquarters.
1-2. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion is composed of a headquarters and headquarters battery (HHB), and two
MLRS/HIMARS firing batteries with 8 launchers each. A forward support company (FSC) from the brigade
support battalion is typically attached or assigned (see Figure 1-1). The battalion can operate as a single unit
or it can detach batteries or platoons to perform separate tactical missions.

Figure 1-1. MLRS/HIMARS battalion organization

HEADQUARTERS AND HEADQUARTERS BATTERY

1-3. The HHB provides command, control, administrative, and service support for organic and attached
elements. It also procures, distributes, administers, and coordinates supply transactions for all classes of
supply, and coordinates unit maintenance support not within the capabilities of the firing batteries. The HHB
operates as a tactical and administrative headquarters. The headquarters element will be positioned for the
most effective control of the battalion assets commensurate with the terrain, combat mission and
responsiveness to the higher headquarters and supported units. The HHB is organic to the MLRS/HIMARS

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 1-1

Chapter 1

battalion and is organized and equipped to coordinate administrative, logistical, maintenance, and
communications support for the battalion headquarters and two firing batteries (see Figure 1-2). The
functional elements of the HHB are discussed below.

Note. In some cases, the personnel and equipment authorizations may differ from a unit’s
modification table of organization and equipment.

Figure 1-2. Headquarters and headquarters battery

Battery Headquarters
1-4. The battery headquarters provides command, control and supervision for the battery. The headquarters
(HQ) consists of the battery commander, first sergeant (1SG), and one driver.

Battery Supply Section

1-5. The supply section consists of a supply sergeant and an armorer. The forward support company carries
the supplies forward with the next logistics package, or immediately, if needed. Barrier materiel may also be
requested as expeditionary support packages.

BATTALION COMMAND SECTION

1-6. The battalion headquarters provides command, supervision, and control for all tactical and administrative
operations of the battalion. The section consists of the battalion commander, the executive officer (XO), and
the command sergeant major. The headquarters controls and coordinates battalion activities.

S-3 SECTION
1-7. The S-3 section coordinates all tactical, technical and logistical operations and planning for the battalion.
The section employs the batteries to meet the needs of the supported units. It develops warning orders,

1-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 The MLRS/HIMARS Battalion

operations orders (OPORD), and fragmentary orders; maintains the tactical situation maps and overlays; and
coordinates tactical movements and positioning. The operations staff officer (S-3) supervises the command
post (CP) and the operations section. The section is staffed with the operations officer, operations sergeant,
two master gunner/assistant operations sergeants, chief surveyor, chemical officer, chemical, biological,
radiological nuclear (CBRN) officer, CBRN noncommissioned officer (NCO), senior radio operator
maintainer, two fire direction specialists, and two radio operator maintainers.

FIRE DIRECTION CENTER (BATTALION)

1-8. The FDC has tactical control over, and provides tactical fire direction to, the firing batteries. The fire
direction officer supervises the FDC. It is staffed with a chief fire direction computer, 2 fire direction
computers, 4 battery display operators, and 2 fire direction specialists.

S-2 SECTION
1-9. The S-2 section processes battlefield information and coordinates intelligence operations within the
battalion and with the supported maneuver units and military intelligence assets. The intelligence staff officer
(S-2) supervises the section, which includes a targeting officer, the intelligence sergeant, an intelligence
analyst, and a fire direction specialist. The intelligence section—
 Provides intelligence and security information.
 Conducts field artillery focused intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB).
 Tracks the priority intelligence requirements related to fire support.
 Develops the priority intelligence requirements related to the battalion protection warfighting
functions.
 Manages all attached field artillery target acquisition systems and Army, joint, and national sensor
system down links under the battalion's operational control.
 Coordinates with the S-3 for survey support for attached target acquisition (TA) assets.
 Processes and correlates targeting data to include predicting and monitoring assigned high-payoff
target (HPT) locations and passing this information to the controlling field artillery headquarters and
the battalion FDC.
 Coordinates the battalion ground and air defense plans with the batteries, and nominates zone
coverage and cueing schedules for all attached radars.

SURVEY TEAM
1-10. The survey team provides survey support for the battalion and operates under the control of the current
operations section. This section consists of one IPADS team chief, and one IPADS vehicle driver.

LIAISON SECTION
1-11. The two liaison sections provide liaison to the appropriate HQ in accordance with the U.S. command or
support relationship or assigned North Atlantic Treaty Organization field artillery tactical task. Two teams are
necessary to accommodate frequent changes in tactical mission assignment, adequately support joint and
multinational forces, provide liaison when supporting Marine air ground task force operations, or conducting
theater missile defense. Each section consists of a liaison officer (LNO), liaison sergeant, and liaison
specialist. The liaison teams may also augment existing fires cells or fires elements.

S-6 SECTION
1-12. The S-6 section is responsible for the maintenance and repair of the battalion communications systems.
This section attaches teams forward with firing batteries. The signal section consists of the signal staff officer
(S-6), signal support systems chief, 3 forward signal support NCOs, one signal information service specialist,
and one signal support system specialist.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 1-3

Chapter 1

AUTOMATION MANAGEMENT SECTION

1-13. The automation management section is responsible for management of the battalion local area network.
The section is composed of two local area network managers.

RETRANSMISSION TEAM
1-14. The retransmission team establishes and maintains the retransmission station, as required. Dual
retransmission capability is essential to maintaining both voice and data communications over extended
distances. The section is composed of the team chief and two radio retransmission operators.

S-1 SECTION
1-15. The S-1 section provides administrative and legal support and helps the battalion commander provide
for the welfare of the battalion personnel. The battalion personnel staff officer (S-1) supervises the section.
The section includes a senior human resources sergeant, two human resources sergeants, a paralegal
specialist, and 4 human resources specialists.

UNIT MINISTRY TEAM

1-16. A unit ministry team consists of at least 1 chaplain and one chaplain assistant, based on organizational
requirements. Religious support facilitates the Soldier’s right to the free exercise of religion, provides and
performs religious activities that support the resiliency efforts to sustain Soldiers, family members and
authorized civilians and advises commands on matters of religion, morals and morale and their impact on
military operations. Three core competencies provide the fundamental direction as the Chaplain Corps
executes its required religious support mission through nurturing the living, caring for the wounded and
honoring the dead.

MEDICAL SERVICES

Medical Platoon Headquarters

1-17. The platoon HQ coordinates the operations, administration, and logistics of the medical platoon. The
medical platoon leader, field medical assistant, and section NCO comprise the HQ. The medical treatment
section provides battalion medical support. This section includes the medical treatment team, combat medic
team, and ambulance team.

Medical Treatment Team

1-18. The medical treatment team provides unit level combat health support to the battalion. The medical
treatment team includes a physician assistant, a health care sergeant and two health care specialists.

Medical Evacuation Squad

1-19. The medical evacuation squad provides evacuation of casualties from the battalion aid station to the
nearest supporting medical company treatment facility or evacuation point. This team consists of one
ambulance team leader and an ambulance aide/driver.

Combat Medic Section

1-20. This section consists of 4 trauma specialists. A trauma specialist is allocated to each firing platoon to
perform immediate life saving measures to casualties.

1-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 The MLRS/HIMARS Battalion

SUPPLY AND SERVICES

S-4 Section
1-21. The S-4 section establishes the administrative and logistics operations center (ALOC) and coordinates
the overall logistical activities of the battalion. It works closely with the operations section in monitoring the
resupply of ammunition and fuel. The battalion logistics staff officer (S-4) supervises the battalion S-4
section and the battalion ammunition officer (BAO), and serves as an ALOC shift leader. The section
includes a property book officer, a senior maintenance supervisor, a supply sergeant, an assistant supply
sergeant, a property book NCO, and two supply specialists.

Ammunition Management Section

1-22. The BAO monitors the ammunition status of the battalion and manages all aspects of ammunition
resupply. The section is composed of the ammunition officer, ammunition sergeant, and a vehicle driver.

MLRS FIRING BATTERY

1-23. MLRS/HIMARS firing batteries provide medium range rocket and long range missile fires in support
of the brigade, division, corps, theater Army, and joint or multinational forces. The battery is organic to an
MLRS/HIMARS battalion, and may be further attached to a Marine artillery regiment, multinational forces in
support of multinational initiatives, or other controlling headquarters, as required.
1-24. Whether the MLRS/HIMARS battalion is organic, assigned, or attached to a fires brigade, the firing
batteries are organized the same and are structured for semi-independent operations. The MLRS/HIMARS
firing battery consists of a battery headquarters, a battery operations center (BOC), a support platoon, and two
firing platoons (see Figure 1-3).

Figure 1-3. MLRS/HIMARS firing battery

BATTERY HEADQUARTERS
1-25. The battery HQ provides mission command over all elements of the battery. The HQ is composed of
the commander, 1SG, and a vehicle driver. The battery commander, 1SG, and the BOC provide the necessary
mission command of the battery.

BATTERY OPERATIONS CENTER

1-26. The BOC provides tactical fire direction planning and directs battery operations in coordination with
the battery commander. It plans, coordinates, executes tactical movements and positioning, and maintains
situational understanding for the battery. The battery operations officer supervises the BOC, which is staffed

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 1-5

Chapter 1

with a battery operations sergeant, an FDC section chief, two battery display operators, and 4 fire direction
specialists.

FIRING PLATOON HEADQUARTERS

1-27. The two platoon headquarters conduct site reconnaissance and supervise launcher positioning and
operations. They perform all command, control, and logistic coordination functions for the platoon. Each
platoon operation center (POC) includes the platoon leader, platoon sergeant, a reconnaissance sergeant, a
battery display operator, two fire direction specialists, and a driver. The headquarters performs tactical fire
direction, when required. The firing platoon leader provides mission command for the firing platoon. Each
platoon HQ typically controls 4 firing sections.

FIRING SECTION
1-28. The 8 firing sections are normally equally divided between the two platoon HQ. The firing section is
responsible for tactically positioning the launcher for survivability and engaging the threat with indirect fire.
Each firing section lays, aims, loads, and fires the launcher. The section performs all technical fire control,
operator maintenance, and launcher organizational maintenance. Each firing section includes a section chief,
gunner, and launcher driver.

SUPPORT PLATOON

Support Platoon Headquarters

1-29. The support platoon HQ supervises organizational supply and maintenance activities, to include Class
V resupply, in support of battery operations. The platoon headquarters includes a platoon leader, platoon
sergeant and vehicle driver. The platoon leader commands and controls the support platoon. The platoon
consists of 8 ammunition sections in a M270A1 battalion (battalion), or ten ammunition sections in a
HIMARS battalion, and a supply section.

Ammunition Section
1-30. The two ammunition section provides Class V (rocket, missile, and small arms ammunition) support to
the battery. The section chief supervises the ammunition section. Each section includes an assistant section
chief, and six MLRS/HIMARS ammunition specialists in a M270A1 unit, or an assistant section chief and 8
MLRS/HIMARS ammunition specialists in a HIMARS unit.

Supply Section
1-31. The supply section includes the supply sergeant and an armorer. The section requisitions and
distributes supplies for the battery elements and provides small arms repairs.

FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY

1-32. The FSC is normally assigned to the brigade support battalion and attached or OPCON to the
MLRS/HIMARS battalion for the duration of an operation, or as determined by the brigade commander. The
FSC provides field maintenance, subsistence Class I, petroleum, oils and, lubricants, Class III, and supply
distribution for the battalion. The FSC consists of a company headquarters, a field feeding section, a field
maintenance platoon, and a distribution platoon. The FSCs normally operate in close proximity to its
supported battalion. The location of the FSC is determined by the supported battalion. The distance separating
the FSC and the battalion is mission, threat, terrain and weather, troops, time available, and civil
considerations (METT-TC) dependent and will vary based upon the mission, situation, and environment.
1-33. The FSC may be divided with some elements collocated with the supported battalion and some
elements located in the BSA. For example, it may be desirable to locate the FSC field maintenance teams
with the supported battalion and the remainder of the FSC in the BSA. This type of task organization must be
determined by the FSC commander in collaboration with the BSB and fires battalion commanders.

1-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 The MLRS/HIMARS Battalion

BATTALION DUTIES
1-34. The following discussions cover the major duties of personnel in MLRS/HIMARS units. They are not
intended to be all inclusive but rather to highlight major functions unique to the system.

BATTALION COMMANDER
1-35. The battalion commander, aided by the staff, controls all the tactical, training, logistical, and
administrative activities of the battalion. He directs employment of the battalion in accordance with assigned
missions. He works closely with the commanders of supported and supporting units to accomplish the
battalion's mission. He establishes policies to promote discipline and morale within the battalion.

COMMAND SERGEANT MAJOR

1-36. The command sergeant major is the senior NCO in the battalion and the senior enlisted advisor to the
Battalion Commander. The command sergeant major is responsible for executing established policies and
enforcing standards pertaining to performance, care, conduct, appearance, personnel management, and
training of enlisted soldiers. The command sergeant major provides advice and makes recommendations to
the commander and staff on all matters pertaining to enlisted soldiers and their families.

EXECUTIVE OFFICER
1-37. The XO directs, supervises, and ensures coordination of the battalion staff and sections. The XO
oversees all logistical functions and acts on behalf of the commander to direct the logistical support of the
battalion. He commands the battalion in the absence of the commander.

S-1
1-38. The S-1 is the coordinating staff officer for all matters concerning human resources support (military
and civilian). The S-1 provides technical direction to field artillery battalion units in the areas of: personnel
readiness management; personnel accounting and strength reporting; personal information management;
casualty operations; postal operations; essential personnel services; reception, replacement, return to duty,
rest and recuperation, and redeployment; human resources planning; and morale, welfare, and recreation
operations. The S-1 coordinates with the battalion unit ministry team, medical platoon and is the staff point of
contact for equal opportunity, retention, inspector general, and morale support activities. The S-1 shares
responsibility with the S-4 for manning sustainment cell operations and serve as a shift leader in the ALOC.
The responsibilities of the S-1 also include:
 Coordinate all aspects of health service support, military pay, and religious support within the
battalion. Ensure activities support tactical plans, their branches and sequels, and the commander's
desired end state.
 Prepare personnel estimates and annexes to plans and OPORD.
 With the S-4, prepare paragraph 4 of the battalion OPORD, field artillery support plan (if used),
and the logistics support plan/tab.
 Annex I: Service Support.
 Annex K: Provost Marshal (if required).
 Annex N: Contiguous Area Operations (if required).
 Annex U: CMO (if required).
 Appendix 1: Public Affairs to Annex J: Inform and Influence Activities.
 Manage the personnel strength of the battalion and all subordinate units.
 Provide oversight for internal Army Records Information Management System compliance.

Note. The Military Personnel File is maintained at the fires brigade S-1.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 1-7

Chapter 1

 Provide or coordinate forms and publications management, official mail distribution, privacy act and
freedom of information act inquiries, and manage congressional inquiries within the battalion and
subordinate units.
 Establish and document battalion human relations policies and standard operating procedures (SOP).
 Coordinate with the human resources operations cell of the supporting fires brigade or sustainment
brigade to obtain external human resources support for the battalion.
 Coordinate essential personnel services for all assigned or attached personnel (for example,
promotions, evaluations, identification cards, awards and decorations, leave and pass, records
management, retention, line of duty investigations, congressional inquiries, and family inquiries).
 Prepare casualty reports in compliance with all local, theater, and Army policies.
 Ensure compliance with command responsibility for casualty.
 Coordinate command interests programs; for example, voting assistance program, Combined Federal
Campaign, Army Emergency Relief, community support programs.
 Coordinate legal support of certain personnel activities to include service transfers and discharges,
line of duty investigations, conscientious objector processing, summary court officer appointments,
and military justice.
 Coordinate finance services, enemy prisoner of war operations, and combat health services.

S-2
1-39. The S-2 is responsible for battalion intelligence operations and supervision of the intelligence section.
The principal duties in this area include the following:
 Assists the S-3 in supervision of the CP.
 Conducts artillery IPB process.
 Develops threat artillery order of battle and predicts/disseminates threat artillery locations.
 Develops threat situation and TA portions of MLRS/HIMARS battalion OPORD to include radar
deployment order if radar sections are provided to the battalion.
 Develops threat intelligence requirements related to division MLRS/HIMARS battalion.
 Positions, tasks, and supervises any provided TA assets in conjunction with the S-3.
 Plans, coordinates, and manages any provided Army sensor support.
 Performs target analysis in support of the counterfire fight.
 Analyzes any intelligence data received.

S-3
1-40. The S-3 is responsible for training, planning, and execution of battalion operations. He supervises the
activities of the operations section and manages all aspects of the battalion CP. The principal duties in this
area include the following:
 Advises the commander on field artillery organization for combat, MLRS/HIMARS battery
positioning, TA asset positioning, radar zones, and field artillery attack guidance.
 Provides survivability and movement criteria to the battalion based on the mission variables of
METT-TC.
 Coordinates position area and movement management with batteries and maneuver units, as required.
 Develops the MLRS/HIMARS battalion OPORD.
 Prepares and publishes SOPs.
 Supervises field artillery rehearsals.
 Calculates ammunition basic load based on mission requirements and required supply rate, and
manages battalion ammunition consumption.

1-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 The MLRS/HIMARS Battalion

S-4
1-41. The S-4 coordinates and manages logistical support for the battalion. He coordinates with the FSC
commander for the execution of support functions. He performs as a shift leader in the ALOC. The S-4’s
duties include:
 Advise the commander and staff on logistics—centralized versus decentralized logistics operations,
and battalion trains concept and positioning.
 Calculates ammunition basic load based on mission requirements and required supply rate, and
manages battalion ammunition consumption.
 Transportation requirements.
 Prepare logistics estimates and plans using logistics preparation of the battlefield methodology. With
the S-1, prepare paragraph 4 of the battalion OPORD, field artillery support plan (if used), and the
logistics support plan/tab.
 Supervise, manage, and coordinate battalion supply and sustainment operations, to include
ammunition and refueling.
 Distribution operations for all classes of supply except Class VIII (medical) within the battalion.
 Recommend logistics priorities and employment of S-4 assets that support the commander’s intent
and mission accomplishment.
 With the S-1, establish and maintain the ALOC.
 Ensure the S-4 section and the ALOC establish and maintain situational awareness—of the general
situation, field artillery operations, and sustainment.
 Review the battalion’s essential tasks for critical logistics.

S-6
1-42. The S-6 is the principal staff officer for all matters concerning signal operations, automation
management, network management, and information security. The principal duties in this area include the
following:
 Plans and coordinates battalion communications systems integration into supported maneuver unit
and force field artillery headquarters systems.
 Manages and controls use of battalion information network capabilities.
 Recommends signal support priorities for battalion information superiority.
 Manages radio frequency allocations and assignments.
 Performs communications reconnaissance and survey to assist in positioning key battalion elements.
 Writes MLRS/HIMARS battalion OPORD signal paragraph.
 Supervises signal support personnel.
 Establishes automation systems administration and security procedures for automation hardware and
software employed by the battalion.
 Serves as battalion COMSEC custodian.
 Coordinates battalion local area network configuration.

OPERATIONS OFFICER
1-43. The operations officer assists in developing warning orders, OPORDs, and fragmentary orders;
maintains the tactical situation maps and overlays; and plans and coordinates tactical movements and
positioning. He develops the execution matrix. The operations officer works directly for the S-3 and is a CP
duty officer.

FIRE DIRECTION OFFICER

1-44. The battalion fire direction officer is primarily responsible for supervising all tactical fire direction in
the battalion. On the basis of guidance from the commander and S-3, the fire direction officer decides where
and how the battalion (and any reinforcing units) will fire. The principal duties in this area include:

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 1-9

Chapter 1

 Secure and supervise input of appropriate parameters into the AFATDS database.
 Analyze requested targets for attack by field artillery in terms of desired effects, method of fire, and
types of ammunition required.
 Ensure complete dissemination of fire plans to subordinate elements.
 Conduct rehearsals of fire plans with subordinate and reinforcing firing units as well as attached
acquisition assets and sensor system down links.
 Establish and maintain digital communications within the battalion, its attachments, and the
controlling force field artillery headquarters if one is designated by the supported commander.

LIAISON OFFICER
1-45. The LNO directs the liaison team and represents the MLRS/HIMARS battalion commander with
supported units. The LNO also advises the supported commander on battalion capabilities, limitations, and
disposition; recommends employment options and helps coordinate fires of the MLRS/HIMARS battalion
with other fire support assets; and keeps the MLRS/HIMARS battalion commander informed on the current
situation of the supported unit and on future requirements.

CHEMICAL BIOLOGICAL RADIOLOGICAL AND NUCLEAR OFFICER

1-46. The CBRN officer advises the commander and staff on CBRN defense matters and serves as shift
leader in the battalion CP. The CBRN officer prepares the CBRN portion of plans and orders and prepares
CBRN estimates and SOPs. He is the chief CBRN trainer for the battalion.

BATTALION AMMUNITION OFFICER

1-47. The BAO coordinates with the XO, S-3, S-4, and support platoon leaders in requesting ammunition,
and planning and executing the ammunition distribution plan within the battalion. He supervises the
ammunition management section. The BAO recommends the method of control for battalion ammunition
resupply operations. The BAO may consolidate some of the resupply vehicles at battalion to provide long
haul capability and deliver ammunition to the firing batteries. The principal duties in this area include the
following:
 Coordinates ammunition resupply operations with higher headquarters.
 Performs mission analysis to verify that ammunition handling capabilities can support decisive
action.
 Ensures ammunition accountability.
 Ensures that proper ammunition mix is distributed to firing batteries.
 Monitors the command and administrative/logistics net for ammunition requirements.
 Manages ammunition turn in.

BATTALION CHAPLAIN
1-48. The battalion chaplain advises commanders on moral and ethical matters. He develops a religious
support plan, and coordinates and conducts garrison religious services, field religious services, and soldier
welfare ministries. He provides counseling, as required, for all soldiers and helps maintain the moral and
spiritual well being of all personnel. He operates from the battalion trains.

PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT
1-49. The physician assistant advises the commander on all health related issues, is responsible for
immediate medical services for field casualties within the battalion, and coordinates all medical support with
higher headquarters in coordination with the S-3 and S-1. The physician assistant supervises the operations of
the battalion medical treatment team.

1-10 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 The MLRS/HIMARS Battalion

PROPERTY BOOK OFFICER

1-50. The property book officer coordinates all supply activities in the battalion and is responsible for
maintaining property accountability and the battalion property book. The property book officer helps the
battery supply sergeants request and receive supplies by coordinating with supporting supply activities; works
closely with the operations section in monitoring the resupply of ammunition and fuel; and supervises the
battalion supply section in the absence of the S-4.

HHB COMMANDER
1-51. The HHB commander is responsible for the training, combat readiness, morale, and welfare of the
headquarters battery. The HHB commander is responsible for maintaining personnel and equipment readiness
within the battery. He ensures supply, maintenance, and administrative support for HHB elements. The HHB
commander may conduct position area reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of position (RSOP) for the
battalion HQ. He develops the defense plan for the CP.

HHB FIRST SERGEANT

1-52. The HHB 1SG is the senior NCO in the battery, and provides leadership and guidance to the battery's
enlisted personnel. He is the primary administrative and logistics coordinator for the battery. The HHB 1SG
is responsible for all internal and external administrative and logistical duties.

FIRING BATTERY
BATTERY COMMANDER
1-53. The firing battery commander is responsible for the training, combat readiness, morale, and welfare of
the battery. The principal duties in this area include the following:
 Directs the employment of the battery in accordance with assigned missions, and commander’s
intent.
 Establishes standards and provides guidance for current and future operations.
 Plans and conducts reconnaissance of the unit headquarters position.
 Designates general areas for each platoon.
 Ensures proper terrain coordination with higher headquarters to facilitate timely position occupations
by battery vehicles and personnel.
 Establishes and maintains training standards for the battery.

FIRST SERGEANT
1-54. The firing battery 1SG is the senior NCO in the battery and the senior enlisted advisor to the Battery
Commander. The 1SG provides leadership and guidance to the battery's enlisted personnel and is the primary
administrative and logistics coordinator for the battery. The 1SG is responsible for supervising internal and
coordinating external administrative and logistical duties activities with the exception of rocket/missile
ammunition and maintenance. The principal duties in this area include the following:
 Guides and supervises internal battery support activities such as battery supply and preventive
maintenance checks and services.
 Directly supervises the battery clerk and combat medics.
 Coordinates with the BOC and logistics operations center (LOC) for overall battery administrative
and logistics support of the firing platoons.
 Develops and supervises the battery defense.

BATTERY OPERATIONS OFFICER

1-55. The battery operations officer supervises the BOC, and plans and coordinates tactical movement and
positioning with the commander's guidance. The operations officer processes intelligence information and

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 1-11

Chapter 1

maintains situational understanding of battery operations. He coordinates logistics efforts with the support
platoon leader. The principal duties include the following:
 Supervises mission command of battery elements.
 Establishes and maintains communications with battery elements and higher headquarters.
 Coordinates with controlling artillery and/or appropriate maneuver headquarters.
 Coordinates position areas.
 Supervises fire control section within the BOC. Responsible for timely transmission of fire orders to
the firing platoons or launchers.
 Oversees selection of firing elements to fire.
 Monitors fire support coordination measures (FSCM).
 Maintains status of battery elements.
 Tracks the battle and monitors situation reporting.

BATTERY OPERATIONS SERGEANT

1-56. The battery operations sergeant, is the primary assistant to the battery operations officer, who directly
supervises the FDC operations and organizes the BOC for 24 hour operation, directs its setup, and controls
the battery radio nets. In coordination with the operations officer, the operations sergeant monitors all radio
transmissions and ensures that all pertinent information and fire missions are quickly relayed to the proper
agencies, maintains the fire direction capabilities map, supervises upkeep of FDC operations records and
reports, and keeps the operations officer and informed.

FDC SECTION CHIEF

1-57. The FDC section chief provides technical fire direction expertise and assists in training FDC personnel,
and controls the battery radio nets. In coordination with the operations officer and NCO, the fire control
sergeant monitors all radio transmissions and ensures that all pertinent information and fire missions are
quickly relayed to the proper agencies, maintains the fire direction capabilities map, supervises upkeep of
FDC operations records and reports, and keeps the operations officer and NCO informed.

FIRING PLATOON LEADER

1-58. The firing platoon leader commands and controls the firing platoon. In a tactical environment, he
develops and communicates OPORDs and ensures that his unit prepares for combat. The firing platoon leader
is responsible for platoon operations including RSOPs, tactical movement, firing position occupation,
survivability actions, CBRN protective measures enforcement, and situation reporting to higher and adjacent
headquarters. He implements guidance and direction from the battery commander.
1-59. The platoon leader designates platoon launchers to fire selected munitions. He also designates the
operational status of the launchers and determines their employment sequence based on guidance from the
battery commander, BOC, and mission requirements. The platoon leader then sends this information to the
BOC, which selects the launchers to fire. The principal duties in this area include:
 Ensuring timely and accurate system and soldier status reporting to higher headquarters.
 Relaying accurate and timely information pertaining to current and future operations, threat and
friendly situations, and fire missions to and from platoon elements.
 Ensuring platoon ability to sustain continuous day/night operations under all conditions, including a
CBRN environment.
 Selecting POC site, SCPs, and platoon operational areas.
 Planning and issuing platoon OPORD as required.
 Training the POC.
 Conducting platoon rehearsals.
 Coordinating platoon sustainment.

1-12 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 The MLRS/HIMARS Battalion

FIRING PLATOON SERGEANT

1-60. The firing platoon sergeant supervises the platoon HQ, including operations with the platoon AFATDS,
and ensures that all reports submitted to the BOC are accurate and timely. In the platoon area of operations,
the firing platoon sergeant controls the ammunition vehicles and monitors ammunition resupply. He must be
prepared to reconnoiter firing points, reload points, and ammunition holding areas. The firing platoon
sergeant maintains the status of launcher sections; plans and coordinates the defense of the platoon elements;
and assists the platoon leader in command, control, and execution of the platoon mission.

RECONNAISSANCE SERGEANT
1-61. The reconnaissance sergeant is the platoon leader’s driver and assists him in the reconnaissance of the
platoon area of operations. The reconnaissance sergeant advises the platoon leader on the placement of the
launchers, resupply points, and the launcher firing points. The reconnaissance sergeant also checks the mask
in the firing point areas.

FIRING SECTION CHIEF

1-62. The firing section chief is responsible for all activities involving the launcher. This includes selecting
the hide area and firing point in accordance with guidance given by the platoon leader/sergeant; ensuring the
launcher is properly emplaced and prepared for action; measuring and reporting immediate mask to the firing
platoon HQ; and observing and checking the functioning of equipment during firing, movement, and reload
operations. He immediately reports errors, unusual incidents, or equipment malfunctions to the platoon HQ.

SUPPORT PLATOON LEADER

1-63. The support platoon leader commands and controls the support platoon. He is the primary logistics
coordinator for the battery. The support platoon leader is responsible for coordinating battery support to
include ammunition resupply, maintenance, food service, and supply efforts. The responsibilities include
working closely with the firing platoon leaders, BOC, and battalion ALOC in the coordination of logistical
support for the battery. The principal duties in this area include the following:
 Coordinates with the controlling headquarters to determine the location and status of support
activities. These activities include the supporting maintenance activity; nearest water and ration
distribution point; nearest petroleum, oils, and lubricants distribution point; supporting shower and
laundry points; and supporting Class II and Class VII activities.
 Coordinates with the firing platoon leaders for the distribution of ammunition and fuel to the firing
platoons.
 Establishes the LOC.
 Supervises ammunition resupply operations with the supporting ammunition transfer holding point or
ammunition supply point.
 Monitors refueling operations.
 Establishes and sets up the battery logistics release point.
 Positions ammunition sections within the battery ammunition holding area.
 Coordinates with the battalion ALOC for maintenance support and directs battery maintenance
efforts.

SUPPORT PLATOON SERGEANT

1-64. The support platoon sergeant is the primary assistant to the support platoon leader, who selects and
reconnoiters routes to and from the ammunition transfer holding point and ammunition supply point, directs
and commands convoy movements of ammunition vehicles, and coordinates with the battalion ammunition
officer for all Class V resupply. He keeps the ammunition document register and accountability files. If a
logistics release point is used, the support platoon sergeant helps the support platoon leader supervise it.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 1-13

Chapter 1

SUPPLY SERGEANT
1-65. The battery supply sergeant directs supply personnel in establishing supply and inventory control
management functions and also maintains property under the standard property book system. He reviews
daily and monthly records of issues of operating supplies, provides technical assistance to the armorer and
assists and advises the commander.

FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY

FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY COMMANDER
1-66. The FSC commander is the senior school trained and senior logistician attached or assigned to the
MLRS/HIMARS fires battalion. The FSC commander should be involved in the planning process to assist the
battalion executive officer, battalion ammunition officer, and S-4 in determining logistics requirements and
integrating the concept of support with the tactical plan.

1-14 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Chapter 2
System Description
The M270A1 (MLRS)/M142 (HIMARS) is designed to attack the threat throughout the
supported commander’s area of operations. Complementing cannon artillery and other
fire support assets, MLRS/HIMARS have an all weather, long range capability, and a full
suite of munitions. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion can be assigned or attached to a fires
brigade.

SECTION I – INTRODUCTION

MLRS/HIMARS EMPLOYMENT CONCEPT

Note. The M270A1 (MLRS) and the M142 (HIMARS) weapon systems are both multiple launch
rocket systems and for the remainder of this manual the M270A1 will be called MLRS and the M142
will be called HIMARS.

2-1. The capabilities of MLRS/HIMARS make it one of the most unique field artillery weapon systems
available for both joint and combined arms operations. Its range, mobility, and lethality allow it to execute fire
support—providing close support to maneuver units, protecting the force with counterfire, and attacking
operational targets for the division, corps, Marine air ground task force, or joint task force commander and in
support of theater missile defense.
2-2. Regardless of the tactical mission, MLRS/HIMARS units are positioned and fight well forward and use
their “shoot-and-scoot” capability to improve survivability. Forward positioning is critical to accomplishing unit
missions. When providing fires in support of offensive tasks, MLRS/HIMARS units move to best support the
maneuver forces, stopping to fire as required, and then move rapidly to continue supporting the formation.
When in support of defensive tasks, these systems may support maneuver units by moving laterally along the
forward line of own troops (FLOT). This allows MLRS/HIMARS units to take maximum advantage of their
range to protect maneuver units from the destructive effects of the enemy's indirect fire systems. The mobility
and firepower of the MLRS/HIMARS make it well-suited to augment other artillery fires supporting units
engaged in tasks such as screening, covering force, and movement to contact.
2-3. The 70+kilometer range of the guided MLRS (GMLRS) rocket and the 300 kilometer range of the Block
IA Army tactical missile system (ATACMS) provide the brigade, division, corps, Marine air ground task force,
and joint commanders with a long range strike capability. To support strike missions, MLRS/HIMARS units are
positioned close to the FLOT, and in some cases beyond the FLOT, to engage the threat at maximum ranges
and to continue to attack the threat throughout the depth of the battlefield. The MLRS/HIMARS units assigned
the mission of firing ATACMS in support of a joint force commander will often operate in a brigade combat
team (BCT) area of operation. Intermixed with maneuver and cannon units, these MLRS/HIMARS units
continually coordinate for positions within the BCT sector.
2-4. The MLRS/HIMARS plays a critical role in contingency operations because it provides a massive
infusion of combat power in small, rapidly deployable force packages. MLRS/HIMARS units are a logical
choice to provide fires for initial entry forces because of the lethality of the MLRS family of munitions
(MFOM) coupled with the ability of the system to be deployed on a variety of aircraft.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2-5. The MLRS/HIMARS consists of the following components.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-1

Chapter 2

SECTION II – LAUNCHER AND SUBSYSTEMS

M270A1 LAUNCHER
2-6. The M270A1 launcher is a highly mobile, lightly armored, tracked carrier vehicle with an launcher
module (LM mounted on the vehicle bed (see Figure 1-1). The launcher consists of a 3 man crew (section chief,
gunner, and driver). Personal equipment is stored in the crew's equipment storage containers located in the
carrier under the LM cage. It is 6.94 meters (22 feet, 9 inches) long, 2.9 meters (9 feet, 6 inches) high, and 3.02
meters (9 feet, 11 inches) wide. When loaded with M26 rocket launch pod container ( LPCs), the launcher
weighs approximately 24,036 kilograms (52,990 pounds) (see Table 2-1).

Launcher
Module

Figure 2-1. M270A1 launcher, M269A1 launcher module, M993A1 carrier vehicle
Table 2-1. M270A1 launcher characteristics
Weight (air trans) 19,414 kg 42,800 lb
Width 2,972 mm 9 ft, 11 in
Length 6,942 mm 22 ft, 9 in
Height (stowed) 2,896 mm 9ft, 6in
Height (full elevation) 5,920 mm 19 ft, 5 in
Included in launcher weight: Not included in launcher weight:
1/2 tank of fuel Combat vehicle crewman helmets for VIC-3
VIC-3 intercom Basic issue items
Radios and mounts, antennas and mounts, cabling Rocket pods, missile/launch pod assembly trainers

M993A1 CARRIER VEHICLE

2-7. The carrier vehicle is a longer version of the Bradley fighting vehicle with nearly 80 percent common
components. It can climb 60 percent slopes, traverse a 40 percent side slope, ford 1.1 meters (40 inches) of
water, and climb one meter vertical walls. The launcher has a cruising range of 483 kilometers (300 miles) and
can be transported by C-17 and larger cargo aircraft. The vehicle cab is constructed of aluminum armor plate,
providing ballistic protection to the crew. It is fitted with an M13A1 gas particulate filter unit that protects the
crew from chemical and biological agents and radioactive particles. It also has a vehicle cab overpressure
system to protect the crew from toxic rocket and missile exhaust. The carrier is equipped with an environmental
control unit and an auxiliary power unit. The M993A1 carrier has a monitoring and sensor system (Centry). The
Centry system consists of electrical sensors interacting with the carrier’s engine and transmission to provide
better performance and improved troubleshooting procedures for maintainers.

M269A1 LM
2-8. The LM consists of two sections: a mechanical section and an electrical section. These sections work
together to perform all firing and non-firing functions.

2-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

LM Mechanical Section
2-9. The mechanical section consists of base, turret, and cage assemblies. The base assembly provides for the
physical mounting of the LM to the carrier. Both the turret and base assemblies house the electronics and
hydraulics of the launcher drive system that actually perform the rotation and elevation functions of the LM.
The cage assembly performs two important functions. First, the structure of the cage assembly aligns, holds, and
protects the launch pods. Second, two boom and hoist assemblies mounted in the cage assembly give the
launcher crew a built in ammunition loading and unloading capability.

LM Electrical Section
2-10. The electrical section consists of 3 subsystems: the primary power supply, the communications system,
and the fire control system (FCS).

Primary Power Supply

2-11. The primary power supply is the source of power for all launcher equipment. It uses standard military
lead acid batteries to provide 24 volts of power to the launcher components. It also controls the distribution of
power through the use of switching relays.

Fire Control System

2-12. The launcher communications system includes a single channel ground and airborne radio system,
AN/VRC-92F, with embedded communications security (COMSEC) capability. Each crewmember has a
combat vehicle crewman helmet that is connected to an AN/VIC-3 intercom system.

Long Range Communication

2-13. Both launcher variants, M270A1 and M142, are being modified to have a long range communications
capability. Both launchers currently utilize advanced lightweight single channel ground and airborne radio
system improvement package single channel ground and airborne radio system for voice and digital
communications. After action reports and crew interviews revealed that the current radio transmitters lacked the
range required to provide coverage for units operating throughout the operating environment. Launchers are
now being equipped with high frequency radio transmitters to provide additional range and compliment the
current single channel ground and airborne radio system radio transmitters. Long range communications may be
expanded to include waveforms such as satellite communications in the future. Use of long range
communications will allow launchers to be separated by greater distances and may not require on site fire
direction centers (FDCs).
2-14. The M270A1 FCS functions with the other launcher components to provide overall control of the LM. It
monitors, coordinates, and controls all electronic devices used during a launch cycle. The FCS is designed to
conduct self diagnosis of its associated components.
2-15. The FCS consists of the fire control panel which is comprised of three major components which includes
gunners display unit, tactical processer unit, with mass storage unit allowing the operator to interface with the
FCS which includes the improved weapon interface unit, the boom controller, the position navigation unit
(PNU), the power switching unit, the launcher interface unit (with power management unit, main processor and
communications processor), and the maintenance support device field ready.
 Gunner’s display unit. The gunners display unit, located in the center of the carrier cab in front of
the gunner's seat, has a high resolution display, full text keyboard, and audio/video alarms. It
provides system interface to the mass storage unit that provides nonvolatile storage for system
software and database information.
 Power switching unit. The power switching unit which replaces the electronics box and provides the
vehicle power source interface and high current power switching and distribution. It is controlled by
the launcher interface unit.
 Launcher interface unit. The launcher interface unit aims and controls the LM. It provides interface
for load/unload operations, and provides embedded communications processing functions. It
oversees the overall operations of the FCS to include providing system power and communication

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-3

Chapter 2

(internal and external) management functions. The launcher interface unit interfaces directly with the
M270A1 improved launcher mechanical system and provides the stabilization and control functions.
In addition, the launcher interface unit provides control functions for the boom and hoist features in
support of reload operations.
 Improved weapon interface unit. The improved weapon interface unit contains the computer
program and data processing electronics to receive, compute, and distribute fire mission parameters.
It calculates the ballistic algorithm, downloads data to MFOM, performs short/no voltage tester
functions, and provides ground power.
 Position navigation unit. The PNU provides launcher position and navigation data. During fire
missions, the PNU provides the FCS with location, attitude, and launcher rate data for use in
computing ballistics and aiming the LM. The PNU contains an embedded GPS receiver to enhance
its inertial performance and provide effective land navigation for the launcher. The reference package
of the PNU is capable of alignment on the move, a process that takes approximately 15 minutes as
long as the vehicle remains in motion. Stationary alignment time can be as long as 5 minutes or as
short as 2 minutes and 30 seconds, depending on initialization data and conditions. The PNU requires
manual updating only in the event that global positioning system (GPS) is not available to the
system. GPS enables effective land navigation of the launcher in the absence of survey control point
(SCP) information. In the absence of GPS information, the PNU provides free inertial navigation or
navigation with the aid of existing odometer encoder inputs.
 Boom controller. The boom controller permits remote control of the loading and off loading
functions and positioning of the LM for maintenance. An emergency disable switch on the on boom
controller allows the operator to disable the launcher drive system in the event of un-commanded
movement of the LM.

Note. During boom controller operations, all crew members must follow all safety procedures
outlined in the Interactive Electronic Technical Manual 9-1055-647-13P.

 Power distribution box. The power distribution box provides operational interface to the
boom/hoist assemblies, travel lock actuator, and cage down limit switch.
 GPS antenna. The GPS receiver interfaces with the GPS satellite constellation via the antenna
mounted on top of the LM cage assembly.
 Tactical processing unit. The tactical processer unit contains the electronics used to operate the fire
control panel and is the interface for the FCS. The tactical processer unit is mounted on a shelf
behind Section Chief’s seat.
 Mass storage unit. The mass storage unit is a removable, Solid State storage device mounted inside
the cab. The mass storage unit provides 12 gigabytes of storage for system software and log files.
Essentially, the mass storage unit performs the same function for the M270A1 as a hard disk drive
performs for a typical personal computer. The mass storage unit uses removable personal computer
memory card international association technology that provides the MLRS/HIMARS crewmen
capability of loading software.
2-16. The maintenance support device-field ready is an electronic device used to read the interactive electronic
technical manual. One maintenance support device-field ready and interactive electronic technical manual is
issued to each section.
2-17. The embedded program load unit functions are provided by specially configured personal computer
memory card international association circuit card assembly inserted into the mass storage unit prior to applying
power to the FCS. The embedded program load unit program provides the operator with the ability to:
 Reload FCS Software.
 Format personal computer memory card international association circuit card assembly.
 Duplicate personal computer memory card international association circuit card assembly.
 Check the status of personal computer memory card international association circuit card assembly.

2-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

FCS FUNCTIONS
2-18. The launcher FCS provides the link between the crew, external digital message sources, and the launcher
components. It performs the following significant functions:
 Monitors and integrates all onboard sensor data.
 In conjunction with the launcher communications system, provides a digital interface between the
launcher crew and the mission command elements.
 Monitors the status of built in tests.
 Enables the crew to control launcher components.
 Computes firing data for all fire missions.
 Lays the LM and sets fuzes or programs warheads as required.
 Controls LM operations.
2-19. The FCS receives data input in the following ways:
 Current mission data are input automatically through digital coded audio tone radio messages or
manually through the gunners display unit keyboard.
 Improved weapon interface unit munitions programs are input to the mass storage unit.
2-20. Data communication is the most common and preferred method of input to the FCS. Through the
AN/VRC-92F and the internet controller, the FCS can communicate digitally with the platoon, battery, or
battalion advanced field artillery tactical data system (AFATDS). The internet controller is a component of the
AN/VRC-92F radio. The FCS allows the crew to send and receive joint variable message format, fixed format,
and free text messages.
2-21. The primary means of communication is secure data over the tactical Internet and secure voice
communications are both available as backup. In case of data communication failure or when operating voice,
the crew can manually enter all data elements through the gunners display unit keyboard.
2-22. The improved weapon interface unit automatically monitors, integrates, and computes data from other
FCS launcher electronic components. It continuously computes launcher heading location and altitude. The FCS
determines the firing data when the target information is received. When the crew enters the appropriate
command, the FCS commands the LM to lay on the required launch azimuth and elevation, and set the rocket
fuze times or program the warheads. The FCS fires the rockets or missiles when commanded by the gunner
through the gunners display unit.
2-23. The FCS continuously checks its internal components and those of the LM. These checks are made
throughout the mission cycle. If a malfunction is detected, the crewmembers are notified by a fault message.

Note. The launcher is unable to fire the mission when a malfunction occurs in a launcher FCS; that
is, in the gunners display unit, power switching unit, launcher interface unit, improved weapon
interface unit, or PNU. Because no backup means exist to fire the launcher manually, the fire mission
must be redirected to an operational launcher for completion.

M142 HIGH MOBILITY ARTILLERY ROCKET SYSTEM

2-24. The M142 is an air transportable, wheeled, indirect fire, rocket/missile system that is capable of firing all
rockets and missiles of the MFOM. This system includes the launcher, ammunition trucks and trailers, MFOM
and the mission command system.
2-25. The M142 (see Figure 2-2) LM holds one launch pod container (LPC)/guided missile launch assembly
(GMLA). The M142 firing and reload times are comparable to the M270A1 Launcher.
2-26. Hot Panel capability allows for the M142 to maintain launcher location and GPS signal while in flight,
which enables the launcher to have true roll off and fire capability. It is a capability primarily incorporated in
the launcher software, which allows the launcher fire control system to remain powered on and fully initialized
during air transport, or to be powered on and initialize while in flight. This capability is accomplished by
modifications to the software that allow the launcher to maintain heading and crypto keys using GPS signals

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-5

Chapter 2

that are provided by the use of the joint precision airdrop system, which allows global positioning system
rebroadcast system inside the cargo bay of the transport aircraft. The Hot Panel capability allows the launcher to
be fully mission capable ("ready to shoot") as soon as it is off loaded from the aircraft. Hot Panel capability
allows for rapid engagement of critical targets while significantly increasing the survivability of the launcher,
crew, and aircraft due to reduced exposure to hostile fires. Additionally, precision strike missions employing
GMLRS rockets or ATACMS missiles can be accomplished utilizing the same aircraft.

Figure 2-2. M142 HIMARS launcher

CARRIER VEHICLE
2-27. The M142 launcher carrier is a variant of the fielded Army family of medium tactical vehicles with a
4500mm (177 inches) wheelbase truck chassis. Major components of the vehicle are the 330 horsepower diesel
engine, 7 speed automatic transmission, central tire inflation system, crew cab with operator vehicle controls,
highway and tactical lighting system and signals, suspension, and flexible frame.
2-28. The cab/chassis of the M142 launcher is designated the M1140; its unique features include:
 A two stage rear spring system that provides stability for fire missions and reload operations. This
two stage system (see Figure 1-3) is common to the tractor trailer variant of the family of medium
tactical vehicles fleet.
 A variable displacement/pressure compensating hydraulic pump mates with a speed increasing
gearbox, which steps up the engine speed to about 5,000 revolutions per minute. The gearbox mates
to the power take off shaft coming out of the transmission; the shaft rotates at about 1,750
revolutions per minute. This hydraulic pump provides the source of hydraulic power to various
subsystems.
 Doubler plates across the lower and upper frame rails to add stiffness for fire missions and reload
operations (see Figure 2-3).
 A 300 ampere alternator to provide the necessary power to the universal fire control system and
communications equipment.

2-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

Doubler
Plates

Figure 2-3. M142 chassis frame

CREW CAB
2-29. The armored crew cab designated the increased crew protection cab provides protection from small arms
fire, foreign objects, and toxic gasses to the 3 man crew. Features of the crew cab include:
 A commander’s hatch and “grab” bar on the roof of the cab (see Figure 2-4).
 All window glass with a transparent shatter resistant material, sufficient to protect against penetration
by foreign objects during firing. A chemical air filtration unit to filter toxic gasses from the outside
air. The air filtration unit forces outside air through an M-48 nuclear, biological and chemical filter
causing an overpressure condition, which also prevents gasses from entering around the doors or
other small openings.
 Air conditioning.
 Inside windshield and side windows are fitted with flash protector curtains for protection from the
flash of rocket/missile firings.

Figure 2-4. Increased crew protection cab

LAUNCHER MODULE
2-30. The LM is mounted to the chassis of the vehicle and provides the necessary structure and mechanisms for
loading, launching and unloading of all the MFOM. The LM consists of:
 A platform assembly for aiming the LM in elevation and on which one LPC/GMLA is mounted.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-7

Chapter 2

 A turret assembly for aiming the LM in azimuth.

 A base assembly that interfaces with the carrier vehicle.
 A hydraulic power control system, the reload system and sponsons containing the FCS and other
electronic components.
 A blast panels to protect the sponsons.

PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
2-31. The platform assembly consists of the firing platform, two outboard sponsons, and reloading system. It
provides the mechanical interface to the LPC/GMLA for the purpose of aiming and firing the weapons. The
platform is capable of securing one LPC/GMLA, consisting of either six rockets or one missile. When aiming,
the platform assembly can be driven in both azimuth and elevation simultaneously. Two operational speeds are
provided; one for a tactical environment and one for maintenance. The maintenance speed is also used during
boom controller reloading operations of the launcher. When operating with the boom controller, the platform is
driven in only one axis at a time.

FIRING PLATFORM
2-32. The firing platform (see Figure 2-5) secures the ammunition pods to the launcher and provides the
mechanical alignment of the pod to the PNU. The hold down mechanism is used to secure the ammunition pods
to the firing platform and is basically the same design found on the M270A1 launchers. The material used to
manufacture the front hold down hook has been changed to stainless steel to accommodate the firing
characteristics of the M142.
2-33. Two manually operated jury struts are integrated into the firing platform for the purpose of securing the
LM in place at an elevation of approximately 170 mils (10 degrees). The LM is secured with the jury struts as
part of the nonstandard procedure of loading LPC/GMLA from the resupply vehicle or resupply trailer.
2-34. Two elevation travel locks are mounted to the bottom front of the firing platform to secure the firing
platform to the turret assembly during travel.

Figure 2-5. Firing platform

SPONSONS
2-35. The curbside sponson houses (see Figure 2-6) the boom controller, universal position navigation unit
(UPNU), universal HIMARS launcher interface unit, power distribution box and the hydraulic reload manifold.

2-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

Access to these components is accomplished through compartment doors on the side and rear of the curbside
sponson. In addition, the on board GPS antenna is mounted on the top of the curbside sponson.
2-36. The roadside sponson houses the universal weapon interface unit and provides additional storage area for
the crew. The universal weapon interface unit is accessed through a compartment door on the rear of the
roadside sponson.
2-37. Blast panels are fixed to the front surfaces of each sponson and provide protection from rocket blasts.

Figure 2-6. Sponsons

TURRET ASSEMBLY
2-38. The turret assembly (see Figure 2-7) houses the elevation drive components and interfaces the platform
assembly to the azimuth drive components located in the base assembly. The turret mounts to the outer race of
the azimuth geared bearing and rotates the firing platform under the direction of the FCS. Mounted to the turret
assembly are components of the hydraulic control system consisting of the elevation manifold and the elevation
cylinder. The turret assembly also houses an elevation resolver to track elevation movement of the LM in
relationship to the carrier vehicle.

Figure 2-7. Turret assembly

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-9

Chapter 2

BASE ASSEMBLY
2-39. The base assembly (see Figure 2-8) provides the mechanical interface between the LM and the carrier
vehicle. The base also houses all the azimuth drive components for the system. These components consist of the
azimuth geared bearing, azimuth drive unit, and azimuth resolver.

Figure 2-8. Base assembly

RELOAD SYSTEM
2-40. The reload system for the launcher (see Figure 1-9) is incorporated into the design of the platform
assembly. It consists of a boom and hoist assembly. The reload system is located over the top of the
LPC/GMLA and does not impede C-130 aircraft loading/off loading. The M142 uses a hydraulic hoist motor
for its reload system.

Figure 2-9. M142 reload system

2-10 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

UNIVERSAL FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM

2-41. The M142 universal fire control system functions with the other launcher components to provide overall
control of the LM. It monitors, coordinates, and controls all electronic devices used during a launch cycle. The
universal fire control system consists of the universal gunners display unit with rugged memory unit allowing
the operator to interface with the universal fire control system which includes the universal weapon interface
unit, the boom controller, the UPNU, the, power switching unit, HIMARS universal launcher interface unit
(with power management unit, main processor and communications processor), and the maintenance support
device-field ready.
 Universal Gunners Display Unit. The universal gunners display unit, located in the passenger’s
side of the carrier cab in front of the gunner's seat, has a high resolution display, full text keyboard,
and audio/video alarms. It provides system interface to the mass storage unit that provides
nonvolatile storage for system software and database information.
 Power switching unit. The power switching unit which replaces the electronics box and provides the
vehicle power source interface and high current power switching and distribution. It is controlled by
the launcher interface unit.
 HIMARS Universal Launcher interface unit. The HIMARS universal launcher interface unit aims
and controls the LM. It provides interface for load/unload operations, and provides embedded
communications processing functions. It oversees the overall operations of the universal fire control
system to include providing system power and communication (internal and external) management
functions. The HIMARS universal launcher interface unit interfaces directly with the M270A1
improved launcher mechanical system and provides the stabilization and control functions. In
addition, the HIMARS universal launcher interface unit provides control functions for the boom and
hoist features in support of reload operations.
 Universal Weapon interface unit. The universal weapon interface unit contains the computer
program and data processing electronics to receive, compute, and distribute fire mission parameters.
It calculates the ballistic algorithm, downloads data to MFOM, performs short/no voltage tester
functions, and provides ground power.
 Universal Position navigation unit. The UPNU provides launcher position and navigation data.
During fire missions, the UPNU provides the universal fire control system with location, attitude,
and launcher rate data for use in computing ballistics and aiming the LM. The UPNU contains an
embedded GPS receiver to enhance its inertial performance and provide effective land navigation for
the launcher. The reference package of the UPNU is capable of alignment on the move, a process that
takes approximately 15 minutes as long as the vehicle remains in motion. Stationary alignment time
can be as long as 5 minutes or as short as 2 minutes and 30 seconds, depending on initialization data
and conditions. The position determining system requires manual updating only in the event that
GPS is not available to the system. GPS enables effective land navigation of the launcher in the
absence of SCP information. In the absence of GPS information, the UPNU provides free inertial
navigation or navigation with the aid of existing odometer encoder inputs.
 Boom controller. The boom controller permits remote control of the loading and off loading
functions and positioning of the LM for maintenance. An emergency disable switch has been added
onto the launcher boom controller because of the decreased reaction time associated with the
increased speed of the LM.

Note. During boom controller operations, all crew members must follow all safety procedures
outlined in the Interactive Electronic Technical Manual 9-1055-1646-13P.

 Power Switching Unit. The power switching unit provides operational interface to the boom/hoist
assemblies, travel lock actuator, and cage down limit switch.
 GPS antenna. The GPS receiver interfaces with the GPS satellite constellation via the antenna
mounted on top of the LM cage assembly.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-11

Chapter 2

SECTION III – MLRS/HIMARS FAMILY OF MUNITIONS (MFOM)

LAUNCH POD
2-42. Each M270A1 holds either two LPCs or two GMLAs (not a mix of the two) in the LM. Each M142 holds
one LPC or GMLA. Each launch pod contains either 6 rocket tubes or one missile housing in a containerized
shipping, storage, and launch frame. Rockets and missiles are factory assembled and tested. Rockets are stored
in fiberglass containers; missiles are stored in an aluminum enclosure with fiberglass camouflage panels on the
exterior. Both rockets and missiles are then mounted on the frame. Both the rocket tubes and the missile
housing are connected by cable to common electrical connectors. Not only are handling, transports, and loading
fixtures similar, the LPC and GMLA are also visually similar.
2-43. The launch pod (see Figure 2-10) is 4.04 meters (13 feet, 2 inches) long (without skids) and 1.05 meters
(3 feet, 5 inches) wide. The height of the pod is 0.84 meters (2 feet, 9 inches) with skids and 0.72 meters (2 feet,
4 inches) without skids. When loaded with rockets (tactical or practice), each LPC weighs 2,270 kilograms
(5,095 pounds). The GMLRS unitary rocket LPC is 4.01 meters (m) (158 inches) long, 1.02 m (40.1 inches)
wide, and weighs 2274.8 kilograms (5015.1 lbs).
2-44. A Loaded GMLA weighs 2,095 kilograms (5,111 pounds), and an inert training GMLA weighs 1,360
kilograms (2,998 pounds).

CAUTION
Do not mix the GMLA pod shoes for Block I with any other ATACMS
missile Blocks IA, M48/M57. The GMLA pod shoes for GPS guided
missiles are one inch thicker than those for the Block I and for rockets. The
added thickness of the pod shoes ensures that the improved missile
guidance set (IMGS) for GPS guided missiles is not damaged during
handling and shipment.. The operator must exercise care when
transporting GMLAs with different pod shoe sizes to prevent unbalanced
loads.

2-45. Four aluminum bulkheads provide rigidity to the frame and support for the rocket tube or missile
housing. Tie down and lifting D-rings are located on the top of the frame at the 4 corners. A lifting rod is
installed and used by the launcher boom and hoist assemblies to lift the container.
2-46. Stacking pins at the top 4 corners of the frame permit stacking of the launch pods. The pods can be
stacked two high during transport and 4 high during storage. They can be handled by forklift because they have
two inner bulkheads that serve as support members. Each launch pod is marked for the center of gravity and
proper lift areas.

Figure 2-10. Launch pod

2-12 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

2-47. The detachable skids mounted to the bottom 4 corners of the frame must be removed from the pod before
it is loaded into the LM. A quick release pull pin allows easy removal of the skids. The GMLA also has a lifting
rod cover that must be removed before being loaded into the LM. Skids should be replaced prior to
downloading and unfired pods to protect the connectors.

MISSILE/LAUNCH POD ASSEMBLY TRAINER

2-48. The missile/launch pod assembly trainer (M68A2) facilitates MLRS/HIMARS crew training. The
external appearances of both versions of the missile/launch pod assembly resemble the tactical M26 LPC.
2-49. The M68A2 is updated to support precision munitions . The upgrade consists of hardware and software
modifications that allow the M68A2 to function with the M270A1 and M142 launchers. The M68A2 assists in
providing realistic training to the MLRS/HIMARS crewmen. The training tasks include fire mission execution,
reaction to munitions malfunctions, and reload operations. The M68A2 represents the entire MFOM, to include
ATACMS unitary.

ROCKETS
2-50. The MLRS/HIMARS unguided rockets (see Table 2-2) are tube launched, spin stabilized, free flight
projectiles. The rockets are assembled, checked, and packaged in a dual purpose, launch storage tube at the
factory. This design provides for tactical loading and firing of the rocket without troop assembly or detailed
inspection. Major components of the rocket assembly include 4 stabilizer fins, a propulsion section, and a
warhead section (see Figure 2-11).
2-51. Propulsion for the rocket is provided by a solid propellant rocket motor. An umbilical cable, passing
through the aft end of the launch tube, links the FCS to an igniter in the rocket nozzle. The motor is ignited by
an electrical command from the FCS.
2-52. Each rocket is packaged with the 4 fins folded and secured by wire rope retaining straps. As the rocket
moves forward upon firing, lanyard devices trigger a delayed strap cutting charge. After the rocket leaves the
launch tube, the charge cuts the straps. This allows the fins to unfold and lock. The M28A1 training rocket has
an additional fin release device to ensure deployment.

Figure 2-11. M26 rocket

2-53. The MLRS/HIMARS rocket follows a ballistic, free flight (unguided) trajectory to the target. The
propulsion provided by the solid propellant rocket motor is the same for each rocket, so rocket range is a
function of LM elevation. The 4 stabilizer fins at the aft end of the rocket provide in flight stability by
maintaining a constant counterclockwise spin. The initial spin is imparted to the rocket through spin rails
mounted on the inner wall of the launch tube.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-13

Chapter 2

M26 ROCKET
2-54. The M26 is the basic rocket for MLRS/HIMARS. It is used against personnel, soft and lightly armored
targets normally with a target location error of 150 meters or less. Larger target location errors may reduce
effectiveness. Each rocket dispenses 644 M77 dual-purpose improved conventional munitions (DPICM) sub
munitions over the target area.

M26 Warhead Function

2-55. Warhead event is initiated by an electronic time fuze (M445) that is set remotely by the FCS immediately
before ignition of the rocket motor. The fuze triggers a center burster charge. This causes the warhead to
rupture, the polyurethane filler to shatter, and the sub munitions to be spread over the target area.

M77 Submunition Description

2-56. The armed M77 submunitions (see Figure 2-12) detonate on impact. The antimateriel capability is
provided through a shaped charge with a built in standoff. The M77 can penetrate up to 4 inches of armor. Its
steel case fragments and produces antipersonnel effects within a radius of 4 meters.
2-57. The sub munitions’ dud rate increases significantly at ranges less than 10 kilometers.

Figure 2-12. M77 submunition

M26A2 EXTENDED RANGE ROCKET

2-58. The extended range (ER) rocket M26A2 is an evolution of the basic M26 rocket that extends the range to
45-plus kilometers.

Note. Meteorology data no older than 30 minutes is required to achieve maximum accuracy at 45
kilometers.

2-59. This greater range capability is achieved through a 20 percent reduction in the number of sub munitions
and a modified rocket motor. It has the same accuracy as the basic M26 rocket. Due to the improved center core
burster the effectiveness of the M26 rocket is maintained in the ER rocket even though the sub munitions
payload has been decreased.

M28A1/M28A2 ROCKET (TRAINING)

2-60. The M28A1 and M28A2 rockets (reduced range) are also available for live firing at Army training
installations. These practice rockets have a monolithic trajectory (relatively uniform and predictable) and a

2-14 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

reduced range (8 to 15 kilometers). The M28A1 and M28A2 are restricted to firing in surface winds of less than
30 knots. This results in a much smaller surface danger zone than the M26, thus allowing it to be fired on many
cannon artillery firing ranges. The M28A1 has a blunt nosed, high drag warhead section that contains an impact
activated smoke charge. The M28A2 does not have an impact activated smoke charge. These training rockets
have the same motor assembly as the M26 and automatically balance the LPC during firing similar to the M26.
This automatic balancing function can be overridden using the rocket selection option in the FCS.

M30/M31 GMLRS ROCKET

2-61. The M30/M31 GMLRS rocket provides the U.S. Army with a long range, all weather, day and night,
rocket artillery system capable of defeating a variety of targets. Target types for the M30/M31 are the same as
for those of the M26 and M26A2 rockets. These targets include but are not limited to artillery, multiple rocket
launchers, air and missile defense, and lightly armored maneuver units. The M30/M31 can engage targets at a
range of 15-70 kilometers. The M30/M31 rocket gives the MFOM improved capability in the areas of system
accuracy, range, and payload types. The much greater accuracy of the M30/M31 allows for rocket to be fired on
targets that in the past would not be possible. Engaging targets nearer friendly troops, built up areas, and
civilian population is now a consideration.
2-62. The M30/M31 guided rockets are packaged in and fired from an LPC with the same height, width, and
length characteristics as the MLRS/HIMARS LPC. The guided unitary rocket is equipped with a GMLRS
motor, a guidance package, and carries a warhead/payload that may attack a variety of targets including those
that require low collateral damage. Design of the rocket allows handling and maintenance within the current
system. The guided unitary rocket is fired from both the M270A1 and the M142 launcher.

M30A1 Guided MLRS Alternative Warhead Rocket

2-63. The Guided MLRS Alternate Warhead (GMLRS-AW) rocket delivers a single, exploding warhead that
contains a polymer fragment layer containing approximately 161,000 tungsten spheres. The GMLRS-AW
rocket utilizes a proximity fuze mode maximizing area effects of the warhead. The warhead weighs
approximately 198 pounds. The GMLRS-AW proximity fuze mode utilizes the proximity-high with a ten-meter
height of burst. The GMLRS-AW enables the attack of critical targets with high kill probability and precision
while eliminating unexploded ordnance where Dual Purpose Improved Conventional Munitions (DPICM)
submunitions are neither effective nor desirable. It provides for precision attack of imprecisely located targets or
large TLEs at ranges from 15-70 km and beyond under all weather conditions.

M30/M31 GMLRS ROCKET COMPONENTS

Propulsion Section
2-64. The propulsion section of the M30/M31 is similar to that of the M26A2 but does incorporate some unique
characteristics. The rocket motor has the same physical dimensions as the M26A2 rocket motor, but
incorporates a spinning tailfin section (the tailfins on the M26 and M26A2 rockets are stationary). The purpose
of the spinning tailfin section is to reduce the effect that the wash from the canards have on the rocket’s flight.
The solid fuel used in the rocket motor of the M30/M31 is the same fuel used in the ATACMS. This is a slower
burning fuel than that used in the M26 and M26A2 rockets, which provides the M30/M31 its extended range.

Embedded GPS Receiver

2-65. The embedded global positioning system receiver (EGR) provides the M30/M31 rockets with very
accurate navigational updates by the use of orbiting satellites. These updates (made in flight) improve the rocket
in flight and terminal accuracy, regardless of range to target. The EGR determines precise position, velocity,
time of day, and range information. Although it has greater accuracy while in the GPS aided mode, the M30 is
not GPS dependent and will achieve a high level of accuracy in the non-aided mode.

Warhead/Guidance Section
2-66. The M30 warhead section contains 404 M101 DPICM grenades, a center core burster, and a polyurethane
support.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-15

Chapter 2

2-67. The M30/M31 uses an internal guidance and control assembly that makes in flight adjustments, guiding
the rocket to the target. The guidance and control assembly consists of the internal measurement unit, guidance
and control computer, GPS antenna and receiver, control actuation system, canards, electrical safe/arm device,
umbilical cable, and battery. The guidance and control assembly section occupies the forward portion of the
rocket and provides the commands to navigate the rocket to its aim point. The internal measurement unit and
GPS are tactical grade, non-developmental items. Adjustments in the flight pattern are made by the use of 4
small non-folding canards located in the ogive portion of the nose cone. The canards are controlled by
electromechanical actuators in response to navigation and control commands from the guidance and control
assembly. The guidance and control assembly also provides the electrical commands to activate the payload
electrical safe/arm device, initiating the center core burster, and dispensing the sub munitions over the target for
the M30 or the warhead fuze for the M31. The guidance and control assembly components are powered by an
onboard thermal battery that is activated just prior to launch. Figure 2-13 shows the components of the M30 and
Figure 2-14 shows the components of the M31.
2-68. The M31 warhead payload is an explosive filled steel canister designed to burst into fragments of a
controlled size. The canister weighs approximately 196 pounds and contains 51.5 pounds of insensitive
explosive and a tri-mode fuze.
2-69. The warhead is capable of 3 fuze modes; proximity, point detonating, and delay.
2-70. The proximity fuze mode causes warhead detonation at approximately 7 meters above the target, point
detonating mode causes detonation upon impact, and delay mode causes detonation as the nose cone penetrates
about one meter into the ground.

Figure 2-13. M30 GMLRS DPICM rocket

Figure 2-14. M31 GMLRS unitary rocket

2-16 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MMON OFFICIAL PART # NSN J- WT RG SUP ACC GUID. TARGETS COLOR CODES
NAME NOMEN. DODAC CODE MUNIT
DODIC
Basic Rocket Pod, 13027900 1340-01-122-2506 JED 5095 lbs 8-32km 644ea 11 mils Ballistic Personnel Large square: YELLOW
Tactical M298mm M26 1340-H104 M77 TLE<150M Soft & Light Armor Upper small square: BROWN

10 January 2014
Rocket H104 DPICM
ER-MLRS Rocket Pod, 13213732 1340-01-450-5867 JEL 4990 lbs 13-45 km 518ea 10 mils Ballistic Personnel Large square: YELLOW
w/M77 M298mm 134001L00H186 M77 Soft & Light Armor Upper small square: BROWN
Grenades M28A1 H186 DPICM Yellow Diamonds around
POD
RRPR Rocket Pod, 13031900 1340-01-370-9666 JEH 5090 lbs 8-15 km Training 24 mils Ballistic Impact Area Large square: BLUE w/RR in
M296mm 1340-H185 Rocket WHITE
M28A1 H185 Upper small square: BROWN
Lowe small square: LIGHT
GREEN
RRPR Rocket Pod, 13540620 1340-01-484-9001 JEH 5090 lbs 8-15 km Training 10 mils Ballistic Impact Area Large square: BLUE w/RR in
M296mm 1340-H185 Rocket WHITE
M28A2 H185 Upper small square: BROWN
Lowe small square: LIGHT
GREEN
3085 lbs

ATP 3-09.60
Trainer 13288848 6920-01-299-2216 Large square: BRONZE
Launch Pod
Container M68
Trainer 13231053 6920-01-486-4736 3085 lbs Large square: BRONZE
Launch Pod
Container M68
Table 2-2. MFOM characteristics

Guided Rocket Pod, 13540000 1340-01-490-9695 JEG 5071 lbs 15-70+ km 404ea <3 mils IMU w/GPS Personnel Large square: YELLOW
MLRS M298mm 1340-HA22 M101 aided Soft & Light Armor Upper small square: BROWN
M30 HA22 DPICM Canards Lower small square:
YELLOW DIAMONDS
Guided Rocket Pod, TBD TBD JTH 15-70+ km TBD <1 mil IMU IMU w/GPS Personnel Large square: YELLOW
MLRS M30A1 <8 meters aided Soft & Light Armor Upper small square: BROWN
AW GPS aided Canards
Guided Rocket Pod, 13540700 1340-01-517-4757 JTJ 5071 lbs 15-70+ km 54 lb. <1 mil IMU IMU w/GPS Personnel Large square: YELLOW
Unitary M2968m Warhead <8 meters aided Soft & Light Armor Upper small square: BROWN
M31 GPS aided Canards Fixed
Infrastructures
Legend: AW—alternative warhead DPICM— dual-purpose improved conventional munition ER—extended range GPS—global positioning system

2-17
GUID—guidance IMU—inertial measurement unit MLRS— multiple launch rocket system MUNIT—munition
NOMEN—nomenclature RG—range RRPR—reduced range practice rocket WT—weight
System Description
Chapter 2

MISSILES
2-71. The ATACMS missile is designed to carry a variety of sub munitions, including “smart” munitions and
lethal mechanisms to provide a wide range of future capabilities. Currently, the Army has the M39 ATACMS
Block I, M39A1 Block IA, and M48/M57 missiles (see Table 2-3).

Note. When firing the ATACMS and the FIRE switch is toggled, battery squibs are activated within
milliseconds. When the SAFE/ARM switch is safe, the firing sequence will be halted. As the squibs
have been activated, the fire control panel will display a misfire. The missile cannot be used for
another fire mission. Treat the missile as if it malfunctioned by downloading it and notifying the
ammunition transfer holding point personnel for disposition instructions. The missile can be repaired
by depot level maintenance.

If the tactical situation is such that the loss of an ATACMS missile to the threat is imminent and
evacuation is not feasible or possible, destroy the missile by using demolition charges in accordance
with interactive electronic technical manual. If the ATACMS missile becomes unserviceable due to
external damage or weapon failures, contact the ammunition transfer holding point for disposition.
MLRS/HIMARS ammunition is not to be left unattended on the battlefield.

COMMON MISSILE ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS

2-72. All ATACMS missiles have 4 sections: the guidance and control section, propulsion section, control
section, and the warhead assembly (see Figure 2-15).

Propulsion Section
2-73. The solid rocket motor furnishes the energy necessary to launch the missile and sustain missile flight for a
sufficient time to meet altitude and range requirements. The solid propellant motor consists of a motor case,
propellant, insulation/liner, nozzle, and igniter arm/fire assembly.

Control Section
2-74. The primary functions of the control section assembly are to position the missile fins, provide the missile
electrical power while in flight, and support selected pyrotechnic functions. The fins are folded when the missile
is installed in the GMLA. Electro mechanical actuators automatically unfold and lock the spring loaded fins in
flight position when the missile leaves the GMLA to control the missile during flight.

ATACMS BLOCK I
2-75. The Block I warhead is used against personnel and soft stationary targets normally with a target location
error of 150 meters or less. Larger target location errors may reduce effectiveness. Each missile dispenses a
cargo of approximately 950 antipersonnel/antimateriel M74 grenades. The missile has 3 programmable dispense
patterns (small, medium, and large) and has off axis launch capability to enhance crew/launcher survivability
from threat counterfire. The M39 Block I missile (ATACMS Block I) has a minimum range of 25 kilometers
and a maximum range of 165 kilometers.

Warhead Function
2-76. Warhead event is initiated by an electronic time fuze (M219A2) that is set in the same manner as the
M445 electronic time fuze of the M26 rocket. The fuze detonates shaped charges mounted to the skin and
bulkheads. This, in turn, severs the skin. The M74 grenades are distributed over the target area by centrifugal
force and air stream currents. Arming of the M74 grenades is accomplished by the spin action induced on the
individual grenade.

2-18 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

Guidance and Control Section

2-77. The Block I guidance and control section provide all navigation, guidance, autopilot, and internal
communications functions for the missile while in flight and for all ground operations. The missile's inertial
sensors, electronics, and software provide continuous determination of missile position, attitude, and motion.

Figure 2-15. M39/M39A1 missile

M74 Submunition
2-78. The M74 submunition (see Figure 2-16) is filled with composition B explosive filler and is covered by a
steel shell. Upon impact and detonation, each grenade breaks up into a large number of high velocity steel
fragments that are effective against personnel, truck tires, missile rounds, thin skinned vehicles, and radar
antenna targets. This submunition is not effective against armored vehicles. The M74 grenade also contains
incendiary material and has an antipersonnel radius of 15 meters.

Figure 2-16. M74 submunition

ATACMS BLOCK IA
2-79. The Block IA missile is a conventional, semi-ballistic missile that employs warheads delivering either
300 antipersonnel/antimateriel (M74) sub munitions against “soft” stationary targets at ranges from 70 to 300+

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-19

Chapter 2

kilometers or a 500 lb blast fragmentation warhead to 270+ kilometers. The ATACMS M74 payload was
decreased to increase the missile’s range (weight for range trade off) while the lethality was maintained by the
integration of a GPS aided improved missile guidance set (IMGS) to improve the missile’s accuracy. The Block
IA is fired from the M270A1 or M142 launcher. Block IA has off axis launch capability to enhance
crew/launcher survivability.

Note. If the Block IA missile is fired from a non GPS aided launcher, the missile will only achieve
Block I accuracy.

Guidance and Control Section

2-80. The guidance and control section contains the IMGS with an EGR for more accurate in flight guidance
corrections and improved accuracy. The IMGS performs all inertial navigation, guidance, mission control, and
built in test functions. The IMGS is also the central communications control point within the missile. The IMGS
contains the inertial sensor assembly, an electronics assembly, and the EGR that improves missile accuracy over
extended ranges.

Inertial Sensor Assembly

2-81. The inertial sensor assembly contains 3 ring laser gyros and 3 accelerometers with associated electronics.
The inertial sensor assembly senses movement and acceleration within the 3 axes (pitch, roll, and yaw) of the
missile. The inertial sensor computer provides the inertial sensor assembly output to the IMGS.

Electronics Assembly
2-82. The electronics assembly contains 2 onboard computer systems that process all inertial sensor assembly
and EGR data, and perform all the guidance and control functions.

Embedded GPS Receiver

2-83. The EGR provides the missile with very accurate navigational updates from orbiting GPS satellites
during flight. These updates improve missile in flight and terminal accuracy, regardless of the range to the
target. The EGR has an external, two element, beam shifting antenna system and electronics to acquire, track,
and process GPS satellite information on the ascending and descending phases of the trajectory. The beam
shifting also allows the missile to pull forward or aft appropriately to enhance tracking performance in a high
electromagnetic countermeasure or jamming environment. The inertial navigation system will continue to guide
the missile to dispense should the missile be jammed. The EGR determines precise position, velocity, time of
day, and pseudo-range information. The launcher initializes the EGR with GPS data. If this does not occur, the
improved inertial navigation system guides the missile to the target area. The missile may still acquire GPS
satellite data in flight. In this case, the missile's delivery accuracy improves.

Warhead Assembly
2-84. The warhead section contains approximately 300 M74 antipersonnel/antimateriel grenades (the same sub
munitions used in the Block I missile). Block IA has 3 programmable dispense patterns (small, medium, and
large). The method of dispense is identical to the Block I missile.

M48/M57 ATACMS Unitary

2-85. The ATACMS unitary missile (see Figure 2-17) is a modified missile with a warhead that integrates the
500 pound unitary high explosive warhead used in the Navy HARPOON missile. The modifications enable the
engagement of point targets while minimizing collateral damage.

Note. The ATACMS unitary missile can be fired only from a GPS aided launcher. The unitary
missile requires the successful transfer of GPS keys/data upon arming the missile. If the transfer of
data fails, a failure prompt will be displayed to the operator.

2-20 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

Figure 2-17. ATACMS M48/M57

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-21

 COMMON OFFICIAL PART # NSN J- WEIGHT RANGE SUB ACCURACY GUIDANCE TARGET COLOR

2-22
NAME NOMEN DODAC CODE In km MUNITION CODE
DODIC
Chapter 2

ATACM GMLA 13330001 1427-01-511-2143 JEJ 4682 lbs 70-270 500 lb Classified IMU w/GPS Fixed Large
Block IA Surface 1427-PL65 warhead aided infrastructure square:
QRU Attack PL-65 sites (buildings, YELLOW
M48 power plants,
etc.)

GMLA GMLA 13330130 1427-01-480-8516 JTK 4682 lbs 70-270 500 lb Classified IMU w/GPS Fixed Large
Surface Surface 1427-PL65 warhead aided infrastructure square:
Attack M57 Attack PL65 sites (buildings, YELLOW
M57 power plants,
etc.)

GMLA M39 GMLA 13288001 1427-01-274-3904 JEE 4814 lbs 25-165 950 M74 Classified Fin stabilized Personnel and Large
M39 1427-PL81 APAM INS soft stationary square:
PL81 targets YELLOW

ATP 3-09.60
GMLA M39 GMLA 13288685 1427-00-000-0195 JEE 4928 lbs 25-165 950 M74 Classified Fin stabilized Personnel and Large
M39 1427-PL81 APAM INS soft stationary square:
PL81 targets YELLOW

GMLA M39 GMLA 13288692 1427-01-386-3113 JEE 5111 lbs 25-165 950 M74 Classified Fin stabilized Personnel and Large
M39 1427-PL81 APAM INS soft stationary square:
PL81 targets YELLOW
Table 2-3. ATACMS family of munitions characteristics

GMLA GMLA 13366000 1427-01-398-6538 JEN 4640 lbs 70-300 300 M74 Classified Ballistic-GPS Personnel and Large
M39A1 M39A1 1427-PL38 APAM aided INS soft stationary square:
PL38 targets YELLOW

GMLA GMLA 13365998 1427-01-439-8639 JEN 4640 lbs 70-300 300 M74 Classified Ballistic-GPS Personnel and Large
M39A1 M39A1 1427-PL47 APAM aided INS soft stationary square:
PL47 targets YELLOW

10 January 2014
Legend: APAM—antipersonnel antimateriel
 System Description

SECTION IV – ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

AMMUNITION RESUPPLY VEHICLE AND TRAILER (HEMTT/HEMAT)

2-86. The M985 heavy expanded mobility tactical truck (HEMTT) is a 10 ton, 8 wheel, or 8 wheel drive truck
with a 5,400 pound lift capacity materiel handling crane (see Figure 2-18). A secure radio provides voice
mission command capability. The rear mounted crane can traverse 6,400 mils to the left or right. Both the
HEMTT and the heavy expanded mobility ammunition trailer (HEMAT) can be loaded and unloaded with the
crane. The HEMAT does not have to be unhooked from the HEMTT. The truck carries 4 launch pods with a
gross vehicle weight of 59,000 pounds. Its operating range is 300 miles, and it can climb a 30 percent slope. The
HEMTT has a 445 horsepower diesel engine with an automatic transmission. It can be transported by C-130
aircraft in an unloaded configuration and by C-5A/C-5B and C-17 aircraft in a loaded tactical configuration.

Figure 2-18. M985 HEMTT

2-87. The M989A1 HEMAT (see Figure 2-19) can carry 4 launch pods and has a fully loaded gross weight of
31,000 pounds. A launcher can tow the trailer in an emergency.

Figure 2-19. M989A1 HEMAT

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-23

Chapter 2

HIMARS RESUPPLY VEHICLE AND RESUPPLY TRAILER

MOVEMENT TRACKING SYSTEM
2-88. The M1084A1 with material handling equipment resupply vehicle (see Figure 2-20) is a family of
medium tactical vehicles variant capable of carrying two LPC/GMLA. The resupply vehicle can tow the M1095
resupply trailer (see Figure 2-21) which is capable of carrying an additional two LPC/GMLA. With the assigned
two man crew and the on board material handling equipment, the crew is capable of loading and off loading
LPC/GMLA to and from the resupply vehicle and resupply trailer. The resupply vehicle is equipped with secure
radio communications.

Figure 2-20. M1084A1 resupply vehicle

Figure 2-21. M1095 resupply trailer

MOVEMENT TRACKING SYSTEM

2-89. Additionally, the resupply vehicle can be equipped with a movement tracking system (MTS) for
controlling movement. MTS is a global satellite communications system that provides text messaging and
vehicle tracking capabilities. It allows a commander to determine where his vehicles are, what their status is,
and to communicate with them in near real time. Because the system is satellite based, as long as the MTS
satellite transceiver has an unhindered view of the satellite, it will be able to communicate with other on line
MTS systems.
2-90. The MTS is made up of two configurations, the control station and the mobile unit.

2-24 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

2-91. The control station provides command functionality for the MTS and is operated by the battalion
ammunition management section and the battery support platoon headquarters. The control station
configuration (see Figure 2-22) consists of a laptop computer with a compact disc read only memory drive for
National Geospatial Intelligence Agency map loading, a satellite transceiver with 100 foot cable, a Precision
Lightweight GPS Receiver and a portable printer.

Figure 2-22. MTS control station

2-92. The Mobile Unit (see Figure 2-23) is designed for permanent installation in a vehicle using an installation
kit designed for that vehicle, and consists of a satellite transceiver and ruggedized computer with appropriate
cabling and a Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver. It provides text messaging and National Geospatial
Intelligence Agency theater maps for displaying MTS equipped vehicles. Each resupply vehicle is equipped
with a mobile unit. Figure 2-24 shows a mobile unit mounted in the resupply vehicle cab.

Figure 2-23. MTS mobile unit

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-25

Chapter 2

Figure 2-24. MTS mobile unit in the resupply vehicle

2-93. The satellite transceiver is placed on a magnetic mount (see Figure 2-25) that is permanently mounted
behind the cab. The mount does not increase the height of the vehicle when the transceiver is mounted. Any
mobile unit can be configured to function as a control station.

Figure 2-25. MTS transceiver mount

2-26 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 System Description

MISSION COMMAND SYSTEM

2-94. Tactical mission command and technical fire direction of MLRS/HIMARS units is provided through
communication systems that control, coordinate, and synchronize. The system includes the combination of the
radios and computers. MLRS/HIMARS units primarily use the AFATDS functionality as internal battalion,
battery, and platoon mission command device. AFATDS is also the primary device at echelons above battalion
to which the battalion reports. The AFATDS communicates digitally with the FCS, which is the onboard
computer on the launcher. The FCS provides both technical firing data and launcher fire control. The AFATDS
can also communicate digitally with the following systems:
 Forward observer system.
 Pocket size forward entry device.
 Field artillery weapons locating radars.
 Profiler.
 Airborne target handover system.
 Joint surveillance and target attack radar system common ground station.
 Fire support team digital message device.
 Tactical fire direction system digital message device.
 Tactical Airspace Integration System.

AFATDS
2-95. AFATDS is the field artillery’s fires warfighting function mission command system. It provides decision
aids and an information system for the control, coordination, and synchronization of all types of fire support
means. The objective AFATDS supports all parts of the fire support system:
 Fire support mission command operational facilities.
 Personnel.
 Target acquisition.
 Battlefield surveillance.
 Weapon systems.
2-96. The AFATDS functionality provides automated fire support, fire unit status, ammunition accounting, fire
unit database management, fire unit selection, fire unit scheduling, ATACMS platoon and target air hazard area
computation, meteorological coordination, and geometry processing in support of the MLRS/HIMARS mission.
2-97. AFATDS is interconnected by the area common user system, the Army data distribution system, and
combat net radio communications. AFATDS operates with other services using joint variable message formats
or the United States message text formats. The system complies with standardized message formats derived
from Standard NATO Agreement 2934 and bilateral agreements with the United Kingdom, Federal Republic of
Germany, and other nations, as applicable.
2-98. AFATDS consists of hardware devices, software modules, and necessary communications equipment to
provide seamless mission command. The objective version provides full fire support planning, technical and
tactical fire direction, and advanced automated decision aids, all of which significantly contribute to effective
Army tactical missile system family of munitions (AFOM) employment. Units that were previously fielded with
AFATDS will receive a software upgrade package to install into the latest version of the hardware. Each
subsequent build will increasingly automate all fire support tasks, ending with the objective system that will be
fully automated.

SURVEY EQUIPMENT
IMPROVED POSITION AZIMUTH DETERMINING SYSTEM
2-99. The survey section of the MLRS/HIMARS battalion is equipped with the improved position azimuth
determining system (IPADS). The IPADS is a self contained surveying system that rapidly determines accurate

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 2-27

Chapter 2

location, azimuth, and altitude. The system gives the MLRS/HIMARS battalion a highly mobile survey
capability.

GPS
2-100. The defense advanced global positioning system receiver (DAGR) is a highly accurate satellite signal
navigation set (AN/PSN-13). The set operates as a part of GPS. Up to 5 satellites are tracked continuously and
simultaneously. The AN/PSN-13 has an antenna, keyboard, backlit display, receiver, processor unit, and a
battery.

Note. IPADS is always the preferred method of survey over the DAGR because of greater accuracy.

2-101. The AN/PSN-13 is designed for battlefield use anywhere in the world. It is sealed watertight for all
weather, day or night operations.
2-102. Capability is included for installation in ground facilities and air, sea, and land vehicles. The AN/PSN-
13 is operated (stand alone) using prime battery power and an integral antenna. It can be used with an external
power source and an external antenna.
2-103. GPS receivers rely on electronic line of sight with the satellites. Dense foliage, buildings, mountains,
and canyons will mask the signal. All GPS receivers automatically try to track visible satellites as low as 5
degrees above the level horizon. Each receiver has a function that displays the direction and vertical angle to the
satellite. This display indicates if masking is a problem. Move to another location when one satellite signal is
masked and another satellite is not visible.
2-104. Multipath (reflected signals) may occur if the GPS antenna is tilted away from a satellite. This may
cause the reflected signal from the satellite to have more signal strength than the direct signal, causing several
hundred meters of position error.
2-105. The DAGR is only useful for position control for MLRS/HIMARS when it provides a figure of merit
(FOM) of 1. The FOM is a number from 1 to 9 located in the upper right portion of the display, which shows
the total estimated position error (EPE) as shown in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4. Estimated position error
FOM Value Estimated Position Error
1 25 m
2 50 m
3 75 m
4 100 m
5 200 m
6 500 m
7 1,000 m
8 5,000 m
9 > 5,000 m

2-28 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Chapter 3
Employment
MLRS/HIMARS units are employed to provide field artillery rocket and missile fires in
support of the brigade combat team, division, corps, army, joint or multinational force,
Marine air ground task force, or in the conduct of theater missile defense to destroy,
neutralize, or suppress the threat. Successful MLRS/HIMARS employment start with a
sound organization for combat that maximizes MLRS/HIMARS capabilities to support
the elements of decisive action—offense, defense, stability, or defense support of civil
authorities.

SECTION I – OPERATIONS IN WAR

GENERAL EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS

3-1. The division, corps, and joint task force commanders' areas of operation normally include all areas
occupied by threat forces that may jeopardize completion of the current mission. Often, MLRS/HIMARS can
engage threat forces to the full depth of those areas of operations.

SYSTEM CAPABILITIES
3-2. The flexibility of the MLRS/HIMARS makes it an important fire support asset to combined arms
commanders at all levels. The battalion's automated mission command capabilities; the organizational structure;
and the system range, firepower, and munitions all contribute to this flexibility.
3-3. The MLRS/HIMARS organizational structure allows assignment of tactical missions down to the firing
battery and platoon levels. The MLRS/HIMARS firing batteries are equipped to operate independently from
parent battalion control. The MLRS/HIMARS firing platoons may execute separate standard or nonstandard
tactical missions for limited periods. Augmentation of platoon assets increases this semi-independent capability.

FIRES
3-4. Division commanders designate decisive, shaping, and sustaining operations within the area of operations
if necessary. Designating these areas provides a tool for analyzing spatial relationships between threat and
friendly combat forces. The field artillery provides fires throughout the area of operations.
3-5. The targeting methodology for planning and executing fires is decide, detect, deliver, and assess. This
methodology requires that targets and their areas of engagement be planned during the decide phase. The
decide, detect, deliver, and assess methodology and the doctrine for planning and executing fire support in
shaping operations are addressed in FM 3-60.

POSITIONING
3-6. Proper and well coordinated positioning and employment of MLRS/HIMARS units increase their
effectiveness. The ability to accomplish its assigned essential or field artillery tasks is the primary consideration
for positioning an MLRS/HIMARS unit. Other considerations include:
 Minimum as well as maximum range.
 Communications to higher, adjacent, and subordinate units.
 Firing signature.
 Availability of suitable terrain.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-1

Chapter 3

 Facilitation of future operations.

3-7. When required by assigned fire support or field artillery tasks, MLRS/HIMARS units fight positioned
forward, as close to the FLOT as possible, to maximize the system’s ability to attack at long range. Positioning
launchers forward and intermixing them with other fire support systems and maneuver units in the brigade
combat team’s area of operations degrades the ability of the threat to template MLRS/HIMARS locations.
Positioning forward, however, does increase the risk to soldiers because MLRS/HIMARS units have a limited
ability to defend themselves against ground attack.
3-8. When positioning forward, minimum range is a consideration. Positioning forward also increases
coordination requirements because, when it fires, the MLRS/HIMARS signature increases the vulnerability of
all elements in the immediate vicinity of the launchers to threat fires.
3-9. Shoot and scoot tactics and ATACMS off axis capability are used to reduce the threat's ability to acquire
and engage MLRS/HIMARS launchers with indirect fires.
3-10. The lethality and range of MLRS/HIMARS make it an HVT for threat ground maneuver and special
operations forces, which hunt down launchers that cannot be attacked by counterfire.
3-11. Digital communications are essential for effective MLRS/HIMARS operations. Communication
requirements, particularly frequency electronic line of sight, are a key consideration when selecting position
areas.

PLANNING AND COORDINATION

Planning
3-12. Employment of the MLRS/HIMARS requires thorough planning and coordination. OPORDS, fire
support plans/annexes, and field artillery support plans should all include detailed tasks and instructions for
MLRS/HIMARS units. These instructions should include types and amounts of ammunition by unit, platoon,
and/or launcher posturing, and FCS configurations for specific launchers. Planners should consider the need for
launcher redundancy in the allocation of targets. If resources allow, assign both primary and backup launchers
to ensure timely target attack.
3-13. Rehearsals are an integral part of the planning process for all operations. If at all possible, the rehearsal
should be conducted with the force commander's rehearsal. A combined rehearsal will improve responsiveness
of fires and the synchronization of all the force commander's resources for the battle.

Rocket Fires
3-14. Rockets will normally be fired at targets within the division area of operations by an attached or
reinforcing MLRS/HIMARS battalion or a fires brigade. These units supporting the division are normally
under the control of the division fires cell or a fires brigade, which may be designated by the supported
commander as the force artillery HQ.

Missile Fires
3-15. The employment of ATACMS missiles will normally be retained at corps and higher levels. An attached
or reinforcing MLRS/HIMARS battalion may, however, fire missiles that have been apportioned to the division
to support its mission. Therefore, all firing elements and platforms of the MLRS/HIMARS battalion must be
prepared for ATACMS missions. The planning tasks and functions necessary for the employment of ATACMS
will be managed under centralized control, normally at echelons above division. Corps and other echelons
above division can integrate the necessary target and intelligence information and coordinate/deconflict targets
at operational depths.

Execution
3-16. The key to effective employment of MFOM is planning and coordination (prior to execution). Execution
functions for fixed or non-mobile targets may also be initiated under centralized control. Responsiveness may
be improved by tailoring linkages to allow shorter paths (decentralized execution) from target acquisition

3-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

sources through fires brigade or MLRS/HIMARS battalion nodes to the launcher for the attack of time-sensitive
targets. If the force commander desires to decentralize execution for certain targets (typically high priority
fleeting targets that are vulnerable to attack for very short periods of time), he will normally designate a
subordinate commander (unit) as the execution authority.

Targets
3-17. The target sets for ATACMS Blocks I and IA include soft, stationary, and/or emitting high priority
targets. The targets include major mission command nodes, air defense weapons and radars, logistics storage
facilities, helicopter operating bases, surface-to-surface missile systems, multiple rocket launchers, and major
troop assembly areas.

Note. Accurate reporting of platoon center locations is paramount because these locations are used to
develop and coordinate Airspace Control Authority restricted operations zones.

3-18. M39, M39A1 and M48/M57 Comparison. The most important differences among Block I, Block IA,
M57, are range, payload, guidance, and default submunitions dispense pattern size (see Table 3-1). Pattern size
can be found in the DP field of the Fire Mission;CFF message. There are 3 dispense patterns (Classified, see
joint munitions effectiveness manuals (JMEM) weaponeering system software for Blocks I and IA: small,
medium, and large.
Table 3-1. Block I, Block IA, and M48/M57comparison
M39 Block I M39A1 Block IA M48/M57 QRU
Range (km) 25-165 70-300 70-270+
Payload 950 M74 grenades 300 M74 grenades 500 lbs unitary charge
Guidance Inertial GPS aided GPS aided
Default Dispense Large Medium N/A
Pattern Size
Legend: GPS—global positioning system QRU—quick reaction unitary

3-19. The battalion and battery fire direction centers process ATACMS family of missiles missions the same
way they do other missions (except for effects processing and airspace message generation). The fire direction
center computer software has no default for the number of ATACMS family of missiles to be fired on an aim-
point. When the fire mission is received at battalion, the fire direction center performs the tactical processing
and formats the call for fire for transmission to the battery. The battalion fire direction uses the designated fire
unit or selects the platoon to fire if it has not been selected. Otherwise, it validates the selection made by the
fires cell.
3-20. At the battery level, the fire direction center performs the tactical functions appropriate to the battery
echelon, selects the launcher or launchers to fire, and generates a separate fire mission message format to each
selected launcher. Basic fire mission processing at the launcher requires no special activities.

Fire Support Coordination

3-21. Fire support coordination must be considered when firing rockets and missiles. Fires will often be located
beyond the fire support coordination line because of the range of the weapon and expected target types. During
planning and coordination, there should be emphasis on establishing procedural controls and the need to
deconflict these fires with the joint force, particularly the air component. Coordination of attacks beyond the fire
support coordination line , if established, is especially critical to commanders of air, land, and special operations
forces. Forces attacking targets beyond the fire support coordination line must inform all affected commanders
in sufficient time to allow necessary reaction to avoid fratricide in the air and on the ground. Finally, this
coordination assists in avoiding conflicting or redundant attacks. In exceptional circumstances, the inability to
conduct this coordination will not preclude the attack of targets beyond the fire support coordination line.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-3

Chapter 3

TASK ORGANIZATION
3-22. The flexibility of the MLRS/HIMARS battalion offers significant fires capability to the combined arms
commander. The battalion automated mission command and 10-300 kilometer range of munitions all contribute
to this flexibility.
3-23. The force commander establishes the mission command of MLRS/HIMARS units through task
organization or the assignment of a field artillery tactical task in accordance with Standard NATO Agreement
2934:
 Establish a command or support relationship by placing the unit in a specific tactical organization.
 Assign a field artillery tactical task in accordance with Standard NATO Agreement 2484.

Note. MLRS/HIMARS batteries and platoons may also be assigned tactical tasks for limited periods.

MLRS/HIMARS MISSION COMMAND REQUIREMENTS

3-24. The composition and distribution of the supported command, the MLRS/HIMARS unit inherent
responsibilities to the force field artillery headquarters, and the mission and organization of the
MLRS/HIMARS unit will determine the mission command requirements. Consider the following in
determining mission command requirements:
 How many mission command nodes does the mission require? Will the unit operations center be
sufficient? Will it require augmentation?
 If a maneuver protection force is required, how is it controlled? Will it provide a liaison to the
MLRS/HIMARS unit mission command element?
 Will a “quick-fire” net/channel be established?
 Will a primary and alternate launcher be designated?
 What target acquisition assets are available for?
 Are electronic warfare assets going to be available to the effort to mask the electronic signature?

COMMAND AND SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS

3-25. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion is capable of complying with the standard Army command or support
relationships as well as nonstandard missions. The following considerations should be taken into account when
assigning MLRS/HIMARS command or support relationships:
 The MLRS/HIMARS battalion lacks organic fire support coordination personnel. The liaison
sections organic to fires brigade MLRS/HIMARS battalions are not designed to satisfy this function.
 MLRS/HIMARS battalions need to maintain the flexibility to shift support relationships rapidly.
 Unguided rockets and area fire munitions are best used against area targets and to complement
cannon fires.
 Unguided rockets and area fire munitions are inherently less precise than cannon projectiles. They
have a much larger circular error probable and collateral damage estimate associated with their
effects.
 Cannon fires are normally more responsive than MLRS/HIMARS fires for targets of opportunity.
Proactive fire support planning and synchronized air space coordination procedures may
substantially reduce response times for MLRS/HIMARS.
 The MLRS/HIMARS has extensive ammunition resupply considerations that may adversely impact
its ability to sustain continuous fires.
 The MLRS/HIMARS lacks some munitions normally required for a direct support relationship (such
as illumination and smoke). Alternate sources of illumination and smoke must be coordinated, as
required.
 Special consideration must be given to communications and net planning.
 While the direct support relationship decentralizes the unit fires, the mission provides the force
commander an important shaping tool.

3-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

 Precision-guided munitions provide improved accuracy and greater range, with precision-guided
unitary providing minimal circular error probable and collateral damage estimate associated with
their effects. For precision-guided munitions delivery, category 1 target location error information is
required. See ATP 3-09.32 for information on target location error categories.
3-26. The supported force commander establishes the mission command of MLRS/HIMARS units through task
organization or the assignment of a field artillery tactical task. The supported commander may establish a
command or support relationship by placing the unit in a specific tactical organization.
3-27. The force commander normally establishes one of the following relationships with a tactical unit for each
field artillery unit:
 Organic.
 Assigned.
 Attached.
 Operational control.
3-28. One MLRS/HIMARS battalion is organic to the fires brigade. Additional MLRS/HIMARS battalions
may be assigned, attached or placed in operational control to the fires brigade.

FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS

3-29. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion is capable of complying with the standard Army support relationships of
general support, general support reinforcing, reinforcing, direct support, as well as nonstandard missions.
3-30. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion may be assigned any support relationship consistent with the
commander's fire support guidance. Assignment of a command or support relationship directs the
MLRS/HIMARS battalion commander to meet each of the directed and inherent responsibilities of the
relationship. For more information on the support relationships see Army doctrine reference publication
(ADRP) 3-0 and FM 3-09.

BATTALION COMMANDER
3-31. The duty location of the MLRS/HIMARS battalion commander at any given time is where he can best
execute the battalion's mission. Tactical mission assignments influence the commander's positioning decisions.
For example, if the battalion has a direct support, support relationship to the combat aviation brigade, the
MLRS/HIMARS battalion commander might be at the side of the brigade commander in the aviation CP. In a
general support role, the battalion commander may position himself in the (corps/division) main FC, tactical CP
fires element, or the MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP, depending on the tactical situation and intelligence feeds
required. When the MLRS/HIMARS battalion has a general support reinforcing or reinforcing role, the
battalion commander may be best situated at the unit supported by the reinforced field artillery battalion. In a
direct support role the battalion commander may position himself at the covering force/screening force CP (see
Table 3-2).
Table 3-2. Positioning the battalion commander
Tactical Mission Recommended BN CDR Location
GS MAIN CP, TAC CP FE, MLRS/HIMARS BN CP
GSR MAIN CP, TAC CP FE, MLRS/HIMARS BN CP, MVR BDE CP of reinforced
FA
Reinforcing BCT CP of reinforced FA
DS With supported unit commander
Legend:
BCT = brigade combat team BDE — brigade BN — battalion
DS — direct support FA — field artillery FC — Fires Cell
FE — Fires Element GS — general support GSR — general support reinforcing
HIMARS = high mobility artillery rocket system MLRS/HIMARS — multiple launch rocket system
MVR — maneuver TAC — tactical

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-5

Chapter 3

3-32. As the tactical missions and tactical situation of the battalion change during the course of a battle, so will
the point on the battlefield where the battalion commander can best influence the action. Relocating on a fluid,
dynamic, and noncontiguous 21st century battlefield may prove challenging as the battalion rapidly transitions
from a general support role to direct support and back to general support again.

LIAISON FUNCTION OPTIONS

3-33. The liaison function is required to accommodate frequent changes in tactical mission assignment. Liaison
provides the MLRS/HIMARS battalion commander needed flexibility to meet rapidly changing and widely
separated (geographically) missions. Liaison enhances the capability to provide fires across the division/corps
front.
3-34. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion has two organic liaison teams to perform the liaison function.
3-35. If the MLRS/HIMARS battalion and reinforced unit are digitized, and both units maintain
communications and situational understanding, the actual physical presence of a liaison team at the reinforced
unit may not be required. If the two units collocate CPs or FDCs, the liaison requirement is met and no liaison is
required. If a liaison team is required at the reinforced unit, it should be equipped with a vehicle, voice and
digital communications, and an AFATDS.
3-36. If an MLRS/HIMARS battery is required to perform the liaison function, it may be accomplished by the
following options:
 Maintain situational understanding and digital communications with the reinforced unit.
 Collocate the BOC with the reinforced unit.
 Form an ad hoc liaison element with internal assets.
3-37. Liaison responsibilities include the following:
 Pass information on the tactical situation to the reinforcing unit CP.
 Establish digital and voice communications as required.
 Exchange orders, situation reports, and intelligence reports.
 Pass fire missions.
 Establish quick fire nets as required.
 Pass unit locations, ammunition status, weapon strength, target lists, and fire plans (see ADRP 5-0).

OFFENSIVE TASKS
3-38. The main purpose of the offense remains to defeat, destroy, or neutralize the enemy force. When
synchronized with the array of other assets capable of providing fire support, including fixed and rotary wing
aircraft and electronic attack assets, the MLRS/HIMARS battalion allows the commander to shape the area of
operations to set the conditions for decisive offensive maneuver. Once those conditions have been established,
the maneuver units will attack and dominate the enemy in the close combat, using both fires and maneuver. An
MLRS/HIMARS unit must be prepared to support the offensive tasks:
 Movement to contact.
 Attack.
 Exploitation and pursuit.
3-39. Detailed discussions of each task and the responsibilities of the field artillery are found in FM 3-09.

MOVEMENT TO CONTACT
3-40. Units conduct movement to contact to gain or regain contact with the enemy. Once contact is made, the
commander can further develop the situation.
3-41. A movement to contact will likely be executed as a series of tactical moves by subordinate elements as a
precursor to the execution of an attack. In this circumstance, a combination of preparation fires and/or
programs, series, or groups of targets may be employed to protect the force and ensure its freedom of maneuver
during movement to, and occupation of, forward assembly areas and attack positions. Fire support tasks include:

3-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

 Plan artillery movement to facilitate tactical movement, maintain force momentum, and provide
adequate immediately responsive support for executing contingencies.
 Destroy threat reconnaissance, surveillance, and target acquisition.
 Anticipate/plan for hasty attack contingencies.
 Plan, on order, FSCMs throughout the unit’s area of operations.
 When situational understanding is less than optimum, plan "worst case" fires where the enemy could
significantly impact friendly operations.
 Plan and execute preparation fires to ensure freedom of maneuver.
3-42. Fires are thus characterized by decentralized control and must be extremely responsive to compensate for
the relatively small amount of maneuver power forward.

ATTACK
3-43. The purpose of the attack is to defeat, destroy, or neutralize the enemy or seize the ground it occupies.
Successful attacks depend on the skillful massing of combat fires and forces, when necessary, while sustaining a
tempo the threat force cannot handle. The attack focuses on a powerful and violent assault on the objective. The
unit will likely mass all available firepower on the threat at the beginning of the assault. This requires detailed
planning, precise execution, and tremendous discipline in the fire support force at all levels. The commander's
intent and time available to plan will drive the selection of available attack options—hasty attack, deliberate
attack, spoiling attack, counterattack, raid, feint, demonstration, or any combination of these. Fire support tasks
include:
 Establish critical friendly zones over tactical assembly areas, attack positions, and CPs.
 Plan and execute counterfires to ensure freedom of maneuver and protect the force.
 Mass effects of fires against HPTs to meet criteria established by the force commander to set
conditions for crossing the line of departure.
 Synchronize artillery movement to facilitate tactical movement, maintain force momentum, and
provide adequate, immediately responsive support for executing contingencies.
 Plan logistics support that facilitates tactical movement, maintains force momentum, and provides
adequate, immediately responsive support for executing contingencies.
 Plan, on order, fire support coordination measures to facilitate execution of branches and sequels to
the plan.

EXPLOITATION AND PURSUIT

3-44. Exploitation and pursuit operations follow successful attacks. Exploitation occurs when the attacker
extends the destruction of the defending force by maintaining continuous pressure. The ultimate objective is the
disintegration of the enemy to the point where he has no alternative but surrender or die. Exploiting forces
disrupt threat mission command, seize objectives in the threat rear, cut lines of communication, and isolate and
destroy threat units. As the threat's will to fight erodes and their formations begin to disintegrate, exploitation
may develop into pursuit. The pursuit is an offensive task against a retreating threat force. The objective is the
complete destruction of that force. Fire support tasks include:
 Plan artillery movement to facilitate tactical movement and maintain force momentum.
 Use firepower of air platforms to maximum extent possible to maintain momentum of the attack.
 Task organize follow and support forces with sufficient artillery to deal with bypassed threat forces.
 Activate/continually update fire support coordination measures throughout the division area of
operations.
 Synchronize fires with employment of dynamic obstacles in chokepoints to continue destruction of
retreating threat forces.
 Continue neutralization of threat fire support and air defense systems to facilitate ground and air
maneuver.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-7

Chapter 3

DEFENSIVE TASKS
3-45. The purpose of defensive tasks are to defeat an enemy attack. The greater intent of the defense is to force
the attack to culminate, to gain the initiative for friendly forces, and to create the opportunity to shift to the
offensive. The defender seeks to mass overwhelming combat power at the times and places of his choosing. It
shifts that mass, as required, to support the main effort in a defensive scheme that will deny the enemy the
ability to achieve its objectives.
3-46. The two primary forms of defensive tasks are mobile and area defense. An effective defense consists of
both active and passive components combined to deprive the threat of the initiative.

MOBILE DEFENSE
3-47. . Mobile defenses orient on the destruction of the attacking force by permitting the threat to advance into
a position that exposes it to counterattack by a mobile reserve. A mobile defense employs a combination of fire
and maneuver, offense, defense, and delay to defeat its attack. Units strive to execute a dynamic defense,
achieving a synergy from a combination of firepower and maneuver that dominate the threat, rob it of the
initiative, and negate its ability to continue offensive tasks.
3-48. Maximizing the advantages conferred on the defender in owning and knowing the terrain, the unit sets the
tempo of operations throughout the depth of its area of operations. Defending forces blind or deceive threat
critical reconnaissance elements to prevent disclosure of friendly dispositions, capabilities, and intent. The
defending unit tracks the threat throughout its attack, identifying critical threat nodes such as mission command,
radars, logistics trains, and fire support systems for attack. The defender commits the minimum force possible
to positional defense.
3-49. A mobile striking force is established that uses maximum combat power to strike the attacking threat at
the most vulnerable time and place—when the attacker is attempting to overcome that part of the defending
force acting as the tactical anvil. At the decisive moment, the defending unit unleashes its firepower and
maneuver forces to strike the attacker simultaneously throughout the depth of its forces to defeat it in detail.

AREA DEFENSE
3-50. Area defense orients on retention of terrain by absorbing the threat in an interlocking series of positions
and destroying it largely by fires and to deny the threat access to designated terrain or facilities for a specified
time. In an area defense, the bulk of defending forces deploy to retain ground, using a combination of defensive
positions and small, mobile reserves. Commanders organize the defense around a relatively static framework
provided by defensive positions, seeking to destroy threat forces close in with interlocking direct fires and at
depth with massed precision fires. Precision in selection and design of engagement areas, and control and
distribution of both direct and indirect fires, are keys to a successful defense. Even while conducting an area
defense, units will take the fight to the threat and inflict levels of damage that will force it to quit the field.
3-51. A field artillery weapons locating radar to MLRS/HIMARS sensor to shooter link through battalion to the
launcher is most effective during defensive tasks. This link allows rapid detection and destruction of threat
artillery and mortars as they fire in support of their maneuver advance.

OPERATIONS IN DEPTH
3-52. Although the shaping of the area of operations is important to the success of all combat operations, in the
defense it is an absolute requirement if the unit is to survive and win. Operations in depth prevent the threat
from gaining momentum or reinforcing success it may experience in its attack. The unit seeks to avoid the
attrition nature of sequential operations through integrated, simultaneous application of combat power
throughout the depth of the area of operations, striving to defeat an threat rapidly with minimum friendly
casualties. The unit employs specific resources to identify and track HVTs and critical combat forces and
functions. When those targets, forces, and functions are located, the unit masses fires and/or forces at the right
place and time to destroy them and achieve the commander’s intent.
3-53. The design and successful application of firepower in depth allows the unit to seize the initiative, retain
and exercise the spirit of the offense, and set the conditions for decisive operations. Sudden strikes by both fire

3-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

and maneuver from a variety of directions, synchronized with other disruptive effects on the threat such as
jamming, smoke, and deception, will unhinge or obviate an attack even before it has begun. Successful
synchronization of the battle plan and achievement of optimum effects demand the detailed integration and
precise timing of both the scheme of maneuver and concept of fires.

SUPPRESSION OF ENEMY AIR DEFENSES

3-54. Suppression of enemy air defenses (SEAD) operations target all known or suspected threat air defense
sites that cannot be avoided and are capable of engaging friendly air assets. The fire cell/fires element integrates
SEAD fires into an overall fire plan that focuses fires according to the commander’s guidance. Synchronization
of the SEAD fires with the maneuver plan is accomplished using procedural control (an H-hour sequence),
positive control (initiating fires on each target as the lead aircraft passes a predetermined reference point or
trigger), or a combination of the two. Regardless of the technique, the fire support coordinator conducts detailed
planning and close coordination with the appropriate combined arms staff members, the MLRS/HIMARS
battalion S-3/ fire direction officer, and the higher HQ fires cell.
3-55. To support an aviation brigade attack package with SEAD, the aviation brigade fire support coordinator
(at division) or the corps fires cell—
 Determines SEAD requirements to support the aviation brigade.
 Provides target list to tactical and main tactical operations center fires cells/fires elements and the
fires brigade fire control element.
 Coordinates cross cueing of the unmanned aircraft system with electronic intelligence and signals
intelligence assets focusing on air routes or corridors.
 Coordinates delivery of fires for preplanned SEAD based on unmanned aircraft over flights and
electronic intelligence/signals intelligence detection.
 Uses MLRS/HIMARS battalion to attack targets located by Longbow Apache that they cannot kill
themselves. Initiates sensor to shooter link to minimize response time.
 Coordinates critical friendly zones on SEAD firers.
 Employs fire support coordination measures to support aviation brigade engagement areas when
required.

COUNTERFIRE
3-56. The planning and execution of the digitized counterfire fight is aggressive and proactive. The
combination of the AFATDS, MLRS/HIMARS, cannon weapon systems, and a vast array of sensors including
the weapon locating radars provide an unprecedented level of accurate, near real time targeting information for
proactive and reactive counterfire. The enhanced targeting, lethality of munitions, improved digital mission
command, and ability of platforms to service targets result in successful counterfire.
3-57. The AFATDS provides the automated mission command for fire support and field artillery requirements.
The AFATDS is designed to achieve a synergistic effect of all available fire support weapons by broadening,
modernizing, and improving the supportability and survivability of fire support mission command for the
operating forces.

Proactive Counterfire
3-58. The fires brigade may control proactive counterfire. Considerations for conducting proactive counterfire
are:
 Effort typically managed by the fires brigade S-2.
 All available artillery units participate.
 Coordinated fire line positioned close to facilitate quick engagements.
 Digital interface between S-2 and MLRS/HIMARS battalion S-2/fires brigade LNO are critical.
 No fire area management is critical.
 Maximize use of AFATDS to clear fires.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-9

Chapter 3

Reactive Counterfire
3-59. The fires brigade may control the counterfire cell. Considerations for conducting reactive counterfire are:
 Coordinated fire line close to facilitate quick engagements.
 Common sensor boundary.
 Radar control.
 Zone manager.
 Brigade critical friendly zones and call for fire zones.
 Send mission fired reports and artillery target intelligence to analysis and control element forward.
 No fire area management is critical.
 Reinforcing fires brigade LNO team provides interface between AFATDS operations, if required.
 Clear missions short of coordinated fire line, beyond the fire support coordination line, and across
brigade boundaries with the tactical CPs fire cell/fires element.

NONSTANDARD EMPLOYMENT TECHNIQUES

3-60. Force commanders can employ MLRS/HIMARS units in numerous ways for special missions. These
missions include conducting proactive counterfire strikes against threat indirect fire systems, attacking targets as
part of a spoiling attack (raid), and moving forward with maneuver security forces to conduct SEAD missions
or attack other HPTs. There are some unique considerations for planning and executing such operations. The
considerations listed below are not all inclusive, but are intended as a planning aid.

MISSION
3-61. The supported commander's intent for the mission must be clearly understood. Questions for the
MLRS/HIMARS unit commander to consider during the planning process are as follows:
 What is the commander's concept for fires?
 How much time is available to complete the mission and conduct the planned withdrawal?
 What are the proposed firing and mission command locations? What are the routes to those
locations? What are the withdrawal routes?
 What is the acceptable level of risk in completing the mission (has the commander established
criteria for aborting the mission)?
 What are the target descriptions? How many and what type/size are the targets?
 What are the acquisition sources?
 Are ground maneuver units available to assist in protecting both firing units and associated radars?
 Was the commander's intent established in the commander's criteria?
 Is the controlled supply rate sufficient to accomplish current and follow-on missions?
 Will a secondary launcher be required?
 Is there a follow-on mission?

PROTECTION
3-62. MLRS/HIMARS units are HPTs for the enemy. On the basis of the nature of the mission, the attack
location, the enemy situation, and the acceptable level of risk, protection requirements will vary. Questions to
determine the required level of protection are as follows:
 What is the threat?
 If a maneuver protection force is required, what is the size and structure of the force? How can that
force best protect the MLRS/HIMARS unit?
 What is the risk of receiving counterfire? Is there a need to have acquisition assets and additional
firing units for counterfire?
3-63. Although the need for external protection capabilities is normally great, MLRS/HIMARS units must
always plan for self-defense. Planning and requesting fire support, situational awareness, appropriate

3-10 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

positioning, and movement all contribute to self-defense. When necessary, digging-in should also be
considered. The key to acquiring external protection capabilities is to work with the force commander to reach
an agreement acceptable to all. Depending on the situation, a company team size force, including air and missile
defense (AMD), should be requested for the MLRS/HIMARS battalion. Procedures for using such a package
should be included in all battalion and battery TSOPs. A combination of roving patrols throughout the position
area and reaction forces may be appropriate.
3-64. Although a launcher firing missiles will be a higher priority enemy target, it may be less vulnerable to
counterfire than it is when firing rockets. Factors that contribute to reduced vulnerability when a launcher is
shooting missiles include both shorter times from initial launch to movement away from the firing point and
randomly selected off axis firing.

COORDINATION
3-65. Coordination is essential during any operation, particularly for raids and other special missions.
Operations orders, fire support plans/annexes, and field artillery support plans should all include detailed tasks
and instructions for MLRS/HIMARS units. These instructions should include types and amounts of ammunition
by unit, platoon, and/or launcher posturing, and fire control system configurations for specific launchers.
Planners should consider the need for launcher redundancy in the allocation of targets. If resources allow, assign
both primary and backup launchers to ensure timely target attack. The following questions can be asked to
determine coordination requirements:
 Is there a need for, and have we established, liaison with the supported and supporting forces (force
maneuver CP, security force HQ)?
 Have the routes been cleared with the appropriate headquarters?
 Are there adequate communications assets and nets? What frequencies?
 If the attack force must pass through the FLOT of another unit, then a passage of lines will be
necessary. Has coordination for passage of lines (if required) been conducted during the planning
phase?

LOGISTICS
3-66. The size of the force during special missions should be minimized. This allows the unit to accomplish
objectives and continue with the follow on mission quickly. Units should include only minimum essential
logistics support as well. Consider the following logistics questions:
 How much and what type of ammunition is required?
 Should a maintenance support teams accompany the force? If so, what should go?
 How much fuel is required? Will refueling be required to complete the mission?
 Will launchers require reloading? If so, how often and where will reloading be conducted?

MISSION COMMAND
3-67. The composition and distribution of the supported force, the MLRS/HIMARS unit inherent
responsibilities to the force field artillery headquarters, and the mission and organization of the
MLRS/HIMARS unit will determine the mission command requirements. Consider the following questions to
determine mission command requirements:
 How many mission command nodes does the mission require? Will the unit operations center be
sufficient? Will it require augmentation?
 If a maneuver protection force is required, how is it controlled? Will it provide a liaison to the
MLRS/HIMARS unit mission command element?
 Will the MLRS/HIMARS unit be linked directly to the corps or division FC using a “quick-fire”
net/channel?
 Will a primary and alternate launcher be assigned?
 What acquisition assets are available for counterfire?
 Are electronic warfare assets going to be committed to the effort to mask the electronic signature?

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-11

Chapter 3

HOT PANEL
3-68. Hot Panel capability allows for the M142 to maintain launcher location and GPS signal while in flight,
which enabling the launcher to have true "roll off and fire" capability. It is a capability primarily incorporated in
the launcher software, which allows the launcher fire control system to remain powered on and fully initialized
during air transport, or to be powered on and initialize while in flight. This capability is accomplished by
modifications to the software that allow the launcher to maintain heading and crypto keys using GPS signals
that are provided by the use of the joint precision airdrop system, which allows global positioning system
rebroadcast system inside the cargo bay of the transport aircraft. The Hot Panel capability allows the launcher to
be fully mission capable ("ready to shoot") as soon as it is off loaded from the aircraft. Hot Panel capability
allows for rapid engagement of critical targets while significantly increasing the survivability of the launcher,
crew, and aircraft due to reduced exposure to hostile fires. Additionally, precision strike missions employing
GMLRS rockets or ATACMS missiles can be accomplished utilizing the same aircra

RAID
3-69. A raid is an operation to temporarily seize an area in order to secure information, confuse an adversary,
capture personnel or equipment, or to destroy a capability culminating with a planned withdrawal (FM 3-90-1).
A MLRS/HIMARS raid, is the movement of a unit (or portion of that unit) to a designated firing position to
attack high-payoff targets that are currently beyond the maximum range of the MLRS/HIMARS weapon
system. After firing the unit will be immediately withdrawn to a safe location.
3-70. As with any military operation, all leaders must consider the mission variables of METT-TC when
planning and executing MLRS/HIMARS raids. Additionally, the controlling headquarters should make a risk
assessment to determine the value of the raid, assuming it is a success, versus the risk to such an important fire
support asset.

Unit Selection
3-71. The battalion CP typically receives the raid mission from higher headquarters. If the firing element is not
specified, the battalion commander determines which unit/firing element will conduct the raid mission on the
basis of—
 Weapon system availability (desired effects on target).
 Ammunition availability (number and type of rounds).
 Location of firing element (proximity to firing points).
 Tactical situation.
 Other mission requirements.
 Fire plan(s).
 Are C-130 or C-17 aircraft available for insertion of the launchers? If so M142 launchers should be
selected.

Behind FLOT Briefing

3-72. Some raids are conducted behind the FLOT and, therefore, require only minimal external assistance. For
example, a maneuver security force may not be necessary. For missions such as these, the battalion commander
or S-3 includes the following when briefing the raid mission firing element:
 Situation. Friendly, threat, attachments, and detachments.
 Mission. Who, what, when, where, and why to include the size of the element to conduct raid,
method of control, and target and firing point (FP) grids.
 Execution.
 Route to area of operations.
 Start point/check point/release point locations.
 Firing point(s).
 Rally point after mission.
 Target grids.

3-12 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

 Firing window or time on target.

 Number/type rounds per target.
 Number of launchers authorized.
 Call signs and frequencies.
 FSCMs.
 Abort authority.
 Abort code word.
 Emergency destruction criteria.
 Fire support assets available.

Cross FLOT Briefing

3-73. If the raid will be conducted cross FLOT, the commander of the maneuver security force should be
present during the mission briefing. In addition to those items listed above, a cross FLOT briefing should
include:
 Link up point with maneuver element guides.
 Protection warfighting function (air and missile defense, electronic warfare, fire support assets, and
security).
 Passage lane/passage point.
 Procedures/signals for passage of lines.
 Maneuver call signs and frequencies.
 Force commander name and rank.
 Service support.
 Maintenance support/contact team requirements.
 Survey support available.
 Reload requirements.
 Amount of ammunition to be brought forward.
 Refuel support.
 Command and signal:
 Retransmission location and frequency.
 Mission command (FDC vehicle, OE-254).

Execution
3-74. Consider the following for execution of the raid:
 Firing units will carry forward only the number of vehicles necessary to accomplish the mission as
designated by battalion. (Depending on the importance of the target, a primary and alternate launcher
will be assigned and laid on the target in case of technical/mechanical difficulties.) Launchers will
move forward with the mission in the buffer and a hard copy of the mission in case manual fire
mission processing is required.
 Firing unit(s) will arrive at the link up point.
 The officer in charge/non commissioned officer in charge of the raid party will brief the maneuver
unit commander or representative at link up point or via voice or digital communications.
 Once the briefing is conducted, the leader of the raid unit or a maneuver escort will bring the firing
elements to the link up points.
 Security force will move forward and clear the route to the FP.
 If possible, report link up, movement/checkpoints, and position to the battalion CP or the BOC. If
necessary, a vehicle will be brought forward with the raid element to act as a relay between the raid
element and the controlling raid headquarters. Communications will be maintained between the
supported unit headquarters, the battalion CP, and the raid officer in charge. The raid officer in
charge must be prepared to accept target updates prior to the designated time.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-13

Chapter 3

 Once the maneuver security force has cleared the route and area, the firing element will be called
forward to the firing points.
 The mission(s) are fired.
 Firing elements will then withdraw to a previously designated rally point.
 If a follow on mission is required, the launcher(s) will proceed to a predetermined ammunition reload
site(s), reload, and fire the follow on mission(s). When rounds are complete, the firing element will
withdraw to the rally point.
 Battalion will provide abort criteria.
3-75. The checklists in Appendix F may help in preparing for a raid.

TARGET ACQUISITION AND SENSOR SYSTEM INTERFACE

3-76. The MLRS/HIMARS mission command system interfaces directly with most digital communications
systems; therefore, it is easily linked to any TA or sensor systems equipped with digital communications. This
linkage allows faster response for attack of detected targets. Likely sources of target information are the field
artillery weapons locating radars, OH-58D helicopters, and unmanned aircraft systems.

WEAPONS LOCATING RADARS

3-77. The MLRS/HIMARS AFATDS at all levels can interface directly with the field artillery weapons
locating radars. This link gives the force field artillery commander an extremely fast, responsive, and effective
counterfire capability. The MLRS/HIMARS to radar options can orient on the force commander's battlefield
priorities while still providing counterfire to the force as a whole. Use of zone management and common sensor
boundaries, based on specific commander's guidance, is essential for providing targeting zone and report criteria
for the radar section and engagement and effects criteria for the MLRS/HIMARS unit.

SENSOR TO SHOOTER OPERATIONS

3-78. The introduction of the complete suite of rocket and missile munitions provides the MLRS/HIMARS
battalion with the capability to deliver lethal fires out to 300 km. When combined with the suite of Joint
Surveillance Target Attack Radar System and unmanned aircraft system sensors, the aviation brigade, and the
radar, the battalion offers a dynamic tool in its conduct of near real-time sensor to shooter operations.
3-79. The fleeting nature of some enemy systems requires sensor to shooter links. Individual sensors and
shooters should be tasked with and provided with the necessary priorities and targeting information they need to
carry out multiple specific missions against multiple specific targets to achieve all of the commander’s desired
effects. For each mission, information linkages must be established between sensors and shooters to enable the
timely execution of missions, especially time-critical missions. Because, ideally, the sensors can be time shared
among many shooters, effective and efficient implementation of these linkages and the ability to pass
information through them will inevitably require the establishment of execution controllers.
3-80. Planners for MLRS/HIMARS battalion sensor to shooter operations should consider total system
capabilities and errors associated with finding, processing, and attacking the target with MLRS munitions. Such
considerations include:
 Target type and vulnerability.
 Target location error.
 Target posture.
 Target dwell time.
 Attack system responsiveness.
 Munitions effects.
 Circular error probable.

3-14 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

Sensor to Shooter Configurations

3-81. Various sensor to shooter configurations are available to support the commander's needs, depending on
the missions to be accomplished and level of control required. In all cases, the commander must decide whether
less control or fewer intervening processors is worth the added responsiveness
3-82. Sensor to shooter engagements should be integrated with other combat activities. The decision to conduct
dedicated sensor to shooter operations with MLRS/HIMARS battalion assets should be weighed against
requirements for support of the force as a whole. Once the decision is made to incorporate MLRS/HIMARS
assets into sensor to shooter operations, planners have 4 options ranging from centralized to decentralized
control and execution.

Option 1
3-83. The sensor provides input directly to a launcher. The fire control system can only communicate with the
AFATDS. The launcher receives a fire order from an agency/device designed to input spot reports and/or
requests for fire. This is the most preferred option in defensive tasks.

Option 2
3-84. The sensor bypasses normal reporting channels and communicates with a mission command organization,
such as the MLRS battery operations center, to which it would not send data under normal circumstances.

Option 3
3-85. The sensor enters the fire support system at an echelon higher than in option 2, such as the fires brigade
main CP or tactical CP.

Option 4
3-86. The information enters the fire support system at the echelon tasked to provide the quick-fire channel,
such as the battalion CP.

Radar Sensor to Shooter Operations

3-87. Direct radar to MLRS/HIMARS interface places the following limitations on radar and MLRS/HIMARS
usage:
 The radar’s minimal ability to discriminate between mortars and artillery prevents full use of the
commander's engagement criteria.
 The direct link of radar and MLRS/HIMARS prevents complete target analysis for artillery
intelligence evaluation and counterfire assignment.
 Radar can generate more targets than a single MLRS/HIMARS battery can handle. Even a moderate,
but constant, stream of radar targets will place an enormous strain on the MLRS/HIMARS resupply
system.
 Radar can generate more target information than the MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP can process. To
be responsive and engage legitimate targets, the CP must be augmented with targeting personnel.
3-88. The best situations for optimum use of direct radar interface are:
 Reduction of time from acquisition to firing is paramount (targets decay time).
 Enough MLRS/HIMARS assets are available to handle the high volume of counterfire targets
generated and/or enough ammunition is available to support the fire mission load.
 Enough additional MLRS/HIMARS and other field artillery assets are available to engage all targets
generated by other sources.
 Enemy electronic warfare capability is low.
 The force field artillery commander determines that only MLRS/HIMARS is necessary in the
engagement of counterfire targets.
 Counterfire is determined to be the most critical requirement.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-15

Chapter 3

OH-58D Helicopter Kiowa Warrior

3-89. The OH-58D Kiowa Warrior fills the armed reconnaissance role for attack helicopter and air cavalry
units. The OH-58D performs reconnaissance, security, mission command, target acquisition/designation, and
defensive air combat missions. The Kiowa Warrior adds armed reconnaissance, light attack, and multipurpose
light helicopter capabilities to the basic OH-58D.
3-90. A highly accurate navigation system permits precise target location that can be handed off to other
engagement systems via the airborne target handover system. The laser designator can provide autonomous
designation for the laser Hellfire or remote designation for other laser guided precision munitions.
3-91. The AFATDS at platoon, battery, or battalion can communicate digitally with observers in an OH-58D
through the helicopter's airborne target handover system. This link gives near real time target acquisition.

Unmanned Aircraft Systems

3-92. The Army and Marine Corps currently use a variety of unmanned aircraft systems. There is no organic
data communications interface between these unmanned aircraft (and their mission command system) and the
MLRS/HIMARS unit AFATDS. However, data communications can be established if the unmanned aircraft
system company is supplemented with the Marine digital message system (AN/PSC-2A) or augmented with one
of the two liaison sections from the corps MLRS/HIMARS battalion headquarters with their organic AFATDS.

Common Ground Station

3-93. MLRS/HIMARS battalions may be provided with a common ground station to reduce sensor to shooter
times during decentralized execution of delivery. The common ground station receives target information
directly from the Joint surveillance and Target Attack Radar System airborne platform, unmanned aircraft, and
broadcast nets. These systems provide near real time information on target location, description, speed, and
direction of travel.
3-94. The common ground station is a highly mobile self supporting system. Its primary mission is targeting,
battle management, surveillance, and data processing. The common ground station provides the link with
MLRS/HIMARS, which gives the division, corps or other supported commanders immediate responsive attack
capability against targets, located by the Joint Surveillance and Target Attack Radar system, unmanned aircraft,
and intelligence sensors.
3-95. Targeting information received at the common ground station is unfiltered raw data. Targeting or
intelligence analysts have not processed it for deception and target importance. Extensive commander's
guidance is necessary for the battalion to engage high priority targets effectively using data from the common
ground station.

DEFENSE SUPPORT OF CIVIL AUTHORITIES TASKS

3-96. MLRS/HIMARS units may provide support for the defense support of civil authorities tasks in the U.S.
For more information see ADRP 3-0 and ADP 3-28.

STABILITY TASKS
3-97. The stability tasks are complex and require disciplined, versatile Army forces to respond to different
situations, including transitioning rapidly from stability tasks to wartime operations and from wartime tasks
back to stability tasks.
3-98. The primary function for MLRS/HIMARS in stability tasks is in the resolution of conflict phase.
MLRS/HIMARS units may also participate in noncombat roles such as a show of force, resolve, or in a direct
action role by attacking HPTs.
3-99. The MLRS/HIMARS system can engage HPTs with precision strikes at extended range when supporting
peacekeeping or peace enforcement tasks. MLRS/HIMARS can effectively neutralize mortar and artillery firing
positions in accordance with rules of engagement established by the joint task force or other supported higher
headquarters.

3-16 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

3-100. When working with the field artillery weapons locating radar systems, MLRS/HIMARS can
effectively neutralize mortar and artillery firing positions in accordance with rules of engagement established by
the joint task force.
3-101. The Army conducts attacks and raids to create situations that permit seizing and maintaining political
and military initiative. Normally, the United States executes attacks and raids to achieve specific objectives
other than gaining or holding terrain. Attacks by conventional ground, air, or special operations forces, acting
independently or in concert, are used to damage or destroy HPTs or to demonstrate U.S. capability and resolve
to achieve a favorable result. The following are techniques, specific to stability tasks.

MISSION COMMAND
3-102. Rules of engagement become more restrictive during stability tasks, requiring more centralized control
of fires. The rules of engagement must clearly specify when the use of fire support is appropriate and justified.
Clearance of fires is significantly more complicated when operating in urban areas in support of stability tasks
(see ADRP 3-07).

GUIDED/UNGUIDED MUNITIONS
3-103. The MLRS/HIMARS can deliver fires that employ guided munitions such as guided MLRS or
ATACMS in support of stability tasks. Unguided munitions are suitable for area fires, but may not be the best
choice to attack a point target. Collateral damage estimates of MLRS/HIMARS munitions must be strongly
considered when supporting stability tasks.

Minimize Movement
3-104. During stability tasks, the greatest threat to the MLRS/HIMARS unit will usually be from small groups
and terrorists conducting raids and ambushes. Occupation of a defensible firing position affords the
MLRS/HIMARS unit greater survivability than does standard MLRS/HIMARS tactics of hide, shoot, and
move.

Collocate with Other Units

3-105. Occupying positions in conjunction with other task force units provides the MLRS/HIMARS unit with
an increased degree of protection against threat small unit attacks.

Harden Positions
3-106. Using engineer assets to harden the MLRS/HIMARS position will improve survivability. Weather and
terrain will dictate whether the unit builds berms or digs in.

Direct Link with Weapons Locating Radars

3-107. When supporting the task force with countermortar/counterbattery fires, a direct link may be
established between the MLRS/HIMARS unit and the field artillery weapons locating radars to improve
reaction time. A positive method of clearing fires must be established and enforced.

Control
3-108. Control is another major concern during support and sustainment operations; friendly forces must
engage only hostile forces. Tight control, based on rules of engagement, is the norm. The rules of engagement
must clearly specify when the use of fire support is appropriate and justified. Clearance of fires is infinitely
more complicated when operating in urban areas (see ADRP 3-07).

Precision Guided Munitions

3-109. The MLRS/HIMARS can deliver fires that employ guided munitions such as GMLRS or ATACMS in
support of stability tasks. Unguided munitions are suitable for area fires but may not be the best choice to attack
a point target. For example, the MLRS/HIMARS unguided M26 rocket may not be the best weapon to attack

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-17

Chapter 3

mortars. In certain circumstances, the collateral damage of MLRS/HIMARS may be too great. Dud
submunitions present an additional concern about using MLRS/HIMARS in this situation. Dud DPICM and
anti-personnel, anti-material bomblets are a threat to personnel, whether Soldiers or civilians. The low collateral
damage from the M31 Guided MLRS/HIMARS Unitary makes it an excellent munition for urban environments.

FIREBASE/FORWARD OPERATING BASE OPERATIONS

3-110. MLRS/HIMARS platoons may choose to occupy some type of operations base or firebase, just as most
other units do in support and sustainment operations. Depending on the situation, platoons may share operating
firebases with other units or occupy one by themselves. Another major consideration for unit leaders in deciding
the type and location of operating base to establish is the positioning of firing points. Firing points may be
inside or outside the firebase. When selecting firing points inside the firebase, the commander must consider
launcher danger areas when firing. Consider the following when determining whether to occupy an operating
base with another unit:

Location
3-111. As in every situation, the potential locations of targets should determine where the platoons should
emplace. Therefore, the required location of the launchers may impact the decision to collocate or not (for
example, are other units in the immediate vicinity of where the platoons are required to position?).

Coordination
3-112. Alarms, warnings, and protective positions must be coordinated with all parties, especially when
launchers are intended to fire from inside tactical infrastructure and engineer support to adequately protect
soldiers and equipment is not available. Firing points outside the tactical infrastructure make coordination of
these activities with another unit easier. Tactical infrastructures include fire bases, operating bases or any other
semi-permanent firing locations.

Defense
3-113. A base established by a larger unit provides a platoon greater defensive strength and logistical support.
However, an operating base with a large number of units faces a tremendous challenge in maintaining a viable
perimeter as individual units leave and reenter the perimeter for patrolling, resupply, or other duties. However,
if a platoon occupies an operating firebase by itself, it has little self-defensive capability.
3-114. If the unit decides to collocate with others, it may consider occupying bases established by a maneuver
battalion, a brigade headquarters and headquarters company, or the brigade support area, predominantly
consisting of a forward support battalion. Table 3-3 summarizes the advantages and disadvantages of each
position option.

3-18 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

Table 3-3. Comparison of MLRS/HIMARS operating base techniques

Type of Base Advantages Disadvantages
Maneuver Unit Good perimeter defense. Difficulty adjusting the perimeter
Consolidated life and equipment support when units leave.
possible. Firing points outside a protected
Deepest fires. area.
Brigade Headquarters Better perimeter defense than an Firing points outside a protected
MLRS/HIMARS platoon alone. area.
Consolidated life and equipment support
possible.
Ease of mission command.
Brigade Support Area Better perimeter defense than Firing points outside a protected
MLRS/HIMARS platoon alone. area.
Ease of logistical support. Longer distance to likely targets,
depending on the brigade support
area location.
MLRS/HIMARS Firing points in a protected area. Limited perimeter defense.
Platoon/Battery No perimeter adjustments required. Longer travel time/distance to
Less coordination with adjacent units in additional logistical support.
the same operating base.
Legend: MLRS/HIMARS—multiple launch rocket system/high mobility artillery rocket system

Firing Points Inside

3-115. When determining whether to locate firing points inside or outside the operating firebase, consider—
 Firing from inside the perimeter provides the best security for the launchers, especially when
engineer support is available. Figure 3-1 portrays a platoon-operating base with internal firing points.
 Burms protect vehicles, equipment, ammunition, and launchers not on firing points.
 Launchers can be in single or consolidated hide positions.
3-116. Fighting positions inside a firebase/forward operating base protect the perimeter. Burms inside the
perimeter act as backstops for the back blast. The three burms forming a "Y" in Figure 3-1 facilitate 6,400-mil
firing. The "Y" has three firing points, one in each corner. The launcher occupies the firing point that best
allows target attack.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-19

Chapter 3

Figure 3-1. Example of a MLRS/HIMARS platoon operating base with internal firing points
3-117. Just as in other MLRS/HIMARS unit areas of operation, the launcher remains in a hide position
(burmed for protection) until it receives a fire mission. It then occupies a firing point (burmed to deflect back
blast) long enough to fire. After the fire mission, the launcher moves to a hide position.

Note. The “stay hot, shoot fast” technique may also be applicable in support and sustainment
operations when platoons are using operating bases (such as the one described above) and extremely
responsive fires are required for fleeting targets.

3-118. Firing from inside a tactical infrastructure requires engineer support to ensure that the flame and smoke
and the flying dirt, rocks, and blast panels do not injure people or damage equipment. Soldiers must occupy
fighting or protective positions during fire missions. A warning device or signal to alert soldiers of a fire
mission is a must. Soldiers within 50 meters of the launcher should mask, even if in a protected position, for
protection from smoke.

Firing Points Outside

3-119. This option for firing points eliminates the impact of rocket back blasts inside the operating base.
However, security of the launcher becomes a major issue. A launcher cannot defend itself. It has no defensive
armament, and the three-man crew is fully employed operating the system. Additional personnel (such as
military police, infantrymen in personnel carriers, or an ad hoc group of MLRS/HIMARS personnel riding in
other vehicles) must accompany a launcher if it is to have any protection. Just as in an operating base, these
security elements must protect themselves from rocket back blasts. Positioning to the side of the launcher
outside the danger area is the easiest solution.
3-120. The BOC, POC, and fire mission requesters must remember that the response time for a fire mission
also increases if the firing point is outside the operating base. The travel time to the firing point makes
successfully engaging a fleeting target less likely. The controlling BOC or POC must determine the travel times
and ensure that its higher HQ understands this additional factor.
3-121. Care is also necessary to ensure that such a fire mission does not become an ambush opportunity for the
threat. If a pattern develops for provocations resulting in MLRS/HIMARS firings, and the firing points are

3-20 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

marked so an enemy can predict a route, an enemy could easily set a trap. It does not take a great deal of enemy
firepower to destroy a HMMWV and a launcher.

SECTION II – INTEGRATION AND COORDINATION OF FIRES

ROLE OF HIGHER HEADQUARTERS

3-122. The division, corps, joint task force, or other supported commanders' areas of operation normally
include all operational areas occupied by enemy forces that may jeopardize completion of the current mission.
The division or other supported commander designates decisive, shaping, and sustaining operations within the
area of operations if necessary. Designating these areas provides a tool for analyzing spatial relationships
between enemy and friendly combat forces. The command release authority and control of precision-guided and
unguided munitions will vary depending on the theater of operations. MLRS/HIMARS can engage enemy
forces to the full depth of the supported headquarters’ areas of operations.

ROCKET AND MISSILE FIRES

3-123. An attached or reinforcing MLRS/HIMARS battalion may, however, fire missiles that have been
apportioned to the division or other supported headquarters with execution authority to support its mission. The
planning tasks and functions necessary for the employment of ATACMS will be managed under centralized
control, normally at echelons above division. Corps and other echelons above division units can integrate the
necessary target information and intelligence and coordinate/deconflict targets at operational depths.
3-124. The supported commander's intent for the mission must be clearly understood. Questions for the
MLRS/HIMARS unit commander to consider during the planning process are:
 What is the commander's scheme of fires?
 How much time is available to complete the mission and conduct the planned withdrawal?
 What are the proposed firing and mission command locations? What are the routes to those
locations? What are the withdrawal routes?
 What is the acceptable level of risk in completing the mission (has the commander established
criteria for aborting the mission)?
 What are the target descriptions? How many and what type/size are the targets?
 What are the acquisition sources?
 Are ground maneuver units available to assist in protecting both firing units and associated radars?
 Was the commander's intent established in the commander's criteria?
 Is the controlled supply rate sufficient to accomplish current and follow-on missions?
 Will a secondary launcher be required?
 Is there a follow-on mission?

PLANNING AND COORDINATION CONSIDERATIONS

3-125. During planning and coordination, there should be emphasis on establishing procedural controls and
the need to deconflict (see Chapter 1) these fires with the joint force, particularly the air component. Missile and
guided MLRS fires will often be located beyond the fire support coordination line, because of the range of the
weapon and expected target types. Coordination of attacks beyond the fire support coordination line, if
established, is especially critical to commanders of air, land, and special operations forces. Forces attacking
targets beyond a fire support coordination line must inform all affected commanders in sufficient time to allow
necessary reaction to avoid fratricide, both in the air and on the ground. Finally, this coordination assists in
avoiding conflicting or redundant attack operations. In exceptional circumstances, the inability to conduct this
coordination will not preclude the attack of targets beyond the fire support coordination line.
3-126. Maneuver and force field artillery commanders must consider the following items when planning for
MLRS/HIMARS employment:

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-21

Chapter 3

Launchers
3-127. M270A1/M142 launchers normally receive their position data from the onboard global positioning
system. With the global positioning system, launchers will have accurate data for all munitions within the
MLRS family of munitions. The HIMARS M142 has better air/land early entry capabilities. The M270A1 has
better terrain maneuverability due to its track configuration. The HIMARS M142 has a 6-rocket/ATACM
capability versus the 12 rocket/ATACM launch ability of the M270A1.

Fire Missions
3-128. MLRS/HIMARS fires typically require longer reaction times than cannon systems. Thus, the
MLRS/HIMARS is better suited for planned missions.

Reaction Time
3-129. Commanders must consider the type of munitions uploaded, amount of munitions on hand, launcher
location, task organization, clearance of fires and the mission variables of METT-TC.

Launcher Response Time

3-130. MLRS/HIMARS response time on any given mission may vary from 2 to 20 minutes based on
launcher readiness status and positioning.

Munition Load
3-131. The mission dictates ammunition load and resupply requirements.

Predicting Weapons Effects

3-132. One of the most important steps in performing a target analysis is determining the number and type of
rounds required to produce the desired effects on a target.

Munition Range
3-133. The ammunition minimum and maximum ranges must be considered in positioning firing elements and
assigning missions.
3-134. Coordination is essential during any operation, particularly for raids and other special missions.
OPORDs, fire support plans/annexes, and field artillery support plans should all include detailed tasks and
instructions for MLRS/HIMARS units. These instructions should include types and amounts of ammunition by
unit, platoon, and/or launcher posturing, and fire control system configurations for specific launchers. Planners
should consider the need for launcher redundancy in the allocation of targets. If resources allow, assign both
primary and backup launchers to ensure timely target attack. The following questions can be asked to determine
coordination requirements:
 Is there a need for, and have we established, liaison with the supported and supporting forces (force
maneuver CP, security force headquarters)?
 Have the routes been cleared with the appropriate headquarters?
 Are there adequate communications assets and nets? What frequencies?
 If the attack force must pass through the forward line of own troops of another unit, then a passage of
lines will be necessary. Has coordination for passage of lines (if required) been conducted?

REHEARSALS
3-135. Rehearsals are an integral part of the planning process for all operations. A rehearsal should practice
and test the plan. If possible, the rehearsal should be conducted with the force commander's rehearsal. A
combined rehearsal will improve responsiveness of fires and the synchronization of all the force commander's
resources for the battle.

3-22 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Employment

3-136. The rehearsal should include significant events (such as the schemes of maneuver and fires, target
acquisition employment, and obstacle emplacement). The battalion S-3, S-2, fire direction officer, radar
personnel (if applicable), and unit fire direction centers are all essential participants. When possible, the firing
batteries and platoons, down to individual launcher level, should participate as well.
3-137. The existing maneuver operations plan, the fire support plan, the fire support execution matrix, the fires
battalion OPORD, and the field artillery support plan and matrix should be rehearsed. Considerations for
rehearsals include but are not limited to the following:
 Early identification of key participants, roles and responsibilities.
 Coordination with all external supported and supporting joint, Army, multinational and required
civilian agencies.
 Fires task and purpose to the lowest level.
 Friendly and enemy actions.
 Fire support coordination and airspace control measures.
 Resupply operations.
 Contingency operations.
3-138. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion operations section pays particular attention to displacements. The
battalion fire direction center issues fire orders. Attached radars work situational cues with the cueing agents.
Each firing unit conducts tactical and technical fire direction rehearsals through launcher level. If alternative
friendly courses of action hinge on enemy actions and if time permits, the alternatives should be rehearsed.

LIAISON
3-139. Liaison is required to accommodate frequent changes in tactical mission assignment.
3-140. Liaison is that contact or intercommunication maintained between elements of military forces or other
agencies to ensure mutual understanding and unity of purpose and action (JP 3-08).
3-141. Liaison provides the MLRS/HIMARS battalion commander needed flexibility to meet rapidly changing
and widely separated (geographically) missions. Liaison enhances the capability to provide fires across the
division/corps area of operations. Liaison responsibilities include the following⎯
 Passing information on the tactical situation to the reinforcing unit CP.
 Establishing digital and voice communications as required.
 Exchanging orders, situation reports, and intelligence reports and products.
 Passing fire missions.
 Establishing quick fire nets as required.
 Passing unit locations, ammunition status, weapon strength, target lists, and fire plans (see ADP 5-0).

SURVIVABILITY

Movement
3-142. MLRS/HIMARS units move or reposition on a continuing basis to mitigate attack by counterfire and
facilitate engagement of enemy formations and targets. Units conduct RSOP on a continual basis to enhance
unit survivability and to facilitate future operations. The necessity to conduct RSOP and select alternate and
supplementary positions at a fast pace has evolved into what is termed shoot-and-scoot techniques. Shoot-and-
scoot techniques, combined with the wide dispersion of elements, help avoid detection and minimize
vulnerability. However, shoot-and-scoot techniques require more planning and coordination because of
competition for terrain. The battalion staff coordinates continually through the appropriate fire support channels
for the use of terrain. Firing battery commanders and platoon leaders must, however, often continue that
coordination face-to-face with maneuver unit commanders throughout all phases of the operation.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 3-23

Chapter 3

Detection
3-143. The key to MLRS/HIMARS survival on the battlefield is the avoidance of detection. Enemy forces can
detect MLRS/HIMARS units firing either rockets or missiles by multiple means.

Air-Ground Observation
3-144. Until it fires, an MLRS/HIMARS launcher is normally difficult to detect by air-ground observation.
During firing, however, the large signature of the launch provides easy location of the firing point by direct
observation.

Counterbattery Radar
3-145. At lower firing elevations (less than 300 mil), MLRS/HIMARS rockets are difficult to detect by
counterbattery radar. At firing elevations greater than 300 mils, the rockets can be more easily acquired because
of their higher trajectory. Factors that further reduce MLRS/HIMARS vulnerability to enemy radar acquisition
include the ATACMS off-axis launch, low radar cross-section, and semiballistic-guided flight program.

Sound Ranging
3-146. The vulnerability of MLRS/HIMARS to detection by sound ranging exceeds that of cannon artillery.
Enemy sound ranging techniques are highly advanced and extremely accurate.

Flash Ranging
3-147. The MLRS/HIMARS is readily detected by flash ranging because of the large visual signature of the
launcher firing. Enemy flash ranging techniques are highly advanced and extremely accurate.

Radio Direction Finding

3-148. Proper communications procedures can reduce detection by enemy radio direction finding. Terrain
masking, fewer and shorter transmissions, and use of low radio power, directional antennas, and frequency
hopping capabilities can improve survivability.

3-24 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Chapter 4
MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations
This chapter addresses MLRS/HIMARS unit operations. This includes organization of
the battalion staff for tactical operations as well as firing battery operations. Instructions
covering features of combat operations, which lend themselves to definite or standardized
procedures without loss of effectiveness, should be covered by the tactical standard
operating procedures (TSOP). A guide and checklist for preparing an MLRS/HIMARS
battalion TSOP is at Appendix B.

SECTION I – BATTALION OPERATIONS

BATTALION COMMAND POST AND OPERATIONS CENTER

4-1. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion staff is organized for tactical operations by establishing the battalion CP
and the ALOC. The battalion CP provides mission command for the battalion elements.

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
4-2. The MLRS/HIMARS is an extremely unique and flexible system. Therefore, the MLRS/HIMARS
battalion commander must consider several options when organizing the staff and CPs for tactical operations. In
addition to the mission variables of METT-TC, the commander must consider survivability, dispersion, support
requirements, past experience, and TSOPs. The commander can devise almost any option to accomplish the unit
mission.

Option 1—Dual CPs

4-3. The HHB is divided into a battalion CP and a battalion trains. At the battalion CP, the operations,
intelligence, and fire direction sections act as the CP and provide mission command for the battalion elements
and the primary communication link to the controlling force field artillery headquarters. Signal personnel may
stay with the CP. The CP also monitors and, if necessary, coordinates for logistical support for the forward
elements of the battalion.
4-4. At the battalion trains, the ALOC coordinates and controls sustainment tasks along with the FSC. The
battalion XO supervises the ALOC. The HHB HQ, trains, and the ALOC may be located in one area or
dispersed. The trains can be subdivided, if necessary, into the maintenance collection point and the battalion
supply operation center. The maintenance collection point can be located 1 to 2 kilometers from the ALOC to
diminish and isolate the noise and light discipline problems associated with extensive maintenance operations.
The battalion supply operation center may be located in a supported maneuver brigade support area, the fires
brigade support area, or other convenient location. The battalion supply operation center is predominately made
up of S-1 personnel, with a small contingent from the S-4. This configuration provides liaison for optimum
logistics and personnel support from the FSC with the supported unit.
4-5. This type of organization emphasizes a reduced signature of the battalion HQ and increased
responsiveness of the battalion sustainment operations. The petroleum, oils and, lubricants resupply,
maintenance, medical treatment, ammunition resupply, and other sustainment tasks are handled by the ALOC
and/or trains personnel. Signal personnel may stay with the CP.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-1

Chapter 4

Option 2—Consolidated CPs

4-6. The entire HHB, both CP and ALOC with trains, is located in one position area. This option gets the
largest amount of its local defense from organic elements and simplifies CP and ALOC coordination,
operations, and procedures. However, if battalion ammunition resupply operations and maintenance operations
are centralized at battalion level, the size and operational signature of the combined CP, ALOC, and trains may
facilitate the threat locating, targeting, and attacking the CP. It can also create logistics and communications
problems with support areas in the contiguous area as the unit moves forward and the lines of communication
are stretched.

Option 3—Mixed CPs

4-7. The HHB is split into a battalion CP and a battalion trains as with option one. The commander moves
some of the trains support elements to the battalion CP location and places them under the control of the CP. He
leaves the rest under the control of the ALOC to operate from the trains area. The primary objective is to move
critical support as far forward as possible, within operational and/or situational constraints, and to provide
greater security for the battalion CP.

BATTALION COMMAND POST

4-8. Within the battalion CP, the operations, fire direction, and intelligence sections make up the CP. The CP
must also coordinate battalion survey requirements and establish liaison as required by the mission. The
battalion CP is positioned on the battlefield to facilitate communications between higher headquarters elements,
subordinate units, and adjacent unit CPs. An MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP is configured with three mission
command vehicle platforms (operations, FDC, and intelligence). Radio and AFATDS quantities per section are
illustrated in Figure 4-1.

Legend: AFATDs - advanced f ield artillery tactical data system AM - amplitude modulation
FM - f requency modulation GRC - Ground Radio Communications
VRC - vehicular radio communications

Figure 4-1. CP radio and AFATDS quantities

4-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

OPERATIONS RESPONSIBILITIES
4-9. Operations responsibilities include the following:
 Issue plans and orders.
 Coordinate survey operations.
 Establish liaison, as required.
 Plan and coordinate all unit movements.
 Coordinate positioning with controlling field artillery headquarters or maneuver fires cell.
 Record all significant events on DA Form 1594 (Daily Staff Journal Or Duty Officer`s Log).
 Maintain operational overlays.
 Maintain a situation map.
 Monitor and project ammunition status and/or requirements.
 Establish communications on appropriate nets.
 Exercise staff supervision of unit CBRN operations.
 Ensure operations security.

INTELLIGENCE RESPONSIBILITIES
4-10. Intelligence responsibilities include the following:
 Threat situation awareness.
 Terrain analysis.
 Intelligence information processing and coordination.
 Weather updates.
 Management of target related information.
 Map control.
 Physical security.
 Counterfire targeting.

SURVEY RESPONSIBILITIES
4-11. The chief of party is the primary advisor for survey operations within the battalion. He is primarily
concerned with providing survey control to the firing batteries, the supported maneuver unit, and other units in
the area. Specific duties include:
 Coordinate and supervise battalion survey operations.
 Develop the survey plan with guidance from the S-3.
 Coordinate directly with battery commanders concerning survey requirements.
 Perform general reconnaissance and observation as required by the S-3.

AUTOMATED SYSTEMS
BATTALION
4-12. The Fire Direction Center responsibilities include:
 Disseminate fire plans and control measures to subordinate units.
 Provide tactical fire control for the battalion.
 Coordinate and conduct technical rehearsals.
 Track and ensure ammunition to mission type is coordinated.
 Establish and maintain digital communications within the battalion, its attachments, and the
controlling force field artillery headquarters if one is designated by the supported commander.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-3

Chapter 4

4-13. The MLRS/HIMARS battalion automated mission command systems consist of the FCS at the launcher
and the AFATDS at platoon, battery, and battalion.
4-14. The FCS provides a link between the crew, launcher external digital traffic, and the launcher components.
The FCS monitors, coordinates, and controls all electronic devices used by the launcher during the launch cycle.
The FCS computes fire data for fire missions and communicates digitally with the AFATDS.
4-15. The AFATDS performs tactical fire direction processing at platoon, battery, and battalion level. The
AFTADS receives, processes, and transmits fire unit, ammunition, and target data. It maintains databases that
include fire units, munitions, and tactical fire plans.
4-16. AFATDS is the fire support mission command system within the Army Battle Command Systems. It
provides decision aids and an information system for the control, coordination, and synchronization of all types
of fire support means. It acts as the force field artillery mission command system.
4-17. AFATDS is located at field artillery CPs from platoon to field artillry brigade to echelons above division.
It is employed in varying configurations at different operational facilities. AFATDS is interconnected by the
area common user system, the Army data distribution system, or combat net radio communications. AFATDS
operates with other services using the variable message format, joint tactical data link or, to a lesser degree, the
United States message text formats messages. The system also complies with standardized message formats
derived from Standard NATO Agreement 5620 and bilateral agreements with the United Kingdom, Germany,
and other nations, as applicable.

MANEUVER CONTROL SYSTEM

4-18. The maneuver control system provides Army tactical commanders and their staffs (corps through
battalion) automated, online, near real time systems for planning, coordinating, and controlling tactical
operations. It is the maneuver component of Army Battle Command Systems. It receives, processes, and
displays the increasing volume and variety of tactical mission command information available. The maneuver
control system’s capabilities range from modifying unit task organization to creating complex map overlays.
MLRS/HIMARS elements at brigade and battalion/squadron level will interface with the maneuver control
system through their AFATDS.

FORCE XXI BATTLE COMMAND—BRIGADE AND BELOW

4-19. Force XXI Battle Command—Brigade and Below (FBCB2) interfaces with the Army Battle Command
Systems and is located at the brigade level and below. It provides mounted/dismounted tactical combat and
service support units the ability to gain situational understanding of the battlefield. FBCB2 provides accurate
and real time information about friendly, threat, neutral, and noncombatant locations—a common relevant
picture of the battlefield scaled to the specific level of interest and needs.
4-20. Every vehicle in the FBCB2 equipped team has a computer that displays a digital image of the map.
Symbols (icons) representing individual friendly and threat vehicles or units appear on the map and move in
near real time as the platforms they represent move on the battlefield. This continually updated situational
understanding is a fully automatic function.

4-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

Table 4-1. Stand alone FBCB2

Communications
Battle Command
Situational Awareness Execution Interface/
Support
Processing
•Own position •Overlays •Five paragraph •Connectivity with
•Position of friendly units •Messages (joint VMF) OPLAN other net members
and platforms –Spot/SALUTE •Logistics reports •Unit task organization
•Position of threat units –Call for fire •Personnel reports •Maintenance/
and platforms –Strike warning •Roll up reports embedded training
•Warnings of dangerous –SITREP •EPW/detainee •Simulation interfaces
conditions in the reports
–Overlay message
operational environment •Video image
–Field order
•Supporting data (such processing Network
as terrain/elevation) –CBRN 1
•Frame grabber/file management/
•Supplemental data transfer administrative
(such as unit •COA functions
status/readiness,
connectivity) Mission command
Legend:
CBRN—chemical, biological, radiological and nuclear COA—course of
action
EPW—enemy prisoner of war MSG—message OPLAN—operations plan
SALUTE—size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment SITREP—situation report
VMF—variable message format

BATTALION ALOC
4-21. The ALOC monitors and coordinates all tactical logistics functions affecting the MLRS/HIMARS
battalion and its subordinate or attached units. The battalion XO supervises the functions with the forward
support company commander, S-1, S-4, BAO, and select members of the special staff directly coordinating and
controlling the service support activities.

SECTION II – MLRS/HIMARS FIRING BATTERY OPERATIONS

BATTERY HEADQUARTERS
4-22. The MLRS/HIMARS firing battery is the basic unit of employment of the MLRS/HIMARS. This section
addresses battery employment and operations. Instructions covering features of combat operations that lend
themselves to definite or standardized procedures without loss of effectiveness should be covered by the TSOP.
For a guide and checklist for preparing an MLRS/HIMARS battery TSOP see Appendix B.

BOC
4-23. The battery HQ provides control, and coordinates logistical support to the battery. The command element
and the BOC provide the mission command. The MLRS/HIMARS BOC is the mission command center of the
battery. The BOC directs all battery operations in coordination with the battery commander. It directly controls
the FDC and CBRN operations. It monitors ammunition and launcher status, requests survey support, and
directs battery internal and external logistics and sustainment. The BOC passes movement orders and other
information to the subordinate platoon headquarters.
4-24. The BOC operates in the FDC tent extension. The BOC personnel maintain situation maps and overlays.
They also maintain SCPs, ammunition, maintenance, and similar status charts, and posts other operational
information. The battery and battalion command (voice) net radios can be remoted as necessary.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-5

Chapter 4

Fire Direction Center

4-25. The MLRS/HIMARS firing battery FDC operates as a sub-element of the BOC. It controls all battery
level tactical fire direction.

Logistics Operations Center

4-26. The battery LOC is the primary mission command center for administration logistical operations,
maintenance, and battery defense. LOC staff coordinates external support and direct internal administration
logistical operations to include resupply. These tasks are accomplished in accordance with priorities set by the
BOC. The support platoon leader/sergeant and/or 1SG directly supervise LOC operations.

Logistics Release Point

4-27. The battery logistics release point is established normally by the battery 1SG to push routine supplies
forward and to facilitate other routine administration. Firing platoon sergeants normally meet the 1SG at the
logistics release point on a daily basis or in accordance with the unit TSOP.

BATTERY HEADQUARTERS OPERATIONS

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
4-28. The MLRS/HIMARS battery commander must consider the factors of METT-TC in addition to
survivability, dispersion, communications, support requirements, past experience, and TSOPs when determining
which configuration to use. There are basically two options for employment of the battery headquarters—dual
and consolidated.

Consolidated CPs
4-29. Food service, supply, and maintenance sections may be consolidated with the BOC at the battery
headquarters. This option facilitates local defense and simplifies BOC and LOC coordination and
communications. When consolidated, wire communications should be established between the LOC and the
BOC. The BOC is the focal point for support requests, planning, and coordination.

Dual CPs
4-30. The battery establishes a battery trains with a LOC serving as a logistics CP. The LOC activities are still
directed by the BOC. The commander decides which assets to deploy with the LOC, and which to leave with
the BOC.

CONSIDERATIONS
4-31. Commanders should consider the following when organizing their CPs.

Terrain
4-32. The BOC requires elevated terrain for good communications. The logistics elements (ammunition,
maintenance, food service, and supply) require a good road network and firm ground. If these two needs cannot
be met at the same location, the commander may choose to separate the elements (for example, place the BOC
on a hill and the trains in a nearby town).

Enemy
4-33. The commander may choose to split operations because of enemy counterfire or air attack capability. A
consolidated BOC's large signature may jeopardize the entire headquarters. However, split CPs are more
vulnerable to ground attack.

4-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

Communications
4-34. Distance between the LOC and BOC increases mission command and defense challenges and requires the
LOC to monitor the battery command or other designated frequency. Radios that can monitor the net are scarce
and restrict the use of certain vehicles. When the LOC is located near the BOC (within 200 meters), wire line
communications can be used between the two operations centers. This reduces mission command problems and
the electronic signature.

BATTERY HEADQUARTERS POSITIONING CONSIDERATIONS

Battery Operations Center

4-35. Locate the BOC on elevated terrain for better communications. It should be in the center of the
headquarters position for maximum protection against ground attack.

Food Service
4-36. The forward support company food service serving area should be located on firm, accessible ground;
have good drainage; and be upwind from the field latrine.

Supply
4-37. The supply section requires firm terrain as well. The supply vehicle is placed to cover a portion of the
headquarters perimeter. The supply vehicle is placed for easy access to and from the position.

Ammunition Holding Area

4-38. The ammunition holding area (should be adjacent, or as near as possible, to the main supply route. It
should be large enough to hold all of the battery resupply vehicles, allow for a minimum turning radius to allow
for safe maneuver of all unit resupply vehicles, and provide enough overhead clearance to allow for boom
operations. It should be easily located, in darkness or daylight, by the support platoon personnel. Placed close to
the main supply route, the ammunition holding area controls the main access route into the battery area.

BATTERY DEFENSE
THREAT CAPABILITIES
4-39. MLRS/HIMARS is an HPT for threat ground forces as well as indirect fires.

AVOIDING DETECTION
4-40. The threat detects friendly forces by first studying friendly force doctrine and then processing information
collection (signals intelligence, imagery intelligence, and human intelligence).
4-41. Long range and reconnaissance patrols, spies, partisans, enemy prisoners of war and unmanned aircraft
systems are all sources for information collectors. Although information collection relies primarily on visual
observation, the peculiar equipment, predicted activities, bumper marking, spoils of war, and rubbish left behind
add to the accuracy of the targeting effort.

Air-Ground Observation
4-42. Until it fires, an MLRS/HIMARS launcher is normally difficult to detect by air-ground observation.
During firing, however, the large signature of the launch provides easy location of the FP by direct observation.

Signals Intelligence
4-43. Using signal intercept and radio direction finding equipment, the threat collects various radio
transmissions. Tactical radios operating on low power can be picked up by threat radio direction finding units at

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-7

Chapter 4

distances in excess of 10 kilometers. High power signals can be detected at distances up to 40 kilometers.
However, directional antennas and reduced radio usage will improve survivability. Radars can detect firing
weapons to a 200 meter accuracy. Seismic and sound ranging can produce targets within 150 meters although
their accuracy is diminished by other battle noise.

Imagery Intelligence
4-44. This effort consists of photographic imagery, thermal detection, radar location, and laser imagery. Unless
assigned as a special mission, imagery intelligence processing requires 6 to 8 hours. Target location error from
imagery intelligence is 200 meters.

Human Intelligence
4-45. Long range and reconnaissance patrols, spies, partisans, and prisoners of war are all human intelligence
collectors. Although human intelligence relies primarily on visual observation, the peculiar equipment,
predicted activities, bumper marking, spoils of war, and rubbish left behind add to the accuracy of the targeting
effort.

Radio Direction Finding

4-46. Proper communications procedures can reduce detection by enemy radio direction finding. Terrain
masking, fewer and shorter transmissions, and use of low radio power, directional antennas, and frequency-
hopping capabilities can improve survivability.
4-47. Using signal intercept and radio direction-finding equipment, the enemy collects various radio
transmissions. However, directional antennas and reduced radio usage will improve survivability.
4-48. During stability tasks, the greatest threat to the MLRS/HIMARS battalion will most likely be from
smaller echelons forces conducting raids and ambushes. Occupation of a defensible firing position affords the
MLRS/HIMARS unit greater survivability than does the standard MLRS/HIMARS techniques of hide, shoot,
and move. Occupying positions in conjunction with other task force units provides the MLRS/HIMARS unit
with an increased degree of protection against enemy small unit attacks. Coordination is the key to success.
Using engineer assets to harden the MLRS/HIMARS position will improve survivability. Weather and terrain
will dictate whether the unit builds berms or digs in. In either case, the key to success is prior planning and
coordination with the supporting engineer unit.

Attack
4-49. MLRS/HIMARS units are vulnerable to threat counterfire, air attack, ground forces, and electronic
warfare. The MLRS/HIMARS unit’s greatest protection is its ability to disperse, hide, fire, and then move out
quickly (shoot and scoot).

HEADQUARTERS POSITION DEFENSE

4-50. The battery operations center must stay attuned to the current tactical situation and ensure that
information is disseminated to all battery elements. Information pertaining to enemy locations and disposition,
friendly units in or near platoon operational areas, the CBRN threat, locations of friendly and enemy minefields,
threat detection activities, and the likelihood of threat ground forces such as patrols operating in the area is
especially important. Unmanned aircraft systems can provide early warning of approaching enemy forces.
4-51. Concealment is the best defense against air attack. If the unit is detected and attacked, the key to survival
is dispersion. Fortunately, MLRS/HIMARS units are naturally dispersed, therefore providing enemy aircraft an
elusive target. Normally, the MLRS/HIMARS unit will fall within the supported unit's air defense umbrella and
may have air defense assets attached. This does not preclude returning fire with all available direct fire
weapons. For more information on defense against air attack see FM 44-18, and FM 44-18-1.
4-52. The best defense against an armored or mechanized ground attack is for the MLRS/HIMARS platoon to
move to a position from which it can continue the mission (alternate operational area) without a direct
confrontation with the enemy. Dismounted enemy elements may attack using⎯

4-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

 Special operations forces.

 Ambushes.
 Guerrilla type attacks.
 A diversionary attack and then a main attack.
 Dismounted infantry.
4-53. The best defense against a dismounted ground attack is to displace to an alternate position. In some
situations, where the enemy counterfire threat is minimal, launchers may operate from mutually supporting hide
areas. These hide areas may allow launchers to observe each other and provide early warning of dismounted
ground attack.
4-54. The battery commander must ensure that the unit’s tactical standing operating procedures include
instructions for the destruction of unit equipment and materiel. See ATP 3-90.90 for guidance in preparing unit
tactical standard operating procedures.

MOVEMENT
4-55. MLRS/HIMARS battery movement options resemble those of other field artillery units. The battery
operations center directs and controls the displacement of subordinate platoons. The battery commander is
usually directed to displace by battery, battery echelon, or platoon. Some considerations in selecting an option
for displacement are:
 Supported maneuver unit scheme of movement.
 Continuous fire support (fire plans/targets).
 Overall tactical situation.
 Immediate and future requirements of the supported unit.
 Characteristics of the terrain to be traversed.
 Distance of march.
 Time available.
 Enemy capabilities.
 Mission command capabilities.
4-56. MLRS/HIMARS movement options are:
 Moving by platoon.
 Moving by battery echelon.
 Moving by battery.
 Jumping the battery operations center.

Moving by Platoon
4-57. This is the most common and preferred method of displacement for MLRS batteries. One firing platoon at
a time is displaced, either as a complete platoon or by individual vehicle infiltration.

Moving by Battery Echelon

4-58. In this method, one or two of the major elements of the battery are moved in two or more groups. For
example, one firing platoon and the battery headquarters may move as a group. Then the second firing platoon,
the support platoon, and the rest of the battery are moved.

Moving by Battery
4-59. Distance, mission, route priorities, or the overall tactical situation may dictate a battery-level move.

Jumping the Battery Operations Center

4-60. If the entire battery is not moving at once, the battery operations center must ensure that battery mission
command and fire direction processing continue while the battery moves. The preferred method for ensuring

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-9

Chapter 4

continuity is to pass control to a firing platoon. The platoon AFATDS enters the appropriate digital nets with
the battalion, fires brigade and supported higher headquarters fires cell AFATDS. Once this link is established,
the platoon assumes the role of the battery operations center and battery fire direction center.

TACTICAL MARCHES
4-61. A tactical march is the movement of a unit or elements of a unit under actual or simulated combat
conditions. There are several methods for moving an element in a tactical configuration. Each method has
specific advantages and disadvantages. The battery commander decides which method or combination is best.

Open Column
4-62. The open column is used for daylight movements when there is an adequate road network that is not
overcrowded, when threat detection is not likely, when time is an important factor, or when the travel distance
is great. A vehicle interval in an open column is generally 100 meters.
 The advantages of the open column are:
 Speed (the fastest method of march).
 Reduced driver fatigue.
 Improved vision on dusty roads.
 Ease in passing individual vehicles.
 Ease in dispersing vehicles as a passive defense measure against an air attack.
 Less chance of the entire unit being ambushed.
 Less vulnerability to indirect fire.
 The disadvantages of the open column are:
 Greater column length requires more road space and more time to close on the area of
operations.
 Other traffic often becomes interspersed in the column.
 Communication within the column is complicated.

Close Column
4-63. In close column movement, the vehicle interval is less than 100 meters. Close column is used to maintain
maximum mission command during periods of limited visibility or when moving through built up or congested
areas.
4-64. The advantages of the close column are:
 Simplicity of mission command.
 Less time to close on the area of operations.
 Reduced column length.
 Concentration of defensive firepower.
4-65. The disadvantages of the close column are:
 The column is vulnerable to threat observation and attack.
 The strength and nature of the column are quickly apparent to threat observers.
 Convoy speed is reduced.
 Driver fatigue is increased.

Infiltration
4-66. When the battery moves by infiltration, vehicles are dispatched individually or in small groups without
reference to a march table. Though this technique is time consuming and the vehicles are difficult to control, it
is used when the threat has good target acquisition means and quick reaction capabilities.
4-67. The advantages of infiltration are:
 Vehicles are less vulnerable to hostile observation.

4-10 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

 Opportunities for cover are increased.

 Defense against air and artillery attack is enhanced.
 The threat is deceived as to the size of the unit.
4-68. The disadvantages of infiltration are:
 It is time consuming.
 It is difficult to mission command.
 Vulnerability of small elements is increased.

Terrain March
4-69. The terrain march is an off road movement to reduce vulnerability and avoid traffic. A unit using this type
of movement should travel close to tree lines, along gullies, and close to hill masses. When threat observation or
interdiction by artillery fire or air attack is likely, a terrain march should be conducted. A unit may move safely
on a road for some distance and change to a terrain march at a point where threat observation becomes likely or
vehicle congestion makes an inviting target.
4-70. Consider the following factors when deciding to use the terrain march:
 Displacement time may be increased.
 Ground reconnaissance is required.
 Soil conditions and other natural obstacles may complicate this type of movement.
 Wheel or track marks to the new position may be left.
 Extensive coordination is required to avoid traveling through other unit areas.
4-71. When using the terrain march, MLRS/HIMARS units may move in open column, in close column, or by
infiltration.

Special Formations
4-72. On the basis of the joint area of operations and the tactical situation, the battery commander may choose
to move his platoons in a special formation. This is most appropriate in a desert environment where there are
few obstacles to movement, visibility exceeds several kilometers, movement is over extended distances, and/or
there is a need to provide rocket fires while moving. Commanders should consider placement of vehicles to
protect mission command elements and make most efficient use of available weapon systems for defense (see
Figure 4-2).

Note. The width and depth of the formations in Figure 4-2 are a function of the mission variables of
METT-TC and mission considerations.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-11

Chapter 4

Figure 4-2. Special formations

SECTION III – FIRING PLATOON OPERATIONS

PLATOON HEADQUARTERS
4-73. The MLRS/HIMARS firing platoon generally conducts operations under battery control, occupies a
separate area of operations, and conducts its own RSOP. The MLRS/HIMARS firing platoon can be considered
comparable to a cannon firing battery for fire support, positioning, and logistics considerations. Tactically, the
platoon leader must do all of those tasks usually associated with the cannon battery commander. The leaders of
the firing platoon must be innovative and creative in their approach to operations. The unique tactics of an
MLRS/HIMARS firing platoon place great responsibility on personnel to meet their missions. Instructions
covering features of combat operations, which lend themselves to definite or standardized procedures without
loss of effectiveness, should be covered by the TSOP. A battery TSOP normally guides preparation of
MLRS/HIMARS platoon TSOPs. For a guide and a checklist for preparing an MLRS/HIMARS battery TSOP,
see Appendix B.

MISSION COMMAND
4-74. The platoon leader and platoon sergeant are responsible for the mission command of platoon operations
and for advising the battery commander and/or BOC on their launcher and ammunition status. The battery
commander and/or BOC directs the platoon leader and sergeant concerning the specific number of operational
launchers that are posturing for specific munitions and ready to fire status. The platoon leader and platoon
sergeant are responsible for coordinating all logistical support with the LOC. The POC personnel monitor all
traffic between the BOC and the launchers by using the platoon AFATDS. Loss of the platoon FDC would
severely hinder platoon mission command. The POC personnel maintain a DA Form 1594 and a DA Form
7232. Fire mission logs should be maintained for one year as a record of live fire missions conducted.

4-12 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

PLATOON OPERATIONS CENTER

4-75. The POC is located in an M1068 for M270A1 units or M1152 for HIMARS units with an AFATDS. The
POC is manned by MLRS/HIMARS fire direction personnel and is supervised by the platoon leader or the
platoon sergeant. The reconnaissance sergeant may also work in the POC when he is in the platoon HQ
position. The platoon leader or platoon sergeant should locate the POC on elevated terrain for communications
and should center it in the platoon HQ position for maximum protection against ground attack and ease of
platoon internal wire communications.

SUPPORT
4-76. The POC is the hub of platoon support activities. Any attached maintenance support teams stay with the
platoon HQ and are deployed in accordance with the unit’s TSOP. Launchers in an inoperational (INOP) status
normally move to the platoon HQ area to reduce the security, command, control, and resupply burdens.

OPERATIONAL AREA
4-77. An MLRS/HIMARS platoon position area should normally be large enough to allow a 3-by-4 kilometer
operational area (see Figure 4-3). Exact size of the OPAREA is a function of METT-TC and a result of risk
assessment. The tactical situation and competition for terrain may require that platoons modify the size of the
OPAREA. However, smaller areas severely restrict the platoon leader's employment options, the length of time
the platoon can occupy, and the survivability of the platoon. The launcher signature, noise, smoke, and fire
make each firing position easily identifiable from great distances, especially in open terrain. After use by
MLRS/HIMARS launchers, the firing point may be subjected to intense enemy counterfire; therefore, firing
points are considered highly dangerous. Except for cases of tactical necessity, launchers should use a firing
point only once.
4-78. The MLRS/HIMARS platoon does not require sole use of the terrain within its position area. With proper
coordination, maneuver units can pass through the OPAREA without disrupting operations. Other units may use
parts of the platoon OPAREA. However, commanders may resist sharing space with MLRS/HIMARS because
of the danger from potential counterfire. This is particularly true of less mobile units. Coordination of terrain
must, therefore, be thorough and continuous.
4-79. Units in the general vicinity should be aware of launchers in the area and establish positive
communications with the firing unit prior to transiting the area. If a unit encounters a launcher in position, it
should avoid locating nearby. The danger area around the launcher, due to blast and flying debris during a
launch, is 300 meters to the front and 400 meters to the rear of the launcher. The supported force commander,
rather than attempting to specify each individual position and/or area, may specify no-go areas for
MLRS/HIMARS. MLRS/HIMARS units would then be expected to plan their positions around the no-go
terrain. Regardless of the method or the extent of planning, battery commanders and platoon leaders/sergeants
must coordinate face to face with commanders in close proximity of their planned position areas.
4-80. There are six types of positions within the OPAREA; each type may have several locations. The platoon
leader or platoon sergeant must identify all OPAREA position types, except hide areas (HA), by grid during a
reconnaissance.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-13

Chapter 4

Figure 4-3. Platoon operational area

FIRING POINTS
4-81. Each platoon OPAREA should have at least 12 FPs, three for each launcher. Each launcher section chief
is responsible for final selection and verification of the firing points. The following are considerations when
selecting a firing point:
 The platoon leader is responsible for selecting firing areas. The section chief then selects the FP
locations (the launchers should not fire from terrain with slopes greater than 89 mils).
 There should be no immediate mask in the probable direction of fire.
 Hide areas should normally be located within 100 meters of the FP; however, longer distances are
acceptable if response times can be kept short.
 The FP may be on a “reverse slope” of a terrain feature. Although masks should still be considered,
reverse slopes break line-of-sight with the FLOT and may reduce the threat of attack by enemy direct
fire systems during firing operations.
 The FP may be located on a road. The road should lead directly to the reload point or the next FP to
reduce ground signature, response time, and time required to move.
 Communications must be established with the BOC and the POC.
 The FP should be 500 meters from other FP (800 meters preferred) and 800 meters from other
positions or elements, except HAs.
 For attack of time-sensitive targets with missiles the launcher may be placed AMC for extended
periods of time. FPs for these missions should also serve the purpose of a HA and provide
concealment. These FPs should be selected to enhance survivability while the launcher is laid on
target awaiting the command to fire.
4-82. The following are additional FP considerations for M270A1 launchers:
 The launcher should be able to park within 150 meters of the firing point grid recorded in the
launcher's database and within 100 mils of the commanded heading.

4-14 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

 The launcher's slope must not exceed 266 mils for rocket missions and 89 mils for missile missions.
The FCS continuously displays launcher slope to assist the driver in parking the vehicle.
4-83. The following are additional FP considerations for M142 launchers:
 The wheeled M142 travels faster on improved roads but can be slowed or denied access by rough
terrain and wet or soft soil that would not impede the M270A1.
 Excessive dry vegetation on the FP can ignite causing damage to exposed wiring and air lines on the
under carriage.
 Initial parking at proper heading is critical to meet timelines. Re-parking the M142 is more time
consuming than pivot steering the M270A1.
 FP slope tolerances are critical—89 mils with no tolerances.

HIDE AREA
4-84. The launcher section chief selects the HA—an area in which to hide the launcher while awaiting a fire
mission. The hide area should be covered and concealed, and close to the designated FP (normally not less than
20 meter and not more than 100 meters away). A launcher in the HA must be able to communicate with the
BOC. The HA may be on a road leading to the FP to reduce the ground signature and to speed response time.
4-85. Hide area operations may degrade or disrupt the launcher GPS performance due to line of site
obstruction. This is especially the case when the hide position is under dense foliage or a structure (such as a
barn or bridge). However, degraded GPS performance is not as critical to the mission as the launcher’s ability to
survive in a hostile environment. The launcher should be able to acquire good GPS information within two
minutes of leaving the hide location. Travel time from hide to the firing point (often 2 to 5 minutes) is adequate
for the launcher receiver to be operationally “hot” before launcher lay. The launcher crew can decrease the
firing time by tracking at least 1 satellite in the hide area. When possible, use the DAGR to check hide areas and
firing points for good satellite acquisition.

RELOAD POINT
4-86. The reload point is where the launchers upload launch pods and the HEMTT-HEMATs/resupply vehicle-
resupply trailer off-load. This is the most vulnerable point for each element. Each platoon OPAREA should
have at least two reload points. Select reload points based on the following conditions:
 Cover and concealment for a HEMTT-HEMAT and launcher in the position at the same time.
 Maneuver room for the 100-foot (30.48-meter) turning radius of the 55-foot-long (16.76-meter)
HEMTT-HEMAT and boom operations.
 Located at least 800 meters from FPs and at least 500 meters from any other element.
 Firm ground or pavement for supporting vehicles and launch pods.
 Covered and concealed route from ammunition handling area to reload point.
 Trafficability.
4-87. The reload point must have sufficient maneuver room for the M270A1 launcher. The HIMARS RSV-
RST has a turning radius of 30 meters.
4-88. The following are additional reload point considerations for the M142 launcher:
 Slope is critical in reload point selection. The M142 cannot violate the 89mil slope limit during
reload.
 The reload point must allow the M142 to download and upload without re-parking.
 The reload point should enable the M142 to drive forward into position, reload and drive forward to
exit the reload point (a drive through reload point is preferable to an reload point that require the
launcher to back up).

SURVEY CONTROL POINT (SCP)

4-89. The SCP is where the launchers update. At least two SCPs should be established in the OPAREA. These
should be collocated with the reload points to reduce travel time of the launchers.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-15

Chapter 4

PLATOON HEADQUARTERS
4-90. Platoon HQ is where the CP, the platoon leader's HMMWV, the platoon sergeant's HMMWV, and, if
attached, the maintenance support team vehicles are positioned. Normally, INOP launchers (being serviced,
crew resting, and so forth) are also positioned in the platoon HQ. Each platoon OPAREA should have a primary
platoon HQ location and an alternate location, if possible. The platoon HQ location is based on the following:
 Optimum communications with the BOC and launchers.
 Cover and concealment.
 Communications mask between the position and the enemy.
 Defensibility with the ammunition holding area.
 Trafficability.

AMMUNITION HOLDING AREA

4-91. The ammunition section positions its vehicles in the ammunition holding area while awaiting transload
or delivery of ammunition. It can be collocated with the platoon HQ if the ground threat is greater than the air
attack or counterfire threat. Otherwise, the ammunition holding area should be located 100 to 300 meters from
the platoon HQ and astride the main entrance route into the platoon HQ for entry control. The ammunition
holding area is not an issue point for the firing sections. The ammunition holding area selection considerations
are as follows:
 Cover and concealment.
 Trafficability.
 Vehicle maneuver room for turning around and boom operations.
 Proximity to the main supply route.
 Defensibility with platoon headquarters.
 Arc blast area in the event of sympathetic detonation, either through mishandling or enemy action, of
the munitions stored there.

LAUNCHER SURVEY CONTROL

UPDATE STAKES
4-92. The update stake is where the launchers updates the PNU when it is in the degraded non-aided mode of
operation. Each launcher can input an update stake in their hide area.
4-93. When navigating in the non-aided mode, the PNU also requires a system parameter update every 12
kilometers of distance traveled. The prompt “UPDATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS” is posted on the FCP at 12
kilometers distance traveled (DT). An alarm also sounds.

Survey Control Points

4-94. Although cover and concealment are factors in survey control point (SCP) selection, utility should be the
primary consideration. The SCPs must be readily accessible so the driver can stop the launchers left drive
sprocket or left front tire aligned next to the SCP marker. The area and SCP marker must allow the driver to
position the launcher without ground guidance or excessive maneuvering. The SCPs should be collocated with a
reload point, if possible. This allows rapid return of the launcher to operational status.
4-95. SCPs are required for M142/M270A1 operations. The exact number depends on the unit SOP because
launchers often use SCPs located at reload points. A launcher can be used to establish SCPs at the reload points.
Establishing and using SCPs allow firing platoons to operate for extended periods (in the inertial mode) if GPS
is lost.

Launcher Navigation
4-96. Vehicle navigation data (easting, northing, altitude, and heading) is determined by the PNU. The PNU
will then determine navigation data in the GPS aided mode, the preferred navigation mode. When GPS data is

4-16 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

not available, the PNU determines navigation data in the non-aided mode. The PNU gyros continuously
measure the angular relationship between the vehicle and true north to determine vehicle heading, which is
displayed as the grid azimuth toward which the front of the vehicle is pointed. At the same time, the
accelerometers measure the acceleration (motion) of the vehicle in three axes (roll, pitch, and yaw), which is
used to determine vehicle easting, northing, and altitude. Data from the vehicle odometer encoders is also used
by the PNU in determining location data. The NAV indicator in region two of the GDU will appear as a solid
box when the launcher is GPS aided for navigation. The NAV indicator will appear as broken lines when the
launcher is not GPS-Aided for navigation.
4-97. Each time the vehicle stops for at least 2 seconds, the PNU starts a zero velocity update, which removes
accumulated errors. The zero velocity update takes 40 seconds to complete. If GPS data is available, the PNU
will use it along with the gyro and accelerometer data.

4-98. System start-up will always bring the PNU to the non-aided mode of navigation. Once in the non-aided
mode, GPS keys may be entered, which begins the warm or cold start of the GPS receiver in the PNU. The
warm/cold start will result in the PNU automatically switching to the GPS aided mode of navigation. As GPS
data is lost and reacquired, the PNU will automatically switch between the GPS aided and non-aided modes of
navigation.
4-99. When navigating in the GPS aided mode, the location and altitude remain accurate within 10 meters,
regardless of distance traveled between latitudes 80 degrees south and 84 degrees north. The ZUPT is
performed automatically and no operator prompts are posted. System parameter updates are not required while
navigating in this mode. If GPS data is lost and cannot be reacquired within 30 seconds, the PNU switches to
the non-aided navigation mode.

M142/M270A1 Non-aided Navigation Mode

4-100. When navigating in the non-aided mode, accuracy is affected by the passage of time, the availability of
survey, distance traveled, and operator response to prompts that are posted on the FCP. In the non-aided mode,
a ZUPT is required at least every 9 minutes and 30 seconds. A “CNTDN ZUPT TIMER” is posted on the FCP.
When the ZUPT countdown timer reaches zero, the advisory “ZUPT REQUIRED” is displayed along with the
prompt “STOP LAUNCHER.” A pulsed alarm also sounds as a reminder to stop the launcher.
4-101. When the vehicle has stopped for 2 seconds, “ZUPT IN PROGRESS” is displayed with a 40-second
countdown clock. ZUPT requires no operator action other than stopping the launcher. “ZUPT COMPLETE” is
displayed when the ZUPT is completed. Once the vehicle moves, the ZUPT countdown timer is displayed. The
ZUPT countdown timer only runs when the vehicle is in motion. If the 40 second ZUPT is interrupted, the
original ZUPT countdown timer is displayed with whatever time remained prior to stopping.
4-102. When navigating in the non-aided mode, the PNU also requires a system parameter update every 12
kilometers of distance traveled. The prompt “UPDATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS” is posted on the FCP at 12
kilometers DT. An alarm also sounds.
4-103. If ZUPT is performed at 9-minute, 30 second intervals but SCPs are not available for system parameter
updates, location and altitude remain accurate within 10 meters for a DT of approximately 40 kilometers. For
DT greater than 40 kilometers, the accuracy is 0.04 percent of the DT. If ZUPT is not performed, location and
altitude remain accurate within 10 meters for a DT of 6.7 kilometers. For DT greater than 6.7 kilometers, the
accuracy is 0.15 percent of the DT. DT is measured from the location at which the PNU entered the non-aided
mode or from the location of the last system parameter update. Table 4-2 provides a consolidated list of
navigation accuracies and ZUPT times. Table 4-3 lists the alignment times associated with each launcher
position.

Operational Considerations
4-104. Hide area operations may degrade or disrupt GPS performance due to line-of-site obstruction. If a
launcher fails to obtain (or maintain) a GPS signal while in its selected hide area, it should be moved to a more
suitable hide location, depending on the tactical situation.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-17

Chapter 4

Table 4-2. Navigation

Manual Position
Mode GPS Status ZUPTS Accuracy
Updates
Aided GPS keys loaded. Yes. Not required. Within
4 or 5 satellites. Automatic. 10 m.
Encoder input. Not displayed.
PNU gyros and
accelerometers.
Non-aided No GPS keys. Yes. Yes. Within 10 m
Less than 4 satellites. Displayed. Prompted–12 km. if ZUPTs.
INOP status. Operator stops Every 9 min
launcher. 30 seconds.
GPS channel malfunction.
Every 9 min 30 Updates
seconds. every 12
40-second km.
duration.
Legend:
GPS—global positioning system INOP—inoperational km—kilometer M—meter
min—minute PNU—position navigation unit ZUPT—zero velocity update

Table 4-3. Alignment time

Status Approximate Time
Stationary stored position 5 minutes
Stored position data 2 minutes
Mobile GPS keys must be loaded 15 minutes

LAUNCHER RESPONSE POSTURE

4-105. A launcher response posture dictates its readiness to respond to fire missions. The commander
determines how his unit launchers will be posturing.
4-106. The commander normally directs the platoons to have a specific number of launchers in hot operational
(OPER) status. The number is based on guidance from the controlling field artillery headquarters, mission
variables of METT-TC, total launchers available, ammunition available, crew available, and fatigue. The
platoon gives the BOC information on crew and launcher status and decides which launchers to posture. The
platoons usually rotate their launchers through hot status, changing individual launchers and maintaining the
total number of required hot launchers. Commanders may designate the response posture of entire platoons.
4-107. The two methods of posturing, tactical and technical are discussed below (see Table 4-4).

TACTICAL POSTURING
4-108. Through several generations of software for the FCS and AFATDS, the terms hot and cold have come
to indicate launcher action response posture.

Hot
4-109. Hot status indicates the launcher is fully capable of firing. Usually, the status is based on the launcher's
electrical and mechanical systems, not on its location or ammunition load. A launcher may be hot and,
therefore, mechanically capable of firing. However, it may not be on or near a FP or perhaps it may not have
any, or enough, or the right type of ammunition aboard.

4-18 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

Cold
4-110. Cold status indicates the launcher is not mission capable for maintenance reasons or that one or more
essential systems are shut down. This status is typically entered for maintenance, preventive maintenance
checks and services, or crew rest. If a cold launcher is to become mission capable, it may take 30 minutes or
more for it to respond.
4-111. The launchers have only two posturing modes; hot and cold.
Table 4-4. Response postures
Posture
Location Response Time Remarks
Tactical Technical
Oriented:
awaiting FIRE
FP Immediate command or
OPER amended CFF at
extended aim
HOT FP 2 minutes ONC
HA 3 to 6 minutes
Moving from RL
6 to 8 minutes Munitions loaded
to FP/HA
MOBL
Moving from FP No munitions
15 to 35 minutes
to RL loaded
30 minutes or PMCS, rest, or
N/A
more refueling
OPER Unscheduled
COLD
INOP maintenance or
N/A N/A
otherwise out of
action
Legend:
CFF—call for fire FP—firing point HA—hide area INOP—inoperational MOBL—mobile
ONC—on call OPER—operational PMCS—preventive maintenance checks and services
RL—reload point SPLL—self-propelled loader launcher

TECHNICAL POSTURING
4-112. The launcher crew makes one or more entries into the FCS using a launcher status message to notify
the BOC of the launcher status and location. The status is entered as launcher OPER or INOP. Additional
explanatory entries and the launcher's current location and altitude are entered.

OPER
4-113. Upon entering OPER into the launcher status message, the crew must choose a numeric code to further
identify the launcher status. For OPER messages, these are location codes. When launcher status is sent, the
AFATDS displays the launcher status (OPER or INOP), current ammunition loaded and quantity, the number of
priority and standard missions, code location, and the last met that it received. Unit TSOP may assign code
messages, but only the code number will appear on the AFATDS. For example, OPER 06 might indicate that
the launcher is fire mission capable but is displacing with the platoon to a new area of operations.

INOP
4-114. The crew usually sends an INOP launcher status message to the BOC when the launcher is not mission
capable. Instead of indicating locations like OPER codes do, INOP codes indicate reasons for the launcher
being INOP. The codes may be assigned messages under the unit’s TSOP. The messages are displayed on the
AFATDS weapons data when launcher status is transmitted. For example, INOP 07 might mean that the
launcher is INOP if the crew is conducting preventive maintenance checks and services or refueling.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-19

Chapter 4

Launcher Status Message

4-115. After entering the OPER or INOP codes, the crew must verify and enter the launcher's grid coordinates
and altitude for transmission to the AFATDS. The launcher status is transmitted after the location fields are
edited. launcher status messages can also be used to send additional information. If a fire mission is stored in
the FCS, the crew edits and transmits the fire mission target number. If no fire mission is stored, the target
number is sent blank. The number and type of rockets onboard also can be sent. This updates the AFATDS on
the launcher ammunition load. If the LM has been laid for a fire mission, the crew can transmit the azimuth of
fire, quadrant elevation, and fuze time. If the LM is not laid, these data are all zeros.

Fire Direction System Posturing

4-116. The FCS weapon status window in AFATDS shows launchers as OP (operational), PART (partial),
MOBL (mobile), or INOP. The MOBL, or INOP launchers are not considered by the AFATDS when selecting
a launcher to fire. The AFATDS continuously displays each launcher status and the code location and/or reason
for the status in weapons data. This provides easy reference for the BOC personnel in determining the battery's
overall and individual launcher status and location. The AFATDS can transmit a command message to a
launcher, directing the crew to bring the launcher to a hot (OPER) status. This message automatically turns on
the stabilization reference package/position determining system to begin the process (see Table 4-5).

LAUNCHER INITIALIZATION STATES

4-117. Upon initialization of the M270A1/M142 fire control system that includes entering GPS keys, the GPS
receiver in the PNU initializes from one of two states—warm or cold, also referred to as warm start and cold
start. The initialization state is dependent on the quantity and quality of the navigation data available for use
during initialization. Previous navigation data, if available, is stored on the mass storage unit and used during
GPS receiver initialization. Navigation data includes receiver location, time, almanac, and ephemeris. GPS
receiver initialization is not possible without keys and usable signals from at least 4 satellites.

4-20 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

Table 4-5. GPS initialization states

STARTUP CATEGORY
DATA PARAMETER
COLD WARM HOT
Position Error 100 km 11 km 200 m
Velocity Error 75 m/sec 5 m/sec 2 m/sec
Time Error 1 year 1 min < 10 μs
Almanac Age none < 3 months N/A
Ephemeris Age none None 4 hours
Time to Fix 17 min 60 sec 20 sec
Success Probability 90% 90% 95%
Legend:
Km—kilometer min—minute m/sec—meter per second
μs—microsecond sec—second

Warm Start
4-118. A warm start is possible if the following criteria are met:
 FCS is initialized with time (Zulu) that is within 5 minutes of synchronization with the GPS.
 FCS is initialized with a location that is accurate within 5 kilometers.
 Almanac and ephemeris data are stored on the mass storage unit.
4-119. The GPS receiver will use this data to search for satellite signals. If 4 or more usable satellite signals
are acquired and can be tracked, the GPS receiver will initialize and the PNU will become GPS aided in
approximately two minutes. GPS aided is the desired navigational mode of the M270A1/M142.

Cold Start
4-120. If time, almanac, and ephemeris criteria are not met for a warm start, the GPS receiver will initialize
from a cold start state. This may take as long as 17 minutes to complete. launcher location that is accurate
within 5 kilometers is also required for a cold start initialization. Initializing the PNU at a SCP in the non-aided
mode and conducting the GPS receiver cold start while moving may reduce the time required for cold start. The
GPS receiver becomes GPS aided as a result of the cold start initialization and the navigation data recorded on
the mass storage unit, which makes future warm starts possible.

Reacquisition
4-121. If satellite signal is lost and reacquired in less than 20 seconds a warm/cold start is not required. If
reacquisition does not occur within 20 seconds, a warm start is required and will take approximately two
minutes.

Note. If the location stored on the mass storage unit prior to movement varies by more than 5
kilometer from the location determined by the PNU when it becomes GPS aided, the gunner will
receive the following prompt on the gunners display unit: “POSITIONING VIOLATION RECYCLE
AND UPDATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS.” The Gunner must power down the system and restart
with a location grid within 5 kilometer of the current launcher location. The FCS will not allow fire
mission processing until this is accomplished. Ideally, the launcher should remain in at least a warm
start condition while in the hide area. This allows the launcher to reestablish satellite track quickly
while moving to the firing point. This maximizes the opportunity to fire the missile in a GPS aided
mode.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-21

Chapter 4

Weapon GPS Receiver Initialization Data

4-122. Initialization data is transferred from the PNU to the GPS receiver embedded in the ATACMS or
GMLRS, immediately after launcher lay. The accuracy of time, location, and ephemeris data makes rapid
initialization of the missile GPS receiver possible. This data transfer and initialization of the missile GPS
receiver is referred to as hot start. This initialization can be completed in approximately 20 seconds.

DETACHMENT OF THE MLRS/HIMARS FIRING PLATOON

4-123. The MLRS/HIMARS firing platoon can provide fires without its parent battery or battalion. Logistical
support of the detached platoon is a significant challenge. For a short time, a cannon battalion could provide
limited support while the platoon’s assigned ammunition section provides short haul Class V resupply.

SECTION IV – RECONNAISSANCE, SELECTION, AND OCCUPATION OF

POSITION

PLANNING
4-124. Because MLRS/HIMARS units are dispersed, firing platoons conduct their own RSOP. The battery
commander and the first sergeant conduct the reconnaissance and selection for only the battery HQ positions.
4-125. Platoon OPAREA reconnaissance is the responsibility of the platoon leader and the primary duty of the
reconnaissance sergeant. The platoon reconnaissance party may also include the platoon sergeant in the platoon
leader's absence and/or the ammunition section chief (or his representative) to advise on ammunition holding
area positioning.

RECONNAISSANCE, SELECTION, AND OCCUPATION OF POSITION

PROCESS
4-126. Frequent moves are common to MLRS/HIMARS operations. The battery commander must anticipate
movement; always planning in advance for displacement. The commander must keep the controlling
headquarters advised of all factors that will impact on the movement of a platoon, the headquarters, or the
battery as a whole.
4-127. The keys to a successful RSOP are discipline, teamwork, and rehearsal. A mission analysis is
conducted to determine what the unit is required to do and how long it has to do it. Mission variables are
considered and troop-leading procedures are initiated. Troop leading procedures provide a mental framework to
ensure complete preparation, dissemination, and execution of the battery mission. The process provides a
checklist for the commander from receipt of the mission to execution.
4-128. Because MLRS/HIMARS units are dispersed, firing platoons conduct their own reconnaissance
selection and occupation of position. The battery commander and the first sergeant conduct the reconnaissance
and selection for only the battery headquarters positions. The time available will dictate the method of
reconnaissance employed. The battery commander/first sergeant selects the reconnaissance party based on the
mission and unit tactical standard operating procedures. Ammunition personnel are often included in
reconnaissance parties to offer advice on vehicle placement and provide additional defensive firepower.
4-129. Platoon operational area reconnaissance is the responsibility of the platoon leader and the primary duty
of the reconnaissance sergeant. The platoon reconnaissance party may also include the platoon sergeant in the
platoon leader's absence and/or the ammunition section chief (or his representative) to advise on ammunition
holding area positioning.
4-130. Mission variables and unit tactical standard operating procedures will dictate the size and composition
of the advance party. Personnel on the advance party prepare the selected position for occupation by the main
body and conduct a security sweep. Battery headquarters personnel conduct advance party operations. Firing
platoons prepare their positions during reconnaissance operations. After the advance or reconnaissance party,
with its jump battery operations center or forward platoon headquarters, has emplaced and is ready to transfer
mission command, the main body moves and occupies the new position.

4-22 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

4-131. These steps may occur out of order or simultaneously after receipt of the mission:
 Receive the mission. Upon receipt of a warning order, field artillery support plan or OPORD, the
commander must analyze the mission to identify fire support tasks. He examines each task to
determine specific ammunition, logistics, and unit preparation requirements. He should identify the
pre-combat checks that the sections must accomplish in priority. A battery TSOP should have
precombat checks that support routine tasks. These checklists streamline mission preparation.
Finally, the commander needs to set a time line for all critical events from issuing the warning order
to execution.
 Issue the warning order. The commander takes his battery mission, fire support tasks, precombat
check priorities, and time line and issues a warning order to maximize battery preparation time. Even
incomplete information can allow the sections to accomplish most of their required preparations. A
modified five paragraph order works well.
 Make a tentative plan. The commander must gather information to make his plan by focusing on
battery level mission variables of METT-TC and IPB, if available. The commander is concerned with
positioning, movement, logistic support, rehearsals, and defense as he makes his plan.
 Initiate movement. If the mission requires repositioning, the commander should start his battery
movement as early as possible to make best use of available time.
 Conduct reconnaissance. Depending on METT-TC, the reconnaissance may consist of standard
map products to nonstandard tailored map products that enhances terrain visualization to include 3-D
mapping, air corridors, and cross country mobility corridors. Based on the map reconnaissance,
coordination for engineer support and security should be requested. Ideally, it will consist of ground
reconnaissance, to verify terrain type and preparing to receive the platoon or battery.
 Complete the plan. The commander must organize the information into a coherent order to issue to
his sections. The level of detail will vary but must, at a minimum, convey the essential information to
accomplish the critical fire support tasks. Prepare a terrain sketch or map board to use to issue the
order. Rehearse to ensure a focused and clear delivery.
 Issue the order. Key players must be present for the brief. Headquarters and BOC personnel should
attend so they understand their role. Be concise but specific in the sub-unit missions to each section.
Once complete, use back brief techniques to make sure your orders and priorities are understood.
Have key leaders back brief you after they have had time to analyze and implement their part of the
plan. State the specific items you will check or have another leader check. Update your time line and
rehearsal schedule.
 Supervise. This is the most important step. Leaders must conduct precombat inspections and spot
check the plan to ensure that standards are met. In the defense especially, leaders must ensure that
weapon range cards, fighting positions, observation posts, and knowledge are to standard. Use
subordinate leaders to assist, but the commander must conduct the priority precombat inspections.
4-132. The time available will dictate the method of reconnaissance employed. The reconnaissance party is
selected by the battery commander/1SG based on the mission and unit TSOP. Ammunition personnel are often
included in reconnaissance parties to offer advice on vehicle placement and provide additional defensive
firepower.
4-133. METT-TC and unit TSOP will dictate the size and composition of the advance party. Personnel on the
advance party prepare the selected position for occupation by the main body and conduct a security sweep.
Battery headquarters personnel conduct advance party operations. Firing platoons prepare their positions during
reconnaissance operations.
4-134. After the advance or reconnaissance party, with its jump BOC or forward platoon HQ, has emplaced
and is ready to transfer mission command, the main body moves and occupies the new position. For a complete
discussion of RSOP procedures, refer to FM 3-09.21.

PLATOON OPERATIONS AREA CONSIDERATIONS

4-135. One of the advantages of MLRS/HIMARS is that the system requires very little, if any, position
preparation. The MLRS/HIMARS firing platoon uses no advance party. The position preparation that does

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-23

Chapter 4

occur is either completed during the reconnaissance or does not impact on operations and is completed after
occupation.
4-136. The firing platoon has considerations beyond those discussed under the battery headquarters section:
 Communications with the BOC.
 Open areas for firing points.
 Dispersion requirements of platoon position types; for example, firing points, hide areas, reload
points, SCPs, platoon HQ, and ammunition holding area.
 Maximum cover and concealment for the platoon.
 Trafficability within the OPAREA and location of the main supply route.
 Availability of a road network to reduce ground signature.
 Traffic patterns for reload and other operations.
 No major terrain or manmade features interfering with OPAREA operations.
 Establish easily identifiable displacement routes from the OPAREA.

Occupation
4-137. When the platoon sergeant arrives with the main body of the platoon, the platoon leader must ensure
that all launchers are configured with proper munitions as required, receive area of operations data, and are
thoroughly briefed on the operational area. The platoon sergeant should ensure that all combat, mission
command, and support vehicles are positioned in accordance with the platoon leader's guidance.

Security
4-138. Because of the limited number of personnel, lack of crew-served weapons, and large size of the platoon
area, defense against a ground attack is limited. The platoon is a high-value target for enemy ground maneuver
and special operations forces. Because the platoon is often positioned as close as possible to the forward line of
own troops in the area of operations, security must be a high priority to avoid exposing the launchers and nearby
friendly units to enemy ground or indirect fire attack. The keys to survivability are the avoidance of detection
and passive defense. The platoon sergeant is in charge of the platoon area security and performs the following
tasks:
 Coordinates with battery first sergeant to ensure platoon area security is integrated with the battery
defense plan. Uses mines and trip flares, if available (which requires extensive coordination).
 Gives a rendezvous grid to each launcher for use in case of hasty or emergency displacement.
 Places all crew served weapons on the most likely avenues of approach to the platoon headquarters
(usually with the listening/observation post at the entry control point in the ammunition holding
area).
 Has launcher chiefs dismount one man in the hide area to provide local security, except during a fire
mission

MASKING DATA
4-139. Masks are terrain features that have enough altitude to interfere with the trajectory of the rocket or
missile. There are two categories of masks: immediate and downrange. Immediate masks are within 2,000
meters of a launcher firing point and are measured and input to the fire control system by individual section
chiefs. Downrange masks are beyond 2,000 meters and are measured and input to the AFATDS by the platoon
leader and/or battery operations officer, in accordance with unit operating procedures.

Automated Downrange Mask Checks

4-140. Downrange masks can be entered in the AFATDS as three-dimensional boxes around the terrain
feature. They are then used by the AFATDS during tactical fire direction to determine whether the target can be
ranged from the launcher firing point (or platoon center) without striking a major terrain feature. The operations
officer and/or platoon leader conducts a terrain profile analysis of the area and identifies terrain features that

4-24 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

may interfere with the trajectory. The platoon leader measures each of the terrain features in terms of altitude,
width, and grid coordinates. He then ensures entry of this data into the AFATDS.
4-141. A consideration in using this method is that the three-dimensional box will normally be much larger
than an existing terrain feature. This means that, although a terrain feature may not physically interfere with the
trajectory, the described downrange mask may cause the AFATDS to detect a violation. Leaders can reduce this
effect by selecting the smallest acceptable value for downrange mask width.

Figure 4-4. Masking

SECTION V – CONTINGENCY OPERATIONS

FORCE PROJECTION
4-142. MLRS/HIMARS units must be capable of deploying anywhere in the world with little or no notice to
provide long-range artillery fires for contingency forces. The following discussion is not intended to be all
inclusive but rather to highlight considerations when planning for contingency operations and deployment.
4-143. Force projection usually begins as a contingency operation—a rapid response to a crisis. Alert may
come without notice, bringing with it a tremendous stress on soldiers and systems, accompanied by pressure
from various external sources. In any event, rapid yet measured response is critical.
4-144. The following are considerations when preparing a force projection package.

DEPLOYMENT READINESS
4-145. Deployment readiness requires much leader time, focus, and energy. It also takes a great deal of soldier
time to train for deployment, maintain deployment administrative and logistical sustainability, and continually
follow up. A key to success is each unit’s deployment SOP. The SOP should be a thorough document designed
to prepare the unit for deployment. The SOP ensures continuity as leaders change and prevents a rather complex
process from being misunderstood. Consider including each of the following items when preparing the SOP:
 Concept of deployment.
 Required preparation procedures.
 Deployment assistance.
 Notification hour sequence.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-25

Chapter 4

 Checklists.
 Report formats.

Training for Deployment

4-146. Demanding and relevant training for deployment is important. It includes the tactical training necessary
to cover contingencies in addition to rehearsing actual deployment procedures often. Soldiers should review tie
down procedures for transporting the unit via land, sea, or air. Practice includes all units rehearsing their parts in
the alert sequence. When alerted to deploy, MLRS/HIMARS units must build on home station training by
focusing on missions and conditions they expect to encounter in a particular contingency. Leaders must conduct
mission essential individual and collective training during deployment and after arriving in the joint area of
operations.

ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICAL READINESS

4-147. In addition to tactical and deployment task proficiency, administrative and logistical sustainability to
execute deployment require constant command emphasis. Primary factors include personnel, medical, and
equipment readiness. Units must establish, maintain, and report prioritized lists of the following information:
 Personnel and equipment shortages.
 Non-mission capable, combat essential equipment.
4-148. Battalions must also verify that soldiers have completed weapon qualification, required individual and
collective training such as CBRN common skills training, and that they have completed 100 percent of soldier
readiness processing for overseas movement, which may include the following:
 Personnel deployability:
 Updated DD Form 93 (Record of Emergency Data).
 Servicemembers' Group Life Insurance Election and Certificate (SGLV) Form 8286
(Servicemembers' Group Life Insurance Election and Certificate).
 Wills and powers of attorney.
 Properly sealed identification card.
 Identification tags.
 Privately owned vehicle disposition instructions.
 Approved family care plan (if required).
 Medical/dental deployability:
 Immunizations.
 Human immunodeficiency virus test.
 Physical exam.
 Panoramic x-ray.
 Dental category one or two.
4-149. Relatively minor discrepancies in personnel deployability criteria may be exacerbated in the face of
deployment. Family care plans must be initiated and continuously reviewed. Family situations often change,
and a care packet that is not properly maintained may contain outdated information.
4-150. Finally, the unit must establish and update unit movement plans, rear detachment plans (for example,
disposition of personal property and privately owned vehicles), recall plans, and alert rosters. Recall plans
should be practiced often and revised as necessary.

INTELLIGENCE
4-151. Early deploying units usually face a maze of complex information requirements—some relating to the
threat, others to local laws, availability of facilities, and similar considerations. Force projection operations need
accurate and responsive tactical intelligence. To satisfy their intelligence requirements, MLRS/HIMARS
commanders must determine the available sources and establish connectivity with appropriate agencies.

4-26 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

FORCE TAILORING
4-152. Force tailoring is the process of determining the right mix of forces and the sequence of their
deployment in support of a joint force commander (ADRP 3-0). MLRS/HIMARS commanders must be ready to
deploy subordinate elements of their unit to support a particular force projection package.

JOINT OPERATIONS
4-153. Joint operations occur when multiple service and functional components combine efforts under a joint
task force. The synchronization of air, land, sea, space, and special operations forces is critical to effectiveness
and ultimate mission accomplishment. MLRS/HIMARS units may support any of a number of components
during joint operations. One of the most likely is MLRS/HIMARS support of a Marine air ground task force.
The exact size and composition of the MLRS/HIMARS unit to support Marine air ground task force operations
will be a function of the mission variables of METT-TC. Normally, an MLRS/HIMARS battery or battalion
will support a Marine expeditionary force or Marine expeditionary force forward based on the mission variables
of METT-TC.

MULTINATIONAL OPERATIONS
4-154. Multinational operations occur when two or more nations combine their efforts in a military operation.
Force projection operations will almost always involve operations with other nations. MLRS/HIMARS
commanders and soldiers should be sensitive to cultural differences that may impact their operations.

HOT PANEL
4-155. Hot Panel capability allows for the M142 to maintain launcher location and GPS signal while in flight,
which enabling the launcher to have true "roll off and fire" capability. It is a capability primarily incorporated in
the launcher software, which allows the launcher fire control system to remain powered on and fully initialized
during air transport, or to be powered on and initialize while in flight. This capability is accomplished by
modifications to the software that allow the launcher to maintain heading and crypto keys using GPS signals
that are provided by the use of the joint precision airdrop system, which allows global positioning system
rebroadcast system inside the cargo bay of the transport aircraft. The Hot Panel capability allows the launcher to
be fully mission capable ("ready to shoot") as soon as it is off loaded from the aircraft. Hot Panel capability
allows for rapid engagement of critical targets while significantly increasing the survivability of the launcher,
crew, and aircraft due to reduced exposure to hostile fires. Additionally, precision strike missions employing
GMLRS rockets or ATACMS missiles can be accomplished utilizing the same aircraft.

MEANS OF DEPLOYMENT
AIR
4-156. C130 and larger aircraft are able to load and transport the HIMARS M142. The MLRS M270A1
requires a C17 or larger aircraft for transport (see Table 4-6). MLRS/HIMARS battery commanders must ensure
that their Soldiers are familiar with aircraft loading procedures as well as with Air Force rules and regulations
regarding transport of equipment. Units must maintain current strategic load plans for all types of aircraft. The
air load planning system enables computation of the required number and type of aircraft to carry the specified
equipment and troops to be airlifted.
Table 4-6. Transportability by aircraft
Aircraft
System/Missile
C-130 C-17 C-5
M270A1 Launcher 0 2 3
M142 Launcher 1 3 4
Rocket Pod 4 pods 16 pods 22 pods
Guided Missile Launch Assembly 4 pods 16 pods 22 pods

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-27

Chapter 4

SEA
4-157. MLRS/HIMARS batteries must also be prepared to deploy their equipment by sea. This is especially
true for follow-on forces. Commanders should ensure that their units are familiar with all facets of sealift
operations.

LAND
4-158. MLRS/HIMARS batteries must often move their equipment to a seaport by rail or heavy equipment
transport and then load the equipment onto ships. Battery commanders must be familiar with specific vehicular
requirements for transport and ensure that their Soldiers are trained on proper loading techniques.

DEPLOYMENT PACKAGES
4-159. Because contingency forces are tailored to meet specific mission requirements, it is possible that only
parts of an MLRS/HIMARS unit will deploy as part of a force projection package. These packages assume that
a slice of mission command up to the battalion level will accompany each package (The liaison vehicle is often
used.). This allows for more rapid integration of follow on elements of the battalion by having the structure in
place. It also facilitates activities such as operational and logistics liaison with support from the battalion. Table
4-7 gives examples of possible MLRS/HIMARS packages that could support contingency operations. These
tables are general in nature and do not include detailed ancillary personnel and equipment requirements. These
tables do, however, include approximate numbers of direct support maintenance equipment and personnel.
Table 4-7. MLRS/HIMARS contingency packages
MLRS/HIMARS Battery Package MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Package
Major Items of Equipment Qty Major Items of Equipment Qty
HIMARS Launcher 8 HIMARS Launcher 16
M1152, rigid wall shelter or M1152, rigid wall shelter or
4 8
M1068 M1068
MTV W/MHE 20 MTV W/MHE 40
HMMWV 6 HMMWV 12
MLRS Launcher 8 MLRS Launcher 16
M985 HEMTT 16 M985 HEMTT 32
HMMWVs 14 HMMWVs 28
Personnel Personnel
HIMARS 75 HIMARS 150
MLRS 71 MLRS 142
Air Frames Air Frames
C5A 5 C5A 17
C17 9 C17 17
Legend:
HEMTT—heavy expanded mobility tactical truck HMMWV— high-mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle
MLRS—multiple launch rocket system HIMARS—high mobility artillery rocket system
MST—maintenance support team

SPECIAL OPERATIONS
OPERATIONS IN MOUNTAINOUS TERRAIN
4-160. More ammunition may be required to support the force in mountainous terrain because of reduced
munitions effects.

4-28 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

4-161. Additionally, mountainous regions may affect MLRS/HIMARS employment because of the low
trajectory of MLRS/HIMARS rocket munitions. Leaders should use the crest clearance tables in planning
platoon area of operations (see Appendix E).
4-162. Mission command is degraded in mountainous regions because of decreased effectiveness of radio
communications. Movement control is more difficult on winding mountain roads, as is occupation and
displacement. Terrain marches may be impractical or impossible.
4-163. Logistics resupply is more difficult because of the limited number of roads and slower convoy speeds.
Survey may not be as accurate, and terrain masks may limit target acquisition. Cross country restrictions force
the threat to use roads and trails, which will enhance interdiction fires. Ambushes are likely in this type of
terrain.

OPERATIONS IN JUNGLE TERRAIN

4-164. MLRS/HIMARS is not normally appropriate for jungle operations. Jungle terrain is more suited to light
cannon artillery. The MLRS/HIMARS generally requires open firing areas and freedom of movement to
maximize both its effectiveness and survivability. Jungle operations also present problems because of the high
humidity and dense vegetation. Humidity may reduce electronic equipment and launcher line replaceable unit
operability. Dense vegetation degrades M77 munitions effects. In a thick canopy, DPICM is not effective.
4-165. Communication is degraded because of high humidity, vegetation density, and electronic line of sight
restrictions. Antennas may have to be elevated to overcome line of sight restrictions.
4-166. Immediate masks are prevalent in jungle terrain. Selection of platoon area of operations and launcher
firing points is hampered by soft terrain and thick vegetation. Terrain marches may be restricted.
4-167. Logistics resupply is hampered by reduced mobility, and survey control is more difficult to establish.
Target acquisition accuracy is degraded because of heavy foliage. Launchers should be positioned closer
together to provide for better security.

NORTHERN REGION OPERATIONS

4-168. Northern operations are characterized by frozen earth, snow covered terrain, intense sunlight, and
prolonged darkness. Rocket and missile smoke trails last longer in cold weather, thus making launchers more
readily identifiable to threat TA assets.
4-169. Radio communications can be unreliable in extreme cold, and equipment may become inoperative.
4-170. Frozen, snow covered terrain may limit the number of available positions for platoon area of
operations. Mobility is slowed for headquarters elements, as wheeled vehicles and trailers generally are not
suited for operations in northern areas. In extreme cold, metal tends to become brittle and parts breakage
increases. Convoys must travel in a close column during whiteout conditions and prolonged darkness.
4-171. Reduced mobility and difficulty in determining grid locations hamper logistics resupply. Snowstorms
and intense cold can adversely affect target acquisition equipment.

URBAN OPERATIONS
4-172. The massive growth of urban areas and manmade changes to the landscape significantly affect the
conduct of future battles. Commanders at all levels must be aware of the unique advantages and disadvantages
associated with operations conducted in and around cities, towns, villages, and similar built up areas. Special
techniques may be used in attacking the defilade areas between buildings. Increasing the target altitude used in
the AFATDS and FCS will allow the submunitions to achieve a more vertical fall prior to detonation and thus
clear buildings and other obstructions (see Figure 4-5). Commanders must, however, consider the precision
error and large submunitions dispersion patterns when applying this method of attack due to the high probability
of extensive collateral damage. Low level winds at the target area will add to the precision error. At longer
ranges, large altitude adjustments may yield a “NO SOLUTION ERROR” in the launcher FCS.
4-173. Mission command of a firing platoon operating in an urban area is demanding. Decentralization to the
maximum feasible extent may be required. The reduced ability to communicate necessitates more detailed

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-29

Chapter 4

orders and TSOPs. The height and density of structures reduce the planning ranges for all organic radio
equipment. Imaginative positioning of antennas for the platoon HQ, such as intermingling them with existing
civilian antennas or in treetops, may increase transmission range and enhance survivability. Existing civilian
communication networks may be used to supplement the organic capability of the unit.

Figure 4-5. Urban targeting solution

4-174. MLRS/HIMARS units should not position launchers in built up areas. Buildings can serve as
concealment for hide areas, but the low trajectory of the system necessitates open areas for firing. Any urban
area used for hide or CP positions should—
 Be free of civilians.
 Be away from the center of the built up area.
 Have several routes of escape.
 Be off the main high speed avenues.
 Afford as much cover and concealment as possible.
4-175. The use of existing structures as hide areas or CP locations maximizes protection and minimizes the
camouflage effort.
4-176. More time must be allotted for reconnaissance. Depending on the density of buildings in the area, the
reconnaissance party may have to use infantry techniques for house to house fighting to clear and check the
buildings.

DESERT OPERATIONS
4-177. Deserts are arid, barren regions that cannot support any quantity of life because of lack of fresh water.
They are characterized by temperature extremes (136 degrees Fahrenheit in Libya or Mexico to bitter cold in
the Gobi Desert) with fluctuations exceeding 70 degrees Fahrenheit. Fire support considerations vary according
to the type of desert; however, considerations common to all include munitions effects due to the temperature
extremes and a lack of identifiable terrain features. The three types of deserts are discussed below.

MOUNTAIN
4-178. The desert is characterized by barren, rocky ranges separated by flat basins that may be studded by
deep gullies created during flash floods.

ROCKY PLATEAU
4-179. The desert has slight relief with extended flat areas and good visibility. It is characterized by steep
walled, eroded valleys (wadis). These are extremely attractive for concealment and limited cover but are subject
to flash flooding.

4-30 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Unit Operations

SANDY OR DUNE
4-180. The desert has extensive flat areas covered with dunes subject to wind erosion. The dune size, the
texture of sand, and the leeward gradient may diminish haul capacity or prohibit movement entirely.
4-181. Map reading is difficult and resections are impossible, unless a number of prominent points are
available. Position data from IPADS, the launcher FCS, and the DAGR are critical.
4-182. Lack of vegetation makes camouflage difficult. In all cases, the MLRS/HIMARS unit is visible to the
ground observer. From about 400 meters in the air, the camouflaged CPs appear bigger than the surrounding
dunes or mounds of sand and vegetation. Moving directly from position to position using special formations is
not only feasible but often preferable.
4-183. High temperature and ever present sand cause failures in mechanical and electronic equipment. Fuel
and air filters must be cleaned after each operation, sometimes twice per day. Optics become opaque unless
protected. Static electricity caused by hot winds interferes with refueling operations, radio traffic, and launcher
reload operations. Turning radii of tracked vehicles is limited because of the buildup of sand between the idler
wheel and the track. See FM 90-3 for additional information on desert operations.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 4-31

This page intentionally left blank.
 Chapter 5
Delivery of Fires
The delivery of field artillery fires depends on locating an appropriate target, analyzing
that target to determine the proper method of attack (tactical fire direction), converting
the call for fire into firing data (technical fire direction), and delivering the required
ordnance on the target to meet the needs of the supported commander. The versatility of
the MLRS/HIMARS automated systems allows smooth, rapid, and accurate fire planning,
target processing, and engagement. This chapter addresses those functions of the battalion
that are directly associated with the delivery of fires.

SECTION I – INTRODUCTION

ORGANIZATION AND STRUCTURE

ORGANIZATION
5-1. Organizations supported by MLRS/HIMARS units normally include brigade, division, corps, and
echelons above corps and/or joint task force. A number of fire support planning and execution agencies support
the targeting process for, and request fires from, MLRS/HIMARS units.

STRUCTURE
5-2. Mission command requirements for MLRS/HIMARS units are centered on a fire support structure that
supports the concept of operation. This structure includes acquisition, mission command, and fire control
systems from the sensor system through the delivery system

PROCESSING BY ECHELON
5-3. It is essential that requests for fires be entered as expeditiously as possible into the fire support system.
This is done manually or in a semiautomatic mode using a variety of systems. The AFATDS is used for fires
support functions from corps to platoon level. All fire planning and FDC personnel work with supporting
functions of the system appropriate to the assigned echelon.
5-4. Brigade and higher fires cell (AFATDS):
 Functions as the primary fire planning and execution system for all assigned missions.
 Determines target values and priorities.
 Considers and determines commander's criteria for effects/effects processing.
 Conducts weapon to target pairing.
 Determines units to fire based on coordinated airspace.
 Acts as the primary fire planning agency for ATACMS.
 Considers target values and priorities.
 Implements commander's criteria for effects.
 Checks for FSCM violations.
 Performs fire planning function.
 Performs tactical fire direction and status reporting.
 Establishes ammunition expenditure and supply limits.
 Processes fire mission message to MLRS/HIMARS Battalion FDC.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-1

Chapter 5

5-5. Battalion computer (AFATDS):

 Distributes fire missions to specified firing Batteries based of tactical data requirements.
 Checks for FSCM violations.
 Performs tactical fire direction and status reporting.
 Assists Batteries in coordination of positions.
 Coordinates and distributes fire plans (target lists) to batteries.
5-6. Battery/Platoon computer (AFATDS).
 Performs tactical fire direction and status reporting.
 Checks for FSCM violations.
 Checks for mask violations.
 Assigns missions to launchers based on current status.
 Transmission of fire orders.
 Executes fire plans.
 Maintains launcher status.
 Maintains current ammunition count.
 Reports MTO for given fire missions.
 Maintains record of fire.

FIRE DIRECTION CENTERS

BATTALION
5-7. The battalion FDC tactically controls the fires of the battalion with the AFATDS. The battalion FDC is
the net control station for the operations/fire and fire direction nets and the primary link with the supported
commander’s FSC for all delivery of fires by the MLRS/HIMARS battalion.
5-8. Selection of targets for the MLRS/HIMARS battalion is the responsibility of the controlling field artillery
headquarters or FSC. Fire plans are sent to a battalion as target lists with specific implementing instructions (for
example, H-hour and times relative to H-hour in a series). The battalion selects platoons to execute the fire
missions then transmits the targets or the complete plans to the battery for execution. Targets that fall in the
category of unscheduled fires are distributed on the basis of battery or platoon status (range to target, number of
missions in progress, launcher availability, and ammunition type and status).

BATTERY
5-9. The MLRS/HIMARS battery’s primary function is delivery of fires. The AFATDS enables the battery
commander to perform the function of mission command for all battery assets and, if necessary, assume control
of battalion functions. The battery engages targets in one of two modes—preplanned and targets of opportunity
The battery AFATDS usually performs the fire direction tasks automatically. The battery AFATDS uses the
“fire when ready”, “at my command”, and “time on target” methods of control (see paragraph 5-40 for more
details). Battery fire direction center functions include the following:
 Target analysis and selection of type and number of rockets and/or missiles to fire based upon
established guidance.
 Downrange mask checks.
 Fire support coordination measures and air corridor checks.
 Selection of launcher to respond.
 Transmission of fire orders.
 Recording the missions.

5-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

PLATOON
5-10. The AFATDS enables the platoon to monitor and control platoon launchers and, if necessary, assume
control of battery functions. When fire mission data is received or manually entered, the fire control system
automatically processes the information. Once executed, the actual firing of the munitions is initiated with
inputs from the AFATDS operator. The method of fire control determines when the fire control system permits
these actions.

SECTION II – ACCURATE PREDICTED FIRE

5-11. Providing lethal, responsive fires in support of maneuver is dependent on the ability to achieve accurate
first round fire for effects on targets precisely when needed. To achieve responsive fires, MLRS/HIMARS units
must conduct thorough and effective fire planning, and maximize the capabilities and the versatility of
automated systems (AFATDS, FCS) used for tactical and technical fire control.
5-12. If these requirements are met, the firing unit will be able to deliver accurate fires. If the requirements for
accurate predicted fire cannot be met completely, accuracy will be degraded accordingly.

TARGET SIZE AND LOCATION

5-13. Establishing the range from the launcher to the target requires accurate and timely detection,
identification, and location of targets. Determining their size and disposition on the ground is also necessary so
accurate firing data can be computed. Determining the appropriate time and type of attack requires
consideration of the target size (radius, altitude, width, or length) and the direction and speed of movement.
Target location is determined by using various TA assets.

FIRING UNIT LOCATION AND METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATON

5-14. Accurate range and direction from the launcher to the target requires accurate launcher location. Each
launcher is capable of determining its location to the appropriate accuracy. Additionally, as back up, the
battalion survey section may use the IPADS to provide accurate survey information for launchers as required.
5-15. To achieve accurate first-round effects on a target, MLRS/HIMARS units must compensate for
nonstandard conditions as time and situations permit. Of the 5 requirements for accurate predicted fire,
MLRS/HIMARS units can ensure accurate firing unit location, accurate meteorological information, and
accurate computational procedures.

FIRING UNIT LOCATION

5-16. There are different required accuracies for a firing point versus a survey control point. The
MLRS/HIMARS survey control point accuracy requirement is 8 meters circular error probable for position and
3.6 meters probable error in altitude. The primary system for establishing position control for launchers is the
onboard global positioning system. Alternate means include the improved position and azimuth determining
system and defense advanced global positioning system receiver. These systems have different accuracies (see
Table 5-2).
5-17. On the basis of system accuracies of both the position and azimuth determining system and Defense
advanced global positioning system receiver and the required accuracies established for survey control points
and firing points, the defense advance global positioning system receiver and precision lightweight global
positioning system receiver can be used to establish position control provided the data is entered during an
update at the firing point from which the launcher will fire.
5-18. *Survey control points are no longer required for operations. Each fully operational M270A1/M142
launcher can establish its location using the onboard global positioning capabilities. M270A1/M142 launchers
that have lost their global positioning system capability can still fire missions as long as the launcher PNU is
updated on a last known location using another launcher, defense advanced global positioning system receiver
or survey control point.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-3

Chapter 5

Note. *Survey control points are required during degraded operations.

REQUIREMENTS OF SURVEY
5-19. The accuracy of the data produced by IPADS is directly related to the accuracy of its starting data. This
data can be obtained from higher headquarters, trig lists, or other artillery units operating in the same area as the
MLRS/HIMARS unit.

SURVEY SUPPORT
5-20. Each battalion has IPADS. The IPADS provides survey control for the current and planned platoon area
of operations. Each launcher has onboard GPS and a DAGR (ANPSN-13).
5-21. Each battalion IPADS is controlled by the battalion CP. The CP then directs the IPADS section to link up
with battery’s requiring survey support. The locations of all SCPs are maintained on the CP situation map or
charts for future use. On completion of the survey mission, a IPADS chief reports to the battalion CP for further
instructions.

REQUIRED ACCURACIES
5-22. There are different required accuracies for firing points versus SCPs. STANAG 2934 defines the
MLRS/HIMARS SCP accuracy requirement as 8 meters circular error probable for position and 3.6 meters
probable error in altitude (see Table 5-1).
Table 5-1. Required accuracies
Circular Error Probable (Position) Probable Error (Altitude)
MLRS/HIMARS 8 meters 3.6 meters
Survey Control Points
STANAG 2934 and The Army Positioning and Navigation Master Plan, 9 September 1990.

SYSTEM ACCURACY
5-23. The primary systems for establishing position control for launchers (IPADS and DAGR) have different
system accuracies (see Table 5-2).
Table 5-2. System accuracy
System Circular Error Probable (Position) Probable Error (Altitude)
IPADS (1) 7 meters 3 meters
DAGR 10 meters 10 meters
Legend: DAGR — Defense advanced global positioning system receiver
IPADS — improved position azimuth determining system
Note (1). Updated using 10 min Z-VEL corrections and a figure of merit (FOM) of 1.

5-24. On the basis of the system accuracies of IPADS and DAGR and the required accuracies established for
SCPs and FPs, the DAGR can be used to establish position control if the data is entered during an update at the
FP from which the launcher will fire.

ALTERNATE METHODS OF POSITION CONTROL

5-25. If the launcher is not tracking GPS you should use alternate methods of position control:
 Use the DAGR to establish survey.
 Update using another launcher with operational GPS.
 Use adjacent unit SCPs or their survey assets to extend position control into the area of operations.
 Use SCPs outside the area of operations. Depending on the number of SCPs and their distance from
the firing points.

5-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

 Use a hasty survey (graphic resection) to establish position control.

 Use map spotting.

LAUNCHER SURVEY CONTROL

5-26. Accurate firing unit location is one of the prerequisites for accurate predicted fires. MLRS/HIMARS
M270A1/M142 operations uses its onboard global positioning system capabilities to establish its location. A
launcher or defense advanced global positioning receiver can be used to establish a position update location at
the reload points if communication with the global positioning system is lost.

Launcher Navigation
5-27. The PNU provides vehicle navigation data (easting, northing, altitude, and heading). The PNU preferred
mode of operation is in the global positioning system-aided mode. When global positioning system data is not
available, the PNU determines navigation data in the non-aided mode. The PNU gyros continuously measure
the angular relationship between the vehicle and true north to determine vehicle heading, which is displayed as
the grid azimuth toward which the front of the vehicle is pointed. Accelerometers measure vehicle acceleration
(motion) and roll, pitch, and yaw to determine vehicle easting, northing, and altitude. Vehicle odometer
encoders also provide data used for determining location.

M142/M270A1 Non aided Navigation Mode

5-28. When operating in a non aided navigation mode, a system parameter update and a zero velocity update is
required to maintain the required accuracy of 10 meters. This can be accomplished using another launcher,
defense advanced global positioning receiver, or survey control point.

METEOROLOGY MESSAGE
5-29. The effects of weather on rockets/missiles in flight must be considered, and firing data must compensate
for those effects(specifically non-aided rocket and missile). Use of current meteorological information in the
fire control system allows the firing solution to compensate for current weather conditions. The launcher fire
control system uses all lines of the current computer meteorology message to compute firing data. Rockets are
particularly sensitive to low-level winds. Meteorology messages are usually received in a digital secure mode
from the controlling headquarters AFATDS and/or meteorological measuring set. They are routed through the
battalion or battery and sent to the fire control system. The battery sends meteorology messages to all launchers
and platoons simultaneously. The platoon AFATDS can store the message and retransmit it to a launcher if
necessary. Both the platoon and the launcher fire control system can be manually loaded with meteorological
data through keyboard entry, if required. Current meteorological information can be obtained by
communicating directly with the meteorological measuring set.
5-30. The accuracy of a meteorology message may decrease as the distance from the meteorological sounding
site increases. Local topography has a pronounced effect on the distance that meteorological data can be
reasonably extended. The profiler is capable of providing meteorological data out to a distance of 500
kilometers from the meteorological measuring set-Profiler (AN/TMQ-52) location. This has been characterized
with excellent results, but has only been certified to 60 km (see FM 3-09.15).

SECTION III – TACTICAL AND TECHNICAL FIRE DIRECTION

TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION

5-31. Tactical fire direction is the process that results in a decision on whether and how a target will be
attacked. Specifically, it answers the following questions:
 Location of the target. Is it safe to fire? Is it within range? Are there intervening crests? Can the
target be attacked?
 Nature of the target. How large is it? What is its degree of protection?
 Timeliness of target information. Is it a fleeting target?

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-5

Chapter 5

 Ammunition available. What do the units have on hand to fire?

 Firing units available. Who is in range and ready to fire?
 Commander's guidance and fire support plan or unit SOP. What do we want to do to the target?
 Request for fire. What did the requestor ask for? Can the battalion give it to him? Should the
battalion give it to him?
 Munitions effects. Given the ammunition available, nature of the target, and commander's guidance,
how should the target be attacked?
 Tactical situation. When should the battalion fire? Are special instructions required?

TARGET ANALYSIS
5-32. Target analysis is the examination of a potential target to determine the most suitable weapon, firing unit,
ammunition, and method for attacking the target.
5-33. The amount of time devoted to target analysis and the thoroughness of the analysis depend on the
following:
 Amount of target information.
 Availability of weapons and munitions to attack the target.
 Urgency of the engagement.
 Precedence of attack.
5-34. A fires cell selects a particular precedence of attack after considering the target location error:
 Target characteristics. Targets vary considerably in composition, degree of protection, shape,
mobility, and recoverability.
 Target location. The proximity of the target to friendly troops, probability of collateral damage, and
the accuracy of the target location must be considered.
 Terrain. The terrain in the target area has a direct effect on the vulnerability of the target. Certain
terrain provides complete protection from some angles of approach but not from others. Thus, it
influences the unit and munitions to be employed. The type of vegetation in the target area should be
considered in the selection of ammunition.
 Weather. Weather is of little consequence in evaluating a target to be attacked with some munitions.
However, precipitation and wind are of particular importance when firing munitions containing sub-
munitions.
 Commander's criteria. All phases of target analysis are conducted within constraints established by
the commander. In determining the precedence for attacking a target, primary consideration should
be given to the commander's target priorities. On the basis of ammunition constraints, a commander
will also specify the type of effects desired against specific target sets. The three target effects
categories are suppression, neutralization, and destruction.

MOST SUITABLE AMMUNITION AND WEAPONS

5-35. When deciding to attack a target, selection of a weapon ammunition combination that can achieve the
desired effect must incur a minimum expenditure of available ammunition.

Ammunition
5-36. The following are considerations in determining the most suitable ammunition:
 Type and quantity available.
 Troop safety.
 Effectiveness.
 Residual effects—Residual effects from special ammunition may influence whether a friendly unit
can occupy an area. Conditions may be hazardous for supported troops occupying an area
immediately after an attack with certain munitions.

5-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

Weapons
5-37. The following are considerations in determining the most suitable weapons:
 System response time.
 Survey.
 Meteorology status.
 Aiming points.
 Density and duration of fires.

MISSION TYPE
5-38. The fires cell must select a method of attack that ensures target area coverage and desired target effects:
 Fire for Effect.
 Multiple Precision Aimpoint Mission.

MULTIPLE PRECISION AIMPOINT MISSION

5-39. The multiple precision aimpoint mission provides the capability to specify multiple precision aimpoints in
a single digital fire mission. The capability is supported by the forward observer systems. When determining
ammunition requirements for multiple precision aimpoint mission targets, AFATDS multiplies the number of
precision aimpoints by the number of rounds to fire specified by the mission originator. It is imperative to
maintain accurate launcher status to insure that sufficient firing units are available to engage a multiple
precision aimpoint mission target. The multiple precision aimpoint mission capability is designed to support all
MLRS/HIMARS precision guided missiles/rockets.

Note: Care must be taken when attempting to engage multiple distributed aimpoints. The launcher
firing window will support shifting the launcher module, but is limited to the firing window support.
Do not attempt to engage aimpoints distributed at ranges greater than the support firing window.

METHOD OF CONTROL
5-40. The battery AFATDS uses the following methods of control:
 Fire when ready.
 At my command.
 On call. (Must be changed to another method before execution.)
 Time on target. (Uses a time for effects on target.)

Fire When Ready

5-41. The “fire when ready” method of control allows the operator to arm and fire the weapons at his own
discretion once the rocket launcher is aimed. The rocket launcher is considered aimed when the launcher is
within +/-3 mils of the commanded aimpoint and the rate of rocket launcher movement is less than 20 mils a
second.

At My Command
5-42. The “at my command” method of control provides the originator of the fire mission with the decision of
when to fire the munitions. The “at my command” method of control allows for the automatic execution of the
fire mission up to achieving aimpoint. Once aim-point is reached, the fire control system transmits a ready to
fire message to fire direction center and awaits reception of the fire command before continuing. At the
appropriate time, the fire direction center transmits an amended call for fire containing the fire command. Upon
reception of the amended call for fire, the fire control system prompts the operator to “ARM WEAPONS” and
then “FIRE WEAPONS”. The fire command may be overridden by placing the arm/safe switch to the “ARM”
position once the ready to fire message has been transmitted.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-7

Chapter 5

On Call
5-43. The “on call” method of control initially places the fire mission into the “on call” target list. The launcher
may also manually enter in an “ONC” into the “LCFCP”. The “ONC” fire mission begins execution when the
launcher receives an amended call for fire changing this method of control. The fire mission then begins
execution under the amended method of control. The fire control system fire control system operator can
manually execute the “ONC” mission by pressing the “EXECUTE” function key in the fire mission option
screen. If manually executed, the “ONC” method of control executes the same as an “at my command.”

Time on Target
5-44. The “time on target” method of control is used to deliver munitions onto a target at a specific time. The
launcher has 2 countdown clocks to inform the operator when to park and press the “LCHR LAY” function
key, and when to activate the arm and fire switches. The two clocks are based on a single time on target time of
day entry. The first clock (CNTDN = NO LATER THAN FOR LCHR LAY) notifies the operator of the
latest time the launcher should be parked, and the “LCHR LAY” key is pressed. This time is equal to the “time
on target” time of day entry minus the current system time, any weapon processing time, nominal launcher
module movement time, the estimated flight time of the munitions, and 20 additional seconds. The countdown
clock is updated every second until the “LCHR LAY” function key is pressed. If the clock reaches 0, it remains
at 0 until the “LCHR LAY” key is pressed. Once the “LCHR LAY” key is pressed, a second clock (CNTDN =
NO EARLIER THAN FOR FIRING) is displayed that notifies the operator when to activate the fire switch.
The time displayed on the second countdown clock is calculated by subtracting the current system time and
actual flight time of the rockets from the “time on target” time. When the fire switch is activated at a countdown
clock time of zero seconds, the munitions will arrive on the target at the “time on target” time.
5-45. The MLRS/HIMARS mission command system interfaces directly with most digital communications
systems; therefore, it is easily linked to any target acquisition or sensor systems equipped with digital
communications. This linkage allows faster response for attack of detected targets.

PREDICTING WEAPON EFFECTS

5-46. One of the most important steps in performing a target analysis is determining the number and type of
rounds required to produce the desired effects on a target. (Refer to the joint munitions effectiveness manuals
for surface-to-surface weapons [JMEM/SS/JWES].)

MLRS/HIMARS RISK ESTIMATE DISTANCES

5-47. In close air support, artillery, mortars, and naval gunfire support fires, the term “danger close” is included
in the method of engagement segment of a call for fire to indicate that friendly forces are within close proximity
of the target. The close proximity distance is determined by the weapon and ammunition fired. The term
“danger close” is used when there are friendly troops or positions within a prescribed distance of the target. This
is simply a warning, not a restriction, to both the force commander and the FDC to take proper precautions.
5-48. Risk estimate distances allow commanders and fire support coordinator s to estimate risk in terms of the
probability of friendly causalities that may result from employing weapons against the threat. Risk estimate
distances are defined as the distance, in meters, from the intended point of impact at which a specific degree of
vulnerability will not be exceeded. Actual classified risk estimate distances are determined by using the
classified Joint Technical Coordinating Group for Munitions Effectiveness publication number 61J1-3-1.

Note. Risk estimate distances are no longer classified for Guided MLRS unitary rocket. As soon as
Guided MLRS alternative weapon is characterized, its risk estimate distances along with ATACMS
risk estimate distances will be declassified for the field.

5-49. Commanders at all levels must determine the risk they are willing to accept for a particular mission or
phase of a battle. This risk is specifically defined as the probability of incapacitation of a soldier. The 1/100
probability of incapacitation value can be interpreted as being less than, or equal to, one chance in one hundred.

5-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

Note. Do not fire DPICM rockets when friendly forces are located beyond the target along the
launcher target line, as rocket debris will extend beyond the target area.

TECHNICAL FIRE DIRECTION

5-50. Technical fire direction is the process of converting weapon and ammunition characteristics, weapon and
target locations, and meteorological information to firing data.

SECTION IV – AUTOMATED MISSION PROCESSING

5-51. MLRS/HIMARS battalions can expect to receive orders to fire from a variety of sources. The automated
AFATDS and the fire control system are the primary devices for processing orders to fire. The battalion uses
the AFATDS in mission processing. Fire mission source is not particularly important to the overall conduct of
the fire mission execution process for automated processing of missions. It does have some significance to the
tactical conduct of the mission in terms of estimates of normal expected target location error for ammunition
selection and effects calculation. The AFATDS performs tactical fire direction based on the MLRS/HIMARS
platoon centers reported by the battery. Generally, the battery is the highest echelon tracking individual
launcher status. The following criteria are important to the outcome of the automated processes:
 Target type.
 Point of entry into the munition and fire unit selection process (node/system).
 Digital communications with fire unit.
 Method of control.
 Whether a munition has been specified.
 Commander’s Guidance established within AFATDS.
 Established battlefield geometries.
 Friendly unit locations.
5-52. At a minimum, the battery maintains the following launcher conditions and states:
 Activity.
 Launcher operational status (OPER or INOP).
 Reason.
 Duration.
 Location information.
 Ammunition status and availability.
5-53. Launcher status reports are consolidated into platoon aggregates and reported to the battalion through the
battery and subsequently the fires brigade and/or division, corps or other supported headquarters, as appropriate,
according to a predetermined timetable. Because the fires brigade and/or supported headquarters AFATDS
generally has the least current information concerning launcher status, it is possible that missions may be
assigned to platoons that cannot comply. This should be reported as soon as possible because airspace
coordination may require adjustment if alternative units are selected to fire the missions. Airspace coordination
is normally conducted at the corps or joint task force level.
5-54. Once the supported higher headquarters fires cell determines the exact unit to fire, the mission(s) is
transmitted to the designated battery. The battery then transmits the mission(s) to the designated launcher(s),
when the time to fire becomes 30 minutes or less. The launcher(s) will receive the missions, compute the
technical solution, and fire the mission(s) using the method of control specified in the mission.
5-55. Fire mission processing at MLRS/HIMARS battalion and battery fire direction center treats all munitions
in the same manner. At a minimum, an ammunition and fire unit message must be received and executed so the
software can recognize the munition J-code in the call for fire message. When the fire mission is received at the
battalion, the fire direction center will perform the tactical processing and (if applicable) effects processing. It
will then format another call for fire for transmission to the battery. If it has not been selected; otherwise, it will
validate the AFATDS selection.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-9

Chapter 5

5-56. At the battery level, the fire direction center will perform the tactical functions appropriate to the battery
echelon, select the launcher or launchers to fire, and generate a separate call for fire to each selected launcher.
5-57. Technical fire direction occurs at the launcher. The appropriate weapon application software and
ballistics data must be resident on the launcher to fire a specific munition successfully.

AUTOMATED TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION

5-58. The FDC computer executes fire missions by establishing and updating relevant information. This
function is graphically depicted in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1. Fire mission execution

TARGET ANALYSIS
5-59. Upon receipt of a fire mission message, the computer screens the target to determine the requirements for
target analysis. The computer analyzes the target using the following information to determine its placement in
the commander's criteria and to specify priority or non-priority handling:
 Type/subtype/element.
 Location.
 Strength.
 Behavior.
 Permanence and age.

Weapon (Munitions/Submunitions) Selection

5-60. Those targets/missions received from an AFATDS at the supported higher headquarters that specify a
weapon to be employed are evaluated. Although subordinate fire direction centers have the capability to change
the weapon type, authorization to modify missions directed by a higher echelon must be coordinated. If the fire
direction center is authorized to change the weapon directed, it must be done manually.
5-61. When a guided munition is selected (rocket or missile) and the mission is processed from the intervention
point the AFATDS sends the mission to the firing platform. AFATDS also generates the munitions flight path
and sends the platoon air hazard message, target air hazard message, and mission fired report to the next higher
AFATDS for coordination/information.
5-62. The M270A1 supports mixed loading of different types of rocket/missile pods in each of the bays. This
capability provides flexibility for commanders to better posture launchers for engagement of time sensitive

5-10 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

targets without the requirement to load a different munition/pod. The following munitions can be loaded in any
combination:
 JTJ(M31).
 MLRS/HIMARS HE Guided (M31A1).
 JTK ATACMS HE (M57).
 JEJ ATACMS HE (M48).

Note: Only one munition type can be fired during any fire mission and during a fire mission, the
munition not being used will be reported as 0 in the FCS status window until the launcher has
completed its current fire mission.

TARGET AIR HAZARD MESSAGE

5-63. The target air hazard message describes the target air hazard area where the missile will dispense the
submunitions. Like the platoon air hazard message, it is used to warn all flight operations and to gain airspace
clearance. The platoon air hazard message is generated when a guided munitions fire mission is processed. The
Block I and 1A target air hazard message defines 4 points on the ground around the target. The size of the
hazard depends on the range to the target. The ZALT defines the height of the airspace hazard based on the
target center and munitions’ burst point. Figure 5-2 depicts the default Block I and 1A target air hazard airspace
(ZALT 1,500 meters or less). The computer alerts the operator when the target air hazard airspace is other than
the default (when ZALT exceeds 1,500 meters). The operator entries are limited to defining the effective date
time group of the message.

Figure 5-2. Default Block I and 1A target air hazard area

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-11

Chapter 5

MISSION FIRED REPORT

5-64. Upon receipt of the mission fired report from the fire unit, the AFATDS will generate a mission fired
report and forward it through the mission chain. A mission fired report or DENY message will purge the
platoon area hazard and target air hazard geometries.

BATTLEFIELD GEOMETRY VALIDATION

5-65. The FDC computer validates that the fire mission does not violate any FSCM or downrange mask
restrictions. FSCM violations will be presented to the operator in the form of a warning message, but the
computer can continue to process the fire mission. Downrange mask violations will be presented in the form of
an error message and will prevent the operator from continuing the mission.
5-66. The fire mission support function establishes or updates the map modification, geometry, ammunition
effects, and meteorological databases to enhance tactical fire control. This function is depicted in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3. Fire mission support function

5-67. Coordinate conversion to Geodetic/Universal Transverse Mercator and MGRS & lat/long.
5-68. Battlefield geometry maintenance overwrites duplicate geometry features.

FIRE UNIT SELECTION

5-69. Fire unit selection in the AFATDS is based on the following:
 Availability—no more than the allowable number of fire missions at each launcher.
 Appropriate munitions onboard or at next reload point.
 Within range of selected munitions.
 Able to meet response time with mission constraints.

METHOD OF ATTACK/EFFECTS ANALYSIS

5-70. If the target is designated as a volleys type, all rockets are normally aimed at the center of the target,
unless the size or shape is large and specified. If the number of rockets to be fired at the 1 aim-point is entered
in the volleys field of the message, that number of rockets is fired at the target center. If there is no entry, a
default value of 1 rocket is used.

5-12 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

Note. This is for unguided munitions because of the error associated with firing M26 rockets. Guided
rockets are very precise munitions and have specific aiming algorithms.

5-71. If the target is designated as an effects type target, the AFATDS may generate multiple aim-points. The
computer performs effects calculations and determines the expected effects for each target selected for
engagement on the basis of weapon performance, capability characteristics, and target degree of protection.
Some processes involved with effects-type targets include:
 The target type is checked to be sure it is a legal effects type. If it is not, a warning message is
displayed.
 The target dimensions are checked to verify that they are within the size limits for MLRS/HIMARS
processing. If they are not, the computer stops processing and the mission is rejected and redisplayed
for transmission back to the higher headquarters.
 The computer designates one to six aim points for an effects target. The number of aim points for an
effects type target and the number of rockets to be fired at each aim-point depend on the following:
 Desired effects (for effects-type target only).
 Dimensions of the target.
 Range to target from the launcher.
 Lethal area of submunitions in relation to target type.
 Disposition of enemy personnel in the target area.
 The computer denies the fire mission request when the percentage of effects requested cannot be
achieved and/or the solution indicates more than the maximum number of rounds to fire (for an
effects type target only).
 The number of aim points (aim point easting and northing offset from target center) and number of
rockets required for each aim-point are temporarily stored during the initial fire mission review.

Note. This type of calculation is for unguided rockets. Current guided unitary rockets patterns are
generated on the launcher. The JMEM Weaponeering System (JWS)calculates the number of
munitions required to engage the target. The Joint Technical Coordinating Group for Munitions
Effectiveness publishes JMEM.

PLATOON AIR HAZARD MESSAGE

5-72. When the AFATDS processes an AFOM fire mission or guided mission, it generates a platoon airspace
hazard geometry message that can be distributed to other agencies. The message describes the aircraft danger
area around the launcher selected to fire as the platoon airspace hazard. The area is defined by two grids on the
ground and a width giving the platoon airspace hazard 4 grids on the ground (depicted in Figure 5-4 by the
points 1, 2, 3, and 4) and an altitude (depicted in Figure 5-4 as ZALT). This area is used to warn all flight
operations and to gain clearance to fly through the airspace. If more than one launcher is required to fire the
mission, separate messages are displayed for each launcher.
5-73. The platoon air hazard message is munition specific. It is generated only for those launcher the computer
has listed as having the munition. If a unit to fire in effect was specified in the fire mission message, that unit to
fire in effect is used. If a unit to fire in effect was not specified, the computer provides the best solution based
on available information. The operator can enter the XDIST (see Figure 5-4) value and an effective date time
group indicating when the platoon air hazard area is valid.
5-74. The platoon airspace hazard may be passed to other organizations as a restricted operations zone. A
restricted operations zone is a volume of space approved by the Airspace Control Authority often uses to restrict
airspace. The same 4 points (1, 2, 3, and 4 in Figure 5-4) and altitude define the restricted operations zone.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-13

Chapter 5

ZALT: The altitude in meters above Mean Sea Level the commander wants airspace
cleared in his area of operation.
XDIST: The distance in meters which determines the area the commander wants
cleared around the launch element.
ZDIST1: The AFATDS calculated distance in meters along the gun target line
determined by the intersection of the munition f light path with ZALT.
ZDIST2: A hard coded 1500 meter buf f er added to XDIST to accommodate f or
ATACMS of f axis launch element.

Figure 5-4. MFOM platoon air hazard area

EFFECTS—TYPE TARGET
5-75. If the target is designated as an effects-type target, the AFATDS may generate multiple aim-points. The
computer performs effects calculations and determines the expected effects for each target selected for
engagement on the basis of weapon performance, capability characteristics, and target degree of protection.
Some processes involved with effects type targets include:
 The target type is checked to be sure it is a legal effects type. If it is not, a warning message is
displayed.
 The target dimensions are checked to verify that they are within the size limits for MLRS/HIMARS
processing. If they are not, the computer stops processing and the mission is rejected and redisplayed
for transmission back to the higher headquarters.
 The computer designates one to six aim points for an effects target. The number of aim points for an
effects type target and the number of rockets to be fired at each aim point depend on the following:
 Desired effects (for effects type target only).
 Dimensions of the target.
 Range to target from the launcher.
 Lethal area of submunitions in relation to target type.
 Disposition of threat personnel in the target area.
 The computer rejects the fire mission request when the percentage of effects requested cannot be
achieved and/or the solution indicates more than the maximum number of rounds to fire (for an
effects type target only).

5-14 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

 The number of aim points (aim point easting and northing offset from target center) and number of
rockets required for each aim point are temporarily stored for use by the fire unit selection routing.

Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manuals

5-76. The JMEMs were developed to provide a set of data and methodologies that would permit a standardized
comparison of weapon effectiveness across all service communities. Historically JMEMs were sets of orange
covered manuals that provided data and methodologies for weaponeering. Those for surface to surface weapons
are published as field manuals. For a current list see 61S1-2-35. Using JMEMs to determine attack data requires
considerable time. Because of time constraints, use of JMEMs at battalion and battery FDC levels for engaging
targets of opportunity is not recommended. The effects data included in these manuals incorporate reliability,
delivery accuracy, and munitions lethality against a representative spectrum of targets. JMEMs have been
supplemented by computer programs that: 1) ease the computational burden on the user; 2) derive results faster;
and 3) allow more realistic models to be incorporated. In recent years the JMEMs have evolved into compact
disc, read-only-memory products. Beginning in 2007, all JMEMs weapon effectiveness products are integrated
into a single program—JWS. For the first time, the system is target oriented, allowing users to determine the
effectiveness of weapon systems against a specified target irrespective of the weapon delivery mode. The JWS
is used by all services to estimate the effects of their weapon systems against an extensive target list.
5-77. Effectiveness tables published in JMEM/SS provide guidance for determining the expected fraction of
casualties to personnel targets or damage to materiel targets. JMEMs The basic data for these manuals were
obtained from test firings, actual combat performance, and mathematical modeling. The effects data included in
these manuals incorporate reliability, delivery accuracy, and munitions lethality against a representative
spectrum of targets. The computational assumptions, defeat criteria, and instructions for use are included in
each manual.

Note. There is no assurance that the expected fraction of damage or casualties will be provided by
any number of volleys in a given situation. Although not precisely within the mathematical
definition, the method of averaging data used for the tables will result in less damage being realized
for approximately 50 percent of the rounds and, conversely, greater damage for the other 50 percent
of the rounds.

COMMANDER'S CRITERIA
5-78. The key to exploiting automated processing is incorporating the commander's guidance into the AFATDS
database. Commander's criteria are established and updated as the situation changes. Table 5-3 gives the fire
planner a matrix that portrays the different types of MLRS/HIMARS munitions available to engage a target.

Note. Commanders can set the effectiveness criteria for the targets that he wants engaged. The
JMEM weaponeering system will allow him to adjust the attack guidance matrix as needed.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-15

Chapter 5

Table 5-3. Ammunition selection matrix

Official J-Code Range (km) Payload Accuracy Guidance Target Types
Nomenclature /DODIC (Submunitions)
Rocket Pod Personnel,
JED 644ea 11 mils
M298MM 8-32 km Ballistic Soft & Light
H104 M77 DPICM TLE<150M
M26 Armor
Rocket Pod Personnel,
JEL 518ea
M298MM 13-45 km 10 mils Ballistic Soft & Light
H186 M77 DPICM
M26A2 Armor
Rocket Pod
JEH
M298MM 8-15 km Training Rocket 10 mils Ballistic Impact Area
H185
M28A1
Rocket Pod
JEH
M298MM 8-15 km Training Rocket 24 mils Ballistic Impact Area
H185
M28A2
Rocket Pod Personnel,
JEG 404ea IMU w/GPS
M298MM 15-70+ km <3 Mils Soft & Light
HA22 M101 DPICM aided, Canards
M30 Armor
Rocket Pod <1 mil IMU Personnel,
JTJ 200lb IMU w/GPS
M298MM 15-70+ km <8 meters Soft & Light
HA37 HE War Head aided, Canards
M31 GPS Aided Armor
Rocket Pod <1 mil IMU Personnel,
JTJ 200lb IMU w/GPS
M298MM 15-70+ km <8 meters Soft & Light
HA51 HE War Head aided, Canards
M31A1 GPS Aided Armor
GMLA,
IMU w/GPS Personnel,
Surface JEJ 70-270+ 500lb Harpoon
Classified aided, Minimum Soft & Light
Attack PL65 km WH, PD 4 Satellites Armor
M48
GMLA,
IMU w/GPS Personnel,
Surface JTK 70-270+ 500lb Harpoon
Classified aided, Minimum Soft & Light
Attack PM75 km WH, PD 4 Satellites Armor
M57
GMLA JEE 950 M74 Fin Stabilized Personnel,
25-165 km Classified
M39 PL81 APAM INS Soft Vehicles

GMLA JEN 300 M74 Ballistically Personnel,

70-300 km Classified launched, GPS
M39A1 PL38 APAM aided INS Soft Vehicles
Legend:
APAM—anti-personnel, anti-material DODIC—Department of Defense identification code
DPICM—dual purpose improved conventional munitions GMLA—guided missile launch assembly
GPS—global positioning system HE—high explosive
IMU—inertial measurement unit INS—inertial navigation system

MLRS/HIMARS Size
5-79. If the AFATDS ammunition and firing unit file contains MLRS/HIMARS fire units, the computer
considers those units first to engage a target when the target radius exceeds the size entered in the
MLRS/HIMARS size modification.

5-16 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

FIRE MISSION INTERVENTION POINTS

5-80. Another powerful capability AFATDS offers is the ability to eliminate the traditional mission delays
associated with processing fire missions through multiple layers of fire support coordination. Not every mission
needs to stop at every fire support node in the mission thread (digital route).

FIRE MISSION CYCLE

5-81. he BOC processes fire missions for the MLRS/HIMARS firing battery. Mission assignments are based on
the following information:
 Grid locations of FPs.
 FP and reload point location.
 Number and type of rockets or missiles currently onboard each launcher and on HEMTT/HEMATs
or resupply vehicle and trailer in the platoon area of operations.
 Near and downrange mask.
 Launcher status and locations.
 FSCMs.
5-82. This information is all part of the FDC database for the battery. The AFATDS then selects the launcher to
respond, the number and type of munitions to fire, the number and dispersion of aimpoints, and the method of
fire. The fire mission is then passed directly to the launcher or using the platoon, the POC monitors the fire
missions. If the launcher cannot communicate digitally with the BOC, the platoon can be used to relay fire
missions. At a minimum, both the BOC and POC record the mission by using DA Form 7232 (see sample,
Figure 5-5) and plot the target on the firing capabilities map. A reproducible copy of DA Form 7232 is available
on line from the Army Publishing Directorate (see Figure 5-6a and 6b).The completed DA Form 7232 should be
retained for 1 year. For instructions on completing form 7232 see Figure 5-6b below.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-17

Chapter 5

Figure 5-5. DA Form 7232 (sample)

5-18 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

Figure 5-6a. DA Form 7232 (front)

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-19

Chapter 5

Figure 5-6b. DA Form 7232 (back)

5-20 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

5-83. Upon receipt of a fire mission, the launcher FCS conducts consistency checks of fire mission data to
ensure that the launcher can fire the mission, that it has the correct munitions loaded, and that the target is in
range. If the launcher can fire, a WILL COMPLY (WILCO) message is generated to be sent to the controlling
FDC.
5-84. The section chief should have previously inspected the FP for any immediate mask (within 2,000 meters).
If one is apparent, the mask is measured with the M2 compass to determine if it should be entered in the FCS.
The mask should be entered if it measures 100 mils or greater. If the launcher cannot fire over the mask, the
launcher must be repositioned.
5-85. If an immediate mask is not a problem, the launcher moves to the designated FP and orients on the
selected parking heading. The crew lays the LM, arms the system, fires the mission(s), stows the LM, and
moves. The launcher crew records the mission data by using DA Form 7233 as shown in the example in Figure
5-7. A reproducible copy of DA Form 7233 is available on line from the Army Publishing Directorate (see
Figure 5-8). The completed form should also be retained for 1 year. For instructions on completing form 7233
see Figure 5-9 below.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-21

Chapter 5

Figure 5-7. DA Form 7233 (sample)

5-22 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

Note. For missile missions, the section chief records the serial number of the missile on one row of
DA Form 7233 and the firing data for that missile on the next available row. The section chief can
pre-record this information, allowing for entry of firing data on the next available lines when
reloading.
If a munition malfunctions, the section chief must record the date, time, prompts displayed, and, as
necessary, a narrative explaining the events surrounding the munition malfunction. The section chief
can use as many lines as needed on either the front of the form or the back of the form to record the
necessary information.
A launch pod container with an unserviceable munition should be marked in accordance with the unit
TSOP and the procedures in the launcher technical manual.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-23

Chapter 5

Figure 5-8. DA Form 7233

5-24 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

Header Information
Date Enter the current date.
Section Chief Enter the Section chiefs name.
Unit Section Enter the Unit or Section name.
Target Information
Target
Enter the assigned Target Number.
Number (a)
Target
Coordinates Enter the grid coordinates of the assigned target.
(b)
Firing Point
Enter the grid coordinates of the launchers firing point.
(c)
Method of
Enter of the method of control; FWR, AMC, TOT or TTT.
Control (d)
Firing Data
Azimuth (e) Enter the azimuth of the launcher in relation to the target.
QE (f) Enter the quadrant elevation of the launcher.
FZ Time (g) Enter the time that was set on the fuze.
Type DODIC
Enter the ammunition DODIC.
(h)
Ammunition Number of Rounds
Assigned (i) Enter the number of rounds assigned for the mission.
Fired (j) Enter the number of rounds fired for the mission.
Time of First
Enter the hour minutes and seconds of the first round fired.
Fire (k)
Remarks (l) Enter any other information as required.
Legend:
AMC—at my command FZ—Fuze DODIC—department of defense identification code
FWR—fire when ready TOT—time on target TTT—time time on target QE—quadrant elevation

Figure 5-9. Instructions for completing DA Form 7233

AUTOMATED AFOM PROCESSING

AFATDS
5-86. AFATDS provides decision aids and an information system for control, coordination, and
synchronization. It is located at field artillery CPs from platoon to fires brigade and is employed in varying
configurations at different operational facilities.

COMMANDER’S CRITERIA
5-87. Integrating the commander’s guidance into the AFATDS database is the key to exploiting AFATDS
capabilities for ATACMS. Targeting guidance tells AFATDS which targets to process or deny. AFATDS
automatically filters and screens mission requests and recommends denying those missions that do not meet the
established commander’s guidance. It prioritizes multiple missions to ensure that the most important missions

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-25

Chapter 5

are processed first. It also checks incoming fire missions against fire support coordinating measures and unit
zones of responsibility. If violations occur, AFATDS notifies the operator and electronically requests clearance
from the unit that established the control measure. AFATDS then determines how to attack the target, applying
guidance by system preference (field artillery preference, field artillery attack methods, mortar, naval gunfire, or
air attack).

AFATDS FILTERING FUNCTION

5-88. Filters tell AFATDS what targets not to attack. One filter is target decay time, which defines how long a
target type is suitable for engagement after it is acquired. This highlights for the commander those targets with
short dwell times and prevents firing on targets that may have moved.
5-89. The target duplication filter allows fire supporters to specify the distance (in meters) that separates targets
or similar targets to determine whether they are duplicates. This prevents different sensors or observers from
firing separate missions on the same target. If two missions violate a target based on prescribed separation
distance, AFATDS processes the first mission and recommends denial on the second.
5-90. The target build up area filter allows the commander to specify the number of targets, within an area, that
must be identified before engagement. This is particularly useful for counterfire elements that want to focus on
developing a template for threat area before attacking it.
5-91. The target exclusion filter (part of the target management matrix) allows the commander to specify
targets he does not want fire support to consider for attack.
5-92. AFATDS target selection standards contains the same information normally used in a target selection
standards matrix, including specifying the target location error for potential sensors. This filter, generally used
for intelligence reports, specifies a report age to prevent firing on targets that are too old.

AFATDS SCREENING FUNCTION

5-93. After a target clears the filters, AFATDS screens the mission to assign a mission value. This focuses fires
by ensuring that the most important targets are engaged first. In AFATDS, this screening guidance includes
mission prioritization, the high-value target list, and the target management matrix.

AFATDS MISSION PRIORITIZATION

5-94. AFATDS prioritizes missions by assigning each a “mission value” of 0 - 100 based on 4 weighted criteria
and one weighted criteria to determine the overall mission value. The 4 criteria are—
 On call precedence allows the commander to decide that targets from the fire plan (stored in the on
call target list) have a higher priority than a target of opportunity. (A commander may not want
targets of opportunity to disrupt the execution of preplanned, rehearsed targets in specific target area
of interest or engagement areas.)
 Priority of fires enables the commander to establish a preference among a pool of potential
sensors/observers.
 If a target falls within a target area of interest, AFATDS will increase its mission value.
 Target Types: 13 categories or 95 targets.
 AFATDS can weight targets based on their relative importance to the force commander's mission.
The target type value is identified in the high-value target list and the target management matrix.
5-95. A commander can define the desired effects in the high-value target list for each target category by
specifying effects or any percentage of destruction from 0 to 100 percent. He also can assign a weighted value
from 0 to 100 to each target category.
5-96. The high-value target list is a starting point for the development of the high-payoff target list and is a
component of the target management matrix. HPTs are high-value targets that friendly forces must attack to
achieve success during friendly operations. The high-payoff target list in the target management matrix applies
additional guidance to weight the target types.

5-26 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

5-97. The target management matrix used in AFATDS provides the same information normally seen on an
attack guidance matrix. It separates HPT types from non-HPT types. A commander can define the effects for
each HPT type or any percentage of destruction up to 100 percent. He can also weight the value of each HPT
type from 0 to 100. This is a second target value (for HPTs only) that AFATDS uses to compute an overall
mission value.
5-98. As a result of mission prioritization, each target is assigned a mission value. Cutoff values set the
minimum thresholds that targets must attain to be considered for attack by certain fire support assets. The
commander assigns these to tell AFATDS which weapon systems to consider (and not to consider) as attack
options for certain targets.
5-99. In the target management matrix, the commander can specify which target types require target damage
assessment or should not be fired on but rather handed off to the intelligence and electronic warfare officer for
exploitation. The commander can specify when targets will be engaged as “acquired,” “immediate,” or
“planned.” The commander also can exclude target types in the target management matrix display from
consideration for attack by fire support assets.

FIRE MISSION EXECUTION

INITIATING AFOM FIRE MISSIONS
5-100. AFOM fire missions can be initiated by any agency capable of requesting fire. Agencies supported by
digital communications systems may not be able to request the AFOM automatically. However, they can
compose and send a plain text message requesting fires. Fire mission source is important for estimated target
location error (when target location error is not reported), munition selection, and effects calculation.
Automated processing depends on:
 Target type.
 Point of entry into the fire unit selection process (node/system).
 Communications link.
 Method of control.
 Specified munition (if any).
5-101. Once an AFOM variant has been selected (usually at the corps/division fires cell), a fire mission
message format (for example, fire mission; call for fire) is generated. It contains a minimum of a weapon type
(or J-code) and a designated unit to fire in effect. It is then transmitted to the selected battalion FDC for
execution. The battalion FDC transmits the fire mission to a battery FDC where launchers are selected from the
designated platoons.

AUTOMATIC PROCESSING
5-102. To ensure the fastest possible reaction, the subordinate echelon FDC computers should be set up to
perform automatic processing of missions. This procedure streamlines the mission processing during non-
routine operations or when responsiveness to time critical targets is required. When the FDC computer is set up
to automatically process missions, it performs all necessary processing to ensure receipt of a valid message. If
the message passes the consistency checks and the unit to fire in effect is available, the FDC computer relays
the message to the next subordinate echelon. The battery FDC computer—
 Performs consistency checks based on commander’s guidance/operator inputs.
 Validates the selected unit to fire in effect (no effects processing will be performed).
 Assigns launcher(s) to fire from within the designated unit to fire in effect.
 Prepares call for fire message for transmission to launcher(s).

INTERVENTION POINTS
5-103. AFATDS allows the mission to be processed automatically or lets operators view and make decisions
on every fire mission they receive. It also permits a mix; certain types of missions will be processed
automatically while the operator handles only specified types of missions. The intervention point window

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-27

Chapter 5

provides the operator the target number, mission value, mission precedence, and a list of filter guidance and
whether they passed or not. All attack assets capable and available to shoot the mission with the required
munitions are also listed.
5-104. The operator can set up intervention rules that allow given target conditions to cause an intervention
point to be generated when the mission is processed. However, AFOM missions are always presented at an
intervention point, regardless of operator criteria. The operator can accept, reject, or change the mission.
5-105. AFATDS presents all attack options for the operator to review. Non-capable attack options will have a
reason stated. This provides the operator enough information to identify the problem and possibly resolve it.

PLANNED MISSIONS
5-106. The AFOM is most effective when used on planned targets. Attack of planned targets permits
refinement of target locations (or predicted locations for moving targets) to required (or better) accuracy and
description and for posturing missiles and launchers. Planned fires typically use the following methods of
control: at my command, time on target, on call, and fire when ready.
5-107. Planned fires may be scheduled missions that are executed according to a predetermined time schedule
or sequence of events or on call. Scheduled missions are planned and sent to the lowest mission command
echelon for execution at the appropriate time. This allows mission execution on receipt of the engagement
trigger event or scheduled time to fire. On call missions are like scheduled missions because they are sent to the
lowest mission command echelon, but the time of execution is unknown.
5-108. At my command missions are planned missions for which the time of execution depends on the
occurrence of a trigger event or confirmation of target location or activity. The FDC can use these missions
when the commander desires rapid attack of a target, or when attack is keyed to other significant events on the
battlefield. When the launcher receives this type of at my command mission, it moves to a firing point (if in
hide position) and elevates to aim point. The launcher reports “READY” to the controlling FDC and awaits the
command to fire.

UNPLANNED MISSIONS
5-109. The AFOM may also be fired against targets of opportunity. All available communications means are
used in mission processing. Prior coordination among the various agencies may reduce the processing time
associated with targets of opportunity. For selected targets or areas of interest, more direct links may be
established between higher and lower agencies to reduce processing time. Those nodes left out of the process
will be provided information and status as the mission progresses.

AFATDS MISSION PROCESSING

5-110. When a fire mission is initiated, AFATDS assigns it a target number (if this has not already occurred)
and calculates its mission value. AFATDS then goes through a series of “filter” checks (for example,
duplication, target selection standards) to see if it qualifies as a fire mission. If it passes these filters, a set of
munitions that could be used to shoot the mission will be generated from the guidance as well as from the
munitions requested in the call for fire. AFATDS generates a list of units that are both capable and available,
based on the operational facility unit organization (from both command and supported HQs that the operator
entered in the current database) as well as observer specified and guidance specified entries. AFATDS then
matches munitions with available units to see which units can actually shoot the mission given the munition
requirements. This set is ordered (sorted) such that the best choice units are listed first. AFATDS will always
present the number one recommended solution to the operator for AFOM missions.
5-111. When a mission is in progress, it is said to be active. While active, a target appears yellow on the
AFATDS screen and is located on the active target list. A number of messages can be initiated while a target is
on the list. However, the AFATDS operator should not interrupt subsequent messages the fire mission initiator
sends, except in extreme circumstances. The operator can trace status or missions on the active target list. This
permits the operator to quickly gain a record of the mission history as well as its current status at other
operational facilities.

5-28 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

5-112. When a mission is completed and an end of mission or mission fired report is received, the target is
processed to the inactive target list. The inactive target list can be purged to rid the system of all old missions.

TECHNIQUES TO REDUCE MISSION TIMELINES

Automatic Processing
5-113. The commander should always direct automatic processing at intermediate nodes to attack AFOM
targets. Automatic processing allows the mission to pass through echelons without operator activity. However,
the battalion must ensure that the following information is kept updated—firing platoon availability; range to
target; and munitions load. The battery FDC has the additional burden of keeping the firing point database
current. This is the primary cause of automatic processing failure.

Stay Hot, Shoot Fast

5-114. The commander should strongly consider establishing a quick fire channel or mandating decentralized
execution for time sensitive targets. This reduces the mission execution response time. Extremely time sensitive
targets designated for attack may necessitate a technique often called "stay hot, shoot fast."
5-115. Most units will describe when to use the stay hot, shoot fast technique and the procedures for this
technique in their TSOP. The following is an example: AFATDS operator sets up the user preferences for
mission processing in the “stay hot, shoot fast” tab, Tolerance Zone 1 is for no adjustment when mission is
received, Tolerance Zone 2 is when “stay hot, shoot fast” mission comes in and adjustments are sent to the
launcher for amended grid. Minimum distance is for minimum distance between an artillery target information
target location and artillery target information impact predicts location. The launcher is placed on a firing point
and laid, LM elevated, on a target grid of an expected threat target. The method of control at the AFATDS is a
warning order but sent to the launcher as an at my command. The launcher will complete the mission sequence
up to the point of achieving aim point and then report ready status. When an threat target is acquired firing from
the expected grid, the BOC uses its AFATDS to send a fire order to the launcher(s) to engage the preplanned
target(s). On receipt of an amended fire mission changing the method of control to fire when ready (or time on
target), the launcher completes the mission when the target falls in Tolerances Zone 1. Often, the preplanned or
expected target location differs slightly from the actual target location. If this occurs, instead of firing the
preplanned target grid, the fire mission is shifted, or amended, to the new target grid acquired by friendly force
systems. The launcher accepts amended missions up to 200 mils on either side of the direction of fire to the
preplanned target for a total shift fan of 400 mils.
5-116. The BOC can plot the amendment fan, or shift zone, on its operations map for all launchers laid on a
potential or preplanned target. This is done by plotting the launcher location and target location, drawing the
azimuth to the target, and then plotting azimuths 200 mils left and right of the azimuth to the target. When the
minimum and maximum ranges are added to this fan, the result is a shift zone where the launcher can engage
targets using amended mission procedures.
5-117. When an acquisition source sends the target location to the BOC, fire direction personnel determine
which launcher or launchers can engage the target and send an amended call for fire to the unit(s) to fire.
5-118. There are distinct challenges to an MLRS/HIMARS unit using stay hot, shoot fast techniques. First, the
BOC must closely monitor the status of launchers and the database associated with them. The stay hot, shoot
fast procedures require the precise location and status of each launcher to work properly. Any error that goes
undetected until the fire mission is processed simply adds more time to correct the error and execute the mission
when we can least afford the time to do so.
5-119. The launcher must park on, or as close to, the park heading as possible. Any mils sacrificed by not
parking on the parking heading may take mils away from the shift fan and cause the launcher to reject the
mission.
5-120. Secondly, “stay hot, shoot fast” requires clear digital communications from the BOC to launcher. First
time acknowledgement of messages is crucial. Non-acknowledgements add more time to the processing.
Thirdly, the launcher and fire direction crews must be well rehearsed.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-29

Chapter 5

5-121. Last, by selecting well concealed FPs nestled in hillside cuts, valleys, or streambeds, units can
minimize vulnerability to observation. Additionally, after each fire mission, the launcher should scoot to
another FP and lay on the next preplanned target if required.

FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING FUNCTION

5-122. AFATDS provides the functional processes for fire support and field artillery planning to support a
maneuver course of action (see Figure 5-10). Plans for military operations often involve multiple phases in
which changes in friendly unit mission command relationships and activities will occur in response to
anticipated events. Fire support planning provides capabilities to describe and review, from a fire support point
of view, the support of the maneuver course of action(s). Maneuver course of action(s) received for the
maneuver operation will normally consist of the force commander’s plan for conducting the operation. This
information may include the objectives, timing, type and quantity of assets to be used. Targets, guidance,
geometries, and any special instructions unique to the operation. Maneuver information is entered into
AFATDS for development into a fire support plan. Up to three separate plans may be compared at one time.

Figure 5-10. Fire planning and scheduling

5-123. In AFATDS a fire support plan will always consist of one or more phases. Planned units, friendly,
threat situations, plan text, map mod, map setup, and guidance are established and maintained for each phase of
a plan.

FIRE PLANS AND SCHEDULES

5-124. Fire plans and schedules of fires are processed on receipt. When the timetable for execution is known
and within scope, allocations of available ammunition and fire units are made for the fire plan or scheduled
targets. Fire direction centers should know that this does not prevent execution of other missions using the
allocated ammunition. If execution of all targets is not possible, an exception report will be prepared and
presented for operator action and adjudication.

Fire Support Planning

5-125. Resource scheduling is the process of pre-allocating fire unit and ammunition resources to expected
mission loads in advance of execution time. This should occur as soon as projections can be made for friendly
and enemy courses of action and expected resource demands by time period, so battalion and battery level
posturing and ammunition loading can be accomplished. Development of alternate courses of action and

5-30 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

supporting plans typically occurs between 72 and 96 hours in advance of the intended operation. Consequently,
this function provides scheduling of resources no earlier than 96 hours prior to execution.
5-126. Expected mission loads exceeding anticipated available resources are reported to the operator for
exception resolution. At a minimum, the operator must report exceptions relating to—
 Ammunition type.
 Ammunition quantity.
 Fire unit sufficiency—specifies the time period for which resources are unavailable or insufficient.
5-127. The fire planner then accounts for resources that are unavailable for whatever reason. Fire missions
included in this analysis are “time on target”, “timed when ready”, “time to target” and “time to fire” (entered at
the launcher only), or other scheduled targets. “At my command” and “when ready” mission firing times are
undefined and consequently will not influence the analysis except by their impact on current resources.

Ammunition Postures Planning

5-128. Ammunition positioning is closely related to the ammunition fire unit functions and resource posturing.
When performed properly, it involves the use of fire plans and schedules, resource scheduling, and contingency
planning outputs combined with expected usage rates.

FIRE PLAN PROCESSING

5-129. On-call schedules for MLRS/HIMARS support should be requested no less than 30 minutes before
desired fire support. This rule is based on the reaction time required by the MLRS/HIMARS fire control system
and the average fire mission cycle of 20 to 30 minutes. Receiving the fire mission, reloading, and moving to the
firing point or hide area times are included in the average fire mission cycle.
5-130. Depending on the time between missions in a single fire plan, launchers can fire, reload, and fire again.
Depending on the number of rockets required for each mission, launchers could fire one mission, move to
another firing point, and fire again. In the case of a rapid fire plan and large fire volumes, no single launcher
should be given more than one target per fire plan, for a maximum of six targets per battery. When the situation
warrants, batteries can be given up to six (M142) or 12 (M270A1) single rocket targets per launcher.

Note. Firing multiple missions from a single launcher during a rapid schedule may require launchers
to remain on the same firing point for an extended time. During this exposure, launchers become
extremely vulnerable to counterfire.

The multiple precision aimpoint mission provides the capability to specify multiple precision
aimpoints in a single digital fire mission. When determining ammunition requirements for multiple
precision aimpoint mission targets, AFATDS multiplies the number of precision aimpoints by the
number of rounds to fire specified by the mission originator. The multiple precision aimpoint mission
capability is designed to support all MLRS precision guided missiles/rockets.

5-131. The total number of rockets in the plan should not exceed 48 (M142) or 96 (M270A1) (8 launchers x 6
or 12 rockets each). The number of rockets per target depends on target size, target type, target location error
and expected fractional damage required. Schedules of fire must be coordinated with the operations officer so
he can manage launcher posture and/or response time. The fire planner must have an accurate picture of
launcher status. Because of maintenance, personnel, and other factors, a rule of thumb is to plan fires for no
more than 6 launchers at 1 time. If a surge condition arises, the unit can be tasked to provide a higher number. If
all available launchers fire on a schedule, temporary loss of a fire support asset can be expected while the
launchers move to reload points, reload, and return to firing points.
5-132. In anticipation of future operations, the fires cell can transmit posture information directing the
munitions to be available within a specified time frame. This posture information can be stored in the database
at battalion, battery, and platoon.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-31

Chapter 5

Reacting to Fire Plan Changes

5-133. The fire plan function for all AFATDS based systems does not lend itself to change. If last minute
changes to planned targets are anticipated, the fire direction center has several options based on anticipated
reaction time to changes (see Table 5-4).
Table 5-4. Fire plan change reaction times
Anticipated Reaction Time Method
30 minutes Use the fire plan function and assign H-hour.
20 to 30 minutes Use the fire plan function. Do not assign H-hour. Once the
actual H-hour is identified, enter it and process.
10 to 20 minutes Transmit each of the targets as at my command missions to
the launchers. This requires them to move to the firing point
and lay on the target. Once the time on target time is known,
transmit an amended call for fire.
5 to 10 minutes Transmit each of the targets as at my command missions to
the launchers. "Back off" the highest time of flight and
coordinate trigger points with the aviation unit (through the
appropriate fires cell). When the aviators cross the trigger
point, the fires cell sends the fire message.

Resource Limitations
5-134. If the number of targets is excessive or the available launchers are limited, units can take advantage of
the multiple fire mission sequence capability. The multiple fire mission sequence allows the launcher to fire two
or more missions without stowing the launcher. If a battery, for example, received 8 targets to engage, it may
commit less than 8 launchers. Initiating the multiple fire mission sequence requires the assignment of two
targets to the same firing point identifier. When this occurs, the fire control system recognizes it as a multiple
fire mission. If the method of fire control is “fire when ready”, the launcher will automatically lay on, and fire
the second target without a second “SAFE”, “ARM”, or “FIRE” command. If another method of fire control is
specified for the second target, the fire control system will lay on the second target, then prompt the crew to
“SAFE” the rockets. The fire control system will then prompt the crew to “ARM” and “FIRE”, in accordance
with the specified method of control.

SUSTAINMENT
5-135. The brigade support battalion is the core sustainment organization for the fires brigade. The brigade
support battalion is organic to the fires brigade, and consists of a headquarters and headquarters company, a
distribution company, a field maintenance company, and one forward support company (FSC) to support each
field artillery battalion. All of these companies are assigned to the BSB and receive mission command from the
BSB. The forward support company provides each fires brigade subordinate battalion commander with
dedicated logistics assets organized specifically to meet his battalion’s requirements. The forward support
company commander receives technical logistics oversight from the brigade support battalion commander. As
the senior logistician, the BSB commander advises the brigade commander on all aspects of sustainment
support to the brigade. Depending on the current operation and situation an FSC may be attached to or placed
under operational control (OPCON) of its supported battalion. The decision to establish these types of command
relationships is made by the brigade commander upon the advice of the BSB commander after careful and
thorough mission analysis. All commanders must understand that these types of command relationships limit
the BSB commander’s, and ultimately the brigade commander’s, flexibility to support the brigade. FSC
attachment or OPCON to its supported battalion is generally limited in duration and may be for a specific
mission or phase of an operation. Because of their criticality and proximity to combat operations, medical
platoons remain organic to subordinate battalions (see FM 4-90).

5-32 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Delivery of Fires

5-136. The lead sustainment planner in the MLRS/HIMARS battalion is the S-4, assisted by the S-1, and
forward support company commander. Representatives from these and other sections form a sustainment
planning cell at the battalion main command post to ensure sustainment plans are fully integrated into all
operations planning. The standard operating procedures should be the basis for sustainment operations with
planning conducted to determine specific requirements and to prepare for contingencies. Battalion and battery
orders should address only specific support matters for the operation and any deviations from standard
operating procedures. In MLRS/HIMARS battalions, sustainment assets are assigned to the forward support
company, except for the medical platoon, which is assigned to the headquarters and headquarters battery. The
FSC forms the battalion echelon of support, often referred to as combat trains. The fires battalion commander
and staff, the BSB commander and staff, and the FSC commander must collaborate to determine the best
method of employment commensurate with the brigade concept of support. FSC employment consideration
include:

 Location of the FSC in relation to the supported battalion.

 Decision to separate elements of the FSC by platoon or other sub-elements into multiple locations.
 Benefits of locating FSC elements in the brigade support area.
 Benefits of collocating battalion staff sections with the FSC.
 Benefits of collocating battalion medical elements with the FSC.
 Security of the FSC locations.
 Establishment and location of a maintenance collection point.
5-137. The battalion S-4, anticipates, requests, coordinates, and supervises execution of sustainment either by
headquarters and headquarters battery or forward support company assets. The size of the force during special
missions should be minimized. This allows the unit to accomplish objectives and continue with the follow-on
mission quickly.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 5-33

This page intentionally left blank.
 Appendix A
Aerial Transport of MLRS/HIMARS Ammunition and
Equipment
AERIAL AMMUNITION RESUPPLY
A-1. Ammunition resupply of MLRS/HIMARS units is a critical operation. Use of the CH-47D helicopter is
one technique or capability available to support resupply of the 5,095 pound (2,311 kilograms) LPC or the
5,111 pound (2,318 kilogram) GMLAs.
A-2. The CH-47D has a load carrying capacity of 25,000 pounds (11,340 kilograms). Loads can be carried
internally or externally by using tables of organization and equipment, except for required external load slings.

INTERNAL LOAD
A-3. The CH-47D can carry up to 4 LPCs or GMLAs internally for a total of 24 rockets or 4 missiles.
Atmospheric or weather conditions in the area will dictate the load carrying capacity of the CH-47D.

EQUIPMENT
A-4. The LPCs or GMLAs can be loaded using the following equipment:
 CH-47D onboard winch.
 4 (1,000 pound [454 kilogram]) conveyor rollers, NSN 3910-0-903-1303.
 Twelve sheets of ¾ inch (19 millimeter) plywood.

CONCEPT
A-5. The LPCs or GMLAs can be loaded two at a time stacked on top of each other. They should be pre-
positioned (using the HEMTT crane) on top of conveyor rollers and one sheet of plywood. The onboard winch
can be used to pull the load into the aircraft. Plywood shoring should be placed in the deck of the aircraft for the
conveyor rollers to travel. The identical procedures are used to load the second two pods. All LPCs or GMLAs
are tied down with standard 10,000 pound (4,536 kilograms) cargo straps.

OFF LOADING
A-6. Four soldiers can push the load down the ramp and use the onboard winch to help brake the load.

LOADING CONSIDERATIONS
A-7. The following should be considered:
 On or off loading requires about 30 minutes.
 A level landing zone is required to ensure that the plywood shoring remains level.
 The winch should be hooked onto the aft end of the load to facilitate loading the second LPCs or
GMLAs.

EXTERNAL LOAD
A-8. Current procedures permit up to 4 LPCs or GMLAs to be carried externally. Four 25,000 pound (11,340
kilogram) capacity slings are required. The front two are 10 feet (3 meters) long and the two in the rear are 12
feet (4 meters) long. Although GMLAs may be carried externally, caution must be exercised because of the no
drop tolerance restrictions.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 A-1

Appendix A

A-9. The following manuals provide sling load rigging procedures for the certified MLRS/HIMARS loads in
various configurations:
 TM 4-48.10.
 TM 4-48.11.

RIGGING PROCEDURES FOR LPC OR GMLA

A-10. Applicability. The following items in Table A-1 are certified for all helicopters with suitable lift capacity
by the US Army Soldier Systems Center:
Table A-1. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with ATACMS missiles,
one container or two containers
NOMENCLATURE MAX SLING SET LINK COUNT RECOMMENDED
WEIGHT (pound FRONT/REAR AIRSPEED
(pounds) capacity) (knots)
Launch Pod Container with 5,095 10,000 3/3 90
Multiple Launch Rocket System
Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch
Rocket System Rockets (with Six
Rockets)
Guided Missile Launch Assembly 5,111 10,000 3/3 90
Pods with Army Tactical Missile
System Missiles
A-11. Materials. The following materials are required to rig this load:
 Sling set (10,000 pound capacity).
 Tape, adhesive, pressure sensitive, 2 inch wide roll.
 Cord, nylon, Type III, 550 pound breaking strength.
 Webbing, cotton, 1/4 inch, 80 pound breaking strength.
A-12. Personnel. Two persons can prepare and rig this load in 15 minutes.
A-13. Procedures. The following procedures apply to this load:
 Preparation. Prepare the pod for travel in accordance with standard procedures.
 Rigging. Rig the load according to the steps in paragraph A-14 below (see Figure A-1).

Note. The firing end is considered to be the front of the load.

 Hookup. The hookup team stands on top of the pod. The static wand person discharges the static
electricity with the static wand. The hookup person places the apex fitting onto the aircraft cargo
hook. The hookup team then moves clear of the load but remains close to the load as the helicopter
removes slack from the sling legs. When successful hookup is assured, the hookup team quickly exits
the area underneath the helicopter to the designated rendezvous point.
 Derigging. Derigging is the reverse of the preparation and rigging procedures.

A-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Aerial Transport of MLRS/HIMARS Ammunition and Equipment

Figure A-1. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with ATACMS
missiles, one container

Rigging Steps for One LPC

A-14. The following are the steps for rigging one LCP:
 Position apex fitting on top of the pod. Route outer sling legs 1 and 2 to the front of the pod and inner
sling legs 3 and 4 to the rear. Sling legs 1 and 3 must be on the left side of the load.
 Loop the chain end of sling leg 1 through the left front lift provision. Place the correct link from
Table A-2 in the grab hook. Repeat with sling leg 2 on the right front lift provision.
 Loop the chain end of sling leg 3 through the left rear lift provision. Place the correct link from Table
A-2 in the grab hook. Repeat with sling leg 4 on the right rear lift provision.
 Cluster and tie or tape (breakaway technique) all sling legs together on top of the container to prevent
entanglement during hookup and lift off.

RIGGING PROCEDURES FOR TWO STACKED LPC OR GMLA

A-15. Applicability. The following items in Table A-2 are certified for all helicopters with suitable lift
capacity by the US Army Soldier Systems Center:
Table A-2. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with ATACMS missiles,
two containers
NOMENCLATURE MAX SLING SET LINK COUNT RECOMMENDED
WEIGHT (pound FRONT/REAR AIRSPEED
(pounds) capacity) (knots)
Launch Pod Container with 10,190 25,000 3/3 90
Multiple Launch Rocket System
Rockets or Guided Multiple Launch
Rocket System Rockets (with Six
Rockets)
Guided Missile Launch Assembly 10,222 25,000 3/3 90
Pods with Army Tactical Missile
System Missiles

A-16. Materials. The following materials are required to rig this load:
 Sling set (25,000 pound capacity).
 Tape, adhesive, pressure sensitive, 2 inch wide roll.
 Cord, nylon, Type III, 550 pound breaking strength.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 A-3

Appendix A

 Webbing, cotton, 1/4 inch, 80 pound breaking strength.

 Felt sheet, cattle hair, Type IV, 1/2 inch or suitable substitute.
 Tie down strap, cargo, CGU-1/B (as required).
A-17. Personnel. Four persons can prepare and rig this load in 30 minutes.
A-18. Procedures. The following procedures apply to this load:
 Prepare the pods for travel in accordance with standard procedures.
 Stack the pods one on top of the other, with both pods facing the same direction.

CAUTION
Do not mix the LPCs and the GMLAs in the same load.

 Lash the stack of pods together using the CGU-1/B tie down straps. Two of the straps should run
through both sets of lifting provisions on each end of the pods, to keep them aligned during flight.
Evenly space the remaining two straps between the lifting provisions, running them around the pods.

WARNING
DO NOT ROUTE THE STRAPS OVER THE ROCKET TUBES. Pad all
straps in the area where they contact the edges of the launch pods.

A-19. Rigging. Rig the load according to the steps in paragraph A-22 (see Figure A-2).

Note. The firing end is considered the front of the load.

A-20. Hookup. The hookup team stands on top of the pods. The static wand person discharges the static
electricity with the static wand. The hookup person places the apex fitting onto the aircraft cargo hook. The
hookup team then moves clear of the load but remains close to the load as the helicopter removes slack from the
sling legs. When successful hookup is assured, the hookup team quickly exits the area underneath the helicopter
to the designated rendezvous point.
A-21. Derigging. Derigging is the reverse of the preparation and rigging procedures.

A-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Aerial Transport of MLRS/HIMARS Ammunition and Equipment

Figure A-2 LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with ATACMS
missiles, two containers

Rigging Steps for Two LPCs

A-22. The following are the steps for rigging two LCPs:
 Position apex fitting on top of the pods. Route outer sling legs 1 and 2 to the front of the pods and
inner sling legs 3 and 4 to the rear. Sling legs 1 and 3 must be on the left side of the load.
 Loop the chain end of sling leg 1 through the left front lift provision on the top pod and through the
front lift provision on the bottom pod. Thread it back through the front lift provision on the top pod.
Place the correct link from Table A-3 in the grab hook. Repeat with sling leg 2 on the right front lift
provision.
 Loop the chain end of sling leg 3 through the left rear lift provision on the top pod and through the
rear lift provision on the bottom pod. Thread it back through the rear lift provision on the top pod.
Place the correct link from Table A-3 in the grab hook. Repeat with sling leg 4 on the right rear lift
provision.
 Cluster and tie or tape (breakaway technique) all sling legs together on top of the pod to prevent
entanglement during hookup and lift off.

RIGGING PROCEDURES FOR FOUR LPC OR GMLA

A-23. Applicability. The following items in Table A-3 are certified for the helicopter(s) listed in the
following table by the US Army Soldier Systems Center:

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 A-5

 Appendix A

Table A-3. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with ATACMS missiles,
four containers
NOMENCLATURE MAX SLING SET LINK COUNT RECOMMENDED
WEIGHT (pound FRONT/REAR AIRSPEED
(pounds) capacity) (knots)
Launch Pod Container with Multiple 20,380 25,000 3/3 90
Launch Rocket System Rockets or
Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System
Rockets (with Six Rockets)
Guided Missile Launch Assembly Pods 20,444 25,000 3/3 90
with Army Tactical Missile System
Missiles

A-24. Materials. The following materials are required to rig this load:
 Sling set (25,000 pound capacity) (2 each).
 Tape, adhesive, pressure sensitive, 2 inch wide roll.
 Cord, nylon, Type III, 550 pound breaking strength.
 Webbing, cotton, 1/4 inch, 80 pound breaking strength.
 Strap, cargo, tie down, CGU-1/B (16 each).
 Lumber, 2 X 4 X 65 inches (4 each).
 Nails, eight penny (as required).
 Felt sheet, cattle hair, Type IV, 1/2 inch or suitable padding.
 Crane or forklift (15,000 pound capacity or larger).
A-25. Personnel. Four persons can prepare and rig this load in 30 minutes.
A-26. Procedures. The following procedures apply to this load. Prepare the load using the following steps:
 Prepare the pods for travel in accordance with standard procedures.
 Prepare two pieces of dunnage to protect the pods by nailing two pieces of 2 X 4 X 65 inch lumber
together, wide side to wide side.
 Make two stacks of pods. Use the crane or forklift to stack one stack of pods on top of the other with
the projectiles facing the same direction. Label the stacks #1 and #2

CAUTION
Do not mix the LPCs and the GMLAs in the same load.

 Lash stack #1 together using four tie down straps. Route a tie down strap through both sets of lifting
provisions on each end of the pods. Evenly space two tie down straps between the lifting provisions
evenly space two tie down straps between the lifting provisions.

WARNING
Routing the straps around the pods. DO NOT ROUTE THE STRAPS
OVER THE ROCKET TUBES. Pad the straps where they contact the
edges of the EALP

 Lash stack #2 using the above procedures for stack #1.

 Position the two pieces of dunnage near the lifting provisions on each end of the pods. Secure the
dunnage to the pods with Type III nylon cord.

A-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Aerial Transport of MLRS/HIMARS Ammunition and Equipment

 Position stack #1 against stack #2 using the crane or forklift. Ensure the dunnage is between the
loads.
 Lash the top two pods together on each end. Connect two tie down straps together to form each
lashing.
 Lash the bottom two pods together on each end. Connect two tie down straps together to form each
lashing.
 Pad the straps where they contact the edges of the pods.
 Rigging. Rig the load according to the steps in paragraph A-27 (see Figure A-3).

Note. The firing end is considered the front of the load.

 Hookup. Two hookup teams stand on top of container. The static discharge person discharges the
static electricity. The forward hookup person places apex fitting 1 onto the forward cargo hook. The
aft hookup person places apex fitting two onto the aft cargo hook. The hookup teams then carefully
dismount the container and remain close to the load as the helicopter removes slack from the sling
legs. When successful hookup is assured, the hookup teams quickly exit the area underneath the
helicopter to the designated rendezvous point.
 Derigging. Derigging is the reverse of the preparation and rigging procedures.

Figure A-3. LPC with MLRS/HIMARS rockets or GMLRS rockets/GMLA pods with ATACMS
missiles, four containers

Rigging Steps for Four LPCs

A-27. The following are the steps for rigging four LCPs:
 Position sling set number 1 on top of the forward end of the pods.
 Loop the chain end of outer sling legs 1 and 2 through their respective top front lift provisions of the
top pods, through the front lifting provision on the bottom pods, and back through the front top lift
provision on the top pods. Place the correct link from Table A-3 in the grab hook.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 A-7

Appendix A

 Loop the chain end of inner sling legs 3 and 4 through their respective top front lift provisions of the
top , through the front lifting provision on the bottom pods, and back through the front top lift
provision on the top pods. Place the correct link from Table A-3 in the grab hook. Secure the excess
chain with tape or Type III nylon cord.
 Position sling set number 2 on top of the aft end of the pods.
 Loop the chain end of outer sling legs 1 and 2 through their respective top rear lift provisions of the
top pods, through the rear lifting provision on the bottom pods, and back through the rear top lift
provision on the top pods. Place the correct link from Table A-3 in the grab hook.
 Loop the chain end of inner sling legs 3 and 4 through their respective top rear lift provisions of the
top pods, through the rear lifting provision on the bottom pods, and back through the rear top lift
provision on the top pods. Place the correct link from Table A-3 in the grab hook. Secure the excess
chain with tape or Type III nylon cord.
 Raise the apex fittings above the container. Cluster tape (breakaway technique) the sling legs in each
sling set together to prevent entanglement during hookup and lift off.

TRANSPORTATION OF MLRS/HIMARS EQUIPMENT ON UNITED

STATES AIR FORCE AIRCRAFT
A-28. MLRS/HIMARS units deploying by airlift assets must coordinate with their commanding headquarters
(see FM 55-1 and ATP 4-12). Rigging procedures unique to MLRS/HIMARS equipment are contained in the
respective technical manuals for that piece of equipment. The unit movement officer and the aircraft loadmaster
direct all other procedures pertinent to air movement.

CORPS
A-29. The tactical commander obtains airlift support from the Air Force using the airlift request system
established in the area of operations. Within the corps, three elements participate in this system. They are the
corps assistant chief of staff, operations (G-3) and the assistant chief of staff, logistics (G-4) (who uses the corps
transportation officer) and the movement control center. An Air Force liaison officer assists the corps
transportation officer.
A-30. The Corps G-3 provides the missions and the priority of support. The G-3 coordinates with the Corps G-4
to provide for logistics requirements. The G-3 then allocates the airframes to the corps support command where
the movement control center enters them in the movement program.

DIVISION
A-31. A division obtains Air Force airlift support by entering the airlift request system. Within the division, the
three key elements involved in this system are the division G-3, division G-4, and the division transportation
officer. An Air Force liaison officer collocates with and assists the division transportation officer.
A-32. Airlift support requests pass between the requesting unit and the division transportation officer. Requests
require coordination with the G-3 and G-4 to ensure the validation of the requirement. The method of delivery
is then coordinated with the receiving unit by the movement control center.

A-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Appendix B
MLRS/HIMARS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standard
Operating Procedures
This appendix is designed as a guide and checklist for preparing a field artillery tactical
standard operating procedures (TSOP) for the MLRS/HIMARS battalion and
MLRS/HIMARS battery. This appendix is not intended to be all inclusive regarding the
information required by an individual unit TSOP. These TSOP outlines are recommended
for use by all MLRS/HIMARS battalions and MLRS/HIMARS batteries to standardize
TSOPs within the MLRS/HIMARS community. MLRS/HIMARS platoon operations are
usually covered within the MLRS/HIMARS battalion or battery TSOP. Therefore, a
separate MLRS/HIMARS platoon TSOP will not be addressed.

SECTION I – TACTICAL STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (TSOP)

FORMAT
B-1. The TSOP is a set of instructions covering those features of operations that lend themselves to a definite
or standardized procedure to increase effectiveness. The TSOP is an order from the commander that tells his
staff and subordinates how he intends to run his unit. Procedures outlined in the unit TSOP apply unless the
commander orders otherwise.
B-2. This appendix provides an outline for use in developing a TSOP. A sample format is provided for use by
all MLRS/HIMARS battalions and MLRS/HIMARS batteries. Standardized formats are very helpful to newly
assigned personnel who must quickly find the answers to operations questions. When TSOPs are exchanged
with other units during coordination or liaison, they help both units understand the operating procedures of the
other.
B-3. The basic format of a TSOP is the implementing memorandum with attached annexes and appendixes (as
shown in the following examples). A table of contents to provide a quick reference to information contained in
the TSOP may also be inserted.
B-4. Normally, TSOPs are unclassified to facilitate distribution to all levels that need to have the information.
However, selected portions of the TSOP may be classified and should be identified as such in the table of
contents (and properly secured). (Normally, each annex would start on a separate page. However, for
presentation here, a line between each annex shows page breaks.)

Note. The following appendixes are unique to the battalion TSOP:

APPENDIX 2 LIAISON
APPENDIX 7 HHB OPERATIONS
APPENDIX 11 CIVIL OPERATION
APPENDIX 13 FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY OPERATION

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 B-1

Appendix B

EXAMPLE IMPLEMENTING MEMORANDUM (BATTALION AND BATTERY)

Department of the Army

Location Unit

OFFICE SYMBOL Date

MEMORANDUM FOR SEE DISTRIBUTION

SUBJECT: Tactical Standing Operating Procedures

1. REFERENCES. This paragraph should contain all references that support the TSOP. A primary reference is the
TSOP of the unit's higher headquarters with which it must operate. In cases where a unit has contingency missions
with more than 1 higher headquarters, its TSOP should be written for the primary mission and annotations should be
made within the text as appropriate where procedures differ.

2. APPLICABILITY/SCOPE. The purpose of this paragraph is to outline the applicability and/or scope of the
TSOP. The paragraph below is one example:
This TSOP covers only wartime operations after deployment. This TSOP does not and will not repeat
doctrine, tactics, or techniques that are provided in field manuals, technical manuals, and mission training
plans. It applies to all organic, assigned, attached, and operational control units. It also applies to all
supporting units operating in or occupying areas within the battalion or battery area of operation. All TSOP
provisions apply except as modified by operations orders and plans. No provision will replace good
judgment and common sense.

3. PURPOSE. The purpose of this paragraph is to describe the purpose of the TSOP. The paragraph below is one
example:
This TSOP prescribes guidance for the conduct of sustained tactical operations. Specifically, it standardizes
those routine and/or recurring operational procedures and responsibilities of individuals and/or organic and
supporting elements.

4. GUIDANCE TO SUBORDINATE UNITS. As appropriate.

5. PROPONENCY. Overall proponency is usually the battalion S-3 or the operations officer at the battery level.
The proponent for each annex and appendix may be listed in this paragraph if applicable.

6. CHANGES. The purpose of this paragraph is to outline procedures for making changes to the TSOP. Consider
the following topics for inclusion in this paragraph:
• Who is responsible for writing and coordinating changes? Normally the proponent of each annex and/or
appendix is responsible for writing changes to his respective annex and/or appendix.
• Who approves changes? Normally the commander approves changes to the TSOP, but the procedure for
approval and dissemination must be specified.
• How changes are to be posted. A posted changes page should precede the TSOP.

SIGNATURE BLOCK
RANK, FA
Commanding

DISTRIBUTION: Distribution is usually made in accordance with a unit distribution scheme, such as:
DISTRIBUTION A
Whether distribution is made in accordance with a unit distribution scheme or listed by element and number of
copies, the following should be considered:
• Elements that need copies within the battalion or battery.
• Copies needed by each element.
• Distribution of changes.
• Liaison officer team distribution during operations.

B-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standard Operating Procedures

• Distribution to external elements.

SECTION II – BATTALION TSOP

EXAMPLE TABLE OF CONTENTS (BATTALION TSOP)

ANNEX A. OPERATIONS
Appendix 1 - Battalion CP
2 – Liaison
3 - Movement and Positioning
4 - Mission command
5 - Fire Direction
6 - Survey and Meteorological Support
7 - HHB Operations
8 - Firing Battery Operations
9 - Firing Platoon Operations
10 - Launcher Operations
11 - Civil Military Operations
12 - Emergency Destruction
ANNEX B. INTELLIGENCE
ANNEX C. AIR DEFENSE
ANNEX D. CBRN
Appendix 1 - CBRN Operations
2 - CBRN Decontamination
3 - Mission-oriented protective posture
4 - CBRN Threat Warning and Alarm System
ANNEX E. SIGNAL
Appendix 1 - Radio Communications
2 - Mobile Subscriber Equipment Communications
3 - Communications Security
4 - Resynchronization
ANNEX F. SUSTAINMENT
Appendix 1 - Battalion Trains
2 - Administrative/Logistics Operation Center
3 - Personnel Administration
4 - Supply Operations
5 - Ammunition Management and Resupply Operations
6 - Services
7 - Unit Ministry Operation
8 - Maintenance Operations
9 - Refueling Operation
10 - Reconstitution
11 - Medical Support Operations
ANNEX G. SAFETY
Appendix 1 - Risk Analysis
ANNEX H. REPORTS
Appendix 1 - Personnel and Administration Reports
2 - Intelligence and Security Reports
3 - Operations Reports
4 - Logistical Reports
5 - CBRN Reports

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 B-3

Appendix B

6 - Communications and Electronics Operations

ANNEX A (OPERATIONS) TO BATTALION FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP

B-5. The purpose of this annex is to prescribe operations within the battalion. Consider the appendixes below
for inclusion in this annex.

APPENDIX 1—BATTALION COMMAND POST

B-6. This appendix shows the physical setup of the battalion CP and establishes internal CP operating
procedures. Consider the following topics for inclusion in this appendix:
 CP manning.
 Shift organization and sleep plan.
 Shift change over time and procedures.
 Overall CP lay down with vehicles.
 CP internal setup.
 CP communications (internal and external).
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Priorities of work.
 Access control.
 Security.
 Load plans.

APPENDIX 2—LIAISON
B-7. This appendix outlines the duties and responsibilities for liaison personnel. Consider the following topics:
 Organization.
 Transportation.
 Communications.
 Checklist for liaison team.
 Liaison functions.
 Liaison responsibilities to supported unit.
 Liaison responsibilities to parent unit.
 Prioritization and formation of ad hoc teams, as required.
 Load plans.

APPENDIX 3—MOVEMENT AND POSITIONING

B-8. This appendix prescribes movement and positioning requirements, procedures, and techniques used
within the battalion. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Movement orders.
 Movement techniques and the mission variables of METT-TC.
 Positioning in the offense.
 Positioning in the defense.
 Displacement options.
 Convoy procedures.
 Mission command during movement.

B-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standard Operating Procedures

APPENDIX 4—MISSION COMMAND

B-9. This appendix outlines how the battalion will be commanded and controlled. Consider the following
topics:
 Responsibilities for mission command.
 Orders process.
 Orders distribution.
 Orders format.
 Succession of command.
 Transfer of CP operations.
 Alternate CP.
 Jump CP operations.
 Assignment of rocket or missile missions to batteries.

APPENDIX 5—FIRE DIRECTION

B-10. This appendix standardizes tactical fire direction procedures and information. Consider the following
topics:
 Personnel responsibilities.
 Initialization.
 Equipment maintenance.
 Communications procedures.
 Degraded mode operations procedures.
 Battalion fire direction procedures.
 Platoon and battery fire direction procedures.
 Massed fire procedures.
 Subscriber tables.

APPENDIX 6—SURVEY AND METEOROLOGICAL SUPPORT

B-11. This appendix prescribes survey operations and identifies responsibilities and procedures for receiving
and disseminating met messages. Consider the following topics:
 Personnel responsibilities.
 Survey priorities (for example, IPADS, DAGR, and hasty survey).
 Radio communications and requests for survey.
 SCP locations and markings.
 GPS procedures.
 Datum coordination and control.
 Extension of survey.
 Alternate met procedures in case of electronic failure.
 Meteorology message dissemination times.
 Coordination of met requirements.

APPENDIX 7—HHB OPERATIONS

B-12. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for the HHB. Consider the following topics:
 Tactical organization.
 Personnel and section responsibilities.
 RSOP.
 Advance party configuration, equipment, and procedures.
 HHB rearm, refuel, and refit operations.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 B-5

Appendix B

 Load plans.

APPENDIX 8—FIRING BATTERY OPERATIONS

B-13. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for firing batteries. Consider the following topics:
 Battery deployment configurations.
 Battery area of operations.
 Battery CP lay down with vehicles.
 BOC and LOC internal setups.
 BOC and LOC manning.
 BOC and LOC shift organizations and sleep plan.
 Shift change over time and briefing procedures.
 Communications (internal and external).
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 RSOP.
 Advance party configuration, equipment, and procedures.
 Security.
 Load plans.
 Rearm, refuel, and refit operations.

APPENDIX 9—FIRING PLATOON OPERATIONS

B-14. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for firing platoons. Consider the following topics:
 Platoon deployment configurations.
 Platoon area of operations.
 POC internal setup.
 Sleep plan.
 Communications (internal and external).
 Fire direction (hot, cool, cold status, ammo status).
 Positioning (firing points, ammo supply points, SCPs, and rendezvous points).
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 RSOP.
 Advance party configuration, equipment, and procedures.
 Security.
 Load plans.

APPENDIX 10—LAUNCHER OPERATIONS

B-15. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for launchers. Consider the following topics:
 Fire direction (status, response time, and start up data).
 Positioning (site selection, masking, and survey).
 Movement.
 Security.
 Specific duties and responsibilities.

APPENDIX 11—CIVIL MILITARY OPERATIONS

B-16. This appendix prescribes operating procedures for civil military operations. Consider the following
topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Communications and coordination with local and/or host nation officials.

B-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standard Operating Procedures

 Refugee control.
 Local and/or host nation support.

APPENDIX 12—EMERGENCY DESTRUCTION

B-17. This appendix prescribes procedures within the battalion. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities (for example, chain of command/authority to order emergency
destruction).
 Priorities.
 Methods.
 Verification and reporting.

APPENDIX 13—FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY OPERATIONS

B-18. This appendix prescribes procedures within the battalion. Consider the following topics:
 Company deployment configurations.
 Company area of operations.
 Company CP lay down with vehicles.
 BOC and LOC internal setups.
 BOC and LOC manning.
 BOC and LOC shift organizations and sleep plan.
 Shift change over time and briefing procedures.
 Communications (internal and external).
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 RSOP.
 Advance party configuration, equipment, and procedures.
 Security.
 Load plans.
 Rearm, refuel, and refit operations.

ANNEX B (INTELLIGENCE) TO BATTALION FA (MLRS/HIMARS)

TSOP
B-19. This annex prescribes intelligence operations within the battalion. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Control and destruction of classified documents.
 Enemy prisoner of war procedures.
 Returnees.
 Security.
 Weather.
 Mapping, charting, and geodesy.
 Tactical jamming procedures.
 Essential elements of information.
 IPB.
 Interface with military intelligence and United States Air Force sensing platforms.

ANNEX C (AIR DEFENSE) TO BATTALION FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP

B-20. This annex prescribes air defense operations within the battalion. Consider the following topics:
 Air and missile defense procedures (active and passive).

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 B-7

Appendix B

 Air and missile defense warning and weapons control status.

 Hostile aircraft criteria.
 Rules of engagement.
 Attached air defense elements (mission command of and support for).

ANNEX D (CBRN ) TO BATTALION FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP

B-21. This annex provides CBRN defense information and prescribes CBRN operations within the battalion.

APPENDIX 1—CBRN OPERATiONS

B-22. This appendix prescribes CBRN readiness and defense operations. Consider the following topics:
 Individual skills.
 CBRN teams and/or control parties.
 Warning devices.
 Collective skills.
 Radiation exposure guidance.
 Unmasking procedures.
 Threat assessment.
 Hazard overlay.

APPENDIX 2—CBRN DECONTAMINATION

B-23. This appendix establishes CBRN procedures. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Decontamination procedures and levels of decontamination.
 Requests for decontamination support from batteries, platoons, and higher headquarters.

APPENDIX 3—MISSION-ORIENTED PROTECTION POSTURE

B-24. This appendix provides easily accessible information and standardizes wear of protective clothing and use
of equipment. Consider the following topics:
 Mission-oriented protection posture levels and dissemination.
 Standardized wear of mission-oriented protection posture gear.
 Requisition and issue of protective clothing and equipment.
 Location and contents of individual protective clothing and equipment bags.

APPENDIX 4—CBRN THREAT WARNING AND ALARM SYSTEM

B-25. This appendix provides easily accessible information and establishes CBRN threat warning and alarm
procedures and priority means of dissemination within the battalion.

ANNEX E (SIGNAL) TO BATTALION FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP

B-26. This annex prescribes signal operations within the battalion. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities (staff, batteries, and platoons).
 Communications integration with higher, lower, supported, and adjacent units.
 Signal equipment maintenance.

APPENDIX 1—COMMUNICATIONS
B-27. This appendix provides communications information and prescribes communications procedures.
Consider the following topics:

B-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standard Operating Procedures

 External radio net diagrams.

 Internal radio net diagrams.
 Priority of nets.
 Specific operating and setup procedures (for example, net control, use of antennas, and so forth).

APPENDIX 2—MOBILE SUBSCRIBER EQUIPMENT COMMUNICATIONS

B-28. This appendix provides mobile subscriber equipment communications information and prescribes mobile
subscriber equipment communications procedures. Consider the following topics:
 Affiliation codes and procedures.
 Disaffiliation procedures.
 Radio access unit positioning and coverage.
 J-1077 positioning and access.
 Subscriber information.

APPENDIX 3—COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY

B-29. This appendix establishes communications security procedures. Consider the following topics:
 COMSEC changeover times and procedures.
 Distribution of COMSEC material.
 Loss and recovery of COMSEC material.
 Signal operating instructions (SOI) procedures.
 Mobile subscriber radio telephone variable control.
 Remote keying procedures.
 Mobile subscriber radio telephone compromise and recovery procedures.
 GPS.

APPENDIX 4—RESYNCHRONIZATION
B-30. This appendix prescribes procedures to resynchronize serialization of digital systems to correct
serialization without voice transmission.

ANNEX F (SUSTAINMENT) TO BATTALION FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP

B-31. This annex prescribes sustainment operations within the battalion

APPENDIX 1—BATTALION TRAINS

B-32. This appendix shows the physical setup of the battalion trains and establishes internal operating
procedures. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Trains area layout (vehicles and sections).
 Internal communications.
 Security.
 Movement and positioning.

APPENDIX 2—ALOC
B-33. This appendix shows the physical setup of the ALOC and establishes internal ALOC operating
procedures. Consider the following topics:
 Specific ALOC functions.
 ALOC manning.
 Shift organization and sleep plan.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 B-9

Appendix B

 Shift change over time and briefing procedures.

 ALOC internal setup.
 Mission command.
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Priorities of work.
 Load plans.

APPENDIX 3—PERSONNEL OPERATIONS

B-34. This appendix prescribes personnel operations within the battalion to support the soldier and batteries.
Consider the following topics:
 Maintenance of unit strength (all levels within the battalion).
 Personnel replacement operations.
 Personnel accounting and strength reporting.
 Personnel database management.
 Casualty management.
 Postal operations.
 Enemy prisoner of war and civilian internee operations.
 Morale, welfare, and recreation.
 Other personnel functions (orders, evaluation reports, promotions, personnel actions, personnel
assignment and utilization, and awards).
 Logistics package input.

APPENDIX 4—SUPPLY OPERATIONS

B-35. This appendix prescribes procedures to request, receive, store, and issue supplies. Consider the following
topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Management of supplies.
 Requisition, flow, and supply distribution (prioritize when applicable).
 All classes of supply (controlled and non-controlled).
 Water operations, requirements, and points.
 Map supply.
 Publications and blank forms.
 Tabs for preplanned logistics packages.
 Specific categories of supply (for example, CBRN, communications, and small arms).

APPENDIX 5—AMMUNITIONS MANAGEMENT AND RESUPPLY OPERATIONS

B-36. This appendix prescribes ammunition management and resupply procedures. Consider the following
topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Requests.
 Resupply procedures used within the battalion.
 Standardization of markings for unserviceable munitions.

APPENDIX 6—SERVICES
B-37. This appendix describes logistics support services within the battalion. Consider the following topics:
 Laundry.
 Clothing exchange.

B-10 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standard Operating Procedures

 Showers.
 CTA-50 exchange.
 Graves registration.

APPENDIX 7—UNIT MINISTRY OPERATIONS

B-38. This appendix prescribes unit ministry operating procedures. Consider the following topics:
 Communications.
 Priority of coverage.
 Coordination of religious services.
 Chaplain support activities.
 Mass burial.
 Civil actions.
 Supplies and logistic support.
 Accommodation of religious practices.
 Distinctive Faith Group Leaders.

APPENDIX 8—MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

B-39. This appendix prescribes maintenance operations. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Maintenance priorities.
 Recovery and evacuation priorities.
 Cannibalization and controlled substitution.
 Battlefield damage assessment and repair.
 Weapons system replacement order.
 Contact teams.
 Equipment density listing.
 Repairable and returnable components and assemblies.
 Operational readiness float.
 Equipment evacuation.
 COMSEC maintenance.

APPENDIX 9—REFUELING OPERATIONS

B-40. This appendix prescribes refueling operations within the battalion. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Fuel request procedures and priorities.
 Refuel on the move.
 Day procedures and template.
 Night procedures and template.
 Security.
 Safety.

APPENDIX 10—RECONSTITUTION
B-41. This appendix prescribes procedures to reconstitute the battalion when it falls below an unacceptable
level of combat readiness. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Requirement to reconstitute (mass casualties, mass destruction of equipment, and the destruction or
loss of effectiveness).

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 B-11

Appendix B

 Method of reconstitution (reorganization and regeneration).

APPENDIX 11—MEDICAL SUPPORT OPERATIONS

B-42. This appendix prescribes medical support tasks. Consider the following topics:
 Specific duties and responsibilities.
 Locations and deployment configurations of medical assets—CP and/or trains.
 Assignment of medics.
 Communications.
 Field sanitation.
 Combat lifesaver training.
 Evacuation and reporting procedures.
 Priority of evacuation.
 Collection and accountability of individual equipment and effects.
 Treatment and prevention of disease.
 Mental health, dental, and other essential services.

ANNEX G (SAFETY) TO BATTALION FA (MLRS/HIMARS) TSOP

B-43. This annex prescribes combat safety requirements and provides risk assessment procedures within the
battalion.

APPENDIX 1—SAFETY INFORMATION AND REPORTING

B-44. This appendix prescribes how command safety information will be distributed and the requirements and
means for rendering accident and incident reports.

APPENDIX 2—FIRING SAFETY

B-45. This appendix prescribes combat firing safety requirements.

ANNEX H (REPORTS) TO BATTALION FA (MLRS/HIMARS TSOP)

B-46. This annex provides a single consolidated section within the TSOP to prescribe report requirements
within the battalion. Normally, reports are segregated by staff functional area. Reports should be tailored to
specific requirements of higher headquarters and the commander's need for input into his decision making
process. Avoid requiring information that is duplicated in other reports or that is of minimal value. To the
greatest extent possible, coordinate report transmission and effective times to reduce workloads and to
synchronize staff actions. The means for submitting each report and the priority of each means must be
addressed. Many reports are submitted as required and should be so indicated. Consider the reports below
within this annex.

APPENDIX 1—PERSONNEL AND ADMINISTRATION REPORTS

B-47. Consider the following:
 Personnel status report.
 Casualty feeder report.
 Medical evacuation request.

APPENDIX 2—INTELLIGENCE AND SECURITY REPORTS

B-48. Consider the following:
 Weather report.
 Size, activity, location, unit, time and equipment report.

B-12 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion and Battery Tactical Standard Operating Procedures

 Sensitive items report.

APPENDIX 3—OPERATIONS REPORTS

B-49. Consider the following:
 Situation report.
 Launcher status report.
 Voice or manual fire mission.
 Recon order.
 Movement order.
 Closing report.
 Request to displace.
 Ammunition assets report.

APPENDIX 4—LOGISTICAL REPORTS

B-50. Consider the following:
 Logistics status report.
 Equipment status report.
 Combat loss report.
 Logistical spot report.
 Emergency resupply request (ammunition and fuel).

APPENDIX 5—CBRN REPORTS

B-51. Consider the following:
 CBRN 1 report.
 CBRN 2 report.
 CBRN 3 report.
 CBRN 4 report.
 CBRN 5 report.
 CBRN 6 report.
 Chemical downwind message.
 Effective downwind message.
 Request for decontamination support.
 Radiation status report.

APPENDIX 6—COMMUNICATIONS AND ELECTRONICS OPERATIONS REPORTS

B-52. Consider the meaconing, interference, jamming, and intrusion operations feeder report.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 B-13

This page intentionally left blank.
 Appendix C

LNO Checklist
PREPARATION FOR OPERATIONS
EQUIPMENT
 Personal field gear and equipment.
 Night vision goggles.
 GPS receiver.
 Camouflage screening system.
 Hex tent/stove/cots/water cans.
 Fire control system (for example, AFATDS).
 Communications Systems:
 Radios/COMSEC devices.
 OE254 antenna (2 each).
 AN/GRA-39 remote.
 TA-312 telephone.
 DR-8 (w/WD-1A/TT).
 TA-1035/U with MX-10891/G field wire.
 Maps and overlay material.
 Field table with chairs.
 Office supplies and materials to include:
 Pens/pencils/markers.
 Notepads and tablet.
 Rubbing alcohol/paper towels.
 DA Form 1594.
 Fire mission logs.

INFORMATION
 TSOP/SOI/OPLAN/OPORD of sending unit.
 TSOP/SOI/OPLAN/OPORD of receiving unit.
 Location and route to receiving CP.
 Intelligence update.
 Current plans, orders, maps, overlays, and targeting information to include concept of operation,
concept of fires, and commander's intent.
 Unit locations/readiness and strength.
 Land management coordinating agency (force headquarters fire cell/fires element).
 Logistical considerations and supporting agencies.
 Current status of receiving unit's mission.
 References: field and technical manuals.

LIAISON CHECKLIST
BEFORE DEPARTING THE SENDING UNIT:
 Do you understand what the commander wants the receiving commander to know?

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 C-1

Appendix C

 Did you arrange for a briefing from operations, intelligence, and other staff elements concerning
current and future operations?
 Did you verify the receipt of, and do you understand, the tasks your staff has given you?
 Did you obtain the correct maps, traces, and overlays (including maneuver, engineer, and fire support
overlays)?
 Did you arrange for transport, communications and cryptographic equipment, codes, and signal
instructions, and for their protection and security?
 Did you arrange for replacement of these items, as necessary?
 Did you arrange for the departure of the liaison party?
 Did you complete route reconnaissance and time management plans so you will arrive at the
designated location on time?
 Do you and your party know how you are to destroy the information you are carrying in an
emergency, in transit, and at the receiving unit?
 Do you have SOI? (Do you know the challenge and password?)
 Did you inform your headquarters of when you will leave, what route you will take, when you are to
arrive, POC for linkup with receiving unit and, when known, the estimated time and route of your
return?
 Did you pick up all correspondence designated for the receiving headquarters?
 Did you conduct a radio check? (Do you have appropriate COMSEC equipment?)
 Do you know the impending moves of your headquarters and of the receiving headquarters?
 Did you bring automation or computers to support your operation?
 Did you pack adequate supplies of Class I and III for use in transit?

DURING THE LIAISON TOUR:

 Establish and maintain communication(s) with sending unit.
 Notify your own headquarters of your arrival.
 Deliver all correspondence designated for the receiving headquarters.
 Visit staff elements, brief them on the situation of your unit, and collect information (such as maps,
traces, and overlays) from them.
 Annotate on all overlays the security classification, title, map scale, grid intersection points, date time
group information, date time group received, and from whom received.
 Participate in receiving unit's orders process, briefings, and rehearsals. Assist in development of:
 Fire support execution matrix.
 Fire support plan.
 Advise on sending unit capabilities, requirements, limitations, and employment.
 Visit and coordinate routinely with all receiving unit staff elements.
 Send sending unit routine updates regarding mission, unit locations, future operations, and
commander's intent.
 Organize sleep plan for 24 hour operations.
 Ensure that receiving unit S-3 is aware of your location at all times.
 Accomplish mission without interfering with the receiving unit’s operations.
 Facilitate information exchange.
 Pick up all correspondence for your headquarters before leaving.
 Inform the receiving headquarters of when you will depart, what route you will take, and when you
expect to arrive at the sending unit.

AFTER RETURNING TO THE SENDING UNIT:

 Did you deliver all correspondence?
 Did you brief the appropriate staff elements?

C-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 LNO Checklist

 Did you prepare the necessary reports?

EXAMPLE OUTLINE OF A LIAISON OFFICER'S HANDBOOK/TSOP

 Table of contents, with the sending unit proponency statement.
 Purpose statement.
 Introduction statement.
 Definitions.
 Scope statement.
 Responsibilities and guidelines for conduct.
 Actions before departing from the sending unit.
 Actions on arriving at the receiving unit.
 Actions during liaison operations at the receiving unit.
 Actions before departing from the receiving unit.
 Actions on arrival at the sending unit.
 Sample questions.
 Information requirements.
 Required reports (from higher and sending units' TSOP).
 Packing list (administrative supplies and unit TSOP, field uniform, equipment).
 Credentials.
 Forms. (DA Forms 1594 and Other blank forms)
 References.
 Computers for information and data exchange. Removable storage drives for transport and
transfer of electronic files.
 Signal operating instructions extract.
 Security code encryption device.
 Communications equipment, including remote equipment.
 Phone book.
 List of commanders and staff officers.
 Telephone calling (credit) card.
 Movement table.
 Administrative equipment (pens, paper, scissors, tape, hole punch, and so on).
 Map and chart equipment (pens, pins, protractor, straight edge, scale, distance counter, acetate,
unit markers, and so on).
 References.
 Sending unit's command modification tables of organization and equipment, unit status report (if
appropriate because of the classification of the report).

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 C-3

This page intentionally left blank.
 Appendix D
MLRS/HIMARS Command Posts
This appendix provides examples of CPs for the MLRS/HIMARS battalion, battery, and
platoon. It is a guide for the MLRS/HIMARS battalion commander and his staff, the
MLRS/HIMARS battery commander and battery HQ and support personnel, and the
MLRS/HIMARS platoon leader and platoon HQ personnel. The battalion CPs in this
appendix are for an MLRS/HIMARS battalion deployed under option one—dual CPs.
The battery CPs in this appendix are for an MLRS/HIMARS battery deployed with a split
HQ. Each unit must adapt these CPs to its own particular mission and deployment option
and to the personnel and equipment authorized in their modification tables of
organization and equipment.

SECTION I—MLRS/HIMARS BATTALION COMMAND POST

Figure D-1. Vehicles at the MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP, option one, dual CPs

Note. The battalion commander’s vehicle and the S-6 vehicle will often be away from the CP area.

Table D-1. Personnel at the MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP, option one, dual CPs
Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B
Battalion Headquarters
Command Section
Commander O5 13A00 1
Command Sergeant Major E9 00Z50 1
Vehicle Driver E3 13P10 1

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 D-1

Appendix D

Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B

S-3 Section
Operations Staff Officer (S-3) O4 13A00 1
Operations Officer O3 13A00 1 A

Chemical Officer O2 74B00 1 A

Operations Sergeant E9 13Z50 1 B

Master Gunner/Asst Operations E7 13M40 1 A
Sergeant
Chief Surveyor E6 13S30 1
CBRN NCO E6 74B30 1 B
Senior Radio Operator-Maintainer E5 25C20 1 A
Fire Direction Specialist E4 13P10 2 A,B
Radio Operator-Maintainer E4 25C10 1 B
Radio Operator-Maintainer E3 25C10 1 A
Fire Direction Center (battalion)
Fire Direction Officer O3 13A00 1 A
Chief Fire Direction Computer 13P40 1 B
E7
Fire Direction Computer 13P30 2 A/B
E6
Battery Display Operator 13P20 4 A/B
E5
Senior Radio Operator-Maintainer 25C20 1 A
E5
Fire Direction Specialist 13P10 2 A/B
E4
Radio Operator-Maintainer 25C10 1 B
E4
Radio Operator-Maintainer 25C10 1 A
E3
S-2 Section
Intelligence Staff Officer (S-2) O3 13A00 1 B
Targeting Officer W2 131A0 1
Intelligence Sergeant E8 13Z50 1 A

Intelligence Analyst E5 35F20 1 B

Fire Direction Specialist/Vehicle Driver E4 13P10 1 B

Survey Section

Improved Position Azimuth Determining A

E5 13S20 1
System (IPADS) Team Chief
IPADs Vehicle Driver/Field Artillery B
E5 13S20 2
Surveyor

D-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Command Posts

Table D-2. MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP shifts by duty position

Duty Position Shift A Shift B
Duty Officer Operations Officer Intelligence Staff Officer (S-2)
Duty NCO Intelligence Sergeant Operations Sergeant
Fire Direction Fire Direction Officer Chief Fire Direction Computer
Computer Operator Battery Display Operator Battery Display Operator
CBRN Operations Chemical Officer CBRN NCO
Legend: CBRN— chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear NCO—noncommissioned officer

Figure D-2. MLRS/HIMARS battalion CP, side by side configuration

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 D-3

Appendix D

SECTION II—MLRS/HIMARS BATTALION TRAINS

Figure D-3. Vehicles at the MLRS/HIMARS battalion trains, option one, dual CPs

Note. Commanders must consider the defense of the CP and the ALOC if operating in a split HQ
configuration.

Table D-3. Personnel at MLRS/HIMARS battalion trains, option one, dual CPs
Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B
Battalion Headquarters
Command Section
Executive Officer O4 13A00 1
Vehicle Driver E3 13P10 1

D-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Command Posts

Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B

Headquarters and Headquarters Battery Headquarters
Battery Headquarters
Commander O3 13A00 1
First Sergeant E8 13Z5M 1
Supply Sergeant E6 92Y30 1
Armorer E4 92Y10 1
Vehicle Driver E3 13P10 1
S-1 Section
Personnel Staff Officer (S-1) O3 42B00 1 B
Senior Human Resources Sergeant E7 42A40 1 A
Human Resources Sergeant E6 42A30 1 B
Human Resources Sergeant E5 42A20 2 A,B
Paralegal Specialist E4 27D10 1 A
Human Resources Specialist E4 42A10 1
Human Resources Specialist E3 42A10 1
Human Resources Specialist E3 42A10 1
Unit Ministry Team
Chaplain O3 56A00 1
Chaplain Assistant E4 56M10 1
Medical Platoon HQ
Platoon Leader O3 65D00 0
Field Medical Assistant O2 70B67 1
Section Noncommissioned Officer E6 68W30 1
Medical Treatment Team
Physician Assistant O3 65D00 1
Health Care Sergeant E6 68W3O 1
Health Care Specialist E4 68W1O 1
Health Care Specialist E3 68W1O 1
+ Section
Combat Medic E4 68W10 4
Ambulance Team
Emergency Care Sergeant E5 68W2O 1
Ambulance Aide/Driver E3 68W1O 1

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 D-5

Appendix D

Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B

S-4 Section
Logistics Staff Office (S-4) O3 13A00 1 A
Property Accounting Tech/Property Book B
Officer W2 920A0 1
Senior Maintenance Supervisor E8 91Z5O 1 A
Supply Noncommissioned Officer E7 92Y4O 1 A
Supply Sergeant E6 92Y3O 1 B
Asst Supply Sergeant E5 92Y2O 1 A
Property Book Noncommissioned Officer E5 92Y2O 1 A
Property Book Noncommissioned Officer E5 92Y2O 1 B
Supply Specialist E4 92Y1O 2 A, B
Supply Specialist E3 92Y1O 1 A
Ammunition Management Section
Ammunition Officer O2 13A00
Ammunition Noncommissioned Officer E7 13M4O
Vehicle Driver E3 13P1O
S-6 Section
Signal Staff Officer (S-6) O3 25A00 1 A
Signal Support System Chief E8 25U50 1 B
Fwd Signal Support Noncommissioned E6 25U30 3
Officer
Signal Information Service Specialist E4 25U10 1 A
Signal Support System Maintenance E4 25U10 1 B
Signal Support System Specialist E3 25U10 1 A
Automation Management Section
Local Area Network Manager E4 25B10 1 A
Local Area Network Manager E3 25B10 1 B
Retransmission Team
Team Chief E5 25U20 1
Radio Retransmission Operator E4 25U10 1
Radio Retransmission Operator E3 25U10 1

Table D-4. MLRS/HIMARS battalion ALOC shifts by duty position

Duty Position Shift A Shift B
Duty officer Logistics Staff Officer (S-4) Personnel Staff Officer (S-1)
Duty Noncommissioned Senior Human Resources Sergeant Battalion supply
Officer Noncommissioned Officer
Maintenance Representative Battalion Maintenance Officer Unit Maintenance Tech
Supply Representative Supply Sergeant Property Property Accounting Tech/
Property Book Officer
Personnel/Administration Human Resources Sergeant Human Resources SSG

D-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Command Posts

Figure D-4. MLRS/HIMARS battalion ALOC in built up trucks

Note. In some units, built up cargo trucks for the ALOC are not possible because of vehicle haul
requirements. See Figure D-5 for the ALOC in a tent.

Figure D-5. MLRS/HIMARS battalion ALOC in a general purpose medium tent

Note. The objective L-series tables of organization and equipment does not have AN/GRA-39 remote
radios. The primary communication means is mobile subscriber equipment.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 D-7

Appendix D

Table D-5. Forward support company with the MLRS/HIMARS battalion

Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B
Company Headquarters
Commander O3 90A00 1 *
Executive Officer O2 88A00 1
First Sergeant E8 91Z5M 1
Supply Sergeant E6 92Y3O 1
CBRN Specialist E4 74D1O 1
Armorer E4 92Y1O 1
Supply Specialist E4 92Y1O 1
Field Feeding Section
Senior Food Operations Sergeant E7 92G4O 1
Senior First Cook E6 92G3O 1
Cook E5 92G2O 2
Cook E5 92G2O 5
Cook E4 92G1O 3
Distribution Platoon Headquarters
Platoon Leader O2 92A00 1
Platoon Sergeant E7 92A4O 1
Material Control/Accounting Specialist E4 92A1O 1
General Supply Section
Section Sergeant E6 88M3O 1
Heavy Vehicle Driver E4 88M1O 1
Vehicle Driver E4 88M1O 4
Vehicle Driver E4 88M1O 4
Class III Distribution Section
Petroleum Heavy Vehicle Operator E5 92F2O 1
Petroleum Heavy Vehicle Operator E4 92F1O 3
Petroleum Light Vehicle Operator E4 92F1O 2
Petroleum Light Vehicle Operator E4 92F1O 4
Class V Section
Squad Leader E6 88M3O 1
Heavy Vehicle Driver E6 88M3O 6
Heavy Vehicle Driver E5 88M2O 19
Heavy Vehicle Driver E4 88M1O 26
Vehicle Driver E4 88M1O 2
Vehicle Driver E3 88M1O 2
Heavy Vehicle Driver E3 88M1O 14
Water Section
Section Chief E6 92F3O 1
Water Treatment Specialist E4 92W1O 1
Class III/V Squad
Squad Leader E6 88M3O 1

D-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Command Posts

Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B

Heavy Vehicle Driver E6 88M3O 2
Heavy Vehicle Driver E5 88M2O 12
Heavy Vehicle Driver E4 88M1O 16
Ammunition Sergeant E5 89B20 2
Petroleum Heavy Vehicle Operator E5 92F2O 2
Petroleum Heavy Vehicle Operator E4 92F10 4
Heavy Vehicle Driver E3 88M10 8
Maintenance Platoon HQ
Platoon Leader O2 91A00 1
Platoon Sergeant E7 91X40 1
Maintenance Control Section
Maintenance Control Officer O2 91A00 1
Senior Auto Maintenance Warrant Officer W3 915E0 1
Maintenance Control Sergeant E7 91X40 1
Equip Recovery/Parts Sergeant E5 92A20 2
Equip Recovery /Parts Specialist E3 92A10 1
Equip Recovery /Parts Specialist E1 92A10 1
Maintenance Section
Motor Sergeant E7 91X4O 1
Senior Mechanic E6 91B3O 1
Small Arms/Artillery Repair E5 91F2O 1
Power Generator Equipment Repair E5 91D2O 1
Wheeled Vehicle Mechanic E5 91B2O 3
Track Vehicle Mechanic E5 91H2O 1
Wheeled Vehicle Mechanic E4 91B10 3
Wheeled Vehicle Mechanic E4 91B10 1
Utilities Equipment Repair E4 91C1O 1
Power Generator Equipment Repair E4 91D1O 1
Quartermaster/Chemical Equipment
Repair E4 91J1O 1
COMSEC/Radio Equip Repair E4 94E1O 1
Computer/Digital Systems Repair E4 94F1O 1
Wheeled Vehicle Mechanic E3 91B10 3
Wheeled Vehicle Mechanic E3 91B10 1
Power Generator Equipment Repair E3 91D1O 1
Small Arms/Artillery Repair E3 91F1O 1
Track Vehicle Mechanic E3 91H1O 1
Service/Recovery Section
Senior Tracked Mechanic E6 91B3O 1
Allied Trades Specialist E5 91E20 1
Recovery Vehicle Operator E5 91H2O 1
Recovery Vehicle Operator E4 91B1O 1

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 D-9

Appendix D

Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B

Recovery Vehicle Operator E4 91H1O 1
Allied Trades Specialist E3 91E1O 1
(X3) Maintenance Support Team (Artillery)
Motor Sergeant E7 91X4O 2
Wheeled Vehicle Mechanic E5 91B2O 2
Recovery Vehicle Operator E5 91H2O 2
Track Vehicle Mechanic E5 91H20 2
MLRS/HIMARS Repairer E5 94P2O
Wheeled Vehicle Mechanic E4 91B1O 2
Recovery Vehicle Operator E4 91B1O 2
Power Generator Equipment Repair E4 91D10 2
Recovery Vehicle Operator E4 91H10 2
Track Vehicle Mechanic E4 91H10 2
MLRS/HIMARS Repair E4 94P1O 2
Track Vehicle Mechanic E3 91H1O 2
Note. The forward support company shift and support locations vary widely from the brigade support area to MLRS/HIMARS
platoon locations.

SECTION III—MLRS/HIMARS BATTERY COMMAND POST

Figure D-6. MLRS/HIMARS battery CP, split HQ

Note. The support platoon leader will be in and out of the CP area. Depending on the local mission
requirements, the support platoon leader may be located at the battery trains.

D-10 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Command Posts

Table D-6. Personnel at the MLRS/HIMARS battery CP, split HQ

Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B
Battery Headquarters
Battery commander CPT 13A00 1
First sergeant 1SG 13Z5M 1
Vehicle driver PFC 13P10 1
Battery Operations Center
Operations Officer 1LT 13A00 1 A
Battery Operations Sergeant SFC 13P40 1 B
Fire Direction Center Section Chief SSG 13P30 1 A
Battery Display Operator SGT 13P20 1 B
Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System SPC 13P10 2 A/B
Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System PFC 13P10 2
Table D-7. MLRS/HIMARS BOC shifts by duty position
Duty Position Shift A Shift B
Duty Officer Operations Officer Support Platoon Leader
Duty Noncommissioned Chief Fire Direction Sergeant Senior Fire Direction Sergeant
Officer
Computer Operator Advanced Field Artillery Advanced Field Artillery
Tactical Data System Tactical Data System
Specialist Specialist
Fire Direction Specialist Advanced Field Artillery Advanced Field Artillery
Tactical Data System (Private Tactical Data System (Private
First Class) First Class)
Note. Personnel must be cross trained to perform administrative and CBRN duties.

Figure D-7. MLRS/HIMARS battery operations center in carrier CP

SECTION IV—MLRS/HIMARS BATTERY TRAINS

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 D-11

Appendix D

Figure D-8. MLRS/HIMARS battery trains, split HQ

Table D-8. Personnel at the MLRS/HIMARS battery trains
Logistics
Operations
Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Center
Shift A/B
Support Platoon Headquarters
Platoon Leader (Battery Operations Center) 1LT 13A00 1
Platoon Sergeant SFC 13M40 1 A
Vehicle Driver PFC 13P10 1
Combat Medic (attached) SPC 68W10 2
Ammunition Section X2
Section Chief E6 13M30 2
Assistant Section Chief E5 13M20 2
HIMARS Ammunition Specialist E4 13M10 8
MLRS Ammunition Specialist E4 13M10 6
HIMARS Ammunition Specialist E3 13M10 8
MLRS Ammunition Specialist E3 13M10 6
Supply Section
Supply Sergeant E5 92Y20 1 B
Armorer E4 92Y10 1 A

D-12 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Command Posts

Table D-9. MLRS/HIMARS battery LOC shifts by duty position

Duty Position Shift A Shift B
Duty Noncommissioned Officer Support platoon Sergeant Supply Sergeant
Maintenance Representative Equipment Recovery Specialist Equipment Recovery
Specialist
Clerk Armorer/Supply Specialist
Note. Depending on the tactical standing operating procedures and mission requirements, the battery first sergeant and the
support platoon leader may be included in logistics operations center shifts. Battery logistics operations center could be
collocated with the battery operations center.

Figure D-9. Battery LOC

SECTION V—PLATOON HEADQUARTERS

D-1. The POC is usually positioned near the center of the platoon HQ area because the platoon HQ is not
equipped and manned to split into a CP and a train’s element. The POC is the CP of the platoon HQ.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 D-13

Appendix D

Figure D-10. Vehicles at the MLRS/HIMARS platoon HQ

Table D-10 Personnel at the MLRS/HIMARS platoon HQ
Section/Element Position Rank MOS Number Shift A/B
Platoon Leader 1LT 13A00 1 A
Platoon Sergeant (Logistics SFC 13M40 1 B
Operations Center)
Battery Display Operator SGT 13P20 1 B
Reconnaissance Sergeant SGT 13M20 1 A
Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data SPC 13P10 1 A
System
Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data PFC 13P10 1 B
System
Vehicle Driver PFC 13P10 1 A

Table D-11. MLRS/HIMARS POC shifts by duty position

Duty Position Shift A Shift B

Shift Leader Platoon Leader Platoon Sergeant (Logistics

Operations Center)
Computer Operator Advanced Field Artillery Fire Direction Sergeant
Tactical Data System
Specialist
Radiotelephone Operator Vehicle Driver Advanced Field Artillery
Tactical Data System
(Private First Class)

D-14 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Command Posts

Figure D-11. MLRS/HIMARS POC in mission command vehicle

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 D-15

This page intentionally left blank.
 Appendix E
Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions
E-1. Conditions: BAV609, sea level standard (no wind). For illustration purposes only.
Table E-1. M26 (low quadrant elevation) rocket trajectory data
Aim Warhead Event Apogee
Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m) Time (sec)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact
(sec) (m)
(sec)

10,000 13,772 161.8 14.33 570 9,487 33.3 613 7,614 11.39
10,100 13,772 161.8 14.52 564 9,589 33.3 613 7,614 11.39
10,200 13,772 161.8 14.71 559 9,691 33.3 613 7,614 11.39
10,300 13,772 161.8 14.89 552 9,791 33.3 613 7,614 11.39
10,400 13,772 161.8 15.07 546 9,890 33.2 613 7,614 11.39
10,500 13,772 161.8 15.26 540 9,990 33.2 613 7,614 11.39
10,600 13,772 161.8 15.45 533 10,092 33.2 613 7,614 11.39
10,700 13,772 161.8 15.65 525 10,198 33.1 613 7,614 11.39
10,800 13,772 161.8 15.84 517 10,300 33.1 613 7,614 11.39
10,900 13,772 161.8 16.04 509 10,401 33.0 613 7,614 11.39
11,000 13,772 161.8 16.23 500 10,503 32.9 613 7,614 11.39
11,100 13,772 161.8 16.43 491 10,605 32.9 613 7,614 11.39
11,200 13,772 161.8 16.62 482 10,707 32.8 613 7,614 11.39
11,300 13,772 161.8 16.81 473 10,803 32.7 613 7,614 11.39
11,400 13,772 161.8 17.01 463 10,906 32.6 613 7,614 11.39
11,500 13,772 161.8 17.21 452 11,008 32.4 613 7,614 11.39
11,600 13,809 162.4 17.42 449 11,109 32.5 618 7,613 11.39
11,700 13,877 163.6 17.62 450 11,211 32.7 627 7,916 11.89
11,800 13,944 164.7 17.82 451 11,311 32.9 636 7,915 11.89
11,900 14,012 165.9 18.03 453 11,412 33.1 645 7,914 11.89
12,000 14,081 167.1 18.23 455 11,513 33.3 654 7,913 11.89
12,100 14,151 168.3 18.44 456 11,614 33.6 664 7,913 11.89
12,200 14,221 169.5 18.65 458 11,715 33.8 673 7,912 11.89
12,300 14,290 170.7 18.86 459 11,815 34.0 683 7,911 11.89
12,400 14,363 172.0 19.07 461 11,916 34.2 693 8,218 12.41

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-1

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m) Time (sec)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact
(sec) (m)
(sec)

12,500 14,433 173.2 19.28 462 12,017 34.4 703 8,217 12.41
12,600 14,504 174.5 19.49 464 12,118 34.6 713 8,206 12.39
12,700 14,578 175.8 19.71 465 12,219 34.9 724 8,205 12.39
12,800 14,649 177.1 19.92 467 12,320 35.1 735 8,204 12.39
12,900 14,723 178.4 20.14 469 12,421 35.3 746 8,203 12.39
13,000 14,797 179.7 20.36 470 12,521 35.5 756 8,496 12.89
13,100 14,870 181.1 20.58 472 12,623 35.8 768 8,494 12.89
13,200 14,944 182.5 20.80 473 12,724 36.0 779 8,493 12.89
13,300 15,019 183.9 21.02 475 12,824 36.2 791 8,492 12.89
13,400 15,094 185.3 21.24 476 12,926 36.4 803 8,491 12.89
13,500 15,173 186.7 21.46 479 13,026 36.7 815 8,489 12.89
13,600 15,251 188.2 21.69 481 13,127 36.9 828 8,777 13.39
13,700 15,328 189.7 21.92 483 13,228 37.2 841 8,776 13.39
13,800 15,408 191.2 22.15 485 13,329 37.4 854 8,775 13.39
13,900 15,486 192.7 22.38 487 13,430 37.7 867 8,782 13.41
14,000 15,566 194.2 22.61 489 13,531 37.9 880 8,781 13.41
14,100 15,645 195.8 22.84 491 13,632 38.2 894 8,779 13.41
14,200 15,724 197.4 23.07 493 13,733 38.4 908 9,062 13.91
14,300 15,804 198.9 23.31 495 13,833 38.7 922 9,061 13.91
14,400 15,885 200.5 23.54 497 13,935 38.9 936 9,059 13.91
14,500 15,965 202.1 23.78 499 14,036 39.2 951 9,057 13.91
14,600 16,046 203.8 24.02 501 14,137 39.4 965 9,056 13.91
14,700 16,127 205.4 24.26 503 14,238 39.7 980 9,334 14.41
14,800 16,208 207.0 24.50 505 14,339 39.9 996 9,333 14.41
14,900 16,290 208.7 24.74 508 14,440 40.2 1,011 9,331 14.41
15,000 16,372 210.4 24.99 510 14,541 40.5 1,027 9,329 14.41
15,100 16,453 212.1 25.23 512 14,642 40.7 1,043 9,327 14.41
15,200 16,537 213.8 25.48 514 14,743 41.0 1,059 9,601 14.91
15,300 16,619 215.6 25.73 516 14,844 41.2 1,075 9,599 14.91
15,400 16,703 217.3 25.98 518 14,945 41.5 1,092 9,597 14.91
15,500 16,785 219.1 26.23 520 15,047 41.8 1,109 9,595 14.91

E-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m) Time (sec)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact
(sec) (m)
(sec)

15,600 16,868 220.9 26.48 522 15,148 42.0 1,126 9,593 14.91
15,700 16,952 222.7 26.74 524 15,249 42.3 1,143 9,863 15.41
15,800 17,035 224.5 26.99 526 15,350 42.6 1,161 9,861 15.41
15,900 17,119 226.3 27.25 528 15,451 42.8 1,179 9,859 15.41
16,000 17,204 228.2 27.51 530 15,552 43.1 1,197 9,857 15.41
16,100 17,288 230.0 27.77 532 15,653 43.4 1,215 9,854 15.41
16,200 17,373 231.9 28.03 535 15,754 43.7 1,234 10,120 15.91
16,300 17,458 233.8 28.29 537 15,855 43.9 1,253 10,118 15.91
16,400 17,543 235.7 28.56 539 15,957 44.2 1,273 10,115 15.91
16,500 17,628 237.6 28.82 541 16,057 44.5 1,292 10,113 15.91
16,600 17,714 239.6 29.09 543 16,159 44.8 1,312 10,110 15.91
16,700 17,800 241.6 29.36 545 16,260 45.0 1,332 10,372 16.41
16,800 17,885 243.6 29.63 547 16,362 45.3 1,352 10,370 16.41
16,900 17,972 245.5 29.90 549 16,462 45.6 1,373 10,367 16.41
17,000 18,058 247.6 30.17 551 16,564 45.9 1,394 10,364 16.41
17,100 18,144 249.6 30.44 553 16,665 46.2 1,415 10,361 16.41
17,200 18,231 251.7 30.72 555 16,766 46.5 1,437 10,619 16.91
17,300 18,319 253.7 31.00 557 16,867 46.7 1,459 10,616 16.91
17,400 18,405 255.8 31.28 559 16,969 47.0 1,481 10,613 16.91
17,500 18,493 257.9 31.55 562 17,070 47.3 1,504 10,610 16.91
17,600 18,579 260.0 31.84 563 17,171 47.6 1,526 10,865 17.41
17,700 18,668 262.2 32.12 566 17,273 47.9 1,550 10,861 17.41
17,800 18,755 264.3 32.40 567 17,374 48.2 1,573 10,858 17.41
17,900 18,844 266.5 32.69 570 17,476 48.5 1,597 10,854 17.41
18,000 18,932 268.7 32.97 572 17,576 48.8 1,621 11,105 17.91
18,100 19,020 270.9 33.26 574 17,678 49.1 1,645 11,102 17.91
18,200 19,109 273.1 33.55 576 17,780 49.4 1,670 11,098 17.91
18,300 19,197 275.4 33.85 577 17,881 49.7 1,695 11,094 17.91
18,400 19,287 277.7 34.14 580 17,982 50.0 1,720 11,342 18.41
18,500 19,375 279.9 34.43 582 18,083 50.3 1,746 11,338 18.41
18,600 19,465 282.2 34.73 584 18,185 50.6 1,773 11,334 18.41

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-3

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m) Time (sec)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact
(sec) (m)
(sec)

18,700 19,554 284.5 35.03 586 18,286 50.9 1,799 11,337 18.42
18,800 19,644 286.9 35.32 588 18,387 51.2 1,825 11,325 18.41
18,900 19,733 289.2 35.63 590 18,489 51.5 1,853 11,569 18.91
19,000 19,823 291.6 35.93 592 18,590 51.8 1,881 11,565 18.91
19,100 19,913 294.0 36.23 594 18,692 52.1 1,909 11,560 18.91
19,200 20,003 296.4 36.54 596 18,793 52.4 1,937 11,587 18.97
19,300 20,094 298.8 36.84 598 18,894 52.7 1,965 11,827 19.47
19,400 20,184 301.3 37.15 600 18,996 53.0 1,995 11,822 19.47
19,500 20,274 303.8 37.46 602 19,097 53.4 2,024 11,817 19.47
19,600 20,365 306.2 37.77 604 19,199 53.7 2,054 11,812 19.47
19,700 20,456 308.7 38.08 606 19,300 54.0 2,084 12,049 19.97
19,800 20,548 311.3 38.40 608 19,402 54.3 2,114 12,021 19.92
19,900 20,639 313.8 38.71 611 19,503 54.6 2,145 12,016 19.92
20,000 20,730 316.4 39.03 613 19,604 55.0 2,177 12,250 20.42
20,100 20,821 318.9 39.35 614 19,706 55.3 2,208 12,245 20.42
20,200 20,913 321.6 39.66 617 19,807 55.6 2,241 12,239 20.42
20,300 21,005 324.2 39.99 619 19,909 55.9 2,273 12,233 20.42
20,400 21,096 326.8 40.31 621 20,010 56.3 2,306 12,464 20.92
20,500 21,188 329.5 40.63 623 20,112 56.6 2,340 12,458 20.92
20,600 21,281 332.1 40.96 625 20,213 56.9 2,373 12,452 20.92
20,700 21,372 334.8 41.28 627 20,314 57.3 2,407 12,445 20.92
20,800 21,465 337.5 41.61 629 20,416 57.6 2,442 12,703 21.48
20,900 21,558 340.3 41.94 631 20,518 57.9 2,477 12,696 21.48
21,000 21,650 343.0 42.27 633 20,619 58.3 2,512 12,689 21.48
21,100 21,743 345.8 42.61 635 20,721 58.6 2,548 12,682 21.48
21,200 21,836 348.6 42.94 637 20,822 58.9 2,585 12,907 21.98
21,300 21,929 351.4 43.28 639 20,924 59.3 2,622 12,900 21.98
21,400 22,022 354.2 43.61 641 21,025 59.6 2,659 12,892 21.98
21,500 22,115 357.1 43.95 643 21,126 60.0 2,696 12,885 21.98
21,600 22,209 359.9 44.29 645 21,228 60.3 2,734 13,107 22.48
21,700 22,302 362.8 44.63 647 21,330 60.7 2,773 13,099 22.48

E-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m) Time (sec)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact
(sec) (m)
(sec)

21,800 22,395 365.7 44.97 650 21,431 61.0 2,812 13,091 22.48
21,900 22,489 368.6 45.32 652 21,532 61.4 2,851 13,310 22.98
22,000 22,583 371.6 45.66 654 21,634 61.7 2,891 13,301 22.98
22,100 22,677 374.5 46.01 656 21,736 62.1 2,932 13,293 22.98
22,200 22,771 377.5 46.36 658 21,837 62.4 2,972 13,284 22.98
22,300 22,864 380.5 46.71 660 21,939 62.8 3,014 13,500 23.48
22,400 22,958 383.5 47.06 662 22,040 63.1 3,056 13,491 23.48
22,500 23,054 386.6 47.41 664 22,142 63.5 3,098 13,481 23.48
22,600 23,147 389.7 47.77 666 22,243 63.9 3,141 13,695 23.98
22,700 23,242 392.7 48.13 668 22,345 64.2 3,184 13,685 23.98
22,800 23,336 395.8 48.48 670 22,446 64.6 3,228 13,675 23.98
22,900 23,431 399.0 48.84 672 22,548 65.0 3,272 13,886 24.48
23,000 23,526 402.1 49.20 674 22,650 65.3 3,317 13,883 24.50
23,100 23,620 405.3 49.56 676 22,751 65.7 3,362 13,872 24.50
23,200 23,715 408.4 49.93 679 22,852 66.1 3,408 13,861 24.50
23,300 23,810 411.6 50.29 680 22,954 66.5 3,454 14,069 25.00
23,400 23,905 414.9 50.66 682 23,056 66.8 3,501 14,058 25.00
23,500 24,000 418.1 51.03 685 23,157 67.2 3,548 14,046 25.00
23,600 24,095 421.4 51.40 687 23,259 67.6 3,596 14,251 25.50
23,700 24,190 424.7 51.78 689 23,360 68.0 3,645 14,239 25.50
23,800 24,285 428.0 52.15 691 23,461 68.4 3,694 14,227 25.50
23,900 24,382 431.4 52.53 693 23,563 68.8 3,744 14,429 26.00
24,000 24,477 434.7 52.90 695 23,665 69.1 3,794 14,416 26.00
24,100 24,572 438.1 53.28 697 23,766 69.5 3,844 14,403 26.00
24,200 24,668 441.5 53.66 699 23,868 69.9 3,896 14,603 26.50
24,300 24,764 444.9 54.05 702 23,969 70.3 3,948 14,590 26.50
24,400 24,859 448.4 54.43 703 24,071 70.7 4,000 14,576 26.50
24,500 24,954 451.8 54.82 705 24,172 71.1 4,053 14,773 27.00
24,600 25,050 455.3 55.21 707 24,274 71.5 4,107 14,758 27.00
24,700 25,146 458.8 55.60 709 24,376 71.9 4,161 14,743 27.00
24,800 25,242 462.4 55.99 712 24,477 72.3 4,216 14,944 27.52

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-5

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m) Time (sec)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact
(sec) (m)
(sec)

24,900 25,338 466.0 56.38 714 24,579 72.7 4,272 14,923 27.50
25,000 25,434 469.5 56.78 716 24,681 73.1 4,328 14,907 27.50
25,100 25,531 473.2 57.18 718 24,782 73.5 4,385 15,099 28.00
25,200 25,627 476.8 57.58 720 24,884 74.0 4,443 15,082 28.00
25,300 25,723 480.5 57.98 722 24,985 74.4 4,501 15,065 28.00
25,400 25,819 484.2 58.39 724 25,087 74.8 4,559 15,254 28.50
25,500 25,915 487.9 58.79 726 25,188 75.2 4,619 15,236 28.50
25,600 26,012 491.6 59.20 728 25,290 75.6 4,679 15,218 28.50
25,700 26,109 495.4 59.61 730 25,391 76.1 4,740 15,411 29.02
25,800 26,205 499.1 60.02 732 25,493 76.5 4,801 15,393 29.02
25,900 26,302 503.0 60.44 734 25,595 76.9 4,864 15,373 29.02
26,000 26,399 506.8 60.86 737 25,696 77.4 4,927 15,557 29.52
26,100 26,496 510.7 61.28 739 25,797 77.8 4,991 15,537 29.52
26,200 26,592 514.6 61.70 741 25,899 78.2 5,055 15,718 30.02
26,300 26,688 518.5 62.12 743 26,001 78.7 5,120 15,697 30.02
26,400 26,785 522.5 62.55 745 26,102 79.1 5,186 15,675 30.02
26,500 26,882 526.4 62.98 747 26,203 79.6 5,253 15,854 30.52
26,600 26,979 530.5 63.41 749 26,305 80.0 5,320 15,831 30.52
26,700 27,076 534.5 63.84 752 26,407 80.5 5,389 15,808 30.52
26,800 27,175 538.6 64.28 755 26,509 80.9 5,459 16,008 31.08
26,900 27,274 542.8 64.72 759 26,611 81.4 5,530 15,984 31.08
27,000 27,371 547.0 65.16 762 26,712 81.9 5,601 15,959 31.08
27,100 27,469 551.2 65.61 765 26,813 82.4 5,674 16,131 31.58
27,200 27,566 555.5 66.06 768 26,914 82.9 5,748 16,105 31.58
27,300 27,665 559.8 66.51 772 27,016 83.4 5,823 16,274 32.08
27,400 27,763 564.2 66.97 775 27,117 83.9 5,899 16,246 32.08
27,500 27,861 568.5 67.43 779 27,219 84.4 5,976 16,218 32.08
27,600 27,959 573.0 67.89 782 27,321 85.0 6,054 16,389 32.59
27,700 28,057 577.5 68.36 785 27,422 85.5 6,133 16,360 32.59
27,800 28,155 582.0 68.83 789 27,524 86.0 6,213 16,522 33.09
27,900 28,253 586.5 69.31 792 27,625 86.5 6,295 16,491 33.09

E-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m) Time (sec)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact
(sec) (m)
(sec)

28,000 28,352 591.1 69.79 795 27,727 87.1 6,377 16,651 33.59
28,100 28,450 595.8 70.27 799 27,829 87.6 6,461 16,618 33.59
28,200 28,548 600.5 70.76 802 27,930 88.1 6,545 16,584 33.59
28,300 28,646 605.2 71.25 805 28,032 88.7 6,631 16,740 34.09
28,400 28,744 610.0 71.75 809 28,133 89.2 6,719 16,704 34.09
28,500 28,842 614.9 72.25 813 28,235 89.8 6,808 16,857 34.59
28,600 28,941 619.8 72.76 816 28,336 90.3 6,899 16,819 34.59
28,700 29,039 624.8 73.28 819 28,438 90.9 6,990 16,968 35.09
28,800 29,137 629.8 73.79 823 28,540 91.5 7,084 16,928 35.09
28,900 29,235 635.0 74.32 827 28,641 92.1 7,179 17,074 35.59
29,000 29,333 640.1 74.85 829 28,743 92.7 7,275 17,032 35.59
29,100 29,431 645.3 75.38 833 28,844 93.2 7,373 17,173 36.09
29,200 29,531 650.7 75.93 836 28,947 93.8 7,474 17,128 36.09
29,300 29,630 656.1 76.48 840 29,049 94.5 7,576 17,266 36.59
29,400 29,727 661.6 77.04 843 29,150 95.1 7,681 17,223 36.61
29,500 29,825 667.2 77.62 846 29,252 95.7 7,788 17,172 36.61
29,600 29,923 672.9 78.19 850 29,353 96.3 7,897 17,304 37.11
29,700 30,021 678.7 78.78 854 29,455 97.0 8,009 17,432 37.61
29,800 30,119 684.7 79.38 858 29,556 97.6 8,124 17,375 37.61
29,900 30,217 690.7 79.99 861 29,658 98.3 8,241 17,498 38.11
30,000 30,315 696.8 80.60 864 29,760 98.9 8,361 17,437 38.11
30,100 30,414 703.2 81.23 867 29,863 99.6 8,485 17,553 38.61
30,200 30,513 709.7 81.88 871 29,965 100.3 8,612 17,487 38.61
30,300 30,611 716.3 82.53 875 30,066 101.0 8,743 17,596 39.11
30,400 30,708 723.1 83.21 877 30,168 101.7 8,877 17,701 39.61
30,500 30,805 730.1 83.90 881 30,269 102.5 9,017 17,625 39.61
30,600 30,905 737.4 84.61 884 30,372 103.3 9,163 17,742 40.17
30,700 31,003 744.9 85.35 888 30,475 104.0 9,313 17,656 40.17
30,800 31,100 752.7 86.11 890 30,577 104.8 9,470 17,724 40.63
30,900 31,198 760.9 86.90 894 30,680 105.7 9,636 17,800 41.13
31,000 31,296 769.5 87.74 899 30,782 106.6 9,811 17,889 41.69

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-7

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m) Time (sec)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact
(sec) (m)
(sec)

31,100 31,393 778.6 88.61 902 30,884 107.5 9,996 17,776 41.69
31,200 31,490 788.3 89.54 906 30,986 108.5 10,196 17,822 42.19
31,300 31,588 798.8 90.55 909 31,090 109.5 10,412 17,853 42.69
31,400 31,685 810.3 91.63 913 31,193 110.6 10,649 17,866 43.19
31,500 31,781 823.1 92.84 917 31,296 111.9 10,914 17,853 43.69
31,600 31,877 837.9 94.22 920 31,400 113.3 11,222 17,968 44.69
31700 31,972 855.8 95.87 924 31,504 115.0 11,597 17,864 45.20
31800 32,072 883.8 98.42 930 31,618 117.6 12,186 17,894 46.70

E-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Figure E-1. M26 low quadrant elevation trajectories. conditions: BA-ER-D, sea level standard (no
wind). For illustration purposes only.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-9

Appendix E

Table E-2. M26 (high quadrant elevation) rocket trajectory data

Aim Warhead Event Apogee
Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

10,000 16,361 209.91 14.36 1,023 9,459 45.71 1,024 9,319 14.38
10,100 16,361 209.91 14.54 1,023 9,560 45.84 1,024 9,319 14.38
10,200 16,408 210.90 14.72 1,032 9,659 46.21 1,033 9,318 14.38
10,300 16,408 210.90 14.91 1,031 9,760 46.33 1,033 9,318 14.38
10,400 16,456 211.88 15.09 1,039 9,860 46.70 1,042 9,317 14.38
10,500 16,456 211.88 15.27 1,037 9,956 46.80 1,042 9,317 14.38
10,600 16,504 212.87 15.46 1,045 10,057 47.16 1,051 9,315 14.38
10,700 16,551 213.86 15.65 1,053 10,157 47.52 1,061 9,591 14.88
10,800 16,598 214.85 15.84 1,061 10,258 47.87 1,070 9,590 14.88
10,900 16,597 214.85 16.04 1,058 10,361 47.95 1,070 9,590 14.88
11,000 16,644 215.84 16.23 1,065 10,462 48.30 1,080 9,589 14.88
11,100 16,692 216.83 16.43 1,072 10,563 48.64 1,089 9,587 14.88
11,200 16,692 216.83 16.62 1,069 10,666 48.70 1,089 9,587 14.88
11,300 16,738 217.82 16.82 1,075 10,768 49.03 1,098 9,586 14.88
11,400 16,784 218.80 17.03 1,081 10,871 49.36 1,108 9,585 14.88
11,500 16,830 219.79 17.23 1,088 10,972 49.68 1,117 9,584 14.88
11,600 16,877 220.78 17.43 1,094 11,074 50.00 1,127 9,583 14.88
11,700 16,923 221.77 17.62 1,100 11,170 50.32 1,136 9,581 14.88
11,800 16,968 222.76 17.82 1,105 11,270 50.62 1,146 9,853 15.38
11,900 17,013 223.75 18.03 1,111 11,371 50.93 1,156 9,852 15.38
12,000 17,014 223.75 18.23 1,105 11,472 50.93 1,156 9,852 15.38
12,100 17,059 224.74 18.44 1,110 11,573 51.23 1,165 9,851 15.38
12,200 17,105 225.73 18.64 1,115 11,674 51.52 1,175 9,849 15.38
12,300 17,150 226.71 18.85 1,119 11,774 51.80 1,185 9,848 15.38
12,400 17,195 227.70 19.06 1,123 11,876 52.09 1,194 9,847 15.38
12,500 17,240 228.69 19.27 1,127 11,976 52.36 1,204 9,846 15.38
12,600 17,329 230.67 19.48 1,143 12,076 52.95 1,224 9,843 15.38
12,700 17,374 231.66 19.70 1,147 12,177 53.22 1,233 10,111 15.88
12,800 17,419 232.65 19.91 1,150 12,278 53.48 1,243 10,109 15.88
12,900 17,462 233.63 20.13 1,154 12,379 53.74 1,253 10,108 15.88

E-10 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

13,000 17,506 234.62 20.34 1,156 12,480 53.98 1,263 10,107 15.88
13,100 17,550 235.61 20.56 1,159 12,581 54.24 1,273 10,105 15.88
13,200 17,594 236.60 20.78 1,161 12,682 54.47 1,283 10,104 15.88
13,300 17,637 237.59 21.00 1,164 12,783 54.70 1,293 10,103 15.88
13,400 17,724 239.57 21.22 1,178 12,883 55.27 1,313 10,100 15.88
13,500 17,768 240.56 21.44 1,180 12,984 55.49 1,323 10,364 16.38
13,600 17,810 241.54 21.67 1,182 13,085 55.71 1,334 10,362 16.38
13,700 17,853 242.53 21.89 1,183 13,186 55.92 1,344 10,361 16.38
13,800 17,939 244.51 22.12 1,197 13,287 56.48 1,364 10,358 16.38
13,900 17,981 245.50 22.35 1,197 13,387 56.67 1,375 10,357 16.38
14,000 18,023 246.49 22.58 1,198 13,489 56.87 1,385 10,355 16.38
14,100 18,102 248.33 22.81 1,209 13,589 57.35 1,404 10,353 16.38
14,200 18,138 249.19 23.04 1,207 13,691 57.49 1,413 10,613 16.88
14,300 18,216 251.03 23.27 1,219 13,791 57.97 1,432 10,610 16.88
14,400 18,253 251.89 23.51 1,216 13,893 58.09 1,441 10,609 16.88
14,500 18,330 253.73 23.74 1,227 13,993 58.57 1,461 10,615 16.90
14,600 18,366 254.58 23.98 1,224 14,094 58.67 1,470 10,613 16.90
14,700 18,443 256.43 24.22 1,234 14,196 59.14 1,490 10,602 16.88
14,800 18,518 258.27 24.46 1,244 14,296 59.60 1,509 10,858 17.38
14,900 18,554 259.13 24.70 1,240 14,398 59.68 1,518 10,856 17.38
15,000 18,630 260.97 24.94 1,250 14,498 60.14 1,539 10,853 17.38
15,100 18,704 262.81 25.19 1,260 14,599 60.59 1,559 10,850 17.38
15,200 18,739 263.67 25.43 1,255 14,700 60.65 1,568 10,849 17.38
15,300 18,815 265.51 25.68 1,264 14,802 61.09 1,588 10,846 17.38
15,400 18,888 267.36 25.93 1,273 14,902 61.52 1,608 10,843 17.38
15,500 18,964 269.20 26.18 1,281 15,003 61.95 1,628 11,095 17.88
15,600 19,036 271.04 26.43 1,290 15,104 62.37 1,649 11,092 17.88
15,700 19,110 272.89 26.68 1,298 15,205 62.79 1,669 11,089 17.88
15,800 19,183 274.73 26.93 1,306 15,305 63.20 1,690 11,086 17.88
15,900 19,256 276.58 27.19 1,314 15,407 63.61 1,711 11,082 17.88
16,000 19,328 278.42 27.44 1,322 15,507 64.01 1,731 11,331 18.38

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-11

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

16,100 19,400 280.26 27.70 1,329 15,609 64.41 1,752 11,328 18.38
16,200 19,471 282.11 27.96 1,336 15,709 64.81 1,773 11,324 18.38
16,300 19,542 283.95 28.22 1,343 15,811 65.19 1,794 11,321 18.38
16,400 19,609 285.79 28.48 1,347 15,912 65.52 1,814 11,318 18.38
16,500 19,679 287.64 28.75 1,353 16,013 65.89 1,835 11,563 18.88
16,600 19,749 289.48 29.01 1,360 16,114 66.26 1,857 11,560 18.88
16,700 19,818 291.32 29.28 1,365 16,214 66.63 1,878 11,556 18.88
16,800 19,888 293.17 29.54 1,370 16,316 66.98 1,900 11,553 18.88
16,900 19,957 295.01 29.81 1,376 16,417 67.33 1,921 11,549 18.88
17,000 20,026 296.86 30.08 1,380 16,519 67.67 1,943 11,791 19.38
17,100 20,094 298.70 30.36 1,385 16,620 68.00 1,964 11,788 19.38
17,200 20,198 301.53 30.63 1,406 16,720 68.77 1,998 11,782 19.38
17,300 20,266 303.38 30.90 1,409 16,821 69.09 2,020 11,778 19.38
17,400 20,334 305.22 31.18 1,413 16,923 69.41 2,042 11,774 19.38
17,500 20,401 307.06 31.46 1,417 17,024 69.72 2,064 12,021 19.90
17,600 20,467 308.91 31.74 1,419 17,125 70.01 2,087 12,017 19.90
17,700 20,569 311.74 32.02 1,439 17,226 70.75 2,121 12,011 19.90
17,800 20,635 313.58 32.30 1,441 17,327 71.04 2,143 12,007 19.90
17,900 20,702 315.43 32.58 1,443 17,429 71.32 2,166 12,003 19.90
18,000 20,802 318.26 32.87 1,462 17,529 72.04 2,201 12,237 20.40
18,100 20,867 320.10 33.15 1,464 17,631 72.31 2,224 12,233 20.40
18,200 20,932 321.95 33.44 1,465 17,732 72.56 2,246 12,229 20.40
18,300 21,031 324.78 33.73 1,483 17,833 73.27 2,281 12,222 20.40
18,400 21,095 326.62 34.02 1,483 17,935 73.51 2,305 12,456 20.90
18,500 21,159 328.47 34.31 1,483 18,036 73.74 2,328 12,451 20.90
18,600 21,257 331.30 34.61 1,500 18,137 74.44 2,364 12,445 20.90
18,700 21,320 333.14 34.90 1,499 18,238 74.65 2,387 12,440 20.90
18,800 21,416 335.97 35.20 1,516 18,339 75.33 2,423 12,668 21.40
18,900 21,479 337.82 35.50 1,515 18,441 75.53 2,446 12,664 21.40
19,000 21,576 340.65 35.80 1,531 18,541 76.19 2,483 12,657 21.40
19,100 21,637 342.49 36.10 1,529 18,644 76.37 2,507 12,652 21.40

E-12 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

19,200 21,732 345.33 36.40 1,544 18,744 77.03 2,543 12,645 21.40
19,300 21,794 347.17 36.71 1,541 18,846 77.19 2,567 12,873 21.90
19,400 21,888 350.00 37.01 1,556 18,947 77.84 2,604 12,866 21.90
19,500 21,948 351.85 37.32 1,552 19,049 77.97 2,628 12,861 21.90
19,600 22,042 354.68 37.63 1,567 19,150 78.60 2,666 12,853 21.90
19,700 22,134 357.51 37.94 1,581 19,251 79.22 2,703 13,076 22.40
19,800 22,195 359.36 38.25 1,576 19,353 79.34 2,728 13,099 22.46
19,900 22,286 362.19 38.56 1,589 19,454 79.95 2,765 13,091 22.46
20,000 22,377 365.02 38.88 1,603 19,555 80.55 2,803 13,084 22.46
20,100 22,441 367.00 39.20 1,599 19,657 80.71 2,830 13,305 22.96
20,200 22,536 369.96 39.51 1,614 19,757 81.36 2,870 13,276 22.91
20,300 22,630 372.93 39.83 1,629 19,859 82.00 2,911 13,288 22.96
20,400 22,692 374.91 40.15 1,624 19,961 82.13 2,937 13,283 22.96
20,500 22,786 377.87 40.47 1,638 20,062 82.76 2,978 13,499 23.46
20,600 22,878 380.84 40.80 1,652 20,163 83.38 3,019 13,490 23.46
20,700 22,971 383.81 41.12 1,666 20,264 84.00 3,060 13,481 23.46
20,800 23,062 386.77 41.45 1,679 20,365 84.61 3,101 13,472 23.46
20,900 23,154 389.74 41.78 1,692 20,466 85.21 3,143 13,686 23.96
21,000 23,215 391.71 42.11 1,684 20,569 85.27 3,170 13,680 23.96
21,100 23,305 394.68 42.44 1,696 20,669 85.86 3,212 13,670 23.96
21,200 23,395 397.65 42.77 1,708 20,771 86.44 3,254 13,881 24.46
21,300 23,485 400.61 43.11 1,720 20,872 87.01 3,296 13,879 24.48
21,400 23,574 403.58 43.44 1,731 20,973 87.57 3,339 13,869 24.48
21,500 23,662 406.54 43.78 1,741 21,074 88.12 3,381 13,859 24.48
21,600 23,750 409.51 44.12 1,751 21,176 88.66 3,424 14,068 24.98
21,700 23,838 412.48 44.46 1,761 21,277 89.19 3,467 14,057 24.98
21,800 23,925 415.44 44.80 1,771 21,378 89.72 3,510 14,047 24.98
21,900 24,011 418.41 45.15 1,780 21,480 90.23 3,553 14,036 24.98
22,000 24,098 421.38 45.49 1,788 21,582 90.73 3,597 14,243 25.48
22,100 24,183 424.34 45.84 1,796 21,683 91.23 3,640 14,232 25.48
22,200 24,269 427.31 46.19 1,804 21,785 91.72 3,684 14,221 25.48

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-13

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

22,300 24,382 431.26 46.54 1,833 21,885 92.75 3,743 14,421 25.98
22,400 24,466 434.23 46.89 1,840 21,987 93.22 3,787 14,410 25.98
22,500 24,550 437.19 47.25 1,847 22,088 93.68 3,832 14,398 25.98
22,600 24,633 440.16 47.61 1,852 22,190 94.12 3,876 14,600 26.48
22,700 24,716 443.13 47.96 1,857 22,291 94.55 3,921 14,588 26.48
22,800 24,799 446.09 48.32 1,862 22,393 94.98 3,966 14,576 26.48
22,900 24,908 450.05 48.69 1,889 22,494 95.96 4,026 14,771 26.98
23,000 24,989 453.01 49.05 1,892 22,596 96.35 4,072 14,759 26.98
23,100 25,070 455.98 49.41 1,895 22,697 96.74 4,118 14,747 26.98
23,200 25,178 459.93 49.78 1,921 22,798 97.70 4,179 14,730 26.98
23,300 25,258 462.90 50.15 1,924 22,900 98.08 4,225 14,927 27.48
23,400 25,338 465.87 50.52 1,926 23,002 98.44 4,271 14,914 27.48
23,500 25,444 469.82 50.89 1,950 23,102 99.37 4,333 14,897 27.48
23,600 25,523 472.79 51.26 1,951 23,205 99.71 4,380 15,101 28.00
23,700 25,602 475.75 51.64 1,951 23,307 100.02 4,427 15,088 28.00
23,800 25,706 479.71 52.02 1,974 23,407 100.93 4,489 15,070 28.00
23,900 25,783 482.67 52.40 1,972 23,509 101.21 4,536 15,262 28.50
24,000 25,886 486.63 52.78 1,995 23,610 102.09 4,600 15,243 28.50
24,100 25,962 489.59 53.16 1,992 23,712 102.36 4,647 15,229 28.50
24,200 26,065 493.55 53.55 2,014 23,813 103.22 4,711 15,421 29.02
24,300 26,141 496.51 53.94 2,009 23,916 103.46 4,759 15,406 29.02
24,400 26,241 500.47 54.33 2,029 24,017 104.29 4,823 15,387 29.02
24,500 26,340 504.42 54.72 2,049 24,118 105.11 4,888 15,570 29.52
24,600 26,414 507.39 55.12 2,043 24,220 105.30 4,937 15,555 29.52
24,700 26,513 511.34 55.51 2,061 24,321 106.10 5,002 15,534 29.52
24,800 26,611 515.30 55.91 2,078 24,422 106.87 5,067 15,715 30.02
24,900 26,683 518.25 56.31 2,070 24,525 107.01 5,116 15,699 30.02
25,000 26,780 522.19 56.71 2,086 24,626 107.77 5,182 15,678 30.02
25,100 26,876 526.13 57.12 2,101 24,727 108.50 5,248 15,856 30.52
25,200 26,970 530.07 57.53 2,116 24,829 109.22 5,314 15,834 30.52
25,300 27,065 534.00 57.94 2,130 24,930 109.92 5,380 15,812 30.52

E-14 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

25,400 27,183 538.93 58.36 2,169 25,031 111.23 5,464 15,982 31.02
25,500 27,275 542.87 58.77 2,181 25,132 111.91 5,531 15,984 31.08
25,600 27,368 546.81 59.19 2,193 25,233 112.57 5,599 15,960 31.08
25,700 27,459 550.74 59.61 2,204 25,335 113.20 5,667 16,134 31.58
25,800 27,571 555.67 60.04 2,239 25,436 114.43 5,752 16,103 31.58
25,900 27,661 559.61 60.48 2,246 25,540 114.99 5,820 16,275 32.08
26,000 27,750 563.54 60.90 2,258 25,638 115.64 5,889 16,250 32.08
26,100 27,859 568.47 61.35 2,288 25,741 116.78 5,975 16,218 32.08
26,200 27,946 572.41 61.79 2,295 25,842 117.33 6,044 16,387 32.58
26,300 28,032 576.34 62.23 2,300 25,944 117.84 6,114 16,361 32.58
26,400 28,140 581.27 62.68 2,329 26,046 118.96 6,201 16,521 33.08
26,500 28,245 586.19 63.13 2,358 26,147 120.06 6,289 16,493 33.09
26,600 28,330 590.13 63.58 2,361 26,249 120.52 6,359 16,466 33.09
26,700 28,434 595.05 64.05 2,387 26,351 121.58 6,447 16,623 33.59
26,800 28,516 598.99 64.50 2,388 26,453 122.00 6,518 16,595 33.59
26,900 28,618 603.92 64.97 2,412 26,555 123.00 6,607 16,749 34.09
27,000 28,719 608.84 65.45 2,435 26,657 123.97 6,697 16,713 34.09
27,100 28,818 613.76 65.93 2,456 26,758 124.93 6,787 16,865 34.59
27,200 28,916 618.69 66.42 2,476 26,861 125.84 6,877 16,827 34.59
27,300 28,994 622.62 66.89 2,470 26,963 126.12 6,950 16,796 34.59
27,400 29,090 627.55 67.38 2,488 27,065 127.00 7,041 16,946 35.09
27,500 29,185 632.47 67.88 2,504 27,167 127.84 7,132 16,906 35.09
27,600 29,298 638.38 68.40 2,546 27,268 129.28 7,242 17,045 35.59
27,700 29,391 643.30 68.90 2,559 27,371 130.05 7,334 17,004 35.59
27,800 29,483 648.23 69.41 2,571 27,473 130.81 7,427 17,148 36.09
27,900 29,573 653.15 69.93 2,581 27,575 131.52 7,520 17,111 36.11
28,000 29,661 658.07 70.45 2,589 27,678 132.19 7,613 17,247 36.59
28,100 29,766 663.98 71.00 2,620 27,780 133.41 7,725 17,195 36.59
28,200 29,868 669.89 71.56 2,648 27,882 134.58 7,838 17,324 37.09
28,300 29,951 674.81 72.11 2,648 27,985 135.09 7,933 17,284 37.11
28,400 30,050 680.72 72.67 2,673 28,087 136.18 8,047 17,411 37.61

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-15

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

28,500 30,147 686.63 73.25 2,693 28,190 137.20 8,161 17,355 37.61
28,600 30,242 692.54 73.84 2,712 28,293 138.17 8,275 17,478 38.11
28,700 30,335 698.44 74.43 2,727 28,395 139.08 8,391 17,420 38.11
28,800 30,427 704.35 75.03 2,741 28,498 139.94 8,506 17,540 38.61
28,900 30,516 710.26 75.63 2,751 28,601 140.74 8,622 17,479 38.61
29,000 30,617 717.15 76.28 2,779 28,704 142.00 8,758 17,585 39.11
29,100 30,701 723.06 76.91 2,782 28,807 142.65 8,875 17,699 39.61
29,200 30,797 729.95 77.58 2,803 28,911 143.74 9,012 17,624 39.61
29,300 30,890 736.84 78.26 2,820 29,015 144.77 9,150 17,724 40.11
29,400 30,981 743.74 78.95 2,833 29,118 145.72 9,288 17,668 40.17
29,500 31,080 751.61 79.69 2,862 29,222 147.07 9,446 17,751 40.67
29,600 31,174 759.49 80.45 2,883 29,326 148.27 9,605 17,831 41.17
29,700 31,264 767.37 81.23 2,898 29,431 149.33 9,765 17,892 41.63
29,800 31,349 775.25 82.03 2,905 29,535 150.23 9,925 17,794 41.63
29,900 31,440 784.11 82.89 2,922 29,641 151.45 10,107 17,874 42.19
30,000 31,534 793.96 83.82 2,947 29,747 152.89 10,308 17,915 42.69
30,100 31,613 802.82 84.74 2,945 29,853 153.70 10,491 17,965 43.19
30,200 31,693 812.66 85.73 2,948 29,959 154.69 10,694 17,997 43.69
30,300 31,772 823.50 86.81 2,950 30,067 155.76 10,918 17,844 43.69
30,400 31,849 835.31 87.99 2,950 30,176 156.86 11,164 18,003 44.69
30,500 31,921 848.11 89.29 2,941 30,285 157.87 11,431 17,973 45.19
30,600 31,955 855.00 90.22 2,855 30,390 156.74 11,575 17,867 45.19
30,700 31,990 862.88 91.23 2,768 30,495 155.67 11,740 17,911 45.70
30,800 32,015 869.77 92.21 2,661 30,599 154.09 11,885 17,961 46.20
30,900 32,040 877.65 93.27 2,552 30,703 152.53 12,050 17,833 46.20
31,000 32,060 885.53 94.36 2,430 30,807 150.68 12,216 17,861 46.70
31,100 32,077 894.39 95.55 2,302 30,911 148.75 12,403 17,870 47.20
31,200 32,085 903.25 96.78 2,153 31,014 146.35 12,589 17,716 47.20
31,300 32,085 903.25 97.28 1,972 31,111 142.46 12,589 17,716 47.20
31,400 32,085 903.25 97.79 1,788 31,208 138.45 12,589 17,716 47.20
31,500 32,085 903.25 98.30 1,602 31,305 134.35 12,589 17,716 47.20

E-16 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting HOB (m) Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

31,600 32,085 903.25 98.82 1,411 31,403 130.12 12,589 17,716 47.20
31,700 32,085 903.25 99.36 1,216 31,501 125.74 12,589 17,716 47.20
31,800 32,085 903.25 99.91 1,015 31,602 121.16 12,589 17,716 47.20
31,900
32,000
Note. Blank cells indicate that a solution is not available for the range indicated.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-17

Appendix E

Figure E-2. M26 high quadrant elevation trajectories. conditions: BA-ER-D, sea level standard (no
wind). For illustration purposes only.

E-18 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Table E-3. M26A2 (low quadrant elevation) rocket trajectory data

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

15,000 18,000 161.8 20.06 667 14,502 41.8 878 10,552 13.49
15,100 18,000 161.8 20.26 656 14,605 41.7 878 10,552 13.49
15,200 18,000 161.8 20.46 643 14,708 41.5 878 10,552 13.49
15,300 18,000 161.8 20.66 630 14,811 41.3 878 10,552 13.49
15,400 18,000 161.8 20.87 617 14,914 41.1 878 10,552 13.49
15,500 18,000 161.8 21.07 603 15,015 40.8 878 10,552 13.49
15,600 18,000 161.8 21.27 590 15,117 40.6 878 10,552 13.49
15,700 18,000 161.8 21.48 576 15,217 40.4 878 10,552 13.49
15,800 18,000 161.8 21.69 561 15,321 40.1 878 10,552 13.49
15,900 18,000 161.8 21.90 545 15,424 39.8 878 10,552 13.49
16,000 18,000 161.8 22.12 529 15,528 39.5 878 10,552 13.49
16,100 18,000 161.8 22.33 513 15,630 39.3 878 10,552 13.49
16,200 18,000 161.8 22.54 497 15,732 38.9 878 10,552 13.49
16,300 18,000 161.8 22.76 480 15,835 38.6 878 10,552 13.49
16,400 18,020 162.0 22.97 466 15,936 38.4 880 10,552 13.49
16,500 18,100 163.2 23.19 467 16,038 38.6 892 10,593 13.55
16,600 18,170 164.4 23.40 469 16,138 38.8 905 10,562 13.50
16,700 18,250 165.6 23.62 470 16,240 39.1 918 10,561 13.50
16,800 18,330 166.8 23.83 472 16,341 39.3 931 10,886 14.00
16,900 18,410 168.0 24.05 474 16,441 39.5 944 10,885 14.00
17,000 18,490 169.3 24.27 476 16,543 39.8 958 10,925 14.07
17,100 18,570 170.6 24.49 477 16,644 40.0 971 10,925 14.07
17,200 18,650 171.8 24.71 479 16,745 40.2 985 10,924 14.07
17,300 18,730 173.1 24.94 480 16,846 40.5 999 10,923 14.07
17,400 18,810 174.4 25.16 482 16,947 40.7 1,013 11,212 14.52
17,500 18,900 175.7 25.38 484 17,048 40.9 1,028 11,211 14.52
17,600 18,980 177.1 25.61 485 17,148 41.1 1,043 11,240 14.57
17,700 19,060 178.4 25.84 487 17,251 41.4 1,058 11,239 14.57
17,800 19,140 179.7 26.07 488 17,351 41.6 1,073 11,238 14.57
17,900 19,220 181.1 26.30 490 17,453 41.9 1,088 11,208 14.52

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-19

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

18,000 19,310 182.5 26.53 492 17,553 42.1 1,104 11,521 15.02
18,100 19,390 183.9 26.77 494 17,655 42.4 1,120 11,520 15.02
18,200 19,470 185.3 27.00 496 17,756 42.6 1,136 11,559 15.08
18,300 19,560 186.7 27.23 498 17,857 42.8 1,152 11,558 15.08
18,400 19,640 188.2 27.47 499 17,958 43.1 1,169 11,557 15.08
18,500 19,730 189.6 27.71 501 18,059 43.3 1,185 11,556 15.08
18,600 19,810 191.1 27.95 503 18,160 43.6 1,202 11,863 15.58
18,700 19,900 192.5 28.19 505 18,261 43.8 1,220 11,863 15.58
18,800 19,980 194.0 28.43 507 18,362 44.1 1,237 11,871 15.60
18,900 20,070 195.5 28.67 508 18,463 44.3 1,255 11,870 15.60
19,000 20,150 197.0 28.91 510 18,565 44.6 1,273 11,869 15.60
19,100 20,240 198.5 29.16 512 18,666 44.9 1,291 11,868 15.60
19,200 20,320 200.1 29.41 514 18,767 45.1 1,310 12,171 16.10
19,300 20,410 201.6 29.65 516 18,868 45.4 1,328 12,170 16.10
19,400 20,490 203.2 29.90 518 18,970 45.6 1,347 12,168 16.10
19,500 20,580 204.7 30.15 519 19,070 45.9 1,366 12,177 16.11
19,600 20,670 206.3 30.40 521 19,172 46.2 1,386 12,176 16.11
19,700 20,750 207.9 30.65 523 19,273 46.4 1,405 12,473 16.61
19,800 20,840 209.5 30.91 525 19,374 46.7 1,425 12,472 16.61
19,900 20,930 211.1 31.16 527 19,476 46.9 1,446 12,471 16.61
20,000 21,020 212.8 31.42 529 19,577 47.2 1,466 12,469 16.61
20,100 21,100 214.4 31.68 530 19,678 47.5 1,487 12,468 16.61
20,200 21,190 216.1 31.94 532 19,779 47.7 1,508 12,761 17.11
20,300 21,280 217.7 32.19 534 19,880 48.0 1,529 12,760 17.11
20,400 21,370 219.4 32.46 536 19,982 48.3 1,551 12,759 17.11
20,500 21,460 221.1 32.72 537 20,083 48.5 1,572 12,766 17.13
20,600 21,540 222.8 32.98 539 20,184 48.8 1,594 12,765 17.13
20,700 21,630 224.5 33.24 541 20,285 49.1 1,617 13,053 17.63
20,800 21,720 226.2 33.51 543 20,386 49.3 1,639 13,052 17.63
20,900 21,810 228.0 33.77 545 20,487 49.6 1,662 13,050 17.63
21,000 21,900 229.8 34.04 547 20,590 49.9 1,686 13,049 17.63

E-20 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

21,100 21,990 231.5 34.31 548 20,689 50.2 1,709 13,323 18.11
21,200 22,080 233.3 34.58 550 20,791 50.4 1,733 13,321 18.11
21,300 22,170 235.1 34.86 552 20,893 50.7 1,757 13,320 18.11
21,400 22,260 236.9 35.13 554 20,994 51.0 1,781 13,327 18.13
21,500 22,350 238.7 35.40 556 21,095 51.3 1,806 13,326 18.13
21,600 22,440 240.6 35.67 558 21,196 51.6 1,830 13,597 18.61
21,700 22,530 242.4 35.95 560 21,298 51.9 1,856 13,604 18.63
21,800 22,620 244.3 36.22 561 21,399 52.1 1,881 13,602 18.63
21,900 22,710 246.1 36.50 563 21,501 52.4 1,907 13,600 18.63
22,000 22,800 248.0 36.78 565 21,601 52.7 1,933 13,598 18.63
22,100 22,890 249.9 37.06 567 21,703 53.0 1,959 13,874 19.13
22,200 22,980 251.8 37.34 569 21,804 53.3 1,986 13,873 19.13
22,300 23,070 253.7 37.62 571 21,905 53.6 2,013 13,871 19.13
22,400 23,170 255.7 37.91 573 22,007 53.9 2,040 13,869 19.13
22,500 23,260 257.6 38.19 575 22,107 54.2 2,068 14,150 19.64
22,600 23,350 259.6 38.47 577 22,209 54.5 2,096 14,148 19.64
22,700 23,440 261.6 38.76 579 22,310 54.8 2,124 14,145 19.64
22,800 23,530 263.5 39.04 582 22,412 55.1 2,153 14,143 19.64
22,900 23,630 265.5 39.33 584 22,513 55.4 2,182 14,412 20.14
23,000 23,720 267.5 39.62 586 22,614 55.7 2,211 14,410 20.14
23,100 23,810 269.6 39.91 588 22,716 56.0 2,241 14,408 20.14
23,200 23,900 271.6 40.20 590 22,817 56.3 2,270 14,405 20.14
23,300 24,000 273.6 40.49 593 22,918 56.6 2,300 14,437 20.21
23,400 24,090 275.7 40.78 595 23,019 56.9 2,331 14,676 20.66
23,500 24,180 277.8 41.07 597 23,121 57.2 2,362 14,674 20.66
23,600 24,280 279.8 41.37 599 23,222 57.5 2,393 14,672 20.66
23,700 24,370 281.9 41.66 601 23,323 57.8 2,424 14,669 20.66
23,800 24,460 284.0 41.96 603 23,425 58.1 2,455 14,700 20.72
23,900 24,560 286.1 42.25 605 23,526 58.4 2,487 14,961 21.22
24,000 24,650 288.2 42.55 608 23,628 58.8 2,520 14,958 21.22
24,100 24,750 290.3 42.85 609 23,729 59.1 2,552 14,956 21.22

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-21

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

24,200 24,840 292.5 43.14 612 23,830 59.4 2,585 15,189 21.68
24,300 24,930 294.6 43.44 614 23,932 59.7 2,618 15,187 21.68
24,400 25,030 296.8 43.74 616 24,032 60.0 2,652 15,216 21.74
24,500 25,120 298.9 44.04 618 24,133 60.3 2,685 15,213 21.74
24,600 25,220 301.1 44.34 621 24,236 60.7 2,719 15,236 21.78
24,700 25,310 303.2 44.64 623 24,336 61.0 2,753 15,491 22.28
24,800 25,410 305.4 44.94 624 24,438 61.3 2,788 15,488 22.28
24,900 25,500 307.6 45.24 627 24,539 61.6 2,823 15,485 22.28
25,000 25,600 309.8 45.55 629 24,640 61.9 2,858 15,481 22.28
25,100 25,690 312.0 45.85 631 24,741 62.3 2,893 15,741 22.80
25,200 25,790 314.3 46.16 634 24,843 62.6 2,929 15,738 22.80
25,300 25,880 316.5 46.46 635 24,944 62.9 2,966 15,735 22.80
25,400 25,980 318.8 46.77 638 25,045 63.2 3,002 15,732 22.80
25,500 26,070 321.0 47.08 640 25,146 63.5 3,039 15,980 23.30
25,600 26,170 323.3 47.39 642 25,248 63.9 3,076 15,976 23.30
25,700 26,260 325.6 47.70 644 25,349 64.2 3,114 15,981 23.32
25,800 26,360 327.9 48.00 646 25,450 64.5 3,152 15,977 23.32
25,900 26,450 330.1 48.31 648 25,551 64.9 3,189 16,223 23.82
26,000 26,550 332.4 48.63 651 25,653 65.2 3,228 16,219 23.82
26,100 26,640 334.7 48.94 653 25,754 65.5 3,267 16,223 23.83
26,200 26,740 337.1 49.25 655 25,855 65.9 3,306 16,219 23.83
26,300 26,830 339.4 49.56 657 25,957 66.2 3,345 16,463 24.33
26,400 26,930 341.7 49.87 659 26,058 66.5 3,385 16,459 24.33
26,500 27,030 344.1 50.19 662 26,159 66.9 3,425 16,455 24.33
26,600 27,120 346.4 50.50 664 26,260 67.2 3,465 16,450 24.33
26,700 27,220 348.8 50.81 666 26,362 67.5 3,505 16,699 24.85
26,800 27,320 351.1 51.13 669 26,463 67.9 3,547 16,695 24.85
26,900 27,410 353.5 51.45 671 26,565 68.2 3,588 16,691 24.85
27,000 27,510 355.9 51.76 674 26,665 68.6 3,630 16,686 24.85
27,100 27,600 358.3 52.08 676 26,766 68.9 3,671 16,924 25.35
27,200 27,700 360.7 52.40 678 26,868 69.3 3,714 16,919 25.35

E-22 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

27,300 27,800 363.1 52.71 681 26,969 69.6 3,757 16,922 25.36
27,400 27,900 365.5 53.03 684 27,070 70.0 3,800 16,917 25.36
27,500 27,990 368.0 53.35 686 27,171 70.3 3,843 17,153 25.86
27,600 28,090 370.4 53.67 689 27,274 70.7 3,887 17,155 25.88
27,700 28,190 372.9 53.99 691 27,373 71.0 3,931 17,134 25.85
27,800 28,280 375.3 54.31 693 27,474 71.4 3,975 17,159 25.91
27,900 28,380 377.8 54.64 696 27,576 71.7 4,020 17,362 26.35
28,000 28,480 380.3 54.96 698 27,677 72.1 4,065 17,386 26.41
28,100 28,580 382.8 55.28 701 27,778 72.4 4,110 17,381 26.41
28,200 28,670 385.2 55.61 703 27,880 72.8 4,155 17,590 26.86
28,300 28,770 387.7 55.93 706 27,981 73.1 4,201 17,584 26.86
28,400 28,870 390.2 56.25 709 28,082 73.5 4,247 17,608 26.93
28,500 28,970 392.7 56.57 711 28,183 73.9 4,293 17,602 26.93
28,600 29,060 395.2 56.90 713 28,284 74.2 4,340 17,596 26.93
28,700 29,160 397.7 57.22 716 28,386 74.6 4,387 17,825 27.43
28,800 29,260 400.2 57.55 718 28,487 74.9 4,434 17,819 27.43
28,900 29,360 402.7 57.87 721 28,587 75.3 4,481 17,820 27.44
29,000 29,450 405.2 58.20 723 28,689 75.7 4,529 18,047 27.94
29,100 29,550 407.7 58.52 726 28,790 76.0 4,577 18,041 27.94
29,200 29,650 410.2 58.85 728 28,891 76.4 4,626 18,034 27.94
29,300 29,750 412.7 59.17 731 28,992 76.8 4,674 18,028 27.94
29,400 29,840 415.3 59.50 733 29,093 77.1 4,723 18,253 28.44
29,500 29,940 417.8 59.83 736 29,195 77.5 4,772 18,253 28.46
29,600 30,040 420.4 60.15 739 29,295 77.8 4,822 18,246 28.46
29,700 30,140 422.9 60.48 741 29,397 78.2 4,871 18,239 28.46
29,800 30,240 425.4 60.81 743 29,498 78.6 4,921 18,462 28.96
29,900 30,330 428.0 61.14 746 29,599 78.9 4,972 18,455 28.96
30,000 30,430 430.6 61.47 748 29,700 79.3 5,022 18,448 28.96
30,100 30,530 433.1 61.79 751 29,801 79.7 5,073 18,669 29.46
30,200 30,630 435.7 62.13 753 29,902 80.0 5,124 18,668 29.47
30,300 30,720 438.2 62.45 755 30,001 80.4 5,175 18,661 29.47

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-23

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

30,400 30,820 440.8 62.78 758 30,103 80.8 5,226 18,653 29.47
30,500 30,930 443.3 63.11 762 30,206 81.2 5,279 18,902 30.03
30,600 31,020 445.9 63.44 764 30,307 81.5 5,331 18,894 30.03
30,700 31,120 448.4 63.76 766 30,407 81.9 5,382 18,893 30.05
30,800 31,220 451.0 64.09 768 30,508 82.2 5,435 18,885 30.05
30,900 31,320 453.6 64.42 771 30,609 82.6 5,487 19,102 30.55
31,000 31,420 456.2 64.75 774 30,711 83.0 5,541 19,094 30.55
31,100 31,510 458.7 65.08 775 30,811 83.3 5,594 19,085 30.55
31,200 31,610 461.3 65.41 778 30,912 83.7 5,648 19,076 30.55
31,300 31,710 464.0 65.75 781 31,014 84.1 5,703 19,299 31.07
31,400 31,810 466.6 66.08 784 31,115 84.5 5,758 19,290 31.07
31,500 31,910 469.2 66.41 787 31,216 84.9 5,813 19,281 31.07
31,600 32,010 471.8 66.74 790 31,316 85.3 5,868 19,494 31.57
31,700 32,110 474.5 67.08 792 31,416 85.6 5,923 19,485 31.57
31,800 32,210 477.1 67.41 796 31,518 86.0 5,980 19,475 31.57
31,900 32,300 479.7 67.75 798 31,619 86.4 6,036 19,493 31.63
32,000 32,400 482.4 68.08 801 31,720 86.8 6,092 19,705 32.13
32,100 32,500 485.0 68.41 804 31,821 87.2 6,149 19,695 32.13
32,200 32,600 487.6 68.75 807 31,921 87.6 6,205 19,664 32.08
32,300 32,700 490.3 69.08 809 32,022 88.0 6,262 19,681 32.14
32,400 32,800 492.9 69.42 813 32,124 88.4 6,320 19,892 32.64
32,500 32,900 495.6 69.75 815 32,225 88.8 6,378 19,888 32.66
32,600 33,000 498.2 70.08 818 32325 89.1 6,435 19,870 32.64
32,700 33,100 500.8 70.42 820 32,426 89.5 6,493 20,079 33.14
32,800 33,200 503.5 70.75 824 32,527 89.9 6,552 20,068 33.14
32,900 33,290 506.1 71.09 826 32,628 90.3 6,611 20,063 33.16
33,000 33,390 508.8 71.42 829 32,729 90.7 6,669 20,052 33.16
33,100 33,490 511.5 71.76 832 32,830 91.1 6,729 20,259 33.66
33,200 33,590 514.1 72.09 834 32,931 91.4 6,788 20,247 33.66
33,300 33,690 516.9 72.44 839 33,034 91.9 6,850 20,235 33.66
33,400 33,790 519.5 72.77 841 33,135 92.3 6,910 20,448 34.18

E-24 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

33,500 33,890 522.2 73.11 842 33,231 92.6 6,969 20,426 34.16
33,600 33,990 524.8 73.44 845 33,332 93.0 7,030 20,413 34.16
33,700 34,090 527.6 73.79 848 33,435 93.4 7,092 20,400 34.16
33,800 34,190 530.3 74.12 851 33,535 93.8 7,153 20,605 34.66
33,900 34,290 532.9 74.46 854 33,636 94.2 7,214 20,592 34.66
34,000 34,390 535.6 74.79 857 33,737 94.6 7,276 20,578 34.66
34,100 34,490 538.3 75.13 859 33,838 95.0 7,337 20,788 35.18
34,200 34,590 540.9 75.46 863 33,939 95.4 7,399 20,775 35.18
34,300 34,680 543.6 75.79 865 34,040 95.8 7,461 20,761 35.18
34,400 34,780 546.2 76.12 867 34,138 96.1 7,522 20,963 35.68
34,500 34,880 548.9 76.46 869 34,239 96.5 7,585 20,949 35.68
34,600 34,990 551.6 76.80 875 34,346 97.0 7,650 20,951 35.71
34,700 35,090 554.3 77.13 878 34,446 97.4 7,714 20,937 35.71
34,800 35,180 556.9 77.47 879 34,543 97.7 7,775 21,130 36.19
34,900 35,280 559.7 77.81 883 34,647 98.1 7,842 21,121 36.21
35,000 35,380 562.4 78.15 883 34,742 98.5 7,905 21,097 36.19
35,100 35,470 565.0 78.48 885 34,841 98.8 7,968 21,296 36.69
35,200 35,580 567.8 78.83 889 34,944 99.3 8,035 21,280 36.69
35,300 35,680 570.5 79.17 894 35,050 99.7 8,102 21,273 36.71
35,400 35,780 573.2 79.51 897 35,150 100.1 8,167 21,257 36.71
35,500 35,880 575.8 79.84 898 35,248 100.5 8,231 21,455 37.21
35,600 35,980 578.6 80.18 901 35,349 100.9 8,298 21,446 37.22
35,700 36,080 581.3 80.52 905 35,451 101.3 8,365 21,429 37.22
35,800 36,180 584.0 80.86 907 35,550 101.7 8,431 21,624 37.72
35,900 36,280 586.7 81.20 910 35,651 102.1 8,499 21,607 37.72
36,000 36,380 589.5 81.54 914 35,752 102.5 8,567 21,616 37.78
36,100 36,480 592.3 81.88 917 35,853 102.9 8,635 21,598 37.78
36,200 36,580 595.0 82.23 920 35,953 103.3 8,703 21,772 38.24
36,300 36,680 597.8 82.57 923 36,054 103.7 8,772 21,754 38.24
36,400 36,780 600.5 82.91 927 36,154 104.2 8,841 21,762 38.30
36,500 36,880 603.3 83.25 929 36,254 104.6 8,910 21,954 38.80

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-25

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

36,600 36,980 606.0 83.60 932 36,355 104.9 8,979 21,935 38.80
36,700 37,080 608.8 83.94 936 36,457 105.4 9,050 21,923 38.82
36,800 37,180 611.6 84.28 939 36,558 105.8 9,120 22,114 39.32
36,900 37,280 614.3 84.63 941 36,657 106.2 9,190 22,094 39.32
37,000 37,380 617.1 84.97 944 36,757 106.6 9,261 22,074 39.32
37,100 37,480 619.9 85.31 947 36,858 107.0 9,332 22,264 39.82
37,200 37,580 622.6 85.66 951 36,959 107.4 9,403 22,243 39.82
37,300 37,680 625.4 86.00 953 37,060 107.8 9,475 22,223 39.82
37,400 37,780 628.2 86.35 957 37,161 108.2 9,547 22,208 39.83
37,500 37,880 631.0 86.69 960 37,261 108.7 9,619 22,396 40.33
37,600 37,980 633.7 87.03 963 37,361 109.1 9,691 22,375 40.33
37,700 38,080 636.5 87.38 966 37,461 109.5 9,764 22,353 40.33
37,800 38,180 639.4 87.73 970 37,564 109.9 9,839 22,546 40.85
37,900 38,280 642.2 88.08 973 37,665 110.3 9,913 22,524 40.85
38,000 38,380 645.0 88.42 975 37,763 110.7 9,986 22,500 40.85
38,100 38,480 647.8 88.77 978 37,864 111.1 10,061 22,685 41.35
38,200 38,580 650.6 89.13 981 37,965 111.6 10,137 22,661 41.35
38,300 38,680 653.5 89.47 984 38,065 112.0 10,212 22,638 41.35
38,400 38,780 656.3 89.82 988 38,166 112.4 10,287 22,821 41.85
38,500 38,880 659.1 90.17 991 38,266 112.8 10,363 22,797 41.85
38,600 38,980 662.0 90.52 994 38,367 113.3 10,439 22,778 41.86
38,700 39,080 664.8 90.87 996 38,467 113.6 10,515 22,960 42.36
38,800 39,180 667.6 91.22 1000 38,569 114.1 10,592 22,936 42.36
38,900 39,280 670.5 91.57 1003 38,670 114.5 10,670 22,910 42.36
39,000 39,380 673.3 91.92 1007 38,769 114.9 10,747 23,097 42.88
39,100 39,480 676.1 92.27 1009 38,869 115.3 10,825 23,063 42.86
39,200 39,580 679.0 92.63 1012 38,970 115.8 10,903 23,043 42.88
39,300 39,680 681.9 92.98 1016 39,070 116.2 10,982 23,221 43.38
39,400 39,780 684.8 93.33 1018 39,171 116.6 11,061 23,194 43.38
39,500 39,880 687.6 93.68 1022 39,271 117.0 11,140 23,167 43.38
39,600 39,980 690.5 94.04 1025 39,372 117.5 11,220 23,164 43.44

E-26 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

39,700 40,080 693.4 94.39 1028 39,472 117.9 11,300 23,322 43.89
39,800 40,180 696.2 94.74 1031 39,572 118.3 11,379 23,293 43.89
39,900 40,280 699.1 95.09 1033 39,672 118.7 11,459 23,469 44.39
40,000 40,380 702.0 95.45 1038 39,775 119.2 11,541 23,466 44.46
40,100 40,480 704.8 95.80 1041 39,875 119.6 11,622 23,417 44.41
40,200 40,580 707.7 96.15 1044 39,974 120.0 11,702 23,405 44.46
40,300 40,680 710.6 96.51 1046 40,074 120.4 11,783 23,560 44.91
40,400 40,780 713.5 96.86 1049 40,175 120.8 11,866 23,554 44.97
40,500 40,880 716.4 97.22 1053 40,276 121.3 11,949 23,523 44.97
40,600 40,980 719.3 97.57 1057 40,376 121.7 12,031 23,695 45.47
40,700 41,080 722.2 97.92 1060 40,476 122.1 12,114 23,663 45.47
40,800 41,180 725.0 98.28 1063 40,577 122.6 12,197 23,637 45.49
40,900 41,280 727.9 98.63 1066 40,676 123.0 12,278 23,808 45.99
41,000 41,380 730.8 98.98 1069 40,776 123.4 12,362 23,775 45.99
41,100 41,490 733.7 99.33 1074 40,879 123.9 12,447 23,743 45.99
41,200 41,590 736.6 99.69 1077 40,981 124.3 12,533 23,917 46.50
41,300 41,680 739.5 100.05 1079 41,079 124.7 12,616 23,876 46.49
41,400 41,780 742.5 100.41 1082 41,179 125.1 12,702 23,847 46.50
41,500 41,890 745.5 100.77 1086 41,280 125.6 12,791 24,013 47.00
41,600 41,990 748.5 101.13 1089 41,380 126.0 12,878 23,977 47.00
41,700 42,090 751.5 101.50 1092 41,480 126.5 12,967 24,142 47.50
41,800 42,190 754.5 101.87 1096 41,581 126.9 13,057 24,104 47.50
41,900 42,290 757.5 102.24 1099 41,681 127.4 13,146 24,072 47.52
42,000 42,390 760.6 102.61 1102 41,781 127.8 13,237 24,234 48.02
42,100 42,490 763.6 102.98 1106 41,881 128.3 13,327 24,195 48.02
42,200 42,590 766.7 103.35 1109 41,983 128.7 13,420 24,155 48.02
42,300 42,690 769.8 103.73 1113 42,086 129.2 13,514 24,321 48.53
42,400 42,790 773.0 104.11 1116 42,185 129.6 13,608 24,279 48.53
42,500 42,890 776.1 104.49 1118 42,283 130.1 13,702 24,235 48.53
42,600 42,990 779.4 104.88 1123 42,384 130.6 13,800 24,391 49.03
42,700 43,090 782.6 105.28 1125 42,485 131.0 13,899 24,346 49.03

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-27

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

42,800 43,190 785.9 105.67 1129 42,585 131.5 13,998 24,506 49.55
42,900 43,290 789.2 106.07 1,132 42,685 132.0 14,099 24,458 49.55
43,000 43,390 792.5 106.48 1,135 42,786 132.4 14,201 24,410 49.55
43,100 43,490 795.9 106.88 1,137 42,885 132.9 14,303 24,561 50.05
43,200 43,590 799.3 107.29 1,141 42,986 133.4 14,408 24,510 50.05
43,300 43,690 802.8 107.71 1,145 43,090 133.9 14,516 24,663 50.57
43,400 43,790 806.3 108.13 1,148 43,189 134.4 14,623 24,610 50.57
43,500 43,890 809.9 108.56 1,150 43,287 134.9 14,733 24,553 50.57
43,600 43,990 813.5 109.00 1,154 43,389 135.4 14,848 24,694 51.07
43,700 44,090 817.3 109.44 1,158 43,489 135.9 14,964 24,659 51.13
43,800 44,190 821.0 109.89 1,161 43,589 136.4 15,081 24,802 51.64
43,900 44,290 824.9 110.35 1,164 43,690 137.0 15,201 24,739 51.64
44,000 44,390 828.8 110.81 1,168 43,790 137.5 15,323 24,871 52.14
44,100 44,490 832.7 111.28 1,170 43,890 138.0 15,447 24,804 52.14
44,200 44,590 836.8 111.77 1,175 43,993 138.6 15,576 24,741 52.16
44,300 44,690 841.0 112.26 1,177 44,093 139.2 15,709 24,865 52.66
44,400 44,790 845.3 112.78 1,180 44,191 139.7 15,845 24,787 52.66
44,500 44,890 849.9 113.31 1,184 44,294 140.4 15,990 24,901 53.16
44,600 44,990 854.5 113.85 1,187 44,393 141.0 16,136 25,012 53.66
44,700 45,090 859.3 114.41 1,191 44,494 141.6 16,288 24,929 53.68
44,800 45,190 864.2 114.99 1,194 44,595 142.3 16,446 25,029 54.18
44,900 45,290 869.3 115.59 1,197 44,696 142.9 16,609 24,931 54.18
45,000 45,390 874.7 116.21 1,201 44,798 143.6 16,783 25,025 54.69
45,100 45,490 880.4 116.88 1,204 44,898 144.4 16,967 25,103 55.19
45,200 45,590 886.5 117.59 1,207 44,998 145.1 17,165 24,976 55.19
45,300 45,690 893.0 118.34 1,210 45,100 145.9 17,375 25,032 55.69
45,400 45,780 900.0 119.14 1,213 45,200 146.8 17,601 25,073 56.19
45,500 45,880 908.0 120.06 1,219 45,304 147.8 17,862 25,094 56.71
45,600 45,980 917.2 121.10 1,221 45,403 148.9 18,159 25,075 57.21
45,700 46,080 928.3 122.36 1,223 45,506 150.2 18,522 25,009 57.72
45,800 46,170 946.3 124.38 1,227 45,609 152.2 19,111 24,962 58.78

E-28 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud Fuze Apogee
Range to HOB Time to Time
QE (mil) Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

45,900 46,180 951.1 125.34 1,047 45,710 148.3 19,269 25,024 59.29

Figure E-3. M26A1/2 trajectories

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-29

Appendix E

Table E-4. M26A2 (high quadrant elevation) rocket trajectory data

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

10,000 19,090 178.91 11.65 1,026 9,443 45.53 1,033 9,679 12.76
10,100 19,150 179.90 11.80 1,039 9,542 46.03 1,046 9,776 12.89
10,200 19,150 179.90 11.94 1,043 9,643 46.24 1,053 9,923 12.57
10,300 19,210 180.89 12.09 1,056 9,744 46.74 1,062 9,971 13.14
10,400 19,210 180.89 12.23 1,060 9,844 46.95 1,065 10,065 13.25
10,500 19,269 181.87 12.38 1,073 9,944 47.44 1,081 10,228 13.02
10,600 19,269 181.87 12.53 1,076 10,044 47.64 1,081 10,228 13.02
10,700 19,328 182.86 12.68 1,089 10,144 48.12 1,093 10,354 13.63
10,800 19,328 182.86 12.83 1,092 10,244 48.32 1,099 10,560 13.52
10,900 19,387 183.85 12.98 1,104 10,345 48.80 1,110 10,600 13.58
11,000 19,387 183.85 13.13 1,107 10,446 48.99 1,111 10,600 13.58
11,100 19,446 184.83 13.28 1,120 10,546 49.47 1,122 10,734 14.11
11,200 19,446 184.83 13.44 1,122 10,647 49.65 1,127 10,925 14.08
11,300 19,504 185.82 13.59 1,134 10,746 50.12 1,137 10,925 14.08
11,400 19,563 186.81 13.74 1,147 10,846 50.60 1,149 11,015 14.48
11,500 19,563 186.81 13.90 1,148 10,948 50.77 1,152 11,244 14.58
11,600 19,621 187.80 14.06 1,160 11,048 51.24 1,163 11,243 14.58
11,700 19,621 187.80 14.22 1,162 11,149 51.40 1,163 11,243 14.58
11,800 19,679 188.78 14.37 1,174 11,248 51.88 1,176 11,556 15.08
11,900 19,737 189.77 14.53 1,186 11,348 52.34 1,187 11,556 15.08
12,000 19,737 189.77 14.69 1,186 11,444 52.47 1,187 11,556 15.08
12,100 19,794 190.76 14.85 1,199 11,545 52.94 1,199 11,632 15.26
12,200 19,851 191.74 15.01 1,210 11,645 53.40 1,210 11,863 15.58
12,300 19,851 191.74 15.17 1,210 11,746 53.53 1,211 11,863 15.58
12,400 19,908 192.73 15.34 1,222 11,847 54.00 1,222 11,862 15.58
12,500 19,964 193.72 15.51 1,233 11,950 54.45 1,234 11,871 15.60
12,600 20,021 194.71 15.68 1,245 12,052 54.91 1,246 11,871 15.60
12,700 20,021 194.71 15.85 1,244 12,155 55.03 1,246 11,871 15.60
12,800 20,077 195.69 16.02 1,256 12,256 55.48 1,257 11,870 15.60
12,900 20,132 196.68 16.19 1,267 12,357 55.92 1,269 11,869 15.60

E-30 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

13,000 20,132 196.68 16.35 1,266 12,455 56.02 1,269 11,869 15.60
13,100 20,189 197.67 16.52 1,276 12,554 56.46 1,281 11,869 15.60
13,200 20,245 198.65 16.69 1,287 12,654 56.90 1,292 12,172 16.10
13,300 20,300 199.64 16.87 1,298 12,756 57.34 1,304 12,171 16.10
13,400 20,355 200.63 17.04 1,308 12,856 57.77 1,317 12,170 16.10
13,500 20,410 201.62 17.21 1,319 12,955 58.21 1,329 12,170 16.10
13,600 20,410 201.62 17.39 1,317 13,058 58.28 1,328 12,170 16.10
13,700 20,465 202.60 17.57 1,327 13,157 58.70 1,340 12,169 16.10
13,800 20,520 203.59 17.75 1,337 13,258 59.13 1,353 12,178 16.11
13,900 20,574 204.58 17.93 1,347 13,359 59.56 1,365 12,177 16.11
14,000 20,629 205.57 18.11 1,357 13,459 59.97 1,377 12,176 16.11
14,100 20,675 206.42 18.29 1,365 13,560 60.34 1,387 12,176 16.11
14,200 20,721 207.27 18.47 1,373 13,660 60.71 1,398 12,474 16.61
14,300 20,768 208.13 18.65 1,380 13,761 61.06 1,408 12,473 16.61
14,400 20,815 208.98 18.84 1,388 13,862 61.42 1,419 12,473 16.61
14,500 20,861 209.83 19.02 1,396 13,962 61.78 1,430 12,472 16.61
14,600 20,907 210.69 19.21 1,403 14,062 62.13 1,440 12,471 16.61
14,700 20,952 211.54 19.40 1,410 14,164 62.48 1,451 12,470 16.61
14,800 20,998 212.40 19.58 1,417 14,264 62.81 1,462 12,470 16.61
14,900 21,095 214.24 19.77 1,438 14,365 63.55 1,485 12,468 16.61
15,000 21,141 215.09 19.96 1,444 14,466 63.89 1,496 12,762 17.11
15,100 21,187 215.94 20.15 1,451 14,565 64.22 1,506 12,761 17.11
15,200 21,231 216.80 20.35 1,457 14,667 64.55 1,517 12,761 17.11
15,300 21,276 217.65 20.54 1,463 14,768 64.87 1,528 12,760 17.11
15,400 21,321 218.50 20.74 1,469 14,868 65.19 1,539 12,759 17.11
15,500 21,366 219.36 20.93 1,475 14,970 65.51 1,550 12,759 17.11
15,600 21,462 221.20 21.13 1,496 15,069 66.23 1,574 12,766 17.13
15,700 21,506 222.05 21.33 1,501 15,171 66.54 1,585 12,765 17.13
15,800 21,551 222.91 21.53 1,506 15,271 66.84 1,596 12,765 17.13
15,900 21,594 223.76 21.73 1,511 15,371 67.14 1,607 13,054 17.63
16,000 21,638 224.61 21.93 1,516 15,473 67.43 1,618 13,053 17.63

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-31

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

16,100 21,733 226.46 22.13 1,537 15,572 68.15 1,642 13,052 17.63
16,200 21,776 227.31 22.33 1,541 15,674 68.44 1,653 13,051 17.63
16,300 21,820 228.16 22.54 1,545 15,775 68.72 1,665 13,050 17.63
16,400 21,914 230.00 22.74 1,565 15,874 69.43 1,689 13,049 17.63
16,500 21,953 230.86 22.95 1,569 15,976 69.70 1,700 13,038 17.61
16,600 21,996 231.71 23.16 1,572 16,077 69.96 1,711 13,323 18.11
16,700 22,040 232.57 23.37 1,576 16,178 70.23 1,723 13,322 18.11
16,800 22,132 234.41 23.58 1,596 16,278 70.93 1,747 13,320 18.11
16,900 22,174 235.26 23.79 1,599 16,379 71.18 1,759 13,320 18.11
17,000 22,218 236.11 24.01 1,601 16,480 71.42 1,770 13,319 18.11
17,100 22,309 237.95 24.22 1,621 16,580 72.12 1,795 13,326 18.13
17,200 22,351 238.81 24.43 1,623 16,681 72.36 1,807 13,326 18.13
17,300 22,442 240.65 24.65 1,642 16,781 73.05 1,831 13,597 18.61
17,400 22,484 241.50 24.87 1,644 16,883 73.28 1,843 13,604 18.63
17,500 22,525 242.36 25.08 1,646 16,984 73.49 1,855 13,604 18.63
17,600 22,615 244.20 25.30 1,665 17,084 74.18 1,880 13,602 18.63
17,700 22,657 245.05 25.52 1,666 17,185 74.39 1,892 13,601 18.63
17,800 22,746 246.89 25.74 1,684 17,286 75.07 1,917 13,599 18.63
17,900 22,787 247.75 25.96 1,685 17,386 75.27 1,929 13,599 18.63
18,000 22,875 249.59 26.19 1,703 17,487 75.94 1,955 13,875 19.13
18,100 22,916 250.44 26.41 1,704 17,589 76.13 1,967 13,874 19.13
18,200 23,003 252.28 26.64 1,721 17,688 76.79 1,993 13,872 19.13
18,300 23,045 253.14 26.87 1,721 17,790 76.97 2,005 13,871 19.13
18,400 23,132 254.98 27.09 1,739 17,890 77.63 2,030 13,869 19.13
18,500 23,172 255.83 27.32 1,738 17,992 77.79 2,042 13,869 19.13
18,600 23,259 257.67 27.55 1,756 18,091 78.44 2,069 14,149 19.64
18,700 23,300 258.52 27.79 1,754 18,193 78.59 2,081 14,149 19.64
18,800 23,385 260.37 28.02 1,771 18,294 79.24 2,107 14,147 19.64
18,900 23,426 261.22 28.25 1,769 18,395 79.37 2,119 14,146 19.64
19,000 23,511 263.06 28.48 1,786 18,495 80.02 2,146 14,144 19.64
19,100 23,597 264.90 28.72 1,802 18,596 80.64 2,172 14,142 19.64

E-32 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

19,200 23,636 265.76 28.96 1,800 18,698 80.77 2,185 14,412 20.14
19,300 23,721 267.60 29.19 1,816 18,797 81.39 2,212 14,410 20.14
19,400 23,760 268.45 29.44 1,813 18,899 81.50 2,224 14,409 20.14
19,500 23,845 270.29 29.67 1,829 18,999 82.11 2,251 14,407 20.14
19,600 23,929 272.13 29.91 1,845 19,101 82.74 2,278 14,405 20.14
19,700 23,968 272.99 30.16 1,840 19,202 82.81 2,291 14,404 20.14
19,800 24,052 274.83 30.40 1,856 19,303 83.42 2,318 14,677 20.66
19,900 24,136 276.67 30.64 1,871 19,403 84.02 2,345 14,675 20.66
20,000 24,218 278.51 30.89 1,886 19,504 84.62 2,373 14,673 20.66
20,100 24,263 279.50 31.14 1,883 19,605 84.74 2,388 14,672 20.66
20,200 24,351 281.47 31.38 1,901 19,706 85.41 2,417 14,670 20.66
20,300 24,395 282.46 31.63 1,897 19,807 85.51 2,432 14,668 20.66
20,400 24,484 284.43 31.88 1,914 19,908 86.17 2,462 14,963 21.22
20,500 24,571 286.41 32.13 1,931 20,008 86.83 2,492 14,961 21.22
20,600 24,615 287.39 32.39 1,927 20,110 86.91 2,507 14,959 21.22
20,700 24,702 289.37 32.64 1,943 20,210 87.55 2,537 14,957 21.22
20,800 24,790 291.34 32.89 1,960 20,311 88.19 2,567 14,930 21.18
20,900 24,833 292.33 33.15 1,954 20,413 88.25 2,582 15,189 21.68
21,000 24,919 294.30 33.40 1,970 20,514 88.89 2,613 15,187 21.68
21,100 25,006 296.28 33.66 1,986 20,614 89.51 2,644 15,217 21.74
21,200 25,049 297.27 33.92 1,980 20,716 89.56 2,659 15,216 21.74
21,300 25,138 299.24 34.17 1,996 20,817 90.19 2,690 15,239 21.78
21,400 25,224 301.21 34.43 2,011 20,917 90.80 2,721 15,236 21.78
21,500 25,266 302.20 34.70 2,004 21,018 90.82 2,737 15,234 21.78
21,600 25,352 304.18 34.96 2,019 21,120 91.42 2,768 15,489 22.28
21,700 25,437 306.15 35.22 2,033 21,220 92.02 2,799 15,487 22.28
21,800 25,522 308.12 35.48 2,048 21,321 92.61 2,831 15,484 22.28
21,900 25,607 310.10 35.74 2,062 21,422 93.20 2,862 15,481 22.28
22,000 25,649 311.09 36.02 2,053 21,524 93.18 2,878 15,480 22.28
22,100 25,733 313.06 36.28 2,067 21,624 93.76 2,910 15,740 22.80
22,200 25,818 315.03 36.55 2,080 21,725 94.33 2,942 15,737 22.80

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-33

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

22,300 25,901 317.01 36.81 2,093 21,826 94.90 2,974 15,734 22.80
031924
22,400 25,985 318.98 37.08 2,106 21,927 95.46 3,006 15,731 22.80
22,500 26,067 320.96 37.35 2,119 22,027 96.00 3,038 15,980 23.30
22,600 26,109 321.94 37.63 2,107 22,130 95.93 3,054 15,978 23.30
22,700 26,191 323.92 37.91 2,120 22,231 96.47 3,087 15,975 23.30
22,800 26,274 325.89 38.18 2,132 22,332 97.01 3,119 15,980 23.32
22,900 26,357 327.87 38.45 2,143 22,433 97.54 3,152 15,977 23.32
23,000 26,440 329.84 38.72 2,155 22,533 98.08 3,184 15,974 23.32
23,100 26,521 331.82 39.00 2,167 22,634 98.60 3,218 16,220 23.82
23,200 26,604 333.79 39.28 2,178 22,735 99.12 3,251 16,225 23.83
23,300 26,685 335.77 39.55 2,189 22,836 99.63 3,284 16,222 23.83
23,400 26,767 337.74 39.83 2,199 22,937 100.13 3,317 16,218 23.83
23,500 26,848 339.71 40.11 2,210 23,039 100.64 3,350 16,462 24.33
23,600 26,930 341.69 40.39 2,220 23,139 101.13 3,384 16,459 24.33
23,700 27,010 343.66 40.67 2,230 23,240 101.62 3,418 16,455 24.33
23,800 27,091 345.64 40.96 2,239 23,342 102.10 3,452 16,452 24.33
23,900 27,171 347.61 41.24 2,249 23,443 102.58 3,485 16,448 24.33
24,000 27,253 349.59 41.52 2,258 23,544 103.06 3,520 16,698 24.85
24,100 27,333 351.56 41.80 2,267 23,645 103.52 3,554 16,694 24.85
24,200 27,414 353.54 42.09 2,276 23,746 103.99 3,588 16,691 24.85
24,300 27,493 355.51 42.38 2,284 23,847 104.44 3,623 16,687 24.85
24,400 27,572 357.48 42.67 2,292 23,948 104.88 3,657 16,682 24.85
24,500 27,691 360.45 42.94 2,327 24,048 106.01 3,709 16,920 25.35
24,600 27,771 362.42 43.23 2,334 24,149 106.45 3,744 16,923 25.36
24,700 27,850 364.39 43.52 2,342 24,251 106.88 3,779 16,920 25.36
24,800 27,928 366.37 43.81 2,349 24,352 107.30 3,814 16,915 25.36
24,900 28,008 368.34 44.11 2,356 24,453 107.72 3,849 17,160 25.88
25,000 28,086 370.32 44.40 2,362 24,555 108.13 3,885 17,156 25.88
25,100 28,165 372.29 44.70 2,369 24,656 108.54 3,920 17,152 25.88
25,200 28,279 375.25 44.98 2,401 24,755 109.61 3,973 17,159 25.91

E-34 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

25,300 28,356 377.23 45.28 2,406 24,857 109.99 4,009 17,363 26.35
25,400 28,435 379.20 45.58 2,411 24,958 110.38 4,045 17,389 26.41
25,500 28,513 381.18 45.88 2,416 25,059 110.76 4,081 17,384 26.41
25,600 28,591 383.15 46.17 2,422 25,161 111.14 4,117 17,380 26.41
25,700 28,668 385.13 46.47 2,426 25,263 111.50 4,153 17,353 26.36
25,800 28,785 388.09 46.76 2,460 25,362 112.61 4,208 17,584 26.86
25,900 28,863 390.06 47.06 2,464 25,464 112.97 4,245 17,608 26.93
26,000 28,940 392.04 47.36 2,467 25,565 113.31 4,281 17,604 26.93
26,100 29,017 394.01 47.66 2,471 25,667 113.66 4,318 17,599 26.93
26,200 29,133 396.97 47.95 2,504 25,767 114.75 4,374 17,827 27.43
26,300 29,210 398.95 48.25 2,507 25,868 115.09 4,411 17,822 27.43
26,400 29,287 400.92 48.56 2,510 25,970 115.41 4,448 17,825 27.44
26,500 29,364 402.89 48.87 2,512 26,071 115.73 4,486 17,820 27.44
26,600 29,479 405.86 49.15 2,545 26,171 116.81 4,542 18,046 27.94
26,700 29,556 407.83 49.46 2,547 26,273 117.12 4,580 18,041 27.94
26,800 29,632 409.80 49.77 2,549 26,374 117.43 4,617 18,036 27.94
26,900 29,747 412.77 50.06 2,581 26,474 118.51 4,674 18,028 27.94
27,000 29,823 414.74 50.37 2,582 26,575 118.80 4,712 18,254 28.44
27,100 29,900 416.72 50.68 2,583 26,677 119.09 4,751 18,249 28.44
27,200 30,014 419.68 50.97 2,615 26,777 120.15 4,808 18,248 28.46
27,300 30,090 421.65 51.28 2,616 26,879 120.43 4,847 18,243 28.46
27,400 30,166 423.63 51.60 2,616 26,980 120.69 4,885 18,467 28.96
27,500 30,279 426.59 51.87 2,651 27,075 121.83 4,944 18,459 28.96
27,600 30,356 428.56 52.19 2,650 27,178 122.07 4,983 18,453 28.96
27,700 30,431 430.54 52.51 2,649 27,280 122.30 5,022 18,448 28.96
27,800 30,545 433.50 52.80 2,680 27,380 123.36 5,080 18,668 29.46
27,900 30,620 435.47 53.12 2,679 27,482 123.59 5,120 18,662 29.46
28,000 30,734 438.43 53.42 2,710 27,582 124.65 5,179 18,660 29.47
28,100 30,809 440.41 53.74 2,707 27,686 124.85 5,219 18,654 29.47
28,200 30,926 443.37 54.04 2,740 27,789 125.93 5,279 18,902 30.03
28,300 31,002 445.34 54.36 2,736 27,893 126.12 5,319 18,896 30.03

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-35

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

28,400 31,077 447.32 54.67 2,737 27,990 126.38 5,360 18,890 30.03
28,500 31,190 450.28 54.96 2,768 28,090 127.44 5,420 18,887 30.05
28,600 31,266 452.25 55.28 2,765 28,192 127.63 5,460 18,881 30.05
28,700 31,379 455.22 55.58 2,797 28,292 128.70 5,521 19,097 30.55
28,800 31,454 457.19 55.90 2,793 28,394 128.88 5,562 19,090 30.55
28,900 31,567 460.15 56.20 2,824 28,493 129.93 5,623 19,080 30.55
29,000 31,641 462.13 56.52 2,820 28,595 130.09 5,664 19,298 31.05
29,100 31,754 465.09 56.82 2,852 28,695 131.15 5,726 19,296 31.07
29,200 31,829 467.06 57.15 2,847 28,797 131.31 5,768 19,289 31.07
29,300 31,940 470.02 57.45 2,878 28,897 132.35 5,830 19,278 31.07
29,400 32,013 472.00 57.78 2,871 28,999 132.46 5,871 19,494 31.57
29,500 32,124 474.96 58.08 2,901 29,099 133.49 5,934 19,483 31.57
29,600 32,199 476.93 58.41 2,895 29,201 133.63 5,976 19,476 31.57
29,700 32,310 479.90 58.71 2,925 29,301 134.65 6,039 19,492 31.63
29,800 32,384 481.87 59.04 2,919 29,403 134.77 6,081 19,707 32.13
29,900 32,495 484.83 59.35 2,949 29,503 135.79 6,145 19,696 32.13
30,000 32,569 486.81 59.68 2,942 29,605 135.90 6,187 19,667 32.08
30,100 32,680 489.77 59.98 2,972 29,705 136.92 6,251 19,683 32.14
30,200 32,754 491.74 60.31 2,965 29,807 137.02 6,294 19,896 32.64
30,300 32,867 494.70 60.62 2,996 29,907 138.06 6,359 19,864 32.60
30,400 32,941 496.68 60.95 2,988 30,009 138.17 6,402 19,884 32.66
30,500 33,051 499.64 61.25 3,017 30,109 139.15 6,467 19,864 32.64
30,600 33,125 501.61 61.59 3,009 30,210 139.24 6,510 20,076 33.14
30,700 33,236 504.58 61.89 3,038 30,311 140.25 6,576 20,063 33.14
30,800 33,310 506.55 62.23 3,029 30,412 140.31 6,620 20,062 33.16
30,900 33,420 509.51 62.54 3,059 30,513 141.32 6,685 20,268 33.66
31,000 33,530 512.45 62.85 3,087 30,613 142.30 6,751 20,255 33.66
31,100 33,603 514.41 63.18 3,076 30,715 142.33 6,795 20,246 33.66
31,200 33,712 517.34 63.49 3,105 30,815 143.30 6,861 20,233 33.66
31,300 33,785 519.30 63.83 3,093 30,917 143.31 6,905 20,442 34.16
31,400 33,888 522.23 64.15 3,116 31,017 144.16 6,970 20,426 34.16

E-36 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

31,500 33,997 525.16 64.46 3,144 31,117 145.13 7,037 20,412 34.16
31,600 34,106 528.10 64.78 3,171 31,217 146.09 7,103 20,615 34.66
31,700 34,179 530.05 65.12 3,159 31,319 146.09 7,148 20,606 34.66
31,800 34,288 532.98 65.43 3,188 31,419 147.07 7,216 20,591 34.66
31,900 34,398 535.92 65.74 3,215 31,519 148.03 7,283 20,577 34.66
32,000 34,471 537.87 66.08 3,203 31,622 148.02 7,328 20,790 35.18
32,100 34,580 540.80 66.39 3,230 31,722 148.98 7,396 20,775 35.18
32,200 34,690 543.74 66.70 3,259 31,822 149.95 7,465 20,760 35.18
32,300 34,763 545.69 67.04 3,245 31,924 149.93 7,510 20,750 35.18
32,400 34,871 548.62 67.35 3,273 32,024 150.88 7,579 20,950 35.68
32,500 34,944 550.58 67.70 3,259 32,125 150.84 7,625 20,940 35.68
32,600 35,060 553.51 67.99 3,293 32,226 151.96 7,696 20,941 35.71
32,700 35,167 556.44 68.31 3,319 32,325 152.86 7,765 21,132 36.19
32,800 35,238 558.40 68.66 3,303 32,428 152.79 7,812 21,122 36.19
32,900 35,346 561.33 68.98 3,329 32,528 153.71 7,882 21,112 36.21
33,000 35,447 564.26 69.32 3,348 32,629 154.48 7,950 21,300 36.69
33,100 35,554 567.20 69.63 3,375 32,728 155.42 8,021 21,283 36.69
33,200 35,626 569.15 69.98 3,358 32,831 155.32 8,068 21,272 36.69
33,300 35,740 572.08 70.28 3,391 32,930 156.41 8,140 21,264 36.71
33,400 35,848 575.02 70.61 3,417 33,031 157.32 8,211 21,460 37.21
33,500 35,919 576.97 70.96 3,399 33,133 157.20 8,259 21,455 37.22
33,600 36,028 579.90 71.27 3,427 33,233 158.16 8,331 21,437 37.22
33,700 36,136 582.84 71.59 3,453 33,333 159.08 8,403 21,446 37.28
33,800 36,241 585.77 71.92 3,477 33,433 159.96 8,475 21,613 37.72
33,900 36,313 587.72 72.27 3,458 33,535 159.82 8,523 21,627 37.78
34,000 36,419 590.66 72.59 3,483 33,635 160.73 8,595 21,608 37.78
34,100 36,526 593.59 72.92 3,508 33,736 161.62 8,668 21,781 38.24
34,200 36,632 596.52 73.25 3,532 33,836 162.50 8,741 21,762 38.24
34,300 36,739 599.46 73.57 3,558 33,936 163.41 8,815 21,769 38.30
34,400 36,810 601.41 73.93 3,537 34,038 163.23 8,863 21,756 38.30
34,500 36,915 604.34 74.25 3,561 34,138 164.11 8,937 21,947 38.80

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-37

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

34,600 37,021 607.28 74.58 3,586 34,239 165.00 9,012 21,927 38.80
34,700 37,129 610.21 74.91 3,611 34,339 165.91 9,086 21,914 38.82
34,800 37,200 612.16 75.26 3,590 34,441 165.72 9,136 22,110 39.32
34,900 37,304 615.10 75.60 3,612 34,541 166.55 9,210 22,089 39.32
35,000 37,410 618.03 75.93 3,635 34,642 167.42 9,285 22,067 39.32
35,100 37,516 620.96 76.25 3,660 34,741 168.30 9,360 22,256 39.82
35,200 37,622 623.89 76.58 3,683 34,842 169.16 9,436 22,234 39.82
35,300 37,693 625.85 76.94 3,660 34,944 168.94 9,486 22,219 39.82
35,400 37,798 628.78 77.27 3,684 35,044 169.81 9,562 22,413 40.33
35,500 37,903 631.71 77.61 3,707 35,144 170.65 9,639 22,390 40.33
35,600 38,008 634.65 77.94 3,728 35,245 171.48 9,715 22,368 40.33
35,700 38,114 637.58 78.27 3,753 35,345 172.37 9,792 22,554 40.83
35,800 38,219 640.51 78.61 3,775 35,445 173.20 9,869 22,537 40.85
35,900 38,288 642.47 78.97 3,749 35,547 172.92 9,921 22,521 40.85
36,000 38,391 645.40 79.31 3,768 35,648 173.69 9,997 22,497 40.85
36,100 38,495 648.33 79.65 3,790 35,748 174.52 10,075 22,681 41.35
36,200 38,599 651.26 79.99 3,811 35,848 175.32 10,153 22,656 41.35
36,300 38,702 654.20 80.33 3,832 35,948 176.13 10,231 22,632 41.35
36,400 38,806 657.13 80.67 3,853 36,049 176.93 10,310 22,814 41.85
36,500 38,910 660.06 81.01 3,873 36,149 177.74 10,389 22,788 41.85
36,600 39,014 662.99 81.35 3,894 36,249 178.54 10,467 22,769 41.86
36,700 39,117 665.93 81.69 3,914 36,350 179.33 10,547 22,950 42.36
36,800 39,188 667.88 82.05 3,889 36,452 179.06 10,600 22,933 42.36
36,900 39,291 670.81 82.39 3,908 36,552 179.83 10,680 22,907 42.36
37,000 39,392 673.75 82.74 3,925 36,652 180.56 10,759 23,086 42.86
37,100 39,495 676.68 83.09 3,945 36,752 181.34 10,839 23,059 42.86
37,200 39,597 679.61 83.43 3,964 36,853 182.10 10,920 23,038 42.88
37,300 39,700 682.55 83.78 3,982 36,953 182.86 11,000 23,215 43.38
37,400 39,803 685.48 84.13 4,000 37,054 183.60 11,081 23,187 43.38
37,500 39,905 688.41 84.47 4,019 37,154 184.36 11,162 23,159 43.38
37,600 40,008 691.34 84.82 4,038 37,254 185.13 11,243 23,361 43.94

E-38 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

37,700 40,110 694.28 85.16 4,056 37,354 185.87 11,325 23,313 43.89
37,800 40,213 697.21 85.51 4,074 37,455 186.61 11,407 23,283 43.89
37,900 40,317 700.14 85.85 4,095 37,555 187.42 11,489 23,484 44.46
38,000 40,419 703.07 86.20 4,112 37,655 188.15 11,572 23,454 44.46
38,100 40,522 706.01 86.55 4,130 37,756 188.89 11,655 23,405 44.41
38,200 40,621 708.94 86.91 4,145 37,856 189.56 11,737 23,596 44.96
38,300 40,723 711.87 87.26 4,161 37,957 190.27 11,820 23,546 44.91
38,400 40,825 714.80 87.61 4,179 38,057 191.00 11,904 23,540 44.97
38,500 40,927 717.74 87.96 4,196 38,157 191.72 11,987 23,712 45.47
38,600 41,029 720.67 88.31 4,212 38,257 192.43 12,071 23,680 45.47
38,700 41,097 722.62 88.68 4,178 38,360 191.98 12,127 23,658 45.47
38,800 41,199 725.56 89.03 4,195 38,460 192.71 12,211 23,631 45.49
38,900 41,301 728.49 89.38 4,212 38,560 193.42 12,296 23,802 45.99
39,000 41,403 731.42 89.73 4,228 38,661 194.13 12,381 23,768 45.99
39,100 41,508 734.35 90.08 4,248 38,761 194.91 12,466 23,735 45.99
39,200 41,609 737.29 90.43 4,264 38,861 195.61 12,552 23,910 46.50
39,300 41,707 740.22 90.79 4,275 38,961 196.20 12,637 23,868 46.49
39,400 41,807 743.15 91.16 4,287 39,062 196.82 12,722 24,042 47.00
39,500 41,938 747.06 91.50 4,350 39,160 198.58 12,837 23,994 47.00
39,600 42,036 749.99 91.87 4,360 39,261 199.17 12,923 23,958 47.00
39,700 42,134 752.93 92.24 4,371 39,361 199.76 13,010 24,124 47.50
39,800 42,231 755.86 92.61 4,381 39,462 200.32 13,097 24,093 47.52
39,900 42,328 758.79 92.98 4,389 39,562 200.87 13,183 24,056 47.52
40,000 42,424 761.73 93.35 4,397 39,663 201.40 13,271 24,219 48.02
40,100 42,521 764.66 93.73 4,405 39,764 201.94 13,358 24,181 48.02
40,200 42,650 768.57 94.08 4,466 39,862 203.66 13,476 24,137 48.03
40,300 42,745 771.50 94.46 4,472 39,963 204.14 13,564 24,299 48.53
40,400 42,836 774.43 94.85 4,472 40,064 204.51 13,651 24,258 48.53
40,500 42,927 777.37 95.24 4,473 40,165 204.91 13,740 24,419 49.03
40,600 43,049 781.28 95.63 4,523 40,264 206.39 13,858 24,365 49.03
40,700 43,139 784.21 96.03 4,522 40,365 206.75 13,947 24,323 49.03

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-39

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

40,800 43,257 788.12 96.42 4,568 40,464 208.15 14,066 24,474 49.55
40,900 43,346 791.05 96.82 4,563 40,566 208.44 14,155 24,432 49.55
41,000 43,462 794.96 97.23 4,606 40,665 209.78 14,275 24,574 50.05
41,100 43,549 797.89 97.63 4,600 40,766 210.03 14,365 24,530 50.05
41,200 43,637 800.83 98.04 4,597 40,867 210.33 14,456 24,493 50.07
41,300 43,750 804.74 98.46 4,633 40,966 211.55 14,576 24,633 50.57
41,400 43,858 808.65 98.89 4,662 41,067 212.61 14,696 24,572 50.57
41,500 43,965 812.56 99.33 4,693 41,166 213.70 14,817 24,709 51.07
41,600 44,044 815.49 99.77 4,672 41,270 213.65 14,909 24,687 51.13
41,700 44,149 819.40 100.20 4,704 41,365 214.78 15,030 24,631 51.14
41,800 44,251 823.31 100.67 4,722 41,469 215.62 15,152 24,765 51.64
41,900 44,352 827.22 101.13 4,742 41,569 216.50 15,275 24,700 51.64
42,000 44,451 831.13 101.60 4,760 41,670 217.33 15,397 24,831 52.14
42,100 44,549 835.04 102.07 4,774 41,770 218.10 15,520 24,765 52.14
42,200 44,646 838.95 102.55 4,787 41,871 218.84 15,644 24,900 52.66
42,300 44,757 843.84 103.07 4,828 41,971 220.24 15,798 24,814 52.66
42,400 44,845 847.75 103.58 4,828 42,072 220.73 15,922 24,939 53.16
42,500 44,951 852.64 104.13 4,863 42,172 222.01 16,077 24,850 53.16
42,600 45,035 856.55 104.65 4,856 42,274 222.34 16,202 24,979 53.68
42,700 45,135 861.43 105.21 4,882 42,374 223.45 16,358 24,888 53.68
42,800 45,232 866.32 105.80 4,897 42,478 224.33 16,514 24,988 54.18
42,900 45,343 872.19 106.46 4,934 42,584 225.77 16,702 25,067 54.68
43,000 45,433 877.07 107.08 4,935 42,690 226.38 16,860 24,977 54.69
43,100 45,544 883.92 107.84 4,977 42,798 228.02 17,080 25,030 55.19
43,200 45,636 889.78 108.57 4,983 42,906 228.84 17,270 25,100 55.69
43,300 45,737 896.62 109.38 5,005 43,017 230.08 17,491 25,146 56.19
43,400 45,827 903.47 110.22 5,010 43,127 231.00 17,713 25,004 56.21
43,500 45,929 912.27 111.24 5,040 43,240 232.61 17,999 24,998 56.71
43,600 46,025 922.04 112.40 5,062 43,357 234.17 18,318 25,149 57.71
43,700 46,113 933.77 113.80 5,075 43,478 235.78 18,702 25,063 58.22
43,800 46,182 950.39 115.83 5,065 43,611 237.48 19,245 25,042 59.29

E-40 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

43,900 46,181 950.39 116.24 4,889 43,712 234.00 19,246 25,042 59.29
44,000 46,181 950.39 116.65 4,712 43,814 230.47 19,245 25,042 59.29
40,100 42,521 764.66 93.73 4,405 39,764 201.94 13,358 24,181 48.02
40,200 42,650 768.57 94.08 4,466 39,862 203.66 13,476 24,137 48.03
40,300 42,745 771.50 94.46 4,472 39,963 204.14 13,564 24,299 48.53
40,400 42,836 774.43 94.85 4,472 40,064 204.51 13,651 24,258 48.53
40,500 42,927 777.37 95.24 4,473 40,165 204.91 13,740 24,419 49.03
40,600 43,049 781.28 95.63 4,523 40,264 206.39 13,858 24,365 49.03
40,700 43,139 784.21 96.03 4,522 40,365 206.75 13,947 24,323 49.03
40,800 43,257 788.12 96.42 4,568 40,464 208.15 14,066 24,474 49.55
40,900 43,346 791.05 96.82 4,563 40,566 208.44 14,155 24,432 49.55
41,000 43,462 794.96 97.23 4,606 40,665 209.78 14,275 24,574 50.05
41,100 43,549 797.89 97.63 4,600 40,766 210.03 14,365 24,530 50.05
41,200 43,637 800.83 98.04 4,597 40,867 210.33 14,456 24,493 50.07
41,300 43,750 804.74 98.46 4,633 40,966 211.55 14,576 24,633 50.57
41,400 43,858 808.65 98.89 4,662 41,067 212.61 14,696 24,572 50.57
41,500 43,965 812.56 99.33 4,693 41,166 213.70 14,817 24,709 51.07
41,600 44,044 815.49 99.77 4,672 41,270 213.65 14,909 24,687 51.13
41,700 44,149 819.40 100.20 4,704 41,365 214.78 15,030 24,631 51.14
41,800 44,251 823.31 100.67 4,722 41,469 215.62 15,152 24,765 51.64
41,900 44,352 827.22 101.13 4,742 41,569 216.50 15,275 24,700 51.64
42,000 44,451 831.13 101.60 4,760 41,670 217.33 15,397 24,831 52.14
42,100 44,549 835.04 102.07 4,774 41,770 218.10 15,520 24,765 52.14
42,200 44,646 838.95 102.55 4,787 41,871 218.84 15,644 24,900 52.66
42,300 44,757 843.84 103.07 4,828 41,971 220.24 15,798 24,814 52.66
42,400 44,845 847.75 103.58 4,828 42,072 220.73 15,922 24,939 53.16
42,500 44,951 852.64 104.13 4,863 42,172 222.01 16,077 24,850 53.16
42,600 45,035 856.55 104.65 4,856 42,274 222.34 16,202 24,979 53.68
42,700 45,135 861.43 105.21 4,882 42,374 223.45 16,358 24,888 53.68
42,800 45,232 866.32 105.80 4,897 42,478 224.33 16,514 24,988 54.18
42,900 45,343 872.19 106.46 4,934 42,584 225.77 16,702 25,067 54.68

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-41

Appendix E

Aim Warhead Event Apogee

Payload
Dud QE Fuze HOB Apogee
Range to Time to Time
Setting Range (m) Altitude Range (m)
Target (m) Fuze (m) (mil) (m) Impact (sec)
(sec) (m)
(sec)

43,000 45,433 877.07 107.08 4,935 42,690 226.38 16,860 24,977 54.69
43,100 45,544 883.92 107.84 4,977 42,798 228.02 17,080 25,030 55.19
43,200 45,636 889.78 108.57 4,983 42,906 228.84 17,270 25,100 55.69
43,300 45,737 896.62 109.38 5,005 43,017 230.08 17,491 25,146 56.19
43,400 45,827 903.47 110.22 5,010 43,127 231.00 17,713 25,004 56.21
43,500 45,929 912.27 111.24 5,040 43,240 232.61 17,999 24,998 56.71
43,600 46,025 922.04 112.40 5,062 43,357 234.17 18,318 25,149 57.71
43,700 46,113 933.77 113.80 5,075 43,478 235.78 18,702 25,063 58.22
43,800 46,182 950.39 115.83 5,065 43,611 237.48 19,245 25,042 59.29
43,900 46,181 950.39 116.24 4,889 43,712 234.00 19,246 25,042 59.29
44,000 46,181 950.39 116.65 4,712 43,814 230.47 19,245 25,042 59.29
44,100 46,181 950.39 117.07 4,534 43,915 226.86 19,246 25,042 59.29
44,200 46,181 950.39 117.49 4,354 44,016 223.18 19,245 25,042 59.29
44,300 46,182 950.39 117.91 4,173 44,117 219.45 19,245 25,042 59.29
44,400 46,182 950.39 118.34 3,991 44,217 215.66 19,245 25,042 59.29
44,500 46,182 950.39 118.76 3,808 44,317 211.78 19,245 25,042 59.29
44,600 46,182 950.39 119.19 3,624 44,416 207.85 19,245 25,042 59.29
44,700 46,181 950.39 119.63 3,438 44,515 203.85 19,246 25,042 59.29
44,800 46,182 950.39 120.06 3,251 44,615 199.76 19,245 25,042 59.29
44,900 46,182 950.39 120.51 3,062 44,713 195.60 19,245 25,042 59.29
45,000 46,181 950.39 120.95 2,872 44,812 191.36 19,246 25,042 59.29
45,100 46,181 950.39 121.40 2,680 44,911 187.01 19,246 25,042 59.29
45,200 46,182 950.39 121.86 2,486 45,009 182.60 19,245 25,042 59.29
45,300 46,182 950.39 122.31 2,291 45,107 178.08 19,245 25,042 59.29
45,400 46,182 950.39 122.78 2,092 45,206 173.44 19,245 25,042 59.29
45,500 46,181 950.39 123.26 1,892 45,304 168.71 19,245 25,042 59.29
45,600 46,182 950.39 123.74 1,688 45,404 163.84 19,245 25,042 59.29
45,700 46,182 950.39 124.23 1,479 45,504 158.80 19,245 25,042 59.29
45,800 46,181 950.39 124.74 1,265 45,605 153.58 19,245 25,042 59.29
45,900
46,000
Note. Blank cells indicate that a solution is not available for the range indicated.

E-42 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Rocket Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Figure E-4. M26A2 (high quadrant elevation) trajectories

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 E-43

This page intentionally left blank.
 Appendix F
Raid Planning Checklists
Table F-1. Raid planning checklist (battalion)
RAID PLANNING CHECKLIST (BATTALION)
Verify that raid order contains all pertinent data.
If not specified by higher HQ, what size MLRS/HIMARS unit is necessary for successful mission?
Who is the raid force commander (maneuver, FA)?
Who will support the raid force?
• Maneuver force?
• Fire support?
• Air defense?
• Reconnaissance and security?
• Radar?
• Observers?
What are the abort criteria?
What frequencies will be used to mission command the raid (Command, Retransmission)?
Any updates on threat/friendly situation that impact on raid?
What is the route (does it require clearance by a force commander)?
Passage of lines.
• Link-up grid and time?
• Routes?
• Maneuver graphics?
• Engineer plan (mobility/countermobility)?
• Air defense plan and coverage?
• Fire support and observation plan?
• Mission command (raid battle handover line)?
• MEDEVAC support?
• Maintenance support?
What survey support is optimal/adequate for raid force?
Will ammunition need to be brought forward? How much?
What is the reload plan (approved location for reload operations)? Need to conduct reload to
complete the mission?
Will the firing point require clearance by a maneuver force? Will this be in addition to the security
force?
What is the link-up grid for coordinating with the raid force commander? When will the link-up take
place?
What are the name, frequency, and call sign of the raid force commander/security force?
Notify the raid battery commander of the raid mission and time/place of briefing.
Plot firing positions, passage lanes/points/routes to area of operations.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 F-1

Appendix F

RAID PLANNING CHECKLIST (BATTALION)

Determine/verify firing elements, number of launchers and mission command structure.
Develop timetable (SP, TOT).
Brief the battery commander of the raid element battery.
Track planning and rehearsal schedule coordinated by battery and progress of actual raid.
Table F-2. Raid checklist (battery commander)
RAID CHECKLIST (BATTERY COMMANDER)

Who will support the raid force?

• Maneuver force?
• Fire support?
• Air defense?
• Reconnaissance and security?
• Radar?
• Observers?
What are the abort criteria?
What frequencies will be used to mission command the raid (CMD, RTS)?
Any updates on threat/friendly situation that impact on raid?
What is the route (does it require clearance by a force commander)?
Passage of lines.
• Link-up grid and time?
• Routes?
• Maneuver graphics?
• Engineer plan (mobility/countermobility)?
• Air defense plan and coverage?
• Fire support and observation plan?
• Mission command (raid battle handover line)?
• MEDEVAC support?
• Maintenance support?
What survey support is optimal/adequate for raid force?
Pre-position pods for reload (if required).
Coordinate sustainment, sustainment operations, or support for follow-on missions (if required).
Brief raid officer in charge (OIC)/NCO in charge (NCOIC) on the raid mission. (The battalion
checklist should be used for this brief.)
Brief the raid OIC/NCOIC on the higher headquarters’ concept of the operation.
Maintain voice and digital with battalion and raid element (possible re-trans).
Provide any changes to the mission to the OIC/NCOIC.

F-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Raid Planning Checklists

Table F-3. Coordination meeting with force commander checklist (passing force)
COORDINATION MEETING WITH FORCE COMMANDER CHECKLIST
(PASSED FORCE)
Mission
Provide a description of vehicles (if possible use photographs).
• HIMARS launcher.
• FDC HMMWV.
• M998/1038 HMMWV.
• M985 HEMTT (if reload required).
• Maintenance/recovery vehicle.
Number of personnel in raid party.
How long you will remain in this area.
Route from link-up point to firing point.
Recognition Signals
NEAR FAR
DAY

NIGHT
Who will support the raid force.
• Maneuver?
• Security force fire support and observation plan?
• Raid force air defense?
• Reconnaissance and security?
• Radar?
• Observers?
Passage of lines.
• Link-up grid and time?
• Routes?
• Maneuver graphics?
• Engineer plan (mobility/countermobility)?
• Air defense plan and coverage?
• Fire support and observation plan?
• Mission command (raid battle handover line)?
MEDEVAC support?
Maintenance support?

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 F-3

Appendix F

Table F-4. Briefing to raid element checklist (raid leader)

BRIEF TO RAID ELEMENT CHECKLIST (RAID LEADER)
Situation
Friendly forces.
• Who will support the raid force.
• Fire support/observers.
• Raid force air defense.
• Reconnaissance
• Security.
• Radar.
• Threat forces.
Mission
Execution
Target number(s), grid(s), munitions type(s), and quantity (provide hard copy to each chief).
area of operations/FP grids (recon, map recon if time constraint).
Route of march/order of march/movement formation.
Rally point grid(s).
SP, CP, RP times and locations (reported to BOC).
SP CP CP RP
GRID
TIME
Survey plan.
• Take survey to provide SCPs at link-up point.
• Launchers will update/realign prior to occupying area of operations.
• SCPs or global positioning system (GPS) at FP will be used as needed.
Follow-on missions (if required).
Miscellaneous:
• Actions upon threat contact.
• Air guards.
• UBL distribution.
• Radio listening silence.
Service and Support
Reload location(s), grid and route to them (if required).
Maintenance support.
Command and Signal
Link-up grid and procedures.
Frequencies, call signs, abort code word/phrase.
Recognition Signals
NEAR FAR
DAY
NIGHT
Time hack (GPS).
Safety
Risk assessment.

F-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Raid Planning Checklists

BRIEF TO RAID ELEMENT CHECKLIST (RAID LEADER)

Control measures.
Table F-5. Raid checklist (launcher section chief)
RAID CHECKLIST (LAUNCHER SECTION CHIEF)
Receive brief from OIC/NCOIC of raid party.
Fire mission buffer clear except for raid target.
Fire mission hard copy on hand and posted.
Target Number Target Grid/Alt Ammunition Type/Quantity

Link up grid.
Firing point grid.
Rally point grid.
Stabilization reference package aligned, position determining system updated.
Time hack (GPS).
Adequate fuel.
Adequate ammunition (LPCs and small arms).
Adequate food and water.
Communication checks complete.
PMCS (batteries, charging system).
Other Details

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 F-5

This page intentionally left blank.
 Appendix G
MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety
This appendix contains safety procedures applicable to the multiple launch rocket system
(MLRS)/ high mobility artillery rocket system (HIMARS) battalion. Section I begins the
appendix with a discussion of safety procedures for the MLRS/ HIMARS battalion.
Section II describes procedures for computation of MLRS/HIMARS safety data. Section
III concludes the appendix with a discussion of M270A1 MLRS and M142 HIMARS
check data procedures.

SECTION I – MLRS/HIMARS SAFETY PROCEDURES

G-1. The following safety procedures are for MLRS/HIMARS. These procedures comply with Army
Regulation 385-63 and Department of the Army Pamphlet 385-63; however, if local range regulations are more
restrictive than the material in this manual, follow the local range regulations.

Note. Sample MLRS/HIMARS firing safety checklists are provided at the end of this appendix (see
Tables G-4 through G-8).

SECTION II – COMPUTATION OF MLRS/HIMARS SAFETY DATA

GENERAL
Note. Do not use M270A1 safety data for HIMARS. Compute safety data separately for each weapon
system.

G-2. Units using these procedures must be thoroughly familiar with the applicable terms contained in
Department of the Army Pamphlet 385-63. To develop safety data for MLRS/HIMARS, there are three things
that must be done:
 Obtain/develop a (range-specific) range safety card.
 Develop a surface danger zone diagram.
 Develop a Safety T based on munitions and current meteorology.
G-3. The range safety card states the location-coordinates of the launcher firing area and the location-
coordinates of the target(s) to be engaged. In some cases, the range safety card will also contain left and right
azimuth limits and minimum/maximum ranges to impact.
G-4. The surface danger zone diagram is developed and maintained in the fire direction center. It is used to
ensure that targets lie within the target selection box and to define the launcher danger area, noise hazard area,
and exclusion areas between the firing points and the target selection box. The following terms and definitions
along with values in Table G-1 will be used to identify the surface danger zone for MLRS/HIMARS (see Figure
G-8 for graphic depiction):
 Surface Danger Zone. The ground and airspace designated within the training complex (to include
associated safety areas) for vertical and lateral containment of projectiles, fragments, debris, and
components resulting from the firing launching, or detonation of weapon systems to include
explosives and demolitions. The surface danger zone consists of an impact area, a target area or
target point, a safety fan (for firing point to point and operational surface danger zones only), flight
corridors, Exclusion Areas I and II, and Area F.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-1

Appendix G

 Target Box. For the point to point method, the target box is determined by applying the values
found in Table G-1, up range, down range, and laterally from the target location.
 Safety Fan. The safety fan is defined by range and lateral limits within the target area.
 Flight Corridors. The flight corridors are areas parallel to the limits of the safety fan that extend
from the forward corners of Area F to the far edge of the surface danger zone impact area.
 Installation Impact Area. An area that has been established by the installation range control officer.
 Usable Portion of the Installation Impact Area. That portion of the installation impact area that a
unit has been allowed to use must be square or rectangular, perpendicular to the azimuth of fire, and
completely within the installation impact area.
 Surface Danger Zone Impact Area. The rectangular area that will contain all but one in one million
normally functioning rockets and debris. It is perpendicular to and bisected by the azimuth of fire.
The surface danger zone impact area is defined by applying Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax (described in
Table G-2) inward from the usable portion of the impact area.
 Target Area. The point or location within the surface danger zone where targets (static/moving,
point/array) are emplaced for weapon system engagement. For demolitions, it is the point or location
where explosive charges are emplaced.
 Target Selection Box. The target selection box (firing point and operational area surface danger
zone only) is the set of all points from which a unit may select targets that will generate safe data
regardless of where the launcher is within the operational area.
 Area F. The area immediately to the rear of the launcher directly exposed to blast overpressure,
fragments, and debris from rocket launch. Area F consists of two parts, the launcher danger area and
the noise hazard area⎯
 Launcher Danger Area. The area immediately behind the firing point or area that is at risk
from blast and debris and which no one may occupy. It launcher danger area extends 350m or
400m each side of the launcher and 400m to the rear.
 Noise Hazard Area. The area to the rear and flanks of the firing point or operational area in
which a noise hazard exists. The noise hazard area extends an additional 300m past the launcher
danger area and may only be occupied by participating personnel wearing approved hearing
protection.
 Exclusion Area I. Is the danger area directly in front of the firing point or OPAREA. This area
extends 2,500m toward the impact area (1:10,000 probability of injury). Based on risk estimates,
Exclusion Area I may be reduced, by deviation, to not less than 1,000m (1:1000 probability of
injury).
 Exclusion Area II. Is the danger area between the forward limit of Exclusion Area I and the
SDZ impact area. Exclusion Area II may be occupied by deviation only, per the criteria for
overhead fire.
 Safety T. A four-space table that shows the left and right azimuth limits and the minimum and
maximum quadrant elevation for firing the M28A1/A2 (see Figure G-7). The safety data calculator-
generated Safety T can also generate maximum quadrant elevation time of flight and minimum
quadrant elevation time of flight.

G-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

Table G-1. M28A1/A2 (combined) safety

Target box
Range to Target (meters) W X Y
dimensions (m)
8,000 to 9,000 770 2,525 1,905 218
9,001 to 10,000 855 2,155 1,635 240
10,001 to 11,000 945 1,795 1,440 264
11,001 to 12,000 1,045 1,485 1,290 268
12,001 to 13,000 1,155 1,220 1,185 312
13,001 to 14,000 1,290 1,175 1,115 336
14,001 to 15,000 1,475 1,275 1,075 360
Note. Target box dimensions are applied to point-to-point method only.

G-5. The Safety T defines the left and right limits for firing azimuth and the minimum and the maximum limits
for firing quadrant elevation. It is maintained in the fire direction center and in the firing launchers.

Note. See Department of the Army Pamphlet 385-63 for firing the M26 rockets (along with other
restrictions, that is, fin failure impact area, Exclusion Area III [Area C]).

MLRS SURFACE DANGER ZONE VALUES

G-6. The executive officer or platoon leader-range safety officer ensures that MLRS/HIMARS section chiefs
report firing data to the platoon operations center/battery operations center and that both area F and Exclusion
Area I are clear. Table G-2 describes terms and abbreviations used to define MLRS/HIMARS surface danger
zones.
Table G-2. MLRS surface danger zone values
Term Definition
AOF Azimuth of fire.
H Height of the launcher above mean sea level.
Distance W A distance to either side of the target wide enough to include all debris (payload,
warhead skin, and rocket motor) from normally functioning rounds. Distance W is
the maximum lateral distance a projectile will ricochet after impacting within the
dispersion area. Distance W defines the maximum lateral edge of the ricochet
area.
Wmax The maximum possible value of W. For operational areas, this is the value of W at
a range from the rear edge of the operational area to the geographic center of the
usable portion of the installation impact area.
Distance X A distance beyond the target adequate to contain a properly functioning rocket.
Xmax The maximum possible value of X. For operational areas, this is the value of X at
a range from the forward edge of the operational area to the geographic center of
the usable portion of the installation impact area.
Distance Y A distance short of the target sufficient to include all debris (payload, warhead
skin, and rocket motor) from normally functioning rounds.
Ymax The maximum possible value of Y. For operational areas, this is the value of Y at
a range from the forward edge of the operational area to the geographic center of
the usable portion of the installation impact area.
Area F Consists of the launcher danger area and the noise hazard area.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-3

Appendix G

COMPUTING SAFETY DATA

SAFETY COMPUTING METHODS
G-7. There are three methods to compute safety data for MLRS/HIMARS live firing: operational area, point-
to-point, and firing point. All of these methods apply to each of the surface danger zone requirements
previously discussed:

Note. The numerical values for azimuth, range, and quadrant elevation in all of the figures in this
section are provided to assist in understanding the procedures for computing safety. To create the
surface danger zone diagram use Gunnery Training Aid (GTA) 06-05-0001 (multi-purpose protractor
“whiz-wheel”).

 Operational Area Method. This method requires a larger impact area but allows the unit to derive a
single Safety T for an entire launcher operational area firing into a target area. This method allows
the unit to conduct more realistic and tactically driven live-fire exercises, thus significantly
enhancing training. Operational area safety works well when conducting live-fire exercises with the
M28A1/A2 training rocket (reduced range). Small impact areas may preclude using operational area
safety procedures.
 Point-to-Point Method. This method allows the unit to derive a Safety T from a specific firing point
to a specific point target that lies within a target area.
 Firing Point Method. This method allows the unit to derive a Safety T for a single firing point
(firing into a target area).

SAFETY COMPUTING PHASES

G-8. Safety computations for each of these methods are completed in four phases:
 Phase I—apply the surface danger zone requirements to the installation impact area.
 Phase II—derive the firing limits in both azimuth and quadrant elevation.
 Phase III—apply the surface danger zone requirements to the launcher firing point or operational
area.
 Phase IV—completing the flight corridor and Exclusion Areas I and II.

OPERATIONAL AREA METHOD OF COMPUTING SAFETY

G-9. This method requires a larger impact area but allows the unit to derive a single Safety T for an entire
launcher operational area firing into a target area.

Phase I Operational Area Method

G-10. Apply the surface danger zone requirements to the installation impact area (see Figure G-1):

Note. If you have been issued a range safety card from your range control office that takes into
account the MLRS/HIMARS surface danger zone requirements, the officer in charge/firing unit must
complete the surface danger zone diagram for their firing point(s) or firing operational area(s).

 Step 1. Plot and draw the installation impact area on a map or overlay. If the existing installation
impact area to be used for MLRS/HIMARS firing is not a rectangle, the unit must draw a square or
rectangle inside the existing impact area. One side of the rectangle must be perpendicular to the
azimuth of fire from the center of the operational area to the center of the impact area. The
procedures in step 4 are only valid when applied to a rectangular impact area (see Figure G-1).
 Step 2. Index the geographic center of the usable portion of the installation impact area (target) (see
Figure G-1).
 Step 3. Index the center of the proposed firing operational area. Draw a circle around the index. (The
size of the circle maybe allocated by range control.) This radius may be larger or smaller depending

G-4 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

upon the training area and/or impact area available to the unit. All of the operational area firing
points must be located in this operational area circle.

Note. If given an irregular firing operational area by range control, you must construct a circular
firing operational area that remains completely inside the area that you received from range control.
As an example, we will use a large firing operational area with a radius of 1,000 meters for graphical
simplicity.

 Step 4. Draw a line connecting the two indices from steps 2 and 3.

Figure G-1. Example impact area

 Step 5. Using the appropriate munition-specific table (Table G-1), derive and apply the appropriate
values of Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax (see Table G-2) to the edges of the installation impact area
(toward target) (see Figure G-1). For operational areas, the entry value for Wmax is the range from
the rear edge of the operational area to the target. The entry value for Xmax is the range from the
forward edge of the operational area to the target. The entry value for Ymax is the range from the
forward edge of the operational area to the target. The surface danger zone impact area is the area
that contains all normally functioning rockets and debris.

Phase II Operational Area Method

G-11. Determine the left and right azimuth limits of the operational area—
 Step 1. Mark the most forward, rearward, right, and left positions along the circumference of the
operational area circle from Phase I (see Figure G-2).
 Step 2. Draw a safety fan from both the left and right positions (from Step 1), which will keep all
rounds within the surface danger zone impact area. You must also apply any azimuth restrictions
imposed by the range control for the operational area (use the more restrictive of the two sets of
azimuth limits). Measure the left and right limits of each fan (see Figure G-3). These are the initial
left and right azimuth limits for the entire live-fire operational area. (You will determine the final
azimuth limits with the fire control system in Step 8.)

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-5

Appendix G

Figure G-2. Example operational area azimuth limits

 Step 3. Apply the lower (or left-most) value of the left azimuth limits (derived from the leftmost
position) to the right-most position. Apply the higher (or right-most) value of the right azimuth limits
(derived from the right-most position) to the left-most position. Ensure that these azimuths are
marked separately and distinctly from the previous fans. They will be used to complete a “target
selection box” and will be referred to as “crossover azimuths.”

Figure G-3 Example development of target selection box azimuth limits

G-12. Derive the minimum and maximum range limits—

Note. Range control may or may not provide a range safety card with the minimum and maximum
ranges identified. If minimum and maximum range is supplied, you must use these values.

 Step 4. Measure the minimum range from the most rearward position in the operational area to a
point just beyond the intersection of the left and right crossover azimuths. Ensure this point is inside
the surface danger zone impact area. From this point, or if this point is short of the surface danger
zone impact area, move along the azimuth limits until you can draw an arc between the original left
and right azimuth limits and remain wholly within the surface danger zone impact area (see Figure

G-6 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

G-4). In drawing the minimum range arc, you must consider munitions capabilities and any
minimum range restrictions issued by range control.

Note. To use operational area safety, the crossover point of the left and right azimuth limits must
occur just inside or short of the surface danger zone impact area. If the crossover point is too far into
the surface danger zone impact area (or beyond it), the target selection box cannot be constructed
inside the surface danger zone impact area and operational area safety cannot be used.

Figure G-4. Example development of target selection box range limits

 Step 5. Measure the maximum range from the most forward position in the operational area to the
most distant point inside the surface danger zone impact area that will scribe an arc between the left
and right azimuth limits and remains wholly within the surface danger zone impact area (see Figure
G-4).

Note. For the example in Figure G-4, the crossover point was inside the surface danger zone impact
area and the range to the crossover point was 7,100 meters. The minimum and maximum range arcs
for the example were based on the M28A1 minimum and maximum ranges of 8,000 and 15,000
meters. These arcs fall inside the original surface danger zone impact area azimuth limits.
(Remember, radius of example operational area is 1,000 meters.) Measure the minimum range from
the most rearward position—10,000 meters. Measure the maximum range from the most forward
position—13,000 meters.

 Step 6. Apply the minimum range from step 4 to the most forward position in the operational area by
drawing an arc between the left and right azimuth limits at the minimum range (see Figure G-5). To
draw the minimum arc, using GTA 06-05-001, place the pivot point over the rear most point of the
operational area and draw the arc at the appropriate range. To draw the maximum arc place the pivot
point at the forward most point of the operational area and draw the arc at the appropriate range.
 Step 7. Apply the maximum range from step 5 to the most rearward position in the operational area
by drawing an arc between the left and right azimuth limits at the maximum range (see Figure G-5).
This arc completes the drawing of the target selection box. (Range control may impose additional
range limits.)

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-7

Appendix G

Figure G-5. Example development of minimum and maximum quadrant

Note. When using safety data calculator, you are not required to use the check launchers. All other
safety procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter and local range regulations still apply.

 Step 8. Compute the Safety T using two check launchers at a minimum when not using safety data
calculator. Both check launchers must use the current meteorology to conduct four dry-fire missions,
for a total of eight fire missions—from front, rear, left, and right operational area extremes as listed
below (see Figure G-6). The fire direction center will compare the command data between the two
check launchers to ensure they agree within ±5 mils in azimuth and quadrant elevation. (Range
control may impose stricter tolerances.) The fire direction center will use the most restrictive
command data. Regardless of method used, the fire direction center must incorporate the applicable
range regulation tolerances for your specific installation.
G-13. Safety data calculator-generated Safety T data will be verified by one of two methods—
 First Method. In the first method, a safety-certified individual inputs safety data calculator data,
which is verified by a second safety-certified individual. This process is performed twice (the second
time with a different safety-certified safety data calculator operator) and both sets of Safety T data
are compared. The data on these Safety Ts must be exactly the same.
 Second Method. In the second method, a safety-certified individual inputs safety data calculator
data, which is verified by a second safety-certified individual and by a check launcher performing the
required check missions with command data within ±5 mils in azimuth and quadrant elevation.

Note. The fire direction center must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data from the target
area is used at minimum range and that the minimum altitude/elevation from the target impact area is
used at maximum range when computing safety data (min/max rule). However the actual launcher
firing point altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude must be used during the
live fire regardless of method used to properly account for vertical interval.

Note. When using the safety data calculator program, ensure that safety data is input by a safety
certified individual and verified by a second safety certified individual. This process will be
performed twice (the second time with a different safety certified safety data calculator operator) and
both sets of Safety T data compared. The data on these Safety Ts will be exactly the same.

 Fire Mission 1. Forward-most operational area position to the lower left corner of the target
selection box. This yields the minimum quadrant elevation.

G-8 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

 Fire Mission 2. Rearward-most operational area position to the upper left corner of the target
selection box. This yields the maximum quadrant elevation.
 Fire Mission 3. Left-most operational area position to the lower right corner of the target selection
box. This yields the right azimuth limit.
 Fire Mission 4. Right-most operational area position to the lower left corner of the target selection
box. This yields the left azimuth limit.

Note. Check launchers can be used as firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all
databases.

Figure G-6. Safety T computations (fire missions)

Note. The target selection box size has been increased for viewing purposes. For a more accurate
relative size of the target selection box, see Figure G-5 or G-9.

G-14. This completes the Safety T that establishes firing limits for the launcher within the operational area (see
Figure G-7).

Figure G-7. Example Safety T

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-9

Appendix G

Phase III OPAREA Method

G-15. Apply the surface danger zone requirements of Area F, which include the launcher danger area and the
noise hazard area to the launcher operational area.
G-16. This phase applies the launcher danger area and noise hazard area requirements to the operational area.
This is done by applying those requirements around the rear half of the circumference of the operational area
(see Figure G-8). Although these actual danger areas are a function of the specific launcher location, controlling
entry to the areas derived in this phase will allow more freedom of movement for the launcher and will add
realism to the live-fire training exercise.

Step 1
G-17. The launcher danger area is the area immediately to the rear of the launcher, which is directly exposed to
blast and debris. Divide the operational area in half by drawing a line through its center, perpendicular to the
azimuth to the target constructed in Phase I. Extend outward along this line to a point 400 meters on each side
around the rear half of the operational area (see Figure G-8).

Step 2
G-18. The noise hazard area extends an additional 300 meters behind the launcher danger area for the
M28A1/A2. Only mission-essential personnel wearing hearing protection can occupy it. There are two means of
constructing the noise hazard area. The first is the most simple, while the second method minimizes the size of
the noise hazard area, thus allowing less use of the training area.

Construct noise Hazard AreaUusing Method A

G-19. Step 2a. The following instructions apply to our example of a 1,000 meter radius OPAREA. Draw a box
that extends 400 meters plus the radius of your firing OPAREA to the left and right (the 1,000 meter radius +
400 meters) as well as 1,700 meters (the 1,000 meter radius + 400 meters + 300 meters) to the rear of the center
of the firing OPAREA. The result for our example is a box 2,800 meters wide and 1,700 meters deep. Standard
instructions for constructing the NHA using Method A are simply to add 300 meters to the rear depth of the
LDA. Put simply, go left and right 400 meters from the edge of your specific firing OPAREA, add a total of 700
meters to the rear edge of your firing OPAREA, and create a rectangle as shown on the left side of Figure G-9.
Go to Phase IV Operational Area Method I.

Construct noise Hazard AreaUusing Method B

G-20. For method B—
 Step2b. From the center of the operational area, draw an arc (400 meters plus the radius of the
operational area) to the rear of the center of the operational area along the azimuth of fire to intersect
the line developed in Step 1. (See Figure G-8, method B, to establish the launcher danger area.)
 Step 2c. Draw two lines parallel to the azimuth of fire on the left and right sides that extend back
from the perpendicular line drawn in Step 1. (See Figure G-8, method B.)
 Step2d. From the center of the operational area, draw a line along the azimuth of fire to the rear that
is equal to the radius of operational area + 400 meters + 300 meters.
 Step2e. From the end of this line, draw an arc that intersects the two lines in step 2c to enclose the
noise hazard area.

G-10 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

Figure G-8. Firing operational area surface danger zone requirements

Phase IV Operational Area Method

G-21. Complete the flight corridor—
 Step 1. Construct line segments (3a and 3b forward from the launcher danger area to the near edge of
the installation impact area. The line segments should be parallel to the left and right azimuth limits,
respectively, and begin at points 400 meters to the left and right of the operational area. This
describes the general flight corridor (see Figure G-8).
 Step 2. The exclusion area is that area of the surface danger zone flight corridor within a specified
distance of the far edge of the firing area. It is endangered by failure of the rocket motor during the
boost phase.
G-22. Construct Exclusion Area I—
 Step 2a. Construct an arc, from the forward edge of the operational area, with a radius that extends
beyond the operational area by the distance in Table G-3 (based on the level of accepted risk for
Exclusion Area I). The area between the arc and the front of the operational area is Exclusion Area I.
The example in Figure G-9 shows both a 1:10,000 short round probability (2,500 meters) and a
1:1,000 short round probability (1,000 meters).
G-23. Construct Exclusion Area II—
 Step 2b. The area between the arc of Exclusion Area I and the front of the impact area is Exclusion
Area II for the M28A1/A2 training rocket (reduced range). Exclusion Area II can only be occupied
with a waiver from the installation commanding general. Exclusion Area II is the danger area
between the forward limit of Exclusion Area I and the SDZ impact area.
 Exclusion Area II may be occupied by deviation only, per the criteria for overhead fire. Exclusion
Area I cannot be occupied (see Figure G-9).

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-11

Appendix G

 Step 2c. The azimuth and range limits determined in Steps 3, 6, and 7 of Phase II also describe a
small area around the target. This is the target selection box. All targets selected from this box will
fall within the Safety T for the live-fire operational area (see Figure G-7).
Table G-3. Exclusion areas
Short-Round Probability
Exclusion Area I Exclusion Area II
M28A1 and M28A2
1 per 1,000 firings 1,000 meters See Note
1 per 10,000 firings 2,500 meters See Note
NOTE: This distance will vary based on range to target and the size of the impact area. It is the area between Exclusion Area I and
the surface danger zone impact area.

G-24. Figure G-9 depicts example exclusion areas.

Figure G-9. Example exclusion areas M28A1/A2

POINT-TO-POINT METHOD OF COMPUTING SAFETY

G-25. Point-to-point method allows the unit to derive a Safety T from a specific firing point to a specific point
target that lies within a target area.

Phase I Point-to-Point Method

G-26. Apply the surface danger zone requirements to the installation impact area (see Figure G-10)—

Note. If you have been issued a range safety card from your range control office that takes into
account the MLRS/HIMARS surface danger zone requirements, proceed to Step 1 of Phase II. The
target box given by range control for computational procedures is a very small box in which the
exact target grid is. The target box may also be determined by applying the values found in Table G-
1 up range, down range, and laterally from the target location. Range control may also give azimuth
and range limits from the firing point. If you are not required by range control to use the point-to-
point method, use the firing point method to increase your target selection opportunities.

 Step 1. Plot and draw the installation impact area on a map or overlay. If the existing installation
impact area to be used for MLRS/HIMARS firing is not a rectangle, the unit must draw a rectangle
inside the existing impact area. One side of the rectangle must be perpendicular to the azimuth of fire
from the center of the operational area to the center of the impact area. The procedures in step 4 are

G-12 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

only valid when applied to a rectangular impact area (see Figure G-10). Index the geographic center
of the usable portion of the installation impact area (target) (see Figure G-10).
 Step 2. Index the firing point (see Figure G-10).
 Step 3. Draw a line connecting the two indices from Steps 1 and 2 (see Figure G-10).
 Step 4. Using the appropriate munitions-specific table (Table G-1), derive and apply the appropriate
values of Wmax, Xmax, Ymax, and target box dimensions (see Table G-1 and G-2) to the edges of
the usable portion of the installation impact area (toward target). The entry values for Wmax, Xmax,
and Ymax are the ranges from the specified firing point on the range safety card to the specific point
target listed on the range safety card. The surface danger zone impact area is the area that contains all
normally functioning rockets and debris (see Figure G-10).

Figure G-10. Example of an impact area

Phase II Point-to-Point Method

G-27. Determine the initial left and right azimuth limits—
 Step 1. Draw lines from the firing point to the right and left inner edges (far corners) of the surface
danger zone impact area, which will keep all rounds within the surface danger zone impact area. The
azimuths for these lines will be stated on the range safety card. This will be your initial left and right
limit. These limits will be further refined in Step 2 (see Figure G-11).

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-13

Appendix G

Figure G-11. Example of the development of target selection box range limits
G-28. Derive the minimum and maximum values for quadrant elevation—
 Step 2. Determine the minimum range at which a vertical line can be scribed between the left and
right azimuth limits that lies completely within the surface danger zone impact area (see Figure G-
11) developed in Phase I or given by range control. This line shows the minimum range limit of the
target box. You must also observe any additional range restrictions imposed by the range safety
office (or munitions limitations).
 Step 3. Determine the maximum range at which a vertical line can be scribed between the left and
right azimuth limits that lies completely within the surface danger zone impact area (see Figure G-
11). This line shows the maximum range limit of the target box. You must also observe any
additional range restrictions imposed by the range safety office (or munitions limitations).

Note. When using the safety data calculator you are not required to use check launchers. All other
safety procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter and local range regulations still apply.

G-29. Determine safe firing data and compute the Safety T—

 Step 4. Using the current meteorology message, compute the Safety T using two check launchers at a
minimum. Check launchers will conduct two dry-fire missions each and determine firing data from
the specified firing point to the lower left-hand corner and upper right-hand corner of the target box
as presented along the gun target line (see Figure G-12). The fire direction center will compare the
command data between the two check launchers to ensure that they agree within ±5 mils in azimuth
and quadrant elevation. Range control may impose stricter tolerances. Safety data calculator-
generated Safety T data will be verified by one of two methods:
 First Method. In the first method, a safety-certified individual inputs safety data calculator data,
which is verified by a second safety-certified individual. This process is performed twice (the
second time with a different safety-certified safety data calculator operator) and both sets of
Safety T data compared. The data on these Safety Ts must be exactly the same.
 Second Method. In the second method, a safety-certified individual inputs safety data calculator
data, which is verified by a second safety-certified individual and by a check launcher
performing the required check missions and command data being within ±5 mils in azimuth and
quadrant elevation.

G-14 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

Figure G-12. Example of computing safety data

G-30. The fire direction center must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data from the target area is
used at minimum range and that the minimum altitude/elevation from the target impact area is used at
maximum range when computing safety data (mini/max rule). However, the actual launcher/firing point
altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude MUST be used during the live fire regardless of
method used to properly account for vertical interval.

Note. When sing the safety data calculator program, ensure that two different safety-certified
personnel verify safety data input. This process will be performed twice (the second time with a
different safety certified safety data calculator operator) and both sets of Safety T data compared.
The data on these Safety Ts must be identical. The check launchers can be used as the firing
launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all databases.

 Fire mission 1. From the specified firing point (location will be given on the range safety card) to
the lower left-hand corner of the target box. This yields the left azimuth limit and minimum quadrant
elevation.
 Fire mission 2. From the specified firing point (location will be given on the range safety card) to
the upper right-hand corner of the target box. This yields the right azimuth limit and the maximum
quadrant elevation.
G-31. The check launchers with current meteorology will report their actual (if laid on target) and command
check data to the fire direction center. The fire direction center will compare the command data between the two
check launchers to ensure that they agree within ±5 mils in azimuth and quadrant elevation. (Range control may
impose stricter tolerances.) The fire direction center will use the more restrictive command data. Regardless of
method used, the fire direction center must incorporate the applicable range regulation tolerances for your
specific installation.
G-32. Safety data calculator-generated Safety T data will be verified by one of two methods—
 First Method. In the first method, a safety-certified individual inputs safety data calculator data,
which is verified by a second safety-certified individual. This process will be performed twice (the
second time with a different safety-certified safety data calculator operator) and both sets of Safety T
data compared. The data on these Safety Ts must be exactly the same.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-15

Appendix G

 Second Method. In the second method, a safety-certified individual inputs safety data calculator
data, which is verified by a second safety-certified individual and by a check launcher performing the
required check missions and command data being within ±5 mils in azimuth and quadrant elevation.
G-33. This completes the Safety T for the point-to-point method. See Figure G-13 for an example.

Note. If the local range safety regulation lists a variance/tolerance between check systems, the range-
specific tolerances will be used. The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after
completing the Safety T and purging all databases.

G-34. Figure G-13 depicts an example of Safety T.

Figure G-13. Example of a Safety T

Phase III Point-to-Point Method

G-35. Apply the surface danger zone requirements to the launcher firing point—
 Step 1. The launcher danger area is the area immediately to the rear of the launcher that is directly
exposed to blast and debris. It extends 350 meters to the left and right of the launcher firing point
(perpendicular to the azimuth of fire) and 400 meters to the rear of the firing point (parallel to the
azimuth of fire). Personnel are prohibited from occupying this area (see Figure G-14).
 Step 2. The noise hazard area extends behind the launcher danger area. Only mission-essential
personnel wearing hearing protection can occupy this area. Draw a box that extends beyond the
launcher danger area an additional 300 meters, for M28A1 or M28A2 training rockets, to the rear of
the firing point (see Figure G-14).

G-16 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

Figure G-14. Example of the launcher danger area and noise hazard area

Phase IV Point-to-Point Method

G-36. Complete the flight corridor—
 Step 1. Draw lines from the left and right forward edge of Area F to the left and right rear edge of the
installation impact area, respectively, that are parallel to the left and right azimuth limits (see Figure
G-14).
 Step 2. Exclusion Areas I and II are the areas of the surface danger zone flight corridor within a
specified distance of the downrange edge of the firing area. It is endangered by failure of the rocket
motor during the boost phase (see Figure G-15).
G-37. Construct exclusion area I—
 Step 2a. Construct an arc, centered on the firing point, with a radius derived from Table H-1 (based
on the level of accepted risk for Exclusion Area I). The area between the arc and the firing point is
Exclusion Area I (see Figure G-15).

Note. A 1:1,000 or 1:10,000 short round probability is used when calculating risk.

G-38. Construct Exclusion Area II—

 Step 2b. The Exclusion Area II is the danger area between the forward limit of Exclusion Area I and
the SDZ impact area. Exclusion Area II may be occupied by deviation only, per the criteria for
overhead fire (see Figure G-15).

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-17

Appendix G

Figure G-15. Example exclusion areas M28A1/A2

Note. Exclusion Area II can only be occupied with a waiver from the installation commanding
general. Exclusion Area I cannot be occupied.

FIRING POINT METHOD OF COMPUTING SAFETY

G-39. The firing point method allows the unit to derive a Safety T for a single firing point (firing into a target
area).

Phase I Firing Point Method

G-40. Apply the surface danger zone requirements to the installation impact area—

Note. The difference between the firing point method of computing safety and the point-to-point
method of computing safety is that, with the firing point method, a larger target selection box allows
the launcher to fire at different targets, whereas the point-to-point method allows firing at one target
within a much smaller target box. If you have been issued a range safety card from your range
control office that is based the MLRS/HIMARS surface danger zone requirements, proceed to Step 1
of Phase II.

 Step 1. Plot and draw the installation impact area on a map or overlay. If the existing installation
impact area to be used for MLRS/HIMARS firing is not a rectangle, the unit must draw a square or
rectangle inside the existing impact area. One side of the rectangle must be perpendicular to the
azimuth of fire from the firing point to the geographic center of the usable portion of the impact area.
The procedures in step 4 are only valid when applied to a square or rectangular impact area. Index
the geographic center of the usable portion of the installation impact area (target) (see Figure G-16).
 Step 2. Index the firing point (see Figure G-16).

G-18 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

Figure G-16. Example of an impact area

 Step 3. Draw a line connecting the two indices from the geographic center of the usable portion of
the installation impact area and 2 (see Figure G-16).
 Step 4. Using the appropriate munitions-specific table (Table G-1), derive and apply the appropriate
values of Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax (see Table G-2) to the edges of the usable portion of the
installation impact area (toward target). The entry value for Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax is the range
from the firing point to the target. This is the surface danger zone impact area (see Figure G-16).

Phase II Firing Point Method

G-41. Determine the initial left and right azimuth limits—
 Step 1. Draw lines from the firing point to the right and left edges of the surface danger zone impact
area, which will keep all rounds within the surface danger zone impact area. Draw the left line from
the firing point to the upper left-hand corner of the surface danger zone impact area. Repeat this
process by drawing a line from the firing point to the upper right-hand corner of the surface danger
zone impact area. This will be your initial left and right limit. These limits will be further refined in
Step 2. You must also apply any azimuth restrictions imposed by range control for the firing area
(see Figure G-17).
G-42. Derive the minimum and maximum values for quadrant elevation.

Note. Range control may or may not provide a range safety card with the minimum and maximum
ranges identified. If minimum and maximum range is supplied, you must use those values.

 Step 2. Determine the minimum range at which an arc can be scribed between the left and right
azimuth limits and lie completely within the surface danger zone impact area. Draw a line on the arc
between the left and right azimuth limits (see Figure G-17). This line shows the minimum range limit
of the target selection box/target area. The target selection box and target area are the same area
when using the firing point method of safety computation. Observe any additional range restrictions
imposed by the range safety office. (Installation range safety office limitations of 8,000 and 9,400
meters were applied in Figure G-17.)
 Step 3. Determine the maximum range at which an arc can be scribed between the left and right
azimuth limits and lie completely within the surface danger zone impact area. Draw a line on the arc
between the left and right azimuth limits (see Figure G-17). This line shows the maximum range
limit of the target selection box/target area. The target selection box and target area are the same area
when using the firing point method of safety computation. You must also observe any additional
munitions-specific limitations or range restrictions imposed by the range safety office.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-19

Appendix G

Figure G-17. Example of azimuth limits

G-43. Determine the safe firing data and compute the Safety T—

Note. When using the safety data calculator, you are not required to use the check launchers. All
other safety procedures and requirements outlined in this appendix and local range regulation still
apply. If using check launchers to determine safe firing data and the safety T, then the check
launchers can be used as the firing launchers after purging all databases.

Figure G-18. Example of fire missions for Safety T

 Step 4. Using the current meteorology message, compute the Safety T using two check launchers at a
minimum. Check launchers will conduct two dry-fire missions each and determine firing data from
the specified firing point to the lower left-hand corner and upper right-hand corner of the target
selection box. The target selection box and target area are the same area when using the firing point
method of safety computation (see Figure G-18).
 Fire mission 1. From the specified firing point to the lower left-hand corner of the target
selection box/target area, apply the maximum altitude at minimum range. This yields the left azimuth
limit and minimum quadrant elevation.
 Fire mission 2. From the specified firing point to the upper right-hand corner of the target
selection box/target area, apply the minimum altitude to the maximum range. This yields the right
azimuth limit and the maximum quadrant elevation.

G-20 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

G-44. The check launchers with current meteorology will report their actual and command check data to the fire
direction center. The fire direction center will compare the command data between the two check launchers to
ensure that they agree within ±5 mils in azimuth and quadrant elevation. (Range control may impose stricter
tolerances.) The fire direction center will use the more restrictive command data. Regardless of method used,
the fire direction center must incorporate the applicable range regulation tolerances for your specific
installation.
G-45. Safety data calculator-generated Safety T data will be verified by one of two methods—
 First Method. In the first method, a safety-certified individual inputs safety data calculator data,
which is verified by a second safety-certified individual. This process is performed twice (the second
time with a different safety-certified safety data calculator operator) and both sets of Safety T data
compared. The data on these Safety Ts must be exactly the same.
 Second Method. In the second method, a safety-certified individual inputs safety data calculator
data, which is verified by a second safety-certified individual and by a check launcher performing the
required check missions and command data within ±5 mils in azimuth and quadrant elevation and 0.5
seconds fuze time.
G-46. The FDC must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data is used at minimum range and that the
minimum altitude/elevation is used at maximum range when computing safety data (mini/max rule). However,
the actual launcher/firing point altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude MUST be used
during the live fire regardless of method used to properly account for vertical interval.
G-47. This completes the Safety T for the firing point method (see Figure G-19).

Figure G-19. Example of a Safety T

Phase III Firing Point Method

G-48. Complete the launcher danger areas—
 Step 1. The launcher danger area is the area immediately to the rear of the launcher that is directly
exposed to blast and debris. It extends 350 meters to the left and right of the launcher firing point
(perpendicular to the azimuth of fire) and 400 meters to the rear of the firing point (parallel to the
azimuth of fire). Personnel are prohibited from occupying this area (see Figure G-20).
 Step 2. The noise hazard area extends behind the launcher danger area. Only mission-essential
personnel wearing hearing protection can occupy this area. Draw a box that extends beyond the
launcher danger area an additional 300 meters for M28A1/A2 to the rear of the firing point (see
Figure G-20).

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-21

Appendix G

 Step 3. The exclusion area is that area of the surface danger zone flight corridor within a specified
distance of the downrange edge of the firing area. It is endangered by failure of the rocket motor
during the boost phase (see Figure G-20).

Figure G-20. Example launcher danger area, noise hazard area, and Exclusion Areas I and II

Phase IV Firing Point Method

G-49. Complete the flight corridor—
 Step 1. Draw lines from the left and right forward edge of Area F to the left and right rear edge of the
useable portion of the installation impact area, respectively, that are parallel to the left and right
azimuth limits (see Figure G-20)
 Step 2. Exclusion Areas I and II are the areas of the surface danger zone flight corridor within a
specified distance of the downrange edge of the firing area. They are endangered by failure of the
rocket motor during the boost phase (see Figure G-20).
G-50. Construct Exclusion Area I—
 Step 2a. Construct an arc, centered on the firing point, with a radius derived from Table G-3 (based
on the level of accepted risk for exclusion area I). The area between the arc and the firing point is
Exclusion Area I (see Figure G-20).

Note. Department of the Army Pamphlet 385-63 contains formulas that may be used to determine
risk during MLRS/HIMARS reduced range practice rocket overhead fire.

G-51. Construct Exclusion Area II—

 Step 2b. The Exclusion Area II is the danger area between the forward limit of Exclusion Area I and
the SDZ impact area.
 Exclusion Area II may be occupied by deviation only, per the criteria for overhead fire.

Note. Exclusion Area II can only be occupied with a waiver from the installation commanding
general. Exclusion Area I cannot be occupied.

G-22 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

SECTION III – CHECK DATA FOR M270A1/MLRS M142 HIMARS

Note. When using safety data calculator, you are not required to use check launchers. All other safety
procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter and local range regulations still apply.

G-52. Check data is the process of developing and verifying firing data by using a minimum of two check
launchers to determine the most accurate data possible to ensure safe live-fire exercises. This section contains
procedures for the safe operation of the M270A1 MLRS and M142 HIMARS. See example live-fire safety
checklists and check data checklists, beginning with Table G-4.
G-53. There are three methods used to develop a Safety T (operational area, point to point, and firing point).
Each of these methods requires two check launchers at a minimum to develop a Safety T. The check launchers
will determine firing data for the required number of fire missions based on the method selected. Check
launchers will report their actual and command data to the fire direction center. The fire direction center will
apply the applicable range regulation tolerances specific to your installation and use the more restrictive
command data.
G-54. The fire direction center must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data is used at minimum range
and that the minimum altitude/elevation is used at maximum range when computing safety data (mini/max
rule). However, the actual launcher/firing point altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude
MUST be used during the live fire regardless of method used to properly account for vertical interval.

Note. The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after completing the Safety T and
purging all databases.

M270A1 MLRS AND M142 HIMARS

G-55. The following material covers M270A1 MLRS and M142 HIMARS-unique operational functions relating
to check data. The introduction of the global positioning system as a source of navigation presents new
operational factors that must be addressed. The following procedures incorporate the new operational factors
and MUST be followed when using the M270A1 MLRS and M142 HIMARS launcher for check data—
 The database must be purged of any previous fire mission or meteorology data.
 The section chief will verify fire control system resolver readouts and ensure that they are within the
correct tolerances (at stow).

Note. All azimuth and elevation resolver data will be in accordance with the system technical
manual. All launchers must be parked within ±100 mils of the fire control system command parking
heading and less than 89 mils slope (M270A1 can fire up to a 266 mils slope). Check launchers and
firing launchers will use the same current meteorology.

 Check data can be computed from the firing point or an alternate location with the M270A1 and
M142.
 Valid weekly global positioning system keys will be used and the chief will verify that the launcher
is operating in the global positioning system-aided mode (keys loaded and verified using survey
control point or defense advanced global positioning system receiver data) with communications
security in precision lightweight global positioning system receiver Figure of Merit 1.
 If it is not possible to operate in the global positioning system-aided mode prior to moving to the
firing point to develop firing data, the launcher must perform a system parameter update usig a
defense advanced global positioning system receiver or a verified survey control point and ensure
that the launcher performed a zero-velocity-update.

Note. The M270A1 and M142 HIMARS launchers will not accept a position update while in the
global positioning system-aided mode.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-23

Appendix G

 A digital or manual fire mission requires the chief and gunner to verify that the launcher’s ballistic
solution is computed by either occupying the firing point or by using the assigned firing point
location.
 A manual fire mission requires the chief or gunner to read back all data to the fire direction center. If
check launchers are not using the ballistic solution function, they must occupy the mission firing
point and lay their launcher module on target and report the actual and command data to the fire
direction center. This ensures that the fire control system performs a complete computation of the fire
mission (displaying command and actual data) using all external factors, thereby providing the most
accurate data possible.

WARNING
Standard MET WILL NOT be used to develop check data.

Note. Check launchers WILL use the command data (not actual data) in developing Safety T data.
The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all
databases.

G-56. Table G-4 provides an example of a launcher live-fire safety checklist.

Table G-4. Example of a launcher live-fire safety checklist
EXAMPLE OF A
LAUNCHER LIVE-FIRE SAFETY CHECKLIST
BEFORE FIRING
1. Launcher crews receive a prefire safety briefing from the fire direction center/officer in charge.
2 Fire direction center/officer in charge reviews the Safety T with the launcher chiefs.
3. Section chief conducts a prefire safety briefing with his crew and reviews the Safety T.
4. Section chief verifies that the correct option is selected for Hang Fire “STOP,” Misfire “STOP,”
Use LP/C 2 on Rocket Malfunction, “NO.” Section chief reviews hang fire and misfire
procedures according to standard operating procedure.
5. Chief verifies resolvers (at stow).
Note. M270A1 azimuth resolver ±1.8, elevation resolver ±2.0; M142 HIMARS azimuth resolver ±7.0 mils, elevation
resolver ±3.2 mils.
6. Chief will verify that no immediate mask is present at the firing point. If mask is present, it will
be measured and reported to the fire direction center for input
Note. Launchers will select high quadrant elevation during startup procedures, if required.
LAUNCHER CHECKLIST
7. Chief inspects ammunition (dents, cracks, gouges, shorting plug) before performing loading
and records lot/serial number.
8. Launcher chief ensures that the gunner purges all previous meteorology and fire missions
from the fire control system database.
9. If the global positioning system is not available for the M270A1 MLRS and the M142
HIMARS, the launcher must perform a system parameter update.
Note. If firing from a global positioning system-aided launcher, survey control point updates are not required.
10. Chief sends a “LCHR STATUS” to the fire direction center.
11. Launcher receives current meteorology from the fire direction center.
12. If manual meteorology is used, section chief will verify meteorology by reading back all lines
of the meteorology to the fire direction center.

G-24 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

Note. Recommend that a few lines of meteorology be read back to the fire direction center
even if it was sent digitally. The range safety officer will verify all startup data to include
verification of current meteorology in use
13. Gunner transmits digital “WILL COMPLY” to the fire direction center.
14. Chief verifies that gunner performs rocket select (if required) before launcher receiving the fire
mission from the fire direction center.
15. Chief and gunner review and record the fire mission on DA Form 7233 (MLRS Launcher Fire
Mission Log).
16. Launcher moves to the firing point.
17. Launcher is parked on firing point (distance from firing point marker based on range control
limits) or within the operational area.
18. Launcher is parked within ±100 mils (or within range control limits if less) of the parking
heading.
19. Gunner lays the launcher module.
20. Chief visually verifies that the launcher module is oriented downrange (towards the azimuth of
fire).
21. Chief ensures that the TC hatch and doors are closed, vent fan switch is set to MED, firing
damper is set to the firing position for the M270A1, or the chemical air filtration unit (CAFU)
switch is turned on for the HIMARS, and cab pressure gauge reads a minimum of 0.25 inches
of water.
22. Chief and gunner verify that the actual data falls within the Safety T.
23. Chief directs gunner to arm and fire. Chief reports “SHOT” to the controlling fire direction
center.
Note. During multiple firings, chief and gunner must ensure that the firing data stays within the Safety T. If the firing
data blanks out during firing, a check fire must be initiated (safe rockets) and the fire direction center notified.
AFTER FIRING
24. Chief reports “ROUNDS COMPLETE” to the fire direction center.
25. Chief verifies that no tube or grass fires exist.
Note. The launcher module is not to be stowed until the officer in charge declares all rounds are safe.
26. Fire direction center transmits that all rounds were observed safe and instructs the launcher
to stow the launcher module.
27. Launcher stows and moves off the firing point.
G-57. Table G-5 provides an example of an officer in charge/fire direction center live-fire safety checklist.
Table G-5. Example of an officer in charge/fire direction center live-fire safety checklist
EXAMPLE OF AN
OIC/FDC LIVE-FIRE SAFETY CHECKLIST
BEFORE FIRING
1. Ensure that the target is entered into the fire control system and verified by map spot.
2. Note. When using the safety data calculator, you are not required to use check launchers. The safety data calculator
alleviates the need for check launchers; all other safety procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter and
local range regulations still apply.
3. Ensure that the surface danger zone computation and safety diagram are posted and verified
by the officer in charge.
4. Ensure meteorology validity.
Note. Up to 4-hour-old meteorology message may be used except during day/night transitions or frontal passages.
5. Ensure that at least two launchers have dry-fired each check mission one time each and that
their firing solutions meet range-specific check tolerances. If the safety data calculator is used
to develop the Safety T, ensure that two safety-certified individuals verify all data input.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-25

Appendix G

6. Ensure that launcher chief has verified that no immediate mask is present at the firing point. If
mask is present, it will be measured and reported to the fire direction center for input.
7. Fire direction center conducts downrange mask checks and inputs data if required.
8. Fire direction center computes the data for each Safety T. On the Safety T, he will annotate
the firing point/operational area they apply to, the time the meteorology data was flown and
the date it was prepared, and the munitions in use. The safety data calculator automatically
annotates this data on the Safety T.
9. The fire direction center and the officer in charge/noncommissioned officer in charge verify
the Safety T data.
10. Officer in charge conducts a prefire safety briefing with the launcher chiefs.
11. Road guards are briefed and posted (if applicable).
12. Observers have received necessary training, are briefed, have the required items, and are
posted.
13. Fire direction center verifies that the range is clear, radar is set (if applicable), and observers
are oriented to observe the rockets.
14. Communication is established and maintained between the officer in charge, fire direction
center, firing launcher, observers, radar (if applicable), and road guards (if applicable). If at
any time communication is lost between any of these elements, all firing will be halted.
15. Fire direction center contacts range control for a wet check-in code.
16. Fire direction center receives a launcher status.
17. Fire direction center transmits meteorology to launcher. If meteorology is manually entered,
all lines of meteorology will be read back to fire direction center and verified.
Note. Recommend that a few lines of meteorology be read back to the fire direction center even if it was sent
digitally.
Note. The same meteorology that was used to compute the Safety T must be sent to launcher for the live-fire
mission.
18. Officer in charge/fire direction center ensures that radar is set (if applicable), observers are
ready, that Exclusion Area I is clear of personnel, and the roads are blocked (if applicable).
19. Fire direction center transmits fire mission.
20. Launcher moves to the firing point, parks on the heading, and lays the launcher module.
21. Fire direction center and officer in charge (fire direction center) ensure receipt of
“ADVANCED READY,” and verify the data is safe.
Note. The officer in charge will ensure that a DA Form 7232 is maintained in the fire direction center.
DURING FIRING
22. Fire direction center sends the fire command.
23. Ensure that the chief reports “SHOT” to the controlling fire direction center.
24. Road guards remain in place (if applicable).
25. Communication is maintained.
26. All rockets launched safe; ensure that the chief reports “ROUNDS COMPLETE” to the fire
direction center.
Note. The launcher module is not to be stowed until all rounds are declared safe by the officer in charge.
AFTER FIRING
27. Ensure that the fire direction center receives the mission-fired report.
28. Observers and/or radar (if applicable) report rounds observed safe.
29. Fire direction center transmits that all rounds were observed safe, then instructs the launcher
to stow the launcher module.
30. Launcher stows and moves off the firing point.
31. Fire direction center/fire direction noncommissioned officer prints out all data for the fire
mission.

G-26 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

G-58. Table G-6 provides an example of a launcher data checklist.

Table G-6. Example of a launcher check data checklist
EXAMPLE OF A
LAUNCHER CHECK DATA CHECKLIST
BEFORE COMPUTING CHECK DATA
1. Launcher crews receive a check data briefing from the fire direction center/officer in
charge.
2. Chief conducts a check data briefing with his crew.
3. Section chief verifies that the correct option is selected for Hang Fire “STOP,” Misfire
“STOP,” Use LP/C 2 on Rocket Malfunction, “NO.” Section chief reviews hang fire and
misfire procedures per standard operating procedures.
4. Chief verifies resolvers (at stow).
Note. M270A1 azimuth resolver ±1.8, elevation resolver ±2.0; M142 HIMARS azimuth resolver ±7.0 mils,
elevation resolver ±3.2 mils.
5. If mask is present at the firing point, it will be measured and reported to the fire direction
center for input.
Note. Launchers will select high quadrant elevation during startup procedures, if required.

LAUNCHER CHECKLIST
6. Chief ensures that the gunner purges previous meteorology, fire missions, and firing
points from the fire control system database.
7. Chief sends a “LCHR STATUS” to the fire direction center.
8. Launcher receives current meteorology from the fire direction center.
9. If manual meteorology is used, section chief will verify meteorology by reading all lines of
meteorology back to the fire direction center.
Note. Recommend that a few lines of meteorology be read back to the fire direction center even if it was sent
digitally.
Note. The range safety officer will verify all startup data to include verification of current meteorology in use.
10. Launcher receives fire mission.
11. Gunner transmits digital “WILL COMPLY” to the fire direction center.
12. Chief and gunner review and record the fire mission in the DA Form 7233 (MLRS
Launcher Fire Mission Log).
13. Launcher moves to the firing point.
14. Launcher is parked on firing point (distance from firing point marker based on range
control limits) or within the operational area.
15. All launchers are parked within ±100 mils (or within range control limits if less) of the
parking heading.
16. Gunner lays the launcher module.
17. Chief visually verifies that the launcher module is oriented downrange toward the azimuth
of fire.
Note. The section chief will ensure that azimuth, quadrant elevation, and fuze time and other pertinent data are
recorded on the DA From 7233 (MLRS Launcher Fire Mission Log) before rocket launch.
18. Chief reads command data to the fire direction center.
G-59. Table G-7 provides an example of a check data checklist using launchers (officer in charge/fire direction
center check data checklist).

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-27

Appendix G

Table G-7. Example of a check data checklist using launchers (officer in charge/fire direction
center check data checklist)
EXAMPLE OF A
CHECK DATA CHECKLIST USING LAUNCHERS
(OIC/FDC CHECK DATA CHECKLIST)
SAFETY T DEVELOPMENT
1. Ensure that the target is entered into the fire control system and verified by map spot.
2. Ensure that the launcher grids for startup are correct for the firing point if the launcher is
not global positioning system-aided and operating in inertial mode.
3. Ensure meteorology validity.
Note. Up to 4-hour-old meteorology message may be used except during day/night transitions or frontal
passages. See FM 3-09.15 for more information on meteorology checking procedures
4. Ensure that at least two launchers have dry-fired each check mission one time each and
that their firing solutions meet range-specific check tolerances.
5. Ensure that the launcher chief has verified that no immediate mask is present at the firing
point. If a mask is present, it will be measured and reported to the fire direction center for
input.
6. Fire direction center conducts downrange mask checks and inputs data if required.
7. Fire direction center contacts range control for a wet check-in code.
8. Fire direction center receives a launcher status.
9. Fire direction center transmits meteorology to launcher. If meteorology is manually
entered, all lines of meteorology will be read back to the fire direction center and verified.
Note. Recommend that a few lines of meteorology be read back to the fire direction center even if it was sent
digitally.
Note. The same meteorology that was used to compute the Safety T must be sent to launcher for the live-fire
mission.
10. Fire direction center transmits fire mission.
11. Ensure that launcher moves to the firing point, parks on the heading, and lays the
launcher module.
12. Chief reads back command data to the fire direction center.
13. Fire direction center computes the data for each Safety T. The Safety T will include the
firing point/operational area they apply to, the time the meteorology data was flown and
the date it was prepared, and the munitions in use.
14. Safety T data is verified by the fire direction center and the officer in
charge/noncommissioned officer in charge.
15. Check data launchers are ordered to purge their databases and ensure that no previous
fire missions, firing points, or meteorology exists in the fire control system. This is required
only if the launcher will be a live-fire launcher.
G-60. Table G-8 provides an example of a safety data calculator check data checklist (officer in charge/fire
direction center) check data checklist.

G-28 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 MLRS/HIMARS Battalion Safety

Table G-8. Example of a safety data calculator check data checklist (officer in charge/fire direction
center) check data checklist
EXAMPLE OF AN
SDC CHECK DATA CHECKLIST
(OIC/FDC CHECK DATA CHECKLIST)
SAFETY T DEVELOPMENT
1. Ensure that the target is entered into the fire control system and verified by map spot.
3 Ensure that the launcher grids for startup are correct for the firing point if the launcher is
not global positioning system-aided and operating in inertial mode.
3. Ensure meteorology validity.
Note. Up to 4-hour-old meteorology message may be used except during day/night transitions or frontal
passages. See FM 3-09.15 for more information on meteorology checking procedures.
4. Develop and plot the surface danger zone requirements on a map or overlay. Identify the
geographical location of the target box, or target selection boxes, whichever is applicable.
Range control may or may not provide these locations.
5. Ensure that at least two safety-certified individuals verify all data input into the safety data
calculator. Fire direction center computes the data for each Safety T. The Safety T will
include the firing point/operational area they apply to, the time the meteorology data was
received and the date it was prepared, and the munitions in use.
6. Safety T data is verified by the fire direction center and the officer in
charge/noncommissioned officer in charge.
7. Fire direction center contacts range control for a wet check-in code.
Note. The firing launcher must use the same valid meteorology that was used in computing the Safety T. Safety
Ts will be updated upon receipt of new meteorology.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 G-29

This page intentionally left blank.
 Glossary
SECTION I – ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1SG first sergeant
ADRP Army doctrine reference publication
AFATDS advanced field artillery tactical data system
AFOM Army tactical missile system family of munitions
ALOC administrative and logistics operations center
ATACMS Army Tactical Missile System
ATP Army Techniques Publication
BAO battalion ammunition officer
BN battalion
BOC battery operations center
CBRN chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear
COMSEC communications security
CP command post; control point
DA Department of the Army
DAGR Defense advanced global positioning system receiver
DPICM dual-purpose improved conventional munitions
DT distance traveled
EGR embedded GPS receiver
ER extended range
FBCB2 Force XXI battle command—brigade and below
FCS fire control system
FDC fire direction center
FLOT forward line of own troops
FM field manual
FP firing point
FSC forward support company
FSCM fire support coordination measure
G-3 assistant chief of staff, operations
G-4 assistant chief of staff, logistics
GDU gun display unit
GMLA guided missile launch assembly
GMLRS guided MLRS
GMLRS-AW guided MLRS alternate warhead
GPS global positioning system
HA hide area
HEMAT heavy expanded mobility ammunition trailer

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 Glossary-1

Glossary

HEMTT heavy expanded mobility tactical truck

HHB headquarters and headquarters battery
HIMARS high mobility artillery rocket system
HPT high-payoff target
HQ headquarters
IMGS improved missile guidance set
INOP inoperational
IPADS improved position azimuth determining system
IPB intelligence preparation of the battlefield
JMEM joint munitions effectiveness manual
JWS JMEM weaponeering system
LM launcher module
LNO liaison officer
LOC lines of communication; logistics operations center
LPC launch pod container
METT-TC mission, threat, terrain and weather, troops, time available, and civil
considerations
MFOM MLRS/HIMARS family of munitions
MLRS multiple launch rocket system
MTS movement tracking system
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NCO noncommissioned officer
NCOIC noncommissioned officer in charge
OPER operational
OPORD operations order
PNU position navigation unit
POC platoon operations center
RSOP reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of position
S-1 personnel staff officer
S-2 intelligence staff officer
S-3 operations staff officer
S-4 logistics staff officer
S-6 signal staff officer
SCP survey control point
SEAD suppression of enemy air defenses
SOI signal operating instructions
SOP standing operating procedure
TSOP tactical standing operating procedures
U.S. United States
UPNU universal position navigation unit

Glossary-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Glossary

XO executive officer

SECTION II – TERMS
force tailoring
Is the process of determining the right mix of forces and the sequence of their deployment in support of a
joint force commander. (ADRP 3-0)
liaison
Is that contact or intercommunication maintained between elements of military forces or other agencies to
ensure mutual understanding and unity of purpose and action. (JP 3-08)
raid
Is an operation to temporarily seize an area in order to secure information, confuse an adversary, capture
personnel or equipment, or to destroy a capability culminating with a planned withdrawal. (FM 3-90-1)

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 Glossary-3

This page intentionally left blank.
 References
Field manuals and selected joint publications are listed by new number followed by old number.

REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS
ARMY PUBLICATIONS
These documents must be available to the intended users of this publication.
ADP 5-0. The Operations Process. 17 May 2012.
ADRP 1-02. Operational Terms and Graphics. 24 September 2013.
ADRP 3-07. Stability. 31 August 2012.
ADRP 3-90, Offense and Defense. 31 August 2012.
ATP 3-09.32, JFIRE Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Joint Application of
Firepower 30 November 2012.
ATP 3-90.90. Army Tactical Standard Operating Procedures. 1 November 2011.
AR 385-63. Range Safety. 30 January 2012.
FM 3-09. Fire Support. 3 November 2011.
FM 3-09.12. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Target Acquisition. 21 June 2002.
FM 3-09.15. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Meteorology. 25 October 2007.
FM 3-28. Civil Support Operations. 20 August 2010.
FM 3-60. The Targeting Process. 26 November 2010.
FM 3-90-1. Offense and Defense Volume 1. 22 March 2013.
FM 3-90-2. Reconnaissance, Security, and Tactical Enabling Tasks Volume 2. 22 March 2013.
FM 4-90. Brigade Support Battalion. 31 August 2010.
FM 6-20-40. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Heavy). 5
January 1990.
FM 27-10. The Law of Land Warfare. 18 July 1956.
FM 55-1. Transportation Operations. 3 October 1995.
FM 90-3. Desert Operations. 24 August 1993.
PAM 385-63. Range Safety. 30 January 2012.
TC 3-25.26. Map Reading and Land Navigation. 15 November 2013.
TM 4-48.10. Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load: Single-Point Load Rigging Procedures. 5 July 2013.
TM 4-48.11. Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load: Dual-Point Load Rigging Procedures. 5 July 2013.
TM 9-1055-647-13P. Interactive Electronic Technical Manual (IETM) for M993/M993A1 Carrier Multiple
Launch Rocket System. 13 January 2013.
TM 9-1055-1646-13P. Interactive Electronic Technical Manual (IETM) for High Mobility Artillery Rocket
System (HIMARS). 14 January 2013.

JOINT PUBLICATIONS
These documents must be available to the intended users of this publication.
JP 1-02. Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms. 15 February 2012.
61S1-2-35. Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual Surface-To-Surface Effectiveness Data For The Army
Tactical Missile System: M39 (Army-TACMS Block I) (U). 1 July 2009.
61J1-3-1. Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual (JMEM) Weaponeering System (JWS) version 1.1. 31
October 2006.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 References-1

References

RELATED PUBLICATIONS
These documents contain relevant supplemental information.

JOINT PUBLICATIONS
Most joint publications are available online: http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine/new_pubs/jointpub.htm.
JP 2-0. Joint Intelligence. 22 June 2007.
JP 3-0. Joint Operations. 11 August 2011.
JP 3-01. Countering Air and Missile Threats. 05 February 2007.
JP 3-09. Joint Fire Support. 30 June 2010.
JP 3-13.1. Electronic Warfare. January 2007.
JP 3-60. Joint Targeting. 13 April 2007.

ARMY PUBLICATIONS
Most Army doctrine publications are available online: http://www.apd.army.mil.
ADP 3-0. Unified Land Operations. 10 October 2011.
ADP 3-09. Fires. 31 August 2012.
ADP 3-37. Protection. 31 August 2012.
ADP 6-0. Mission Command. 17 May 2012.
ADRP 2-0. Intelligence. 31 August 2012.
ADRP 3-0. Unified Land Operations. 16 May 2012.
ADRP 3-37. Protection. 31 August 2012.
ADRP 4-0. Sustainment. 31 July 2012.
ADRP 5-0. The Operations Process. 17 May 2012.
ADRP 6-0. Mission Command. 17 May 2012.
AR 385-10. The Army Safety Program. 27 November 2013.
AR 700-8. Logistics Planning Factors and Data Management. 15 March 2011.
AR 700-138. Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability. 26 February 2004.
ATP 3-37.34. Survivability Operations. 28 June 2013.
FM 2-01.3. Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield/Battlespace. 15 October 2009.
FM 3-01. U.S. Army Air and Missile Defense Operations. 25 November 2009.
FM 3-09.21. Tactics, Techniques and Procedures for the Field Artillery Battalion. 22 March 2001.
FM 3-11. Multi-Service Doctrine for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Operations. 1 July
2011.
FM 3-11.3. Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and
Nuclear Contamination Avoidance. 2 February 2006.
FM 3-13. Inform and Influence Activities. 25 January 2013.
FM 3-27. Army Global Ballistic Missile Defense (GBMD) Operations. 3 January 2011.
FM 3-35. Army Deployment and Redeployment. 21 April 2010.
FM 3-36. Electronic Warfare. 9 November 2012.
FM 3-90.6. Brigade Combat Team. 14 September 2010.
FM 4-02.1. Army Medical Logistics. 8 December 2009.
FM 4-02.2. Medical Evacuation. 8 May 2007.
FM 5-19. Composite Risk Management. 21 August 2006.
FM 6-2. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Survey. 23 September 1993.

References-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 References

FM 6-20-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Corps and Division Operations. 18
October 1989.
FM 6-20-50. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Light). 5
January 1990.
FM 6-22. Army Leadership. 12 October 2006.
FM 6-99. U.S. Army Report and Message Format. 19 August 2013.
FMI 2-01.301. Specific Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures and Applications for Intelligence Preparation
of the Battlefield. 31 March 2009.
TB 11-7025-354-10-3. Technical Fire Direction, MLRS Operation for AFATDS V6.4.0.0 Software. 12
September 2008
TC 3-09.31. Fire Support Training for the Brigade Combat Team Commander. 15 November 2013.
TM 11-7025-297-10-2. Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS) Operational Systems
Software Version 6.4.0.1 Volume 2. 1 October 2007.

MARINE CORPS PUBLICATIONS

MCWP 3-16. Fire Support in the Ground Combat Element. 28 November 2001.
UM 10690A-10. Operator's Manual, Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS). 15 April 2000.

STANDARD NATO AGREEMENT

STANAG 2934. Artillery Procedures. Edition 2. 31 March 2004.
STANAG 2484. NATO Field Artillery Tactical Doctrine. 15 January 2002.
STANAG 5620. Standards for the Interoperability of Fire Support Automatic Data Processing (ADP)
Systems. 27 March 1987.

PRESCRIBED FORMS
DA Form 7232. MLRS FDC Fire Mission Log (LRA).
DA Form 7233. MLRS Launcher Fire Mission Log (LRA).

REFERENCED FORMS
DA Form 1594. Daily Staff Journal Or Duty Officer`s Log.
DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms.
DD Form 93. Record of Emergency Data.
SGLV Form 8286. Servicemembers' Group Life Insurance Election and Certificate.

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 References-3

This page intentionally left blank.
 Index

A battery operations center (BOC), extended range rocket (ER), 2-

1-5, 4-5, 4-7 14
administrative and logistics
operating center (ALOC), 1-5 battery operations officer F
duties and responsibilities, 1-
advanced field artillery tactical figure of merit (FOM), 2-28
11
data system (AFATDS), 2-27,
boom controller, 2-4, 2-11 fire control panel, 2-3, 2-11
3-9, 4-4, 5-17, 5-23, 5-24, 5-
26 fire control sergeant, 1-12
C
AFATDS fire direction
chaplain, 1-10 tactical, 5-5
Joint Munitions Effectiveness
Manuals ([JMEM) chemical officer, 1-10 technical, 5-9
Weaponeering System combined operations, 4-27 fire direction center (FDC), 4-6,
([JWS), 5-13 command post (CP), B-4, D-1 5-2
Multiple Precision Aimpoint battalion, 4-1 fire direction officer, 1-9
Mission, 5-29
command post(CP), 4-6 fire direction system (FDS), 5-17
ammunition, 2-3
aerial transport, A-1 command sergeant major, 1-7 fire support coordination line, 3-3
battalion ammunition officer, commander fire support execution matrix, 3-
1-5 battalion, 1-7 23
battalion ammunition officer battery, 1-11 firing platoon leader, 1-6, 1-12
(BAO), 1-10 firing battery, 1-11
HHS, 1-11 firing platoon sergeant, 1-13
holding area, 1-13
holding area (AHA), 4-7, 4-16 commander’s criteria, 5-23 firing point (FP), 4-14
most suitable, 5-6 firing section chief, 1-13
commander's criteria, 5-6
resupply vehicle and trailer firing sections, 1-6
(HEMTT/HEMAT), 2-23 communications
supply point, 1-13 jungle terrain, 4-29 first sergeant (1SG), 1-11
transfer holding point, 1-13 communications security food service, 4-7
antipersonnel and antimateriel (COMSEC), 2-3, B-9 formations
M74 grenades, 2-18 counterfire, 3-9 special, 4-11
Army Tactical Missile System proactive counterfire, 3-9 forward line of own troops
(ATACMS), 2-1 reactive counterfire, 3-10 (FLOT), 2-1, 3-2, 3-12, 3-13
at my command mission, 5-26 crest clearance tables, 4-29 frequency modulated/modulation
ATACMS, 3-2 critical friendly zone, 3-7 (FM), 1-4
Block I, 2-18 G
D
Block IA, 2-19
missiles, 2-18 decide, detect, deliver, and general support, 3-5
quick reaction unitary missile, assess, 3-1 general support reinforcing, 3-5
2-20 defensive tasks, 3-8 global positioning system (GPS),
automation management deployment, 4-25, 4-26 2-4, 2-11, 4-15, 4-21
section, 1-4 desert operations, 4-30, 4-31 guidance and control section, 2-
18, 2-20
B direct support, 3-5
dual-purpose improved guided missile launch assembly
battalion commander, 1-7
conventional munitions (GMLA), 2-12, A-1
duty location, 3-5
battalion headquarters, 1-2 (DPICM). See M77 H
submunition
battalion maintenance collection hide area (HA), 4-13, 4-14, 4-15,
point, 4-1 E 4-17, 4-30
battery emergency destruction, B-7 human intelligence, 4-8
headquarters, 1-2 estimated position error (EPE),
reconnaissance, selection, I
2-28
and occupation of position, imagery intelligence, 4-8
4-22 executive officer (XO), 1-7
improved fire control system
battery headquarters, 4-5, 4-6 (IFCS), 2-5, 4-4

10 January 2014 ADRP 3-09.60 Index-1

Index

improved position azimuth mission, enemy, terrain and counterbattery, 3-24

determining system (IPADS), weather, troops, time radio direction finding, 3-24
2-27 available, and civil
considerations (METT-TC), 4- radio direction finding
intelligence preparation of the equipment, 4-7
battlefield (IPB), 1-3, 4-23 6
MLRS family of munitions raid, 3-12
intelligence staff officer (S-2), 1-
8 (MFOM), 2-1, 2-12, 2-13 reconnaissance, 4-22, 4-23, 4-
MLRS/HIMARS battalion 30
J ammunition positioning, 5-29 OH-58D Kiowa Warrior, 3-16
joint munitions effectiveness command and support sergeant, 1-13, 4-13
manual (JMEM), 5-8, 5-15 realationships, 3-4 reconnaissance, selection, and
joint operations, 4-27 higher headquarters role in occupation of position
integration and (RSOP), 1-11, 3-23, 4-12, 4-
jungle operations, 4-29 22
coordination of fires, 3-21
L liaison, 3-23 rehearsal, 3-22
target acquisition, 5-8
launch pod container (LPC), 2- reinforcing, 3-5
12, A-1 MLRS/HIMARS battery
reload point (RL), 4-15
tactical movement and
liaison function, 3-6 retransmission, 1-4
positioning, 4-9
liaison officer (LNO), 1-10, C-3 rockets
mountainous terrain operations,
liaison section, 1-3 4-28 general, 2-13
logistics operation center (LOC), movement control center, A-8 S
4-6
N S-1 section, 1-4
logistics release point, 4-6
net control station (NCS), 5-2 S-2 section, 1-3
logistics release points, 1-13
northern operations, 4-29 S-3 section, 1-2
M S-4 section, 1-5
M26 rocket, 2-14
O
S-6 section, 1-3
M269 launcher module (LM), 2-2 offensive tasks, 3-6
safety
OPAREA, 4-13 computation of check data for
M270/270A1 launcher, 4-16, 5-4
M270/M270A1 launcher, 2-2, 2- operations officer, 1-9 MLRS/HIMARS, G-23
3, 2-11, 2-12 operations staff officer (S-3), 1-8 computation of surface
danger zones, G-3
M28A1/M28A2 rocket, 2-14 P sensor to shooter operations, 3-
M39 missile, 2-18 personnel staff officer S-1, 1-7 14
M74 submunition, 2-18, 2-19, 3- petroleum, oils, and lubricants, shoot and scoot, 4-8
3 1-13 signal staff officer (S-6), 1-9
M77 submunition, 2-14, 4-29 physician assistant, 1-10 signals intelligence, 4-7
M993 carrier vehicle, 2-2 planning, 3-2 stabilization reference
maintenance support team, 3- platoon headquarters, 1-6, 4-12, package/position determining
11, 4-13 4-16, D-13 system, 4-20
marches, 4-10 platoon operations center stay hot, shoot fast, 3-20, 5-27
masks, 4-14, 4-29 (POC), 1-6, 4-13, D-13 supply sergeant, 1-6, 1-14
medical services, 1-4 position azimuth determining support platoon, 1-6
ministry team, 1-4 system (PADS), 5-4
support platoon leader, 1-13
mission command, 2-27, 3-11, 5- positioning, 3-1
suppression of enemy air
1 precision lightweight GPS defenses (SEAD), 3-9
battalion automated systems, receiver, 2-28
4-4 survey
precision lightweight GPS chief of party, 4-3
platoon, 4-12 receiver (PLGR), 2-28, 5-4 equipment, 2-27
mission, enemy, terrain and preventive maintenance checks graphic resection, 5-5
weather, troops, time and services, 4-19 support, 5-4
available, and civil
property book officer, 1-11 survey control point (SCP), 4-15,
considerations (METT-T), 4-
23 4-16
R
survey section, 1-3
radar, 3-14

Index-2 ATP 3-09.60 10 January 2014

 Index

sustainment operations, 5-30 target acquisition (TA), 3-14 urban operations, 4-29
T target analysis, 5-6
tactical standing operating U
procedures (TSOP), 4-1, 4-12, unmanned aircraft system, 3-16
B-1

10 January 2014 ATP 3-09.60 Index-3

This page intentionally left blank.
 ATP 3-09.60
10 January 2014

By order of the Secretary of the Army:

RAYMOND T. ODIERNO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff

Official:

GERALD B. O’KEEFE
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
1400602

DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, Army National Guard, and United States Army Reserve: Not to be distributed; electronic
media only.
PIN: 103688-000